Korg MicroArranger Owners Manual

Owners Manual
E 1
PRECAUTIONS
LOCATION
Usingtheunitinthefollowinglocationscanresultina
malfunction.
Indirectsunlight
Locationsofextremetemperatureorhumidity
Excessivelydustyordirtylocations
Locationsofexcessivevibration
Closetomagneticfields
POWER SUPPLY
Please connect the designated AC adapter to an AC
outletofthecorrectvoltage.DonotconnectittoanAC
outletofvoltageotherthanthatforwhichyourunitis
intended.
INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER ELECTRICAL

DEVICES
Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience
reception interference. Operate this unit at a suitable
distancefromradiosandtelevisions.
HANDLING
Toavoidbreakage,donotapplyexcessiveforcetothe
switchesorcontrols.
CARE
Iftheexteriorbecomesdirty,wipeitwithaclean,dry
cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or
thinner,orcleaningcompoundsorflammablepolishes.
KEEP THIS MANUAL

Afterreadingthismanual,pleasekeepitforlaterrefer
ence.
KEEPING FOREIGN MATTER OUT OF YOUR

EQUIPMENT
Never set any container with liquid in it near this
equipment. If liquid gets into the equipment, it could
causeabreakdown,fire,orelectricalshock.
Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equip
ment. If something does slip into the equipment,
unplugtheACadapterfromthewalloutlet.
Then contact your nearest Korg dealer or the store
wheretheequipmentwaspurchased.
THE FCC REGULATION WARNING (FOR USA)

Thisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywith
thelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15
oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoproviderea
sonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresi
dentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,
uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnot
installedandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,
maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.
However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnot
occurinaparticularinstallation.Ifthisequipmentdoes
causeharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,
whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoff
andon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterfer
encebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:
Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.
Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentand
receiver.
Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdiffer
entfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.
Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechni
cianforhelp.
Unauthorizedchangesormodificationtothissystemcan
voidtheusersauthoritytooperatethisequipment.
NOTICE REGARDING DISPOSAL (EU ONLY)

When this crossedout wheeled bin symbol is
displayed on the product, owners manual, bat
tery,orbatterypackage,itsignifiesthatwhenyou
wishtodisposeofthisproduct,manual,package
orbatteryyoumustdosoinanapprovedmanner.
Donotdiscardthisproduct,manual,packageor
battery along with ordinary household waste.
Disposing in the correct manner will prevent harm to
human health and potential damage to the environment.
Since the correct method of disposal will depend on the
applicablelawsandregulationsinyourlocality,pleasecon
tactyourlocaladministrativebodyfordetails.Ifthebattery
containsheavymetalsinexcessoftheregulatedamount,a
chemical symbol is displayed below the crossedout
wheeledbinsymbolonthebatteryorbatterypackage.
IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS

This product has been manufactured according to strict
specificationsandvoltagerequirementsthatareapplicable
in the country in which it is intended that this product
shouldbeused.Ifyouhavepurchasedthisproductviathe
internet, through mail order, and/or via a telephone sale,
youmustverifythatthisproductisintendedtobeusedin
thecountryinwhichyoureside.
WARNING:Useofthisproductinanycountryotherthan
thatforwhichitisintendedcouldbedangerousandcould
invalidate the manufacturers or distributors warranty.
Pleasealsoretainyourreceiptasproofofpurchaseother
wiseyourproductmaybedisqualifiedfromthemanufac
turersordistributorswarranty.
DATA HANDLING
Datastoredinmemorymayoccasionallybelostdueto
incorrect user action. Be sure to save your important
datatoamemorycard.KORGwillnotberesponsible
fordamagescausedbydataloss.
LCD DISPLAY
Some pages of the manuals show LCD screens along
withanexplanationofoperationandfunctionality.All
soundnames,parameternames,andvaluesaremerely
examplesandmaynotalwaysmatchtheactualdisplay
thatyouareworkingon.
TRADEMARKS
Mac,theMaclogoandtheAudioUnitslogoaretrade
marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
MSDOS and Windows are registered trademarks of
MicrosoftCorporation,registeredintheU.S.andother
countries.
Allproductnamesandcompanynamesarethetrade
marks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
THE BALANCE SLIDER

Whenturningtheinstrumenton,pleasebeassuredtheBALANCEsliderissettothecen
ter.ThissetsbothSequencer1(SEQ1)andSequencer2(SEQ2)totheirmaximumlevel.
ThiswillavoidyoustartaSongwithouthearinganything.
HOW TO
Keyboard
select a Sound Program
select a Performance
play a Sound Program across the
whole keyboard, as with a piano
split the keyboard in two
add sounds to the right hand
mute/unmute sounds
Style Play mode
select a Style
start/stop the Style
select a Fill or a Break
select a Style Variation
see the Style tracks
create a new Style
25
25
24
24
24
24
26
27
27
27
41
52
Song Play mode

play a Song (Standard MIDI File)
see the Lyrics
see the Song tracks
start both Sequencers at the same time
31
74
73
18, 80
Backing Sequence mode

record a new Backing Sequence (Song)
82
Song mode
record a new Song
edit a Standard MIDI File
90
88
In general
turn the speakers off
change the Damper polarity
select the Arabic Scale
125
126
34
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
Welcome! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Usefullinks .................................... 8
Aboutthismanual .............................. 9
Loadingtheoperatingsystem .................... 9
ReloadingtheFactoryData...................... 9
Start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ConnectingtheACpoweradapter ............... 10
Turningtheinstrumentonandoff ............... 10
ControllingtheVolume ........................ 10
TheBALANCEslider.......................... 10
Headphones.................................. 10
AudioOutputs ................................ 11
AudioInputs ................................. 11
MIDIconnections.............................. 11
DamperPedal................................. 11
Demo ........................................ 11
Themusicstand ............................... 11
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Display and User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Displaycontrols ............................... 19
Interfacestructure............................. 20
Messagewindows ............................. 21
SymbolsandIcons ............................. 21
Grayedoutnonavailableparameters............ 21
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Basic Guide
Basic operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Playingonthekeyboard........................ 24
Selecting,muting/unmutingandsoloingatrack... 24
SelectingaPerformance........................ 25
SelectingaProgram............................ 25
SelectingaStyle............................... 26
SelectingaSingleTouchSetting(STS)............ 26
Changingallkeyboardtracksatonce............. 26
Shortcuttoseetheoriginalbank
foraStyle,PerformanceorProgram ............ 26
Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
PlayingaStyle
(AutomaticAccompaniment) .................. 27
PlayinginRealtime
(WithoutusingAutomaticAccompaniment) .... 28
RecordingaSong
(Simultaneouslyrecording
theStyleandrealtimeperformance) ............ 30
PlayingaSongfromacard ..................... 31
EditingaSong ................................ 32
TheArabicScale............................... 34
MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
WhatisMIDI?................................. 35
Midifiles...................................... 35
TheGeneralMIDIstandard ..................... 35
TheGlobalchannel ............................. 35
TheChord1andChord2channels............... 36
TheControlchannel ............................ 36
MIDISetup.................................... 36
Connecting
microARRANGERtoaMasterkeyboard ........ 36
Connecting
themicroARRANGERtoaMIDIaccordion...... 37
Connecting
themicroARRANGERtoanexternalsequencer .. 37
Playinganotherinstrument
withthemicroARRANGER .................... 38
Reference Guide
Style Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
WhatsaStyle?................................. 40
StylesandPerformances ........................ 40
ChangingandresettingtheTempo............... 40
TheDIRECTSDbank ........................... 40
Mainpage..................................... 41
Styletrackspage............................... 41
HowtoselectPrograms ......................... 41
TheWritewindow ............................. 42
Menu ......................................... 42
Editpagestructure............................. 42
Page1Mixer:Volume ......................... 43
Page2Mixer:Pan ............................. 43
Page3Mixer:FXSend ......................... 43
Page4Tuning:Detune......................... 44
Page5Tuning:Scale........................... 44
Page6Tuning:PitchBendSensitivity ............ 44
Page7FX:A/BSelect.......................... 44
Page8FX:C/DSelect .......................... 45
Page9FX:Aediting ........................... 45
Page10FX:Bediting.......................... 45
Page11FX:Cediting .......................... 45
Page12FX:Dediting .......................... 45
Page13Track:Easyedit ....................... 45
Page14Track:Mode .......................... 46
Page15Track:Internal/External................. 47
Page16R.T.controls:Damper.................. 47
Page17R.T.controls:Joystick .................. 47
Page18R.T.controls:Dynamicrange ............ 48
Page19R.T.controls:Ensemble ................. 48
Page20Stylecontrols:Drum/Fill ................ 49
Page21Stylecontrols:
WrapAround/KeyboardRange ............... 49
Page22Pads ................................. 50
Page23Preferences:Lock...................... 50
Page24Preferences:controls ................... 51
5
Style Record mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TheStylesstructure............................52
StyleImport/Export ............................53
EnteringtheRecordmode ......................53
ListeningtotheStylewhileinRecord/Editmode...53
ExitandSave/AbortStyle .......................54
TheWritewindow .............................54
Listofrecordedevents .........................54
FastDeleteusingthecontrolpanelbuttons ........54
Mainpage ....................................55
StyleTrackspage..............................56
StepRecordpage ..............................57
StyleRecordprocedure .........................58
Menu ........................................61
Editpagestructure .............................61
Page1Edit:Quantize .........................62
Page2Edit:Transpose ........................62
Page3Edit:Velocity ..........................63
Page4EventEdit .............................63
Page5EventFilter ............................64
EventEditprocedure ...........................65
Page6Edit:Delete ............................66
Page7Edit:DeleteAll.........................67
Page8Edit:Copy .............................67
Page9StyleElementControls:Programs ........68
Page10StyleElementControls:Expression......68
Page11StyleElementControls:KeyboardRange.68
Page12StyleElementControls:
ChordVariationTable........................69
Page13StyleControls:Mode/Tension ...........69
Song Play operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
TheSongsandtheStandardMIDIFileformat .....70
Transportcontrols .............................70
MIDIClock ...................................70
Switchingbetweensequencersduringediting .....70
SelectingaSongcomposingitsprogressivenumber70
Realtimeandsequencertracks ...................70
MasterVolume,SequencerVolume,BALANCE ...71
EffectsinSongPlaymode.......................71
GrooveQuantizewindow.......................71
TheWritewindow .............................72
Mainpage ....................................73
Tracks18page................................73
Tracks916page...............................74
SongSelectpage ...............................74
TheLyricspage................................74
PlayingaJukeboxfile ..........................74
Menu ........................................75
Editpagestructure .............................75
Page1Mixer:Volume .........................76
Page2Mixer:Pan.............................76
Page3Mixer:FXsendA/B .....................76
Page3Mixer:FXsendC/D .....................77
Page4FX:A/BSelect ..........................77
Page4FX:C/DSelect..........................77
Page5FX:Aediting ..........................78
Page6FX:Bediting ...........................78
Page5FX:Cediting...........................78
Page6FX:Dediting ..........................78
Page7Track:Mode...........................78
Page8Track:Internal/External ................. 79
Page9Jukebox ............................... 79
Page10Preferences ........................... 80
SavingalistofSongs........................... 81
Backing Sequence operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Transportcontrols ............................. 82
TheBackingSequence,SongandSongPlaymodes. 82
HowtoplaybackaSong ........................ 82
RealtimeRecordingmode ...................... 82
Chord/AccSteprecording ...................... 83
MainPage(BackingSequencePlay) .............. 83
LoadSongpage............................... 84
SaveSongpage................................ 84
RealtimeRecordingpage....................... 85
Chord/AccStepRecordingpage ................. 85
HowtodeleteawholeSong .................... 87
Song operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Transportcontrols ............................. 88
MasterVolumeandSequencerVolume........... 88
TheSongsandtheStandardMIDIFileformat ..... 88
Fasttrackdeletion............................. 88
HowtodeleteawholeSong .................... 88
Mainpage .................................... 88
Tracks18page ............................... 89
Tracks916page .............................. 89
SongSelectpage............................... 89
SaveSongpage................................ 90
RealtimeRecordprocedure..................... 90
StepRecordprocedure......................... 91
SongRecordpage ............................. 92
StepRecordpage .............................. 93
Menu........................................ 94
Editpagestructure ............................ 94
Page1Mixer:Volume......................... 95
Page2Mixer:Pan ............................ 95
Page3Mixer:FXBlock ........................ 95
Page4Mixer:FXSendA/B(orC/D)............. 96
Page5Tuning:Detune ........................ 96
Page6Tuning:Scale .......................... 96
Page7Tuning:PitchBend/Scale ................ 97
Page8FX:A/BSelect ......................... 97
Page9FX:C/DSelect ......................... 97
Page10FX:Aediting......................... 98
Page11FX:Bediting ......................... 98
Page12FX:Cediting ......................... 98
Page13FX:Dediting......................... 98
Page14Track:Easyedit ....................... 98
Page15Track:Mode .......................... 99
Page16Track:Internal/External ................ 99
Page17Edit:Quantize....................... 100
Page18Edit:Transpose...................... 100
Page19Edit:Velocity ........................ 100
Page20Edit:Delete.......................... 101
Page21Edit:CutMeasures ................... 101
Page22Edit:InsertMeasures................. 101
Page23Edit:Copy .......................... 102
Page24EventEdit........................... 102
Page25EventFilter.......................... 103
EventEditprocedure ......................... 104
6
Program operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Mainpage ................................... 105
SoundProgramsandDrumPrograms........... 105
Menu....................................... 105
Editpagestructure ........................... 106
TheComparefunction ........................ 106
Howtoselectoscillators ....................... 106
EraseProgram/Oscillator...................... 106
TheWritewindow .......................... 106
Page1Basic ................................ 107
Page2Sample(SoundPrograms).............. 107
Page2DKSamples(DrumPrograms) .......... 108
Page3Pitch ................................ 109
Page4PitchLFO1 ........................... 110
Page5PitchLFO2 ........................... 111
Page6PitchEG............................. 111
Page7Filter................................ 112
Page8FilterModulation ..................... 113
Page9FilterLFO1 ........................... 114
Page10FilterLFO2 .......................... 115
Page11FilterEG ............................ 115
Page12Amp ............................... 117
Page13AmpModulation .................... 117
Page14AmpLFO1 .......................... 118
Page15AmpLFO2 .......................... 118
Page16AmpEG............................ 118
Page17LFO1 ............................... 120
Page18LFO2 ............................... 122
Page19Effects .............................. 122
Page20FX1editing.......................... 122
Page21FX2editing.......................... 122
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)list......... 123
Global edit environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
TheWritewindow............................ 125
Menu....................................... 125
Page1Generalcontrols ...................... 125
Page2MasterTranspose..................... 126
Page3Assignable
Pedal/Footswitch,AssignableSlider ........... 126
Page4MIDISetup........................... 126
Page5MIDIControls ........................ 127
Page6MIDIINChannels .................... 127
Page7MIDIINControls(1) .................. 128
Page8MIDIINControls(2) .................. 128
Page9MIDIINFilters ....................... 129
Page10MIDIOUTChannels ................. 129
Page11MIDIOUTFilters .................... 129
Card Edit environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
TheWRITE/CARDINUSELED ................ 130
Supportedcards.............................. 130
LoadingdatacreatedwiththePa80/Pa60/Pa50 ... 131
Cardstructure ............................... 131
Filetypes .................................... 131
Fileandfoldersizedisplay .................... 132
Pagestructure ................................ 132

Navigationtools .............................. 132
Menu ........................................ 133
Page1Load................................. 133
Page2Save ................................. 135
Page3Copy ................................. 138
Page4Erase ................................. 139
Page5Format............................... 140
Page6NewDir .............................. 140
Page7Rename .............................. 140
Page8Utilities1............................. 141
Page9Utilities2............................. 142
Appendix
Factory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Styles ........................................ 144
StyleElements................................ 146
SingleTouchSettings(STS) ..................... 146
Programs(bankorder) ......................... 147
Programs(ProgramChangeorder).............. 154
DrumKits.................................... 160
DrumKitinstruments ......................... 161
Performances ................................. 173
MIDISetup................................... 174
Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Diagrams .................................... 175
DynamicModulationsources ................... 175
Filter/Dynamic................................ 175
Pitch/PhaseMod. ............................. 185
Mod./P.Shift .................................. 195
ER/Delay..................................... 202
Reverb ....................................... 208
MonoMonoChain........................... 209
Assignable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
ListoffunctionsassignabletotheFootswitch ..... 225
Listoffunctionsassignable
tothePedalorAssignableSlider .............. 226
ListofsoundsassignabletothePads............. 226
ListoffunctionsassignabletothePads........... 227
Scales........................................ 227
MIDI Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MIDIImplementationChart .................... 229
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Recognized chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Error messages & Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 235
Errormessages ............................... 235
Troubleshooting .............................. 238
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
INTRODUCTION
Welcome!
Useful links
1. WELCOME!
ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgProfessional
ArrangermicroARRANGER.
Thisinstrumentisanidealkeyboardforsongproduc
tionitletsyouselectadesiredmusicalstyleandgen
erate a highquality band accompaniment simply by
playing chords, and then you can play the melody
yourselftoeasilycreateanoriginalsong.
Herearesomeofthefeaturesofyournewinstrument:
PowerfulHI(HyperIntegrated)KORGsoundgen
eration system, as seen in our best professional
synthesizers.
OPOS(ObjectivePortableOperatingSystem)mul
titasking operating system, to let you load data
whileplayingyourinstrument.
Operating System updates, to load new features
fromcard.Dontletyourinstrumentgetold!
Solid State Disk (SSD), for any system updatea
smartwaytoreplacetheusualROMmemory.
SDcardslot,capableofreadingandwritingonSD
andMMCmemorytypes.
DirectStyleaccessfromSDcard.
GeneralMIDILevel2Soundscompatible.
Morethan662SoundPrograms.
4multieffectprocessor,eachwith89effecttypes.
160Performancesand1,216SingleTouchSettings
(STS), for fast setting of keyboard sounds and
effects.
304Styles.
XDSDoubleSequencerwithCrossfader.
StyleRecordandEdit
Fullfeaturedsequencer(SongRecordandEdit)
Integrated speakers, for the most true sound
reproduction.
WideCustomDisplay.
USEFUL LINKS
YourpreferredKORGdealeralsocarriesawiderange
ofKorghardwareandsoftwareaccessories.Pleaseask
your dealer about additional Programs, Styles, and
otherusefulmusicmaterials.
Each KORG distributor can supply you with useful
information.Justgivehimacallforadditionalservices.
In the Englishspeaking world, here are the relevant
addresses:
USA
KORGUSA,316SouthServiceRoad,Mel
ville,NewYork,11747,USA
Tel:15163339100,Fax:15163339108
UK
KORGUKLtd,1HarrisonClose,Knowl
hill,MiltonKeynes,MK5,8PA,UK
Tel:01908304600,Fax:01908304699
UKTechnicalSupport
Tel:01908304637
Email:info@korg.co.uk
Many KORG distributors also have their own web
pageontheinternet,whereyoucanfindinfosandsoft
ware.UsefulwebpagesinEnglisharethefollowing:
http://www.korg.com/
http://www.korg.co.uk/
Aplacetofindoperatingsystemupdatesandvarious
system files (for example, a full backup of the factory
data)isatthefollowinglink:
http://www.korgpa.com/
Welcome!
About this manual
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
LOADING THE OPERATING SYSTEM
Thismanualisdividedinthreesections:
A Basic Guide, containing an overview of the
instrument, as well as a series of practical guides
(namedTutorials).
AReferenceGuide,witheachpageandparame
terdescribedindetail.
AnAppendix,withalistofdataandusefulinfor
mationfortheadvanceduser.
Withinthemanual,youwillfindthefollowingabbrevi
ations:
TheparametercanbesavedontoaPerfor
mancebypressingtheWRITEbutton.
Theparametercanbesavedontothecur
rent Style Performance by pressing the
WRITEbutton.
TheparametercanbesavedontoaSingle
TouchSettingbypressingtheWRITEbut
ton.
TheparametercanbesavedontoaGlobal
setting by going to the Global environ
ment (see Global edit environment on
page125)andpressingtheWRITEbutton.
Your microARRANGER can be constantly updated as

new versions of the operating system are released by
KORG. You can download the operating system from
http://www.korgpa.com/.Please, readthe Readmefile
includedwiththeoperatingsystemitself.
Youcanseewhichversionoftheoperatingsystemsis
installed in your microARRANGER by keeping the
SHIFT button pressed, and pressing the ENTER and
EXIT buttons together. The operating system version
numberwillappearinthedisplay.PressEXITtoclose
themessagewindow.
Toloadanewsystem,followtheseinstructions:
1. Copythethreeoperatingsystemsfilesintheroot
ofanSDcard.Thesearetheneededfiles:
BPaMAR1.sys
NBPaMAR1.sys
OsPaMAR1.lzx
2. Turn the instrument off, and insert the card con
tainingtheoperatingsystemintothecardslot.
3. Turntheinstrumenton.Amessageappearsinthe
display, asking if you want to load the operating
system.
4. PressENTERtoload,orEXITtocanceltheloading
procedure. If you press ENTER, wait until the
loadingisfinished.
When the operating system is finished loading, a
message appears, asking you to remove the card
andpressanybutton.
Hint:When done, deletethe operating system files, to
avoidmicroARRANGERstartstheupgradeprocedure
eachtimeitisturnedonwiththesamecardinthedrive.
5. Removethecard,andpressanybutton.
RELOADING THE FACTORY DATA

Shouldtheinternalmemorycontentgetdamaged,you
can reload the original Factory Data from the backup
card.SeeRestoreDataonpage141.
10
Start up
Connecting the AC power adapter
2. START UP
CONNECTING THE AC POWER ADAPTER
CONTROLLING THE VOLUME
Connect the supplied AC power adapter to the dedi

catedsocketontherearoftheinstrument.Then,plugit
intoawallsocket.
Warning:Useonlythesuppliedadapter,oranadapter
suggested by Korg. Other adapters may look similar,
buttheymaydamageyourinstrument!
TURNING THE INSTRUMENT ON AND OFF

Turningthepoweron
Pressthepowerbutton( )locatedontheupperright
sideofthefrontpanel.
Thestartup screenwill appear in the LCD, andaftera
time it will display the main page in Style Play mode
andtheunitwillbereadyforsoundoutput.
Turningthepoweroff
Pressthepowerbutton( )locatedontheupperright
sideofthefrontpaneltoturnoffthepower.
Warning:Whenturningtheinstrumentoff,alldatacontai
nedinRAM(avolatilememory,usedforSongediting)willbe
lost.Onthecontrary,datacontainedintheSSDdisk(anon
volatilememory,usedforFactoryandUserdata)willbepre
served.
Note: Never turn off the power while the SD card data is
beingreadorwritten.
ABOUT THE AUTO POWER-OFF FUNCTION
Withthefactorysettings,thisinstrumentwillautomat
ically poweroff when four hours have passed since
you last played the keyboard or used the buttons. If
desired,youcanturnoff(disable)thisfunction.
The power will also turn off automatically after four
hours pass with only songs or demo songs being
played.
To adjust power on/off settings, press the [GLOBAL]
buttontoentertheGLOBALpage,andadjusttheset
tings on the Page1Gen.Controls page. (AutoOff on
page125)
UsetheMASTERVOLUME
slider to control the overall
volume of the instrument.
This slider controls the
volume of the sound going
totheinternalspeakers,the
L/MONO & RIGHT OUT
PUTS, and the HEADPHO
NESconnector.
Note: Start at a moderate level, then raise the MASTER
VOLUME up. Dont keep the volume at an uncomfortable
levelfortoolong.
UsetheACC/SEQVOLUMEslidertocontroltheStyle
tracks (drums, percussion, bass) volume. This slider
also controls both of the Sequencers tracks, excluding
theRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
Bydefault,youcanusetheASSIGN.SLIDERtocontrol
thekeyboardtracksvolume.Thissliderisuserassigna
ble,butissettotheKeyboardExpressionparameterby
default.
THE BALANCE SLIDER

The BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the
twoonboardsequencers(Sequencer1andSequencer2).
Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum
levelandSequencer2tozero.
Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and
Sequencer2tothemaximumlevel.
MoveittothecentertosetbothSequencersatthesame
level.
Note:Whenturningtheinstrumenton,movethissliderto
thecenter,toavoidstartingaSongattheminimumlevel.
HEADPHONES
Youcanconnectapairofheadphonestotherearpanel
headphone jack (PHONES: stereo minijack). You can
use headphones with an impedance of 16200 (50
recommended). Use a headphone distributor to con
nectmorethanonepairofheadphones.
Start up
11
Audio Outputs
AUDIO OUTPUTS
DAMPER PEDAL
You can send the sound to an external amplification

system,insteadoftheinternalspeakers.Thisisuseful
whenrecording,orwhenplayinglive.
Connect a Damper (Sustain) pedal to the DAMPER

connectoronthebackpanel.UseaKORGPS1,PS3or
DS1Hfootswitchpedal,oracompatibleone.Toswitch
theDamperpolarity,seeDamperPol.(DamperPolar
ity)onpage126.
Stereo. Connect two mono cables to the L/MONO &

RIGHTOUTPUTS.Connecttheotherendofthecables
toastereochannelofyourmixer,twomonochannels,
two powered monitors, or the TAPE/AUX input of
your audio system. Dont use the PHONO inputs of
youraudiosystem!
Mono. Connect a mono cable to the L/MONO OUT
PUT. Connect the other end of the cable to a mono
channelofyourmixer,apoweredmonitor,orachannel
of your TAPE/AUX input of a hifi system (you will
hearthatchannelonly,unlessyoucansettheamplifier
toMonomode).
AUDIO INPUTS
Youcanconnecttheoutputofanotherelectronicmusi
cal instrument, an unpowered mixer, or any audio
devicetotherearpanelinputjack(INPUT:stereomini
jack).Sincethisisalinelevelinput,youllneedtousea
separatelysoldmicpreampormixerifyoureconnect
ingamic.
Usetheconnecteddevicesvolumecontroltoadjustthe
inputlevel.Becarefulnottomakeitdistort(orclip).
Hereishowtosetthevolumeoftheconnecteddevice:
ifthesoundheardonmicroARRANGERsoutputsistoo
low,youshouldincreasetheoutputleveloftheconnec
teddevice.
ifitsoundsfine,itsok.
ifitdistorts,youshouldlowerthelevelalittle,untilthe
soundsisfineagain.
MIDI CONNECTIONS
You can play the internal sounds of your microAR
RANGERwithanexternalcontroller,i.e.amasterkey
board, a MIDI guitar, a wind controller, a MIDI
accordion,oradigitalpiano.
1. ConnectastandardMIDIcablefromtheMIDIOUTof
your controller to the MIDI IN connector on the mic
roARRANGER.
2. Select a transmission MIDI channel on your controller.
Some controllers, like the MIDI accordions, usually
transmitonmorethanonechannel(seemoreinforma
tionintheMIDIchapter).
3. On the microARRANGER, select the MIDI Setup that
bestfitsyourcontrollerstype(seePage4MIDISetup
onpage126).
DEMO
Listen to the builtin Demo Songs to appreciate the
power of the microARRANGER. There are 16 Demo
Songstochoosefrom.
1. Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons
together.TheirLEDsstartblinking.
At this point, if you dont press any other button, all the
DemoSongswillbeplayedback.
2. ChooseapageusingthePAGEbuttons.Therearetwo
differentpagesintheDemomode.
3. Select a Demo Song by pressing the corresponding
VOLUME/VALUEbuttonaroundthedisplay.TheDemo
willautomaticallystart.
4. StoptheDemobypressingSTART/STOP.
5. ExittheDemomodebypressingoneoftheMODEbut
tons.
THE MUSIC STAND

A music stand comes standard with your microAR
RANGER. Fit it into the two dedicated holes in the
backpanel.
Front panel
12
3. FRONT PANEL
28
27
2
6 7
34
30
30
31
15 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
32
33
48
16
17
29
18
19
20
21
1 Power switch ( )
ThisturnsthemicroARRANGERspoweronoroff.
2 MASTER VOLUME
This slider controls the overall volume of the instru
ment,bothoftheinternalspeakers,theL/MONOand
RIGHToutputs,andtheHEADPHONESoutput.
Warning:Atthemaximumlevel,withrichsoundingSongs,
StylesorPrograms,theinternalspeakerscoulddistortdur
ingsignalpeaks.Shouldthishappen,lowertheMasterVol
umealittle.
3 ACC/SEQ VOLUME
Thisslidercontrolstheaccompanimenttracksvolume
(StylePlaymode)ortheSongtracksvolume,excluding
theRealtimetracks(SongandSongPlaymodes).This
is a relative control, where the effective maximum
value is determined by the MASTER VOLUME slider
position.
4 ASSIGN.SLIDER
Thisisafreelyprogrammableslider(seeSld(Slider)
on page126). By default, it acts as the Keyboard
Expressioncontrol,toletyoubalancetherelativevol
umeoftheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
5 MODE section
Eachofthesebuttonsrecallsoneoftheoperatingmodes
oftheinstrument.Eachmodeexcludestheothers.
STYLEPLAY
Style Play mode, where you can play
Styles (automatic accompaniments) and/
orplayuptofourRealtimetracksonthe
keyboard.
In the main page, Realtime (Keyboard)
tracks are shown on the right half of the
display. You can reach the main page by
pressing EXIT from any of the Style Play
editpages.Ifyouareinadifferentoperat
ingmode,pressSTYLEPLAYtorecallthe
Style Play mode. If the TRACK SELECT
LEDison,pressTRACKSELECTtoturn
itoffandseetheRealtimetracks.
This operating mode is automatically
selected when the instrument is turned
on.
22
23 24 25 26
39
40
35
36
49
38
37
44
45
41 42 43
46
47
SONGPLAY
SongPlaymode,whereyoucanplayback
16track Songs in Standard Midi File
(SMF) format directly from the memory
card. You can also play .MID and
.KAR files directly from the memory
card. Since the microARRANGER is
equipped with two sequencers, you can
evenplaytwoSongsatthesametime,and
mixthemwiththeBALANCEslider.
In addition to the Song tracks, you can
play one to four Realtime (Keyboard)
tracks,alongwiththeSong(s).Inthemain
page, Realtime (Keyboard) tracks are
shownontherighthalfofthedisplay.You
canreachthemainpagebypressingEXIT
from any of the Song Play edit pages. If
you are in a different operating mode,
pressSONGPLAYtorecalltheSongPlay
mode.IftheTRACKSELECTLEDisonor
flashing, press TRK SELECT one or two
times to turn it off and see the Realtime
tracks.
B.SEQ
Backing Sequence mode, where you can
recordanewSongbasedontheRealtime
andStyletracks,andsaveitasanewStan
dardMIDIFile.
SONG
Songmode,whereyoucanplay,record,or
editaSong.
PROGRAM Programmode,toplaysingleSoundPro
gramsonthekeyboard,oreditthem.
Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY
DEMO
buttonstogethertoselecttheDemomode.
This mode lets you listen to some Demo
Songs,to let youhear the sonic power of
themicroARRANGER.
6 GLOBAL
ThisbuttonrecallstheGlobaleditenvironmentwhere
you can select various global settings. This edit envi
ronmentoverlapsanyoperatingmode,whichwillstill
remainactiveinthebackground.PressEXITtogoback
totheunderlyingoperatingmode.
Front panel
7 SD CARD
This button recalls the Card edit environment, where
you can execute various operations on files and cards
(Load, Save, Format, etc). This edit environment
overlapsanyoperatingmode,thatstillremainsactive
inthebackground.PressEXITtogobacktotheunder
lyingoperatingmode.
8 MEMORY (TIE)
ThisbuttonturnstheLowerandChordMemoryfunc
tions on or off. Go to the Page 24 Preferences: con
trols edit page (Style Play mode, see page 51) to
decideifthisbuttonshouldbeaChordMemoryonly,
oraLower/ChordMemorybutton.Whenitworksasa
Lower/ChordMemory:
ON
Thesoundtotheleftofthesplitpoint,and
the chord for the automatic accompani
ment,arekeptinmemoryevenwhenyou
raiseyourhandfromthekeyboard.
OFF
The sound and chords are released as
soonasyouraiseyourhandfromthekey
board.
This button doubles as a TIE function for the Song
mode(seechapter13).
9 BASS INV. (REST)
ThisbuttonturnstheBassInversionfunctiononoroff.
ON
The lowest note of a chord played in
inverted form will always be detected as
theroot noteof thechord. Thus,you can
specify to the arranger composite chords
suchasAm7/GorF/C.
OFF
The lowest note is scanned together with
the other chord notes, and is not always
consideredastherootnote.
ThisbuttondoublesasaRESTfunctionfortheSong
mode(seechapter13).
10 MAN. BASS
ThisbuttonturnstheManualBassfunctiononoroff.
Note: When you press the MAN. BASS button, the Bass
trackvolumeisautomaticallysettothemaximumvalue.The
volumeisautomaticallysetbacktotheoriginalvaluewhen
theMAN.BASSbuttonisdeactivated.
ON
Theautomaticaccompanimentstopsplay
ing (apart for the Drum and Percussion
tracks), and you can manually play the
Bass track on the Lower part of the key
board.Youcanstarttheautomaticaccom
paniment again by pressing one of the
CHORDSCANNINGbuttons.
OFF
Thebasstrackisautomaticallyplayedby
theStyle.
11 SPLIT POINT (<)
Keep this button pressed to open the Split Point win
dow.Whilethiswindowisopen,youcansetthesplit
pointsimplybyplayingthesplitpointnoteonthekey
board.Then,releasetheSPLITPOINTbutton.
To memorize the selected split point note, press the
GLOBALbutton,thenpressWRITEtosavetheGlobal
intomemory(seeTheWritewindowonpage125).
13
This button doubles as a PREVIOUS EVENT func

tion for the Backing Sequence and Song modes (see
chapters12and13).
12 G.QUANTIZE (>)
PressthisbuttontoopentheGrooveQuantizewindow,
whereyoucanselectarealtimegroovequantizationto
beappliedtotheSong(onlySequencer1).SeeGroove
Quantizewindowonpage71.
ThisbuttondoublesasaNEXTEVENTfunctionfor
theBackingSequenceandSongmodes(seechapters12
and13).
13 TEMPO
(= LOCK)
ThisbuttonturnstheTempoLockfunctiononoroff.
ON
When you select a different Style or Per
formance, the tempo doesnt change. You
can still change it using the DIAL or the
TEMPObuttons.
OFF
When you select a different Style or Per
formance, the memorized tempo value is
automaticallyselected.
14 SINGLE TOUCH
ThisbuttonturnstheSingleTouchfunctiononoroff.
ON
WhenadifferentStyle(orthesameagain)
isselected,aSingleTouchSetting(STS1)is
automatically selected, meaning that the
Realtime tracks and effects will change,
togetherwiththeStyletracksandeffects.
OFF
When you select a different Style (or the
same again), the Style tracks and effects
arechanged,whiletheRealtimetracksare
notchanged.
15 STYLE section (NUMERIC KEYPAD)
UsethesebuttonstoopentheStyleSelectwindowand
selectaStyle.SeeSelectingaStyleonpage26.
Theleftmostbuttonletsyouselecttheupperorlower
row of Style banks. Press it until youve selected the
row yourelooking for. (After both LEDs have turned
on,pressthebuttonagaintoturnthemoff).
UPPERLEDON
UpperrowStylesselected.
LOWERLEDON
LowerrowStylesselected.
AwordaboutStylebanksandnames.Stylesfrom8/
16 BEAT to WORLD 3, and from LATIN1 to
TRAD are standard Styles, the user cant normally
overwrite with a Load operation (unless you remove
theprotection;seeFactoryStyleProtectonpage142).
DIRECT SD StylesareStylesdirectly accessed from
thememorycard(noneedtoloadfromcard).SeeThe
DIRECTSDbankonpage40.
Styles from USER1 to USER3 are locations where
youcanloadnewStylesfromthememorycard.
Eachbutton(Stylebank)contains2pages,eachwithup
to8Styles.BrowsethroughtheStylesusingthePAGE
buttons.
ThereisashortcuttoseetheoriginalbankforaStyle.
You can see the original bank where a Style is con
tained. Just keep the SHIFT button pressed, and then
14
Front panel
pressthelefmostbuttonoftheSTYLEsection.Ames
sage window will appear, showing the name of the
originalbank.ReleasetheSHIFTbuttontoexitthewin
dow.
There is a shortcut to see all pages of the selected
bank.Tocycleallpagesforaselectedbank,pressthe
banksbuttonuntilyouseethepagethatyourelooking
for.
Thesebuttonsdoubleasanumerickeypadoncertain
pages(seeSelectingaSongcomposingitsprogressive
numberonpage70).
16 FADE IN/OUT
WhentheStylestoped,pressthisbuttontostartitwith
a volume fadein (the volume goes from zero to the
maximum).
When the Style is playing, press this button to stop it
with a volume fadeout (the volume gradually
decreases).
You dont need to press START/STOP to start or stop
theStyle.
17 VARIATION 14 (NOTE LENGTH) buttons
Eachofthesebuttonswillselectoneofthefourvaria
tions of the current Style. Each variation can vary in
patternsandsounds.
ThesebuttonsdoubleasaNOTELENGTHfunction
fortheSongmode(seechapter13).
18 FILL 12 (NOTE LENGTH) buttons
Thesetwobuttonstriggerafillin.Pressthemtwice(LED
blinking) to let them play in loop, and select any other
Styleelement(Fill,Intro,Variation)toexittheloop.
TheyalsodoubleasaNOTELENGTHfunctionfor
theSongmode(seechapter13).
19 COUNT IN / BREAK
WhiletheStyleisnotrunning,pressthisbutton,then
press START/STOP. This combination triggers a one
barinitialcount,thentheStylestartsplaying.
WhiletheStyleisalreadyinplay,thisbuttontriggersa
break(anemptymeasurebeginningwithakick+crash
shot).Pressittwicetoletitplayinloop,andselectany
otherStyleelement(Fill,Intro,Variation)toexitthe
loop.
20 ENDING 12 (DOT, TRIPLET) buttons

WhiletheStyleisrunning,thesetwobuttonstriggeran
Ending,andstoptheStyle.Pressoneofthem,andthe
Style will stop running with an Ending. If pressed
while the Style is stopped, they act as an additional
coupleofIntros.
Press them twice (LED blinking) to let them play in
loop, and select any other Style element (Fill, Intro,
Variation)toexittheloop.
ENDING1 also doubles as a DOT function, and
ENDING2doublesasaTRIPLETfunction,tobeused
inSongmode(seechapter13).
Note:Ending1playsashortsequencewithdifferentchords,
whileEnding2playsonthelastrecognizedchord.
21 INTRO 12 buttons
ThesetwobuttonssetthearrangerinIntromode.After
pressingoneofthesebuttons,starttheStyle,anditwill
begin with the selected intro. The INTRO LED will
automaticallygooffattheendoftheintro.
Pressthemtwice(LEDblinking)toletthem playina
loop, and select any other Style element (Fill, Intro,
Variation)toexittheloop.
Note: Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords,
whileIntro2playsonthelastrecognizedchord.
22 START/STOP
StartsorstopstheStylethatsrunning.
You can reset all frozen notes and controllers
on the microARRANGER and any instrument con
nectedtoitsMIDIOUT,byusingthePanickeycom
bination. Just press SHIFT + START/STOP to stop all
notesandresetallcontrollers.
23 SYNCHRO START / STOP (DELETE)
ThisbuttonturnstheSynchro Startand Synchro Stop
functionsonoroff.Pressitrepeatedlytoturnthefunc
tions on or off. The LEDs will cycle in this order:
STARTSTART+STOPOFF.
STARTLEDON
WhenthisLEDislitup,justplayachord
in the chord recognition area (usually
under the split point, see CHORD
SCANNINGsectiononpage17)toauto
matically start the Style running. If you
like, you can turn one of the INTROs on
beforestartingtheStyle.
Front panel
START+STOPLEDsON
When both LEDs are litup, raising your
handfromthekeyboardmomentarilywill
stoptheStylefromplaying.Ifyouplaya
chordagain,theStylestartsagain.
OFF
AllSynchrofunctionsareturnedoff.
This button doubles as a DELETE function for the
Backing Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12
and13).
It is also used to delete the selected character, during
textediting.
24 TAP TEMPO/RESET (INSERT)
This is a doublefunction button, acting in a different
waydependingontheStylestatus(stop/play).
Tap Tempo: When the Style is not playing, you can
beatthetempoonthisbutton.Attheend,theaccom
panimentstartsplaying,usingthetappedintempo.
Reset:WhenyoupressthisbuttonwhiletheStyleisin
play,theStylepatterngoesbacktothepreviousstrong
beat.
This button doubles as an INSERT function for the
Backing Sequence and Song modes (see chapters 12
and13).
It is also used to insert a character at the cursor posi
tion,duringtextediting.
25 WRITE/CARD IN USE
In Style Play mode, this button opens the Write win
dow, that lets you save all the tracks onto a Perfor
mance, the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks in a Single
TouchSetting(STS),ortheaccompanimenttracksonto
a Style Performance. (See The Write window on
page42).
IntheGlobaleditenvironment,pressittosaveGlobal
parameters in memory. (See The Write window on
page125).
ThisbuttonsLEDworksasaCARDINUSEindica
tor,andturnsonwhenthecardslotisinuse.
26 ENSEMBLE
This button turns the Ensemble function on or off.
When on, the righthand melody is harmonized with
thelefthandchords.
Note:TheEnsemblefunctionworksonlywhenthekeyboard
isinSPLITmode,andtheLOWERChordScanningmode
selected.
15
See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating

modeoreditenvironment,toseetheirmapsindetail.
29 PAGE -/+
After pressingMENUtoopen a menu, usethese but
tonstobrowsetheeditpagesofanoperatingmodeor
editing environment. Press EXIT to go back from an
edit page to the main page of the current operating
mode,ortoclosetheGlobalorCardEditenvironment.
Inaddition,youcanusethesebuttonstoselectadiffer
entpageinaStyleSelectorProgramSelectwindow.
30 VOLUME/VALUE (MUTE) AH buttons
Withinthisusersmanual,eachbuttonpairismarked
withanalphabeticletter(AH).SeeDisplayandUser
Interfaceonpage19formoredetails.
Acorrespondingtracknameisprintedovereachbut
ton pair. These names show the corresponding track
the button pair affects in the main page of the Style
Playmode.
The left half is for the main page, where you can
see the Realtime tracks, and the Style tracks
groupedtogether:
The right half is for the Style tracks page, where

youcanseeeachoftheaccompanimenttracks:
27 RECORD
This button sets the instrument in Record mode
(dependingonthecurrentoperatingmode).
28 MENU
ThisbuttonopenstheMenupageforthecurrentoper
ating mode or edit environment. After opening a
menu,youcanjumptooneoftheeditpagesbypress
ing the corresponding VOLUME/VALUE buttons; or
browse them using the PAGE buttons. Otherwise, go
backto themainpageofthecurrentoperating mode,
or close the edit environment, by pressing the EXIT
button.
SeeSymbolsandIconsonpage21.
Usethesebuttonstoperformvariousoperationsonthe
commandsandfunctionsappearinginthedisplay.
SELECTING
Use each button pair to select the corre
spondingiteminthedisplay(i.e.atrack,a
parameteroracommand).Useeitherthe
leftorrightbuttoninapair.
16
Front panel
VOLUME
MUTE
SOLO
VALUE
While you are in the main pages of any

operating mode, select a track and use
these buttons to change the tracks vol
ume.Usetheleftbuttontodecreaseit,or
therightbuttontoincreaseit.
Press both buttons in a pair to mute the
corresponding track. Press both buttons
againtounmutethetrack.
While in the Style Play, Song Play
andSongmodes,youcansolooneofthe
tracks. Just keep the SHIFT button
pressed,andpressbothoftheVOLUME/
VALUE buttons corresponding with the
trackyouwishtosolo.
Toexitthesolomode,keeptheSHIFTbut
ton pressed again, and press both the
VOLUME/VALUE buttons corresponding
tothesoloedtrack.
Useeachbuttonpairtochangethecorre
spondingparametersvalue.Theleftbut
ton decreases the value, the right button
increasesit.
31 TRACK SELECT
Depending on the operating mode, this button
switchesbetweenthevarioustracksview.
STYLEPLAYMODE
SwitchesbetweentheRealtimetracksand
theStyletracks.
SONGPLAYMODE
Switchesbetweenthemainpage(showing
the Realtime/Keyboard tracks), Song
tracks18,andSongtracks916.
SONGMODE
Switches between the main page, Song
tracks18andSongtracks916.
The TRACK SELECT LED shows the current page
view:
Off
Main page(Realtimetracks,orSongcon
trols)
On
2ndpage(Styletracks,orSongtracks18)
Flashing
3rdpage(Songtracks916)
32 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING
(F-1F-4 FUNCTION KEYS) buttons
While in the main page of the Style Play or Backing
Sequence mode, these buttons select a Single Touch
Settingeach.EachoftheStylesincludesamaximumof
fourSingleTouchSettings(STS),toautomaticallycon
figuretheRealtimetracksandeffectsatthetouchofa
finger.WhentheSINGLETOUCHLEDislit,anSTSis
automaticallyselectedwhenselectingaStyle.
InEditmode,thesebuttonsdoubleasfunctionkeys,
toselectthecorrespondingitemsinthedisplay.
33 SHIFT
Withthisbuttonhelddown,pressingcertainotherbut
tonswillaccesstoasecondfunction.
34 TEMPO/VALUE section
The DIAL and the DOWN/ and UP/+ buttons can be
used to control the Tempo, assign a different value to
theselectedparameterinthedisplayorscrollalistof
files in the Song Select and Card pages. The VALUE
LEDshowsthestatusofthissection.
DIAL
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the
valueortempo.Turnitcounterclockwise
todecreasethevalueortempo.
When used while pressing the
SHIFTbutton,thiscontrolalwaysactsasa
Tempocontrol.
DOWN/andUP/+
DOWN/ decreases the value or tempo;
UP/+increasesthevalueortempo.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed
down,andpresseithertheDOWN/or
UP/+ button to reset the Tempo to the
valuethatssavedontotheselectedStyle.
35 VALUE LED
ThisLED shows the status of the DIAL and DOWN/
andUP/+buttons.
ON
TheDIALandDOWN/andUP/+buttons
actasValuecontrols,tochangethevalue
oftheselectedparameterinthedisplay.
OFF
TheDIALandDOWN/andUP/+buttons
controltheTempo.
36 EXIT/NO
Use this button to perform various actions, leaving
fromthecurrentstatus:
exitadialogbox
answer No to any question that appears in the
display
exittheMenuwindow
gobacktothemainpageofthecurrentoperating
mode
exittheGlobalorCardEditenvironment,andgo
back to the main page of the current operating
mode
exit from a Style, Performance or Program Select
window
37 ENTER/YES
Use this button to perform various actions, agreeing
thecurrentselectedstatus:
answer Yes to any question that appears in the
display
confirmacommand
38 DISPLAY HOLD
ThisbuttonturnstheDisplayHoldfunctiononoroff.
ON
Whenyouopenatemporarywindow(like
theProgramSelectwindow),itremainsin
the display until you press EXIT/NO, or
anoperatingmodebutton.
OFF
Anytemporarywindowclosesafteracer
taintime,orafterselectinganiteminthe
window.
Front panel
39 CHORD SCANNING section

In Style Play and Backing Sequence mode, use these
buttonstodefinethewaychordsarerecognizedbythe
arranger.
LOWER
Chordsaredetectedbelowthesplitpoint.
The number of notes you should play to
form a chord is defined by the Chord
Scanning Mode parameter (see Chord
RecognitionModeonpage51).
UPPER
Chordsaredetectedabovethesplitpoint.
Youmustalwaysplaythreeormorenotes
toletthearrangerrecognizeachord.
FULL(bothLEDson)
Chordsaredetected onthefullkeyboard
range. You must always play three or
morenotestoletthearrangerrecognizea
chord.
OFF
Nochordswillbedetected.Afterpressing
START/STOP,onlytheDrumandPercus
sionaccompanimenttrackscanplay.
40 KEYBOARD MODE section
ThesebuttonsdefinehowthefourKeyboard(orReal
time)tracksarepositionedonthekeyboard.
SPLIT
The Lower track plays below the split
point, while the Upper 1, Upper 2 and
Upper 3 tracks play above it. By default,
selecting this keyboard mode automati
cally selects the Lower chord scanning
mode(seeChordRecognitionModeon
page51).
FULLUPPER
The Upper 1, Upper 2 and/or Upper 3
tracksplayonthewholekeyboardrange.
TheLowertrackdoesnotplay.Bydefault,
selecting this keyboard mode automati
callyselectstheFullchordscanningmode
(see Chord Recognition Mode on
page51).
41 STYLE CHANGE
ThisbuttonturnstheStyleChangefunctiononoroff.
ON
WhenyouselectaPerformance,theStyle
could change, according to which Style
number is memorized onto the Perfor
mance.
OFF
WhenyouselectaPerformance,theStyle
and Style track settings remain
unchanged. Only Realtime (Keyboard)
trackssettingsarechanged.
42 PERFORM.
Press this button to use the PROGRAM/PERFOR
MANCEsectiontoselectaPerformance.
43 PROGRAM
Press this button to use the PROGRAM/PERFOR
MANCE section to select a Program, and assign it to
theselectedtrack.
17
44 PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section
UsethesebuttonstoopentheProgramSelectorPerfor
manceSelectwindow,andselectaProgramoraPerfor
mance. See Selecting a Program on page25, or
Selecting a Performance on page25. For a list of
available Programs, see Programs (Program Change
order)onpage154.
Theleftmostbuttonselectstheupperorlowerrowof
Program or Performance banks. Press it until youve
selected the row that youre looking for. (After both
LEDs have consecutively turned on, press the button
againtoturnthemoff).
UPPERLEDON
Upper row of Programs or Performances
selected.
LOWERLEDON
Lower row of Programs or Performances
selected.
On the front panel, Program banks are identified by
the instrument names, while Performance banks are
identifiedbynumbers(110;0=bank10).
A note about Program banks and names. Programs
from PIANO to SFX are standard Programs, the
usercantdirectlymodify.
Programs USER1 and USER2 are locations where
youcanloadnewProgramsfromthememorycard.
USERDKiswhereyoucanloadnewdrumkits.
EachProgrambankcontainsvariouspages,eachwith
up to 8 Programs. You can browse them using the
PAGEbuttons.
ShortcuttoseetheoriginalbankforaPerformanceor
Program.YoucanseetheoriginalbankwhereaPerfor
mance or Program is contained. Just keep the SHIFT
button pressed, and then press the lefmost button of
the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section. A message
windowwillappear,showingthenameoftheoriginal
bank.ReleasetheSHIFTbuttontoexitthewindow.
Shortcuttoseeallpagesoftheselectedbank.Tocycle
all of the pages for a selected bank, press the banks
button.
45 PADS (14, STOP)
These programmable pads can be used to trigger a
sound effect. Use the STOP button to stop a cyclic
sound.(SeeListofsoundsassignabletothePadson
page226).
EachPadcorrespondstoadedicatedPadtrack.
46 TRANSPOSE
Thesebuttonstransposethewholeinstrumentinsemi
tonesteps(MasterTranspose).Thetranspositionvalue
isshown(asanotename)onthetoprightofthedis
play.
Pressbothbuttonstogether,toresettheMasterTrans
posetozero.
18
Front panel
Note: The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to

Drum mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the
DrumandPercussiontracks).SeePage14Track:Mode
onpage46,andPage7Track:Modeonpage78.

LowerstheMasterTransposeasemitone.
RaisestheMasterTransposeasemitone.
47 OCTAVE
Thesebuttonstransposetheselectedtrackinstepsofa
wholeoctave(12semitones;max2octaves).Thetrans
position value is shown (in octaves) on the top right
areaofthedisplay.
Pressbothbuttonstogether,toresettheOctaveTrans
posetozero.
Note: The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to
Drum mode (and, even if set in a different status, on the
DrumandPercussiontracks).
Lowerstheselectedtrackanoctave.
Raisestheselectedtrackanoctave.
48 BALANCE slider
InSongPlaymode,thissliderbalancesthevolumeof
the two onboard sequencers. When fully on the left,
onlySequencer1canbeheard.Whenfullyontheright,
only Sequencer 2 can be heard. When in the middle,
bothsequencerswillplayatfullvolume.
49 SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS - SEQ1

and SEQ2
The instrument is equipped with two sequencers
(Sequencer1andSequencer2),eachwithitsownsetof
transportcontrols.
<<and>> Rewind and Fast Forward commands. If
you use them while the Song is in play,
theymakeitscrollbackorforward.
When pressed once, these buttons move
the Song to the previous or following
measure. When kept pressed, they make
the Song scroll continuously, until you
releasethem.
In Jukebox mode (Sequencer 1),
keeptheSHIFTbuttonpressed,andpress
these buttons to scroll to the previous or
nextSongintheJukeboxlist(seePage9
Jukeboxonpage79).
PAUSE
Pauses the Song at the current position.
Press PAUSE or PLAY/STOP to start the
Songplayingagain.
PLAY/STOP Starts or stops the current Song. When
youstoptheSong,theSongPositiongoes
backtomeasure1.
In Song Play mode, pressing this
button while keeping SHIFT pressed,
startsbothsequencersatthesametime.
Display and User Interface
19
Display controls
4. DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE

Thedisplay shows the currentstatusof the microAR
RANGERanditsperformanceandeditingparameters.
YoucanselecteachparameterbyusingtheVOLUME/
VALUE (AH) buttons on the side of the display, or
each page command appearing along the last line

using the F1F4 buttons. You can vary many of the
parameters values by pressing the left () or right (+)
buttonofanyVOLUME/VALUEpair.
Status icons area
Style (accompaniment/backing) tracks
DISPLAY CONTROLS
VOLUME/VALUE (AH) buttons and display parameters. Thesebuttonsareusedtoselectthecorrespond
ing parameter or command in the display, to change
theparameters value, orto changethe volume of the
correspondingtrack.
While you are on the main page, these buttons can
select a track, change the tracks volume, or mute/
unmuteatrack.
See VOLUME/VALUE (MUTE) AH buttons on
page15formoreinformation.
F-1F-4 buttons. WheninanEditpage,thesebuttons
maybeusedwhentherearefourparametersinarow,
asinthefollowingexample:
Realtime (Keyboard) tracks
IntheCardEditenvironment,theF1F4buttonscan
be used also to select one of the page commands
appearinginthelastlineofthedisplay.
SeeSINGLETOUCHSETTING(F1F4FUNCTION
KEYS)buttonsonpage16formoreinformation.
PAGE. The PAGE buttons select the previous or next
edit page. When selecting a Style or a Program, they
select a different page of Styles or Programs. See
PAGE/+onpage15formoreinformation.
MENU. TheMENUbuttonopensthecurrentoperating
mode or edit environments Menu. When in a Menu,
youcanusetheVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectan
editsectiontojumpto.
First, select the line using a VOLUME/VALUE (AH)

button. Then, select a column using the F1F4 func
tionbutton.
TRACK SELECT. Eachoftheoperatingmodeshavea

differentnumberoftracks:
StylePlay 4Realtimetracks,8Styletracks,4Pads.
20

Interface structure
SongPlay
4Realtimetracks,2x16SongTracks,
4Pads.
BackingSequence
4Realtimetracks,8Styletracks,4Pads.
Song
16Songtracks.
Youcanonlyseeupto8tracksinthedisplay.So,use
theTRACKSELECTbuttontoswitchtotheother(hid
den) tracks. Forexample,wheninStyle Play,youcan
usethisbuttontoswitchfromtheRealtimetracksand
theStyletracks.
Whenopeninganeditenvironmentoraselectingpage,
thecurrentoperatingmodeisstillworkingintheback
ground.
INTERFACE STRUCTURE
Thankstoitsmultitaskingoperatingsystem,themicro
ARRANGER user interface is structured in overlap
ping,activelayers.Fromthelowerlevel:
operating modes (Style Play, Backing Sequence,
SongPlay,Song,Program)
editenvironments(Global,Card)
selecting windows (Style Select, Song Select, Pro
gramSelect,PerformanceSelect).
Operating modes. (See diagram at the bottom of this

page).Atthelowestlevel,anoperatingmodeisalways
active.Thecurrentoperatingmodeisindicatedbythe
lit LED on the STYLE PLAY, B.SEQ, SONG PLAY,
SONGorPROGRAMbuttonintheMODEsection.The
relevanticonlightsupinthedisplay.
An operating mode is divided into a main page (the
pagewhereyouusuallyplayaStyle,aSongoraPro
gram),amenu,andaseriesofeditpages.
PressMENUtoaccesstheMenu.UsetheMENUand
PAGEbuttonstobrowseacrossthevariouseditpages.
PressEXITtogobacktothemainpage.
Operating modes
Main page
Menu
Edit pages
21
Message windows
Edit environment. (See diagram at the bottom of this

page).WhenyoupressGLOBALorSDCARD,anedit
environment overlaps the current operating mode.
PressEXITtogobacktothecurrentoperatingmode.
Aneditenvironmentismadeupofamenuandaseries
of edit pages. Use the MENU and PAGE buttons to
browseacrossthevariouseditpages.
SYMBOLS AND ICONS

Manyiconsandsymbols,onthecustomdisplay,show
thestatusofaparameterorthedisplaycontent.
Realtime/Keyboardtrack
(Upper13,Lower).
Drumtrack(Styletrackview).
Selecting windows. When you press one of the

STYLE or PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE buttons, you
open a selecting window. This window closes after
selectingoneoftheitemsinit,orafterpressingEXIT.
If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is light up, the window
doesntcloseafterselectinganitem.PressEXITtoclose
thewindow,andgobacktotheunderlyingpage.
Percussiontrack(Styletrackview).
GroupedDrumandPercussiontracks.
Basstrack(Styletrackview).
Grouped accompaniment tracks. This
symbolindicatesthefivegroupedaccom
panimenttracks(Acc15).
MESSAGE WINDOWS
Accompanimenttracks(Styletrackview).
Sometimes, a message might appear in the display,

warningaboutanerrororanincorrectoperation:
PressENTERorEXITtoexitoneofthesewindows.
Other messages ask for an answer, asin the Are you
surewindowbelow:
PressENTER/YESforYes,orEXIT/NOforNo.
Sequencertracks.
(noicon)
Selected track or parameter. When this

symbol appears, you can execute any
availableoperationontheselecteditem.
Thetrackisinmute,andcantplayonthe
keyboard.
GRAYED-OUT NON-AVAILABLE
PARAMETERS
Currentlynonavailableparametersarenowshownin
grayinthedisplay,i.e.withaghosttexture.Here
isanexampleofagrayedoutparameter,comparedto
anormalparameter:
Text in solid black
Text in gray
Edit environment
Menu
Edit pages
22
Rear panel
5. REAR PANEL
4 5
1 PHONES
Usethisjacktoconnectapairofheadphones.Youcan
use headphones with an impedance of 16200 (50
suggested). Use a headphone distributor to connect
morethanonepairofheadphones.
2 INPUT
Usetheseunbalancedconnectorstoinputanotherkey
board/synthesizer,a(nonpowered)mixersoutput,or
aCD/tapeplayer(lineimpedance).Thesignalisauto
matically routed to the speakers, the Audio Outputs
andthePhones.
3 OUTPUTS
Usetheseunbalancedconnectorstosendtheaudiosig
nal(sound)toamixer,aPAsystem,asetofpowered
monitors,oryourhifisystem.Settheoutputlevelwith
theMASTERVOLUMEslider.
4 DAMPER
Use this to connect a Damper pedal, like the KORG
PS1,PS3orDS1H.Tochangeitspolarity,seeDamper
Pol.(DamperPolarity)onpage126.
5 ASSIGN. PDL/SW
Use this to connect a continuous or footswitch pedal,
liketheKORGEXP2orXVP10.Toprogramit,seeP/S
(Pedal/Switch)onpage126.
6 MIDI interface
The MIDI interface allows your microARRANGER to
be connected to an external controller (master key
board, MIDI guitar, wind controller, MIDI accor

dion), to an expander, or to a computer running a
sequenceroraneditor.Formoreinformationonhowto
usetheMIDIinterface,seetheMIDIchapter.
IN
ThisconnectorreceivesMIDIdatafroma
computeroracontroller.Connectittoan
external controllers or computers MIDI
OUT.
OUT
ThisconnectorsendsMIDIdatagenerated
bythemicroARRANGERskeyboard,con
trollers, and/or the internal sequencer.
Connectittoanexpandersorcomputers
MIDIIN.
7 DC 12V (AC power adapter connector)
Plugthesuppliedpoweradapterintothisconnector.
8 SD Card Slot
To insert an SD card (or SDHC card),
push it into the slot until it clicks into
place.ToremovetheSDcard,pushitin;
the card will pop out slightly, allowing
youtopullitout.
Connector
Note: Carefully read the owners manual
side
that came with your SD card, and observe
the instructions regarding care and han
dling.
Note:TakecaretoinserttheSDcardinthecorrectdirection
andorientation,andbesuretopressitallthewayintothe
slot.Donotuseexcessiveforce.
BASIC GUIDE
24
Basic operations
Playing on the keyboard
6. BASIC OPERATIONS
PLAYING ON THE KEYBOARD
Justplayonthekeyboard.YouwillheartheRealtime
tracks playing. There are four Realtime tracks: Upper
13andLower.Theymayplayallatthesametime,or
justoneorafewofthem,dependingontheirMutesta
tus.Ifyoucannothearatrack,checkthemutestatusof
thatpart.
Tracks can be set in different ways: use the KEY
BOARDMODEsectiontoselectthewaytheyarecon
figuredonthekeyboard.
Press FULL UPPER to play the Upper 13 tracks
on the full range of the keyboard, just as you
wouldonapiano.
Upper 1
SELECTING, MUTING/UNMUTING AND

SOLOING A TRACK
Selecting. UsetheVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttonsto
selectatrack.
The selected track is shown with a solid square sur

roundingitsstatusicons.
Upper 2
Upper 3
Selected track
PressSPLITtolettheUpper13tracksplayonthe
rightoftheSplitPoint,andtheLowertrackonthe
left.
Ifyoucantseethetrackthatyourelookingfor,usethe
TRACK SELECT button to scroll up or down the
tracks,andfindthehiddenones.
Upper 1
Lower
Upper 2
Upper 3
Split Point
KeeptheSPLITPOINTbuttonpressed,andplaya
note to change the point where the keyboard is
dividedinanUpperandaLowerpart.
Mute/unmute. Press both VOLUME/VALUE (AH)

buttonstomuteorunmuteatrack.Forexample,ifyou
are on the main page that appears after turning the
instrument on, and you want to mute the Upper 1
track,presstheE(UPPER1/ACC2)buttonstogether.
Themute/playstatusisshownbytherelevanticonin
thedisplay:
LOWER
UPPER
(noicon)
Tosavetheselectedsplitpointnote,presstheGLOBAL
button,thenpressWRITEtosavetheGlobalinmem
ory(seeTheWritewindowonpage125).
Play status; the track plays on the key

board.
Mutestatus;thetrackdoesntplayonthe
keyboard.
Solo. While in the Style Play, Song Play and Song

modes, you can solo one of the tracks. Just keep the
SHIFT button pressed, and press both VOLUME/
VALUEbuttonscorrespondingtothetrackyouwishto
solo.
Toexitthesolomode,keeptheSHIFTbuttonpressed
again,andpressbothVOLUME/VALUEbuttonscorre
spondingtothesoloedtrack.
Basic operations
25
Selecting a Performance
SELECTING A PERFORMANCE
The Performance Select window appears. There

are8Performancesforeachbank.
APerformanceisasetofProgramsandsettingsforthe
Keyboard and Style tracks, that makes selecting com
plexcombinationslivefastandeasy.WhentheSTYLE
CHANGE LED is on, a Performance can also select a
differentStyle.
ItisalwaysadvisabletousePerformances,ratherthan
single Programs, when playing even a solo sound,
since a Performance lets you select the right effects,
transposition, plus many other parameters, together
withthePrograms.
Data type
Realtime
Tracks
Style
Tracks
Parameters
Upper 1, Upper 2,
Upper 3, Lower
Drum, Percussion,
Bass, Acc1, Acc2,
Acc3, Acc4, Acc5
Master Transpose, Program,

Volume, Pan, Octave, Scale,
Detune, Pitch Bend,
Poly/Mono/Drum, Int/Ext,
Damper, Dynamic Range,
Joystick, C&D Effect Send
level, Type, Parameters,
Program parameters, Pads
Program, Volume, Pan,
Octave, Detune, Pitch Bend,
Poly/Mono/Drum, Int/Ext,
Wrap Around, Keyboard
Range, A&B Effect Send
level, Type, Parameters,
Program parameters,
Drum Mapping, Kick&Snare
Assignation
Other performance parameters are saved in the

Global.
Global
Chord Recognition Mode, Memory Mode, Velocity

Trigger, Lock
1. Press the PERFORM button. This changes the

PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section into a Per
formanceselector.
2.
3.
Use the leftmost button of the PROGRAM/PER

FORMANCE section to select the first row of ten
banks(110,upperLEDturnedon),orthesecond
rowoftenbanks(1120,lowerLEDturnedon).
Press one of the 10 buttons to select the PRO
GRAM/PERFORMANCEbankcontainingthePer
formanceyouarelookingfor.
Last selected Performance
4.
5.
SelectaPerformanceusingtheVOLUME/VALUE
(AH)buttons.
If the DISPLAY HOLD LED is on, press EXIT to
exitthiswindow.
The STYLE CHANGE button

WhenyouselectaPerformance,theStylemayormay
not change, depending on the status of the STYLE
CHANGEbutton.(WhenyousaveaPerformance,the
currentStylenumberisalwaysmemorized).
IftheSTYLECHANGELEDison,theStylesaved
inthePerformancewillbeselected.
If the STYLE CHANGE LED is off, the Style
doesntchange.
SELECTING A PROGRAM
You can select a different Program (i.e., sound) to be
playedbyatrack.BeforeselectingaProgram,youmust
selectthetrackthatyouwanttoassigntheProgramto.
Note:ToassigndifferentPrograms totheStyletracks,press
TRACK SELECTtoseetheStyletracks.IfyouselectaPro
gram while grouped tracks (Drum/Percussion or ACC) are
selected,theProgramwillbeassignedtothelastselectedtrack.
EachStyleElement(Variations,Fills)canhavedif
ferentPrograms,soyourselectionmightbeautomati
callyresetwhenselectingadifferentElement.Toavoid
thisreset,seeProg(Program)onpage49.
1. Use the VOLUME/VALUE (EH) buttons on the
right side of the display, to select the Realtime
(Keyboard) track you wish to assign a different
Programto.
2.
Press the PROGRAM button. This changes the

PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section into a Pro
gramselector.
26
Basic operations
Selecting a Style
3.
Use the leftmost PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE

button to select a row of Program banks (upper,
lower).
4.
SelectthePROGRAM/PERFORMANCEbankcon
tainingtheProgramyouarelookingfor(Program
banksareidentifiedbyinstrumentnames).
TheStyleSelectwindowappears.
3.
4.
The Program Select window appears. See Pro
grams(ProgramChangeorder)onpage154fora
listofFactoryPrograms.
Last selected Program
Selected track
5.
Thereare2pagesforeachbank,eachcontaining8
Styles.SelectapageusingthePAGEbuttons.
AsyoufindtheStyleyouarelookingfor,selectit
usingtheVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttons.
Note:ThenewStylewillenteratthenextstrongbeat.
exitthiswindow.
The SINGLE TOUCH button

When you select a Style, the Realtime (Keyboard)
trackscanbechanged.
IftheSINGLETOUCHLEDison,theSingleTouch
Setting(STS)#1isautomaticallyselected,andthe
Realtime tracks are changed. Programs, and the
KeyboardMode,maychange.
IftheSINGLETOUCHLEDisoff,Realtimetracks
dontchange.
5.
6.
7.
BrowsealltheProgramsintheselectedbankusing
thePAGEbuttons.Therecanbevariouspagesfor
eachbank,containingupto8Programseach.
AsyoufindtheProgramyouarelookingfor,select
itusingtheVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttons.
exitthiswindow.
SELECTING A STYLE
AStyleisasetofrhythmandaccompanimentpatterns.
You can select a Style from the internal memory, or
from a memory card (see The DIRECT SD bank on
page40).
1. Use the leftmost STYLE button to select a row of
Stylebanks(upper,lower).
2.
Select the STYLE bank containing the Style that

yourelookingfor.
SELECTING A SINGLE TOUCH SETTING

(STS)
A Single Touch Setting (STS) contains Realtime (Key
board) tracks settings. Four STS are included in each
Style, and can be recalled by pressing the SINGLE
TOUCHSETTING(F1F4)buttonsunderthedisplay.
Note:YoucanselectaSTSonlywhenyouareinthemain
pageoftheStylePlayorBackingSequenceoperatingmode.
CHANGING ALL KEYBOARD TRACKS AT

ONCE
SelectaPerformanceoraSingleTouchSetting(F1F4
buttons,whenyouareintheStylePlaymainpage)to
changekeyboardProgramsandeffectsatthetouchofa
button.
SHORTCUT TO SEE THE ORIGINAL BANK FOR

A STYLE, PERFORMANCE OR PROGRAM
YoucanseetheoriginalbankwhereyourStyle,Perfor
manceorProgramcamefrom.JustkeeptheSHIFTbut
tonpressed,andpressthelefmostbuttonoftheSTYLE
or PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section. A message
windowwillappear,showingthenameoftheoriginal
bank.
ReleasetheSHIFTbuttontoexitthewindow.
Tutorial
27
Playing a Style (Automatic Accompaniment)
7. TUTORIAL
This chapter is fully devoted to stepbystep instruc
tions,thatwehopemaybeusefultolearnthebasics
inthefield.
PLAYING A STYLE
(Automatic Accompaniment)
A Style will be your virtual band for your best solos.
Selectoneofthe304Styleswefittedinthismachine
1 OK, select your favorite musical Style.
There are plenty of Styles to choose from. We will go
withaJazzStyletheJazzBrush.
1. SelectthesecondrowofStyles.Presstheleftmost
STYLEbuttontoswitchthelowerLEDon.
2 Call an Intro.
YoucanengageanIntrotobeplayedbeforetheStyle.
Press INTRO1 or INTRO2. The former plays more
freely,withoutlettingyoudecidethechords.Thelatter
letsyouplayachordprogressionwhileitsplaying.
3 Start the Style!

Playachord,andpresstheSTART/STOPbutton.
Then begin playing. Usually (when the SPLIT LED is

on)chordsarerecognizedunderthesplitpoint,i.e.on
the Lower part of the keyboard. With the UPPER or
FULL Chord Scanning mode, you must play three or
morenotestohaveachordrecognized.
2.
Now,youarefreetopressbuttonnumber4,called
JAZZ1.
TheStyleSelectwindowappears.
The selected Style
3.
Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to

selectJazzBrush.
4 Play your chords and your melody.

Go on playing. As you may notice, the microAR
RANGER features a very sophisticate chord recogni
tion engine. Recognized chords are shown in the
display.
5 Make a breakor should we say a fill?
During your playing, you are free to call a onebar
break.Tryit:
PRESS BREAK
Doyousee?Musicstoppedforonebar.Then,itisback
again.Afterawhile,letsgoforsomethingdifferent
PRESS FILL1 OR FILL2
No silence, this time. microARRANGER plays a com
plexpassagetoletyoutakeabreath.FILL1isthesim
pler one, where FILL2 is more sophisticated. Usually,
youwilluseFILL1whenplayingwithVariations1and
2(themosteasy),FILL2whenworkingwithVariations
3and4(morecomplexones).
6 Select other Variations.

TherearefourVARIATIONbuttons.Thesearefourdif
ferentversionsofthesameStyle.Trythemall!
YoucangotoaVariationafteraFill.JustpressaFILL
button, then, immediately after press a VARIATION
button.
28
Tutorial
Playing in Realtime (Without using Automatic Accompaniment)
7 Stop it!
OK,youcouldsay:Oh,thatseasy,Iknowhowtodo
it, I can just press that big red START/STOP button
again.
Yes,youareperfectlyright.Butthatstheeasyway.Let
ussuggestamorecolorfulway:
PRESS ENDING1 OR ENDING2
An ending is instantaneously called, and will begin
playing, to lead the Style to a colorful end. As usual,
ENDING1 is preprogrammed, while ENDING2 asks
foryourchordprogression.
PLAYING IN REALTIME
(Without using Automatic Accompaniment)
AssoonasyouturnyourmicroARRANGERon,itisin
StylePlaymode,andyoucanplayitinrealtime.Please
followme
1 Play on the keyboard.
WhenyouturnthemicroARRANGERon,Performance
11isautomaticallyselected.
Performance bank-number
In Sync
WhatifIwanttoavoidallthatSTART/STOPstuff?I
mean, I prefer to have my hands free for playing
music!
Good point. The SYNCHRO button is there right for
thispurpose.
While the Style is stopped, press the SYNCHRO button.
TheSYNCHROSTARTLEDbeginsblinking.TheSyn
chroStartfunctionisenabled.
1
2 Play a chord on the keyboard.

You must play a chord for the chord recognition
engine.Usually,itwillbetotheleftofthesplitpoint,
butitdependsontheCHORDSCANNINGsection(see
CHORDSCANNINGsectiononpage17).
TheStylestarts.
3
Stop the Style using your chosen method.
ThissetstheRealtime(Keyboard)tracksforyou.Inthis
caseyougettheUpper1trackplayingonthefullkey
boardrange,withtheGrandPianoProgramselected.
As you may know, there are four available Realtime
tracks: Upper 13 and Lower. Upper Realtime tracks
may play on the full range of the keyboard (the
selected KEYBOARD MODE shall be FULL UPPER).
Otherwise,theLowertrackplaysontheleftoftheSplit
Point,andtheUppertracksontheright(KEYBOARD
MODEshallbeSPLIT).
Ifyouarenotsatisfiedwiththissettingatstartup,you
cansimplyselectanotherPerformance.Orchangethe
tracks settingsas you will see in this tutorialand
savethemintoPerformance11.Youllsoonseehowto
doit.
2 Select a different Performance.
IsthePERFORM.LEDon?
Need more information?

GotoStylePlayoperatingmodeonpage40.TheRef
erenceGuideincludesalltheinformationyouneed.
If so, press one of the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE

buttons,andselectaPerformancewiththeVOLUME/
VALUEbuttons(onthesideofthedisplay).
Select a Performance with the VOLUME/VALUE buttons
Go ahead and try out the different Performances. We

provided160ofthemforyou.
Tutorial
29
Playing in Realtime (Without using Automatic Accompaniment)
3 Select Performance 1-1 (Grand Piano) again.

As above: press Performance bank 1, and use the A
VOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectPerformance11.
7 Mute/unmute various tracks.

PressbothHVOLUME/VALUEbuttons.Youwillmute
theLowertrack.
4 Unmute the Upper 2 track.

Press both F VOLUME/VALUE but
tons. The Upper 2 track will be
selectedandunmuted.ThePlayicon
willappear,surroundedbytheselectedtrackframe
andaccompaniedbythepointingarrow.Youwillhear
the Dark Pad Program play together with the Grand
Piano.
Press the H VOLUME/VALUE buttons
PressthemagaintounmutetheLowertrack.
Try also with the Upper tracks, using the E, F and G
VOLUME/VALUE buttons. You will notice the sound
becomes more or less fullersounding, depending on
thenumberoftracksmutedorunmuted.
Press the F VOLUME/VALUE buttons
Press SPLIT on the KEYBOARD MODE section,

and play.
Now,thekeyboardissplitintwoparts:theLowerpart
ontheleft,andtheUpperpartontheright.TheAna
logStrProgramisplayingontheLowerpart,whilethe
Grand Piano and the Dark Pad are playing on the
Upperpart.
Press the EG VOLUME/VALUE buttons
8 Set the relative volume of the Realtime tracks.

UseeachEHVOLUME/VALUEbuttonpairtosetthe
volume of the Realtime tracks. Press one of the VOL
UME/VALUE button to select a track. Then press the
rightonetoincreasethevolume,theleftonetolowerit.
Press the left one to lower
6 Set the split point.

Nothappywiththecurrentsplitpoint?KeeptheSPLIT
POINTbuttonhelddown,andplaythenewsplitpoint
on the keyboard. You can even save this setting in
memory(seeTheWritewindowonpage125).
and the right one to raise.
Press FULL UPPER on the KEYBOARD MODE

section, and play.
Again, the Upper tracks can play across the full key
boardrange.
10 Save your track configuration in a Performance.

Thats all! When you find the right sound, you can
presstheWRITEbuttontosavethetrackconfiguration
into a Performance, a Single Touch Setting (STS), or a
StylePerformance.ThePerformanceisahandywayto
save Realtime tracks. See The Write window on
30
Tutorial
Recording a Song (Simultaneously recording the Style and realtime performance)
RECORDING A SONG
(Simultaneously recording the Style and
realtime performance)
TheBackingSequencemodeisafastandeffectiveway
of recording a new Song, making full use of the fea
tures of the Style Play mode. So, arm your recorder,
andplaylivewiththeStylesasongwillbereadyin
seconds!
1 First, enter Backing Sequence mode
PressB.SEQtoaccesstheBackingSequencemode.The
Realtimetracks,onthekeyboard,willremainthesame
asyouselectedintheStylePlaymode.
If you think the selected Style is not what you

like for your backing tracks, select a different
one.
(see Selecting a Style on page26). Here is a fast
reminder:
1. SelectoneoftheStylerowsintheSTYLEsection,
usingtheleftmostbutton.
2. Select one of the Style Banks, by pressing one of
thebuttonsoftheSTYLEsection.
3. Selectoneofthepages,usingthePAGEbuttons.
4. Select a Style, using the VOLUME/VALUE (AH)
buttons.
The Style Bank and number appear after the Style
parameterinthedisplay.
5
Dont worry about this display: its something you

dont need to learn at this point. You may find more
information on it, going to the Reference Guide (see
BackingSequenceoperatingmodeonpage82).
ThisistheBackingSequencePlaypage,whereyoucan
load,playorsaveaSong.
2 Now, press RECORD.
YouarepromptedtoselecteithertheRealtimerecord
ingmode,ortheChord/AccSteprecordingmode.
3 Select the Realtime recording mode.

Simply press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons.
TheRecordpageappears.
And what about changing the Performance or

Single Touch Setting?
(see Selecting a Performance on page25, or Select
ingaSingleTouchSetting(STS)onpage26).Hereisa
shortrecapforthePerformances:
1. PressthePERFORMbuttontosetthePROGRAM/
PERFORMANCE section act as a Performance
selector.
2. Select one of the Performance Banks, by pressing
one of the buttons of the PROGRAM/PERFOR
MANCEsection.
3. SelectaPerformance,usingtheVOLUME/VALUE
(AH)buttons.
andfortheSingleTouchSettings(STS):
Press one of the SINGLE TOUCH SETTING but
tons.
6 Ok, now we can go.
Asyousee,boththeRTtrackandtheCh/Acctrackare
in RECord mode. This means you can start recording
everythingyouplayinarealtimeperformancewiththe
Styles.
PRESS START/STOP
WAIT FOR THE PRECOUNT TO REACH BAR 1
AND BEGIN PLAYING!
7 Play as if you were playing live.
Youcandoexactlywhatyoudowhenplayingwiththe
Styles:selectadifferentStyle,Performance,STS,differ
entVariation,aFill,andEnding
You can even start your recording with an Intro: just
press one of the INTRO buttons before pressing
START/STOPtostartrecording.
8 Stop the Song.
To stop the Song, press either START/STOP or one of
the ENDING buttons. The Song will stop, but the
Recording will still be on. So, you can start with
another Song to be recorded in the same session (go
backtostep6,ifyoulike).
Otherwise,finishtheRecording.Nowforgoingtothe
nextstep.
Tutorial
31
Playing a Song from a card
Finish the recording.

PRESS PLAY/STOP (SEQ1)
and the Recording status will be gone. Both Backing
Sequence tracks (RT and Ch/Acc) will be set to the
PLAYstatus.
10 Listen to the Song.
When back in the Backing Sequence Play page, press
PLAY/STOP (SEQ1) to listen to the new Song. How
smartwereyou?
If the Song is fine, you can switch to the Song mode
and do some editing. Or you can save it (as seen
below),andplayitinSongPlaymode.
11 Deleting one of the tracks, or the whole Song

and record again.
Thatseasy!
1. PressRECORDtoenterRecordmode.
3.
Pressthe[F1]buttontoselecttheSDcard(SD).
4.
MovethefolderwhereyouwishtosaveyourSong
tothefirstlineofthedisplay,usingtheEF(Scroll
Up) and GH (Scroll Down) VOLUME/VALUE
buttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.PressF3
(OPEN) to open it. Close the current folder by
pressingF4(CLOSE).
To create a new file, move the NEW_NAME.MID
itemtothefirstlineofthedisplay.
When the NEW_NAME.MID item is selected,
pressoneoftheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttons.You
arepromptedtoassignanametothenewfolder:
5.
6.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set the track to delete and set the REC status to

record.
Setthetrackyouwanttolistentoduringrecording
toPLAYstatus.Ifyoudontwanttodeleteit,but
youdontwanttolistentoit,setthetracktoMUTE
status.
Startrecordingagain.IfyouarerecordingtheRT
track,youcantusetheStylecontrols.
Press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1) to finish the Song and
exitRecordingmode.
12 Time to save your Song.

If you dont save your Song, it will be lost when you
turn the instrument off, or switch to the Song Play
mode. YoumustsavetoacardanySongyouwish to
preserve.
1. InsertyourSDcardintothecardslot.
2. IntheBackingSequencePlaypage,selecttheSave
Songparameter.
7.
MovethecursorusingtheDOWN/andUP/+but
tons. Select a character using the DIAL. Insert a
character at the cursor position by pressing the
INSERT button. Delete a character at the cursor
positionbypressingtheDELETEbutton.
When you have finished writing a name for the
new midifile, press F2 (SAVE) to confirm. The
Are you sure? message will appear. Press
ENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.

GotoBackingSequenceoperatingmodeonpage82.
The Reference Guide includes all the information you
need.
PLAYING A SONG FROM A CARD

1
Insert the card containing the Song into the

card slot.
Press the SONG PLAY button to access the

Song Play mode.
32
Tutorial
Editing a Song
Press the A (S1:) VOLUME/VALUE button to

open the Song Select window.
EDITING A SONG
You can edit a Song, either a Standard MIDI File
boughtattheshop,oroneofyourSongsmadeinBack
ingSequencemode.
What about changing those boring General MIDI
sounds with those gorgeous original KORG sounds?
YoucandoitinSongmode.
1 Press SONG to go to the Song mode.
This is the Song garage, where you may find tools to
reshapeyourSong.
Page commands
Note: You can also access the Song Select window by

pressingthePAGE+buttonfromthemainpage.Youcan
exitthiswindoweitherbypressingEXITorPAGE.
4 Press the F-1 button to select the SD card (SD).
Thecardcontentappears.
5
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls, or the VOLUME/VALUE (EH) buttons to scroll the list.
The EF buttons are the Scroll Up ( ), while the
GH buttons are the Scroll Down ( ).
Movethefileyouarelookingfortothefirstlineofthe
display.
6
If the file you are looking for is in a folder (a file

whose name begins with ), move the
folder to the first line in the display, then select
the F-3 (OPEN) command. Select the F-4
(CLOSE) command to close a folder and go
back to the upper level.
Insert in the card slot the card containing the

midifile you wish to edit.
Midifiles are files generated by a computer sequencer
oramusicalinstrument,usuallyafteraconversion.For
example,ifworkingwithacomputer,youshouldfind
acommandwhosenamecouldsoundalittlelikeCon
vert to .MID. A midifile has a .MID or .KAR
extension.
2
3 Load the Song.

Press one of the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons (corre
sponding to the Load Song command). As expected,
theLoadpagewillappear.
When the file you are looking for is in the first

line of the display, press the F-2 (SELECT) button.
When the Song appears

in the S1 line on the main
page of the Song Play
mode, press the left (SEQ 1) PLAY/STOP button
to start the playback.
Note:IftheBALANCEsliderisallthewaytothe
right,Sequencer1isattheminimumvolumeand
cantbeheard.
IfyouwishtoplayadifferentSongonSequencer2
at the same time, press the B (S2:) VOLUME/
VALUEbutton(pressittwiceifaSongisalready
selected for Sequencer 2), and repeat the above
proceduretoselectaSongforSequencer2.Usethe
right(SEQ2)PLAY/STOPbuttontostart/stopthe
second Song. Use the BALANCE cursor to mix
betweenSequencer1andSequencer2.
Stop the Song(s) using the PLAY/STOP button for the
correspondingSequencer.

GotoBackingSequenceoperatingmodeonpage82.The
ReferenceGuideincludesalltheinformationyouneed.
Ifyoureplacedthecard,pressF1(SD)toreadtheSD
cardagain.
Movethemidifiletoloadtothefirstlineofthedisplay.
UsetheDIALortheUPandDOWNbuttonstoscroll
thelist;orusetheEF(ScrollUp)orGH(Scrolldown)
VOLUME/VALUEbuttons.
When the midifile is on the first line of the display,
pressF2(LOAD)toloadit.TheAreyousure?mes
sagewillappear.PressENTERtoconfirm.
Note:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,thefirstMIDI
events are converted to the Song Performance events. You
willseethemasthePrograms,Volume,Pan,Effectsettings
assignedtothetracks.
Tutorial
33
Editing a Song
select.Forexample,oneoftheAbuttonstoselect
track1:
4 Listen to the Song.

After loading you are back to the main page of the
Songmode.
3.
Press PLAY/STOP (SEQ1) to listen to the Song. The
LEDonthebuttonturnson.
Doesitsoundgood?IfitisaGeneralMIDIcompatible
midifile,thereisagoodchanceitdoes.Butwecanfur
therimproveonit.
5 Stop the Song.
Thisoneiseasy:pressPLAY/STOP(SEQ1).TheLEDon
thePLAY/STOPbuttonturnsoff.
Please, always remember: make any changes to the
Songwhenthesequencerisnotplaying.Otherwise,a
Stopcommandwillresetallyourchanges.
(Notfunny,huh?)
6 Select different Programs.
You can replace General MIDI Programs with KORG
Programs.Itwillsoundmorerich,morelively.
1. PressTRACKSELECTtoseetracks18.TheLED
turnson.
Youarewatchingattracks18.Youcanswitchto
tracks 916 by pressing the TRACK SELECT but
tonagain.
2.
IfyoupressTRACKSELECTagain,youareback
to the main page. Press TRACK SELECT AGAIN
togototracks18
SelectthetrackyouwishtoassignadifferentPro
gram using the VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Press
one of the buttons corresponding to the track to
4.
SelectaProgram.Youshouldknowhowtodo.If
not,whataboutgoingbackforalittletotheBasic
operations chapter, Selecting a Program sec
tion, page25? It will be of a great help in the
future
Which Programs to choose? With >662 Programs,
you will for sure find your preferred sound. Just
browse any Program bank, and listen to them.
Turn on the DISPLAY HOLD LED, to stay in the
Selecting Window until you have found the right
Program.(Then,pressEXITorDISPLAYHOLDto
exitthewindow.)
Executeasmanychangesasyouliketotheother
tracks.
7 Change the volume.

Yes, this is another obvious change. Press MENU to
opentheeditmenu.
PressoneoftheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,toselect
the Mixer/Tuning item. Suddenly, a Volume edit page
appears
Selectatrack,andusetheDIALortheUPandDOWN
buttons, or the VOLUME/VALUE buttons, to change
thetracksvolume.
Modifyalltracksyouthinkneedtobemodified.
8 Save the Song.
YourchangeswillbelostwhenyouloadanewSong,
switch to the Song Playmode,or turnthe instrument
34
Tutorial
The Arabic Scale
off.So,pressEXITtogobacktothemainpageofthe
Songmode.
THE ARABIC SCALE

You can program an Arabic scale in real time, by
assigning a footswitch or a pad the Quarter Tone
function.
Anotherwayofchangingthescaleisassigningittoa
Performance or Single Touch Setting (STS), but this is
the most convenient way to change the pitch in real
time.
1
PressoneoftheCVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,toselect
the Save Song command. Save your Song with a new
name. How to accomplish this simple operation is
described in great details on page90 (Save Song
page).
Note: When saving a Song the Song Performance events
(initial Program, Volume, Pan, Effect Send settings) are
savedatthebeginningoftheStandardMIDIFile.Effectset
tingsaresavedasmicroARRANGERSysExevents,ignored
byothermusicalinstruments.
Other editings
TheVolumeisnottheonlyparameteryoucanedit.You
caneditalotmorethings,likethePan,theEffects,the
Tuningyoucanevenuseupto4effects(ADInter
nal FX Processors), but this will be useful only when
readingtheSongbackonthemicroARRANGERonly,
since other General MIDIcompliant instruments use
only2effects.

Go to Song operating mode on page88. The Refer
enceGuideincludesalltheinformationyouneed.
Program a footswitch to be the Quarter tone

switch.
SimplygototheGlobalenvironment,andreachPage
3 Assignable Pedal/Footswitch, Assignable Slider.
There,youwillfindtheP/S(Pedal/Switch)parame
ter,towhichyoucanassigntheQuartertonefunction.
PressWRITEtosavetheGlobalstatusinmemory(see
TheWritewindowonpage125).
2 Lower some note pitches.
Keep the Quarter tone pedal pressed. The keyboard
willnotplayatthistime.Pressthenotesyouwantto
loweraquarteroftone.Releasethepedal.
3 Play with your new scale.

Thenotesyoupressedarenowloweredofaquarterof
tone.
4 Reset the original scale.
PresstheQuartertonepedalagain.Allpitcheswillbe
reset,andthescaleselectedbythePerformance,STSor
StylePerformancewillberecalled.

Asstated,youcanassignanalternativescaletoaPer
formance or STS. Go to Page 5 Tuning: Scale on
page44, and give also a look to the Scale Mode
parameter(seepage51).
MIDI
35
What is MIDI?
8. MIDI
WHAT IS MIDI?
Here is a brief overview of MIDI, as related to the
microARRANGER. If interested, you may find more
informationonthegeneraluseofMIDIinthevarious
specializedmagazinesandbooks.
In general
MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface.
Thisinterfaceletsyouconnecttwomusicalinstruments,
oracomputerandvariousmusicalinstruments.
Physically,MIDIiscomposedofthreedifferentconnec
tors.TheMIDIINreceivesdatafromanotherdevice;the
MIDIOUTsendsdatatoanotherdevice;theMIDITHRU
sendstoanotherdeviceexactlywhatwasreceivedonthe
MIDIIN(thisisusefultodaisychainmoreinstruments).
Channels and messages

Basically, a MIDI cable transmits 16 channels of data.
Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel: the
receivermustbesetonthesamechannelofthetrans
mitter. The same happenswith MIDImessages:when
you send a Note On message on channel 1, it will be
received on channel 1 only. This allows for multitim
bricity:youcanhavemorethanonesoundplayingon
thesameMIDIinstrument.
Therearevariousmessages,butherearethemostcom
monlyused:
Note On This message instructs an instrument to
play a note on a specific channel. Notes have both a
name(C4standingforthecenterC)andanumber(60
being the equivalent for C4). A Note Off message is
often used to say the note has been released. In some
case,aNoteOnwithvalue0isusedinstead.
TogetherwiththeNoteOnmessage,aVelocityvalueis
always sent. This value tells the instrumenthow loud
thenotemustplay.
PitchBend(PB)Youcangeneratethismessageacting
on the joystick (X movement). The pitch is translated
upordown.
ProgramChange(PC)WhenyouselectaProgram,a
ProgramChangemessageisgeneratedonthechannel.
Usethismessage,togetherwithControlChange00and
32, to remotely select microARRANGER data from a
sequenceroramasterkeyboard.
Control Change (CC) This is a wide array of mes
sages, controlling most of the instrument parameters.
Someexamples:
CC00, or Bank Select MSB, and CC32, or Bank
SelectLSB.Thismessagepairisused,togetherwith
theProgramChangemessage,toselectaProgram.
CC01, or Modulation. This is the equivalent of
pressingupthejoystick.Avibratoeffectisusually
triggeredon.
CC07,orMasterVolume.Usethiscontrollertoset
thechannelsvolume.
CC10,orPan.Thisonesetsthechannelsposition
onthestereofront.
CC64,orDamperPedal.Usethiscontrollertosim
ulatetheDamperpedal.
Tempo
Tempo is a global MIDI message, that is not tied to a
particularchannel.EachSongincludesTempodata.
Lyrics
LyricsarenonstandardMIDIevents,madetodisplay
text together with the music. microARRANGER can
readmanyoftheavailableLyricsformatonthemarket.
MIDIFILES
Midifiles,orStandardMIDIFiles(SMF),areapractical
way of exchanging songs between different instru
mentsandcomputers.microARRANGERhastheSMF
format as its default song format, so reading a song
fromacomputer,orsavingasongthatacomputersoft
warecanread,isnotaproblematall.
microARRANGERsequencersarecompatiblewiththe
SMF in format 0 (all data in one track; it is the most
common format) and 1 (multitrack). It can read the
SMFinSongPlaymodeandmodify/savetheminSong
mode.ItcansaveaSonginSMF0formatintheBack
ingSequenceorSongmode.
When in Song Play mode, the microARRANGER can
also display SMF lyrics in Solton, MLive (Midisoft),
Tune1000 and compatible (Edirol, GMX, HitBit, XF)
formats,andthechordabbreviationsofSMFinSolton,
Mlive(Midisoft),GMX,andXFformat.
THE GENERAL MIDI STANDARD

Some years ago, the musical instruments world felt a
needforsomefurtherstandardization.Then,theGen
eral MIDI Standard (GM) was born. This extension of
the basic MIDI sets new rules for compatibility
betweeninstruments:
Aminimumof16MIDIchannelswasrequired.
Abasicsetof128Programs,correctlyordered,was
mandatory.
TheDrumKithadastandardorder.
Channel10hadtobedevotedtotheDrumKit.
A most recent extension is the GM2, that further
expands the Programs database. The microAR
RANGERissoundwisecompatiblewiththeGM2stan
dard.
THE GLOBAL CHANNEL

Any channels with the Global option assigned (see
Page6MIDIINChannelsonpage127)cansimulate
themicroARRANGERintegratedkeyboard.Whenthe
microARRANGERisconnectedtoamasterkeyboard,
36
MIDI
The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels
transmissionshouldtakeplaceovertheGlobalchannel
ofthemicroARRANGER.
The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and
notoverastandardchannelareaffectedbythebuttonsof
the KEYBOARD MODE section, as well from the split
point. Therefore, if the SPLIT button LED is lit up, the
notesthatarrivetothemicroARRANGERoverthischan
nelwillbedividedbythesplitpointintotheUpper(above
thesplitpoint)andLower(belowthesplitpoint)parts.
ThenotesthatarrivetoaGlobalchannelareusedfor
thechordrecognitionoftheautomaticaccompaniment.
If the KEYBOARD MODE is SPLIT, only the notes
belowthesplitpointwillbeused.Thesenoteswillbe
combined with the ones of the special Chord 1 and
Chord2channels.
selectedthemostappropriateMIDISetupforthecon
nectiontobemade,youcanmodifytheparametersas
necessaryandsavetheGlobalinthememorywiththe
Writefunction(seeTheWritewindowonpage125).
CONNECTING microARRANGER TO A
MASTER KEYBOARD
You can control the microARRANGER with a master
keyboardoranyotherMIDIkeyboard.Youonlyneed
toconnecttheMIDIOUTconnectorofthemasterkey
boardtotheMIDIINconnectorofthemicroARRANG
ERmicroARRANGER. The master keyboard will
become the integrated keyboard of the microAR
RANGER if it transmits over the same channel pro
grammedasGlobalinthemicroARRANGER.
THE CHORD 1 AND CHORD 2 CHANNELS

YoucansettwospecialChordchannels(seepage128)
to send to the microARRANGER notes for the chord
recognition.Thenoteswillbecombinedwiththenotes
thatgothroughthechannelsetasGlobal(Globalnotes
arerecognizedonlyunderthesplitpoint,iftheSPLIT
LEDislitup).
TheChordchannelsarenotaffectedbythesplitpoint
and the KEYBOARD MODE section of the control
panel. All the notes both above and below the split
pointwillbesenttothechordrecognition.
ThebuttonsoftheCHORDSCANNINGsectionhavea
particulareffectontheChordchannels:
ifyouhaveselectedLOWER,thechordrecognition
modewillbesetbytheChordRecognitionMode
parameterintheStylePlaymode(seepage51);
if you have selected UPPER or FULL, the chord
recognition mode will always be Fingered 2 (you
need to play at least three notes in order for the
chordtobedetected).
Thesetwochannelsareespeciallyusefulforaccordion
players to assign a different Chord channel to the
chordsandthebassplayedwiththelefthand.Inthis
way,chordsandbasswillparticipatetothecreationof
chords for the chord recognition of the automatic
accompaniment.
THE CONTROL CHANNEL

YoucansetaMIDIINchannelastheControlchannel
(seepage128),toselectStylesandPerformancefroman
externaldevice.SeetheAppendixforalistofmessages
correspondingtomicroARRANGERinternaldata.
MIDI SETUP
YoucanplaymicroARRANGERwithanexternalcon
troller,anduseitsimplyasagorgeoussoundgenera
tor.TohelpyouconfiguretheMIDIchannels,wehave
provided a set of MIDI Setups. Go to Global mode to
selecttheonethatfitsyourMIDIneeds.(SeePage4
MIDISetuponpage126formoreinformation).
WerecommendyoutoconsidereachMIDISetupasa
starting point you can freely tweak. Once you have
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
IfthemasterkeyboardtransmitsovertheGlobalchannel
ofthemicroARRANGER,thesplitpointandthestatusof
theKEYBOARDMODEsectioninthecontrolpanelwill
affectthenotesreceivedfromthemasterkeyboard.
Connections and settings

To connect the master keyboard to the microAR
RANGERfollowthisprocedure:
1. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master
keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the micro
ARRANGER.
2. Programthemasterkeyboardtotransmitoverthe
Global channel of the microARRANGER (see
Page6MIDIINChannelsonpage127).
For information on the master keyboard program
ming,seetheusersmanualofthemasterkeyboard.
3. PressGLOBALtoentertheGlobalmode,thengo
toPage4MIDISetup(seepage126).
4. SelecttheMasterKeyboardSetup.
Note:Thesettingscanchangewhennewdataisloaded
fromacard.Toprotectthesettingsfromloading,usethe
Global Protect function (see Global Protect on
page142).
5. Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to
savetheGlobal.TheAreyousure?messagewill
appear.PressENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.
6. PressoneofthebuttonsintheMODEsectiontogo
tothedesiredoperativemode.
MIDI
37
Connecting the microARRANGER to a MIDI accordion
CONNECTING THE microARRANGER TO A

MIDI ACCORDION
There are different types of MIDI accordion and each
typerequiresadifferentconfigurationofthemicroAR
RANGER. Select one of the MIDI Accordion Setups
toconfigurethemoduleproperly(seepage126).
3.
4.
Connection and settings

ToconnecttheaccordiontothemicroARRANGERfol
lowthisprocedure:
1. ConnecttheMIDIOUTconnectoroftheaccordion
to the MIDI IN connector of the microAR
RANGER.
2. PressGLOBALtoentertheGlobalmode,thengo
toPage4MIDISetup(seepage126).
3. SelectoneoftheAccordionSetups.
page142).
4. Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to
5. PressoneofthebuttonsintheMODEsectiontogo
tothedesiredoperativemode.
CONNECTING THE microARRANGER TO AN

EXTERNAL SEQUENCER
YoucanprogramanewSongonanexternalsequencer,
usingmicroARRANGERasamultitimbralexpander.
Connections and settings

In order to connect the microARRANGER to a com
puter, you need to have a computer with the MIDI
interface.
1. ConnectthemicroARRANGERandthecomputer
asinthefollowingdiagram.
MIDI OUT
5.
6.
GotoPage4MIDISetup(seepage126).Select
theExt.SeqSetup.
page142).
Press WRITE, select Global, and press ENTER to
Set the Upper 1 track in play, and press FULL
UPPER in the KEYBOARD MODE section. This
way,youcantransmittotheexternalsequenceron
thefullkeyboardrange.
At this point, the notes played on the Upper 1
track go from the MIDI OUT of the microAR
RANGER to the MIDI IN of the computer/MIDI
interface.
The notes generated by the computer (i.e. a Song
played by its sequencer) are sent thru the MIDI
OUToftheMIDIinterfacetotheMIDIINconnec
torofthemicroARRANGER.
The Local Off

WhenthemicroARRANGERisconnectedtoanexter
nalsequencer,werecommendyoutosetthemicroAR
RANGERinLocalOffmode(seeLocalonpage127)
to avoid that the notes are simultaneously played by
thekeyboardandbytheMIDIeventssentbytheexter
nalsequencer.
WhenthemicroARRANGERisinLocalOff,themicro
ARRANGER keyboard transmits data to the external
sequencer, but not to the internal sound generation.
The sequencer will receive the notes played on the
microARRANGERkeyboard(Upper1)andsendthem
totheselectedtrackofthesong.Thetrackwilltransmit
thedatatotheinternalsoundgenerationofthemicro
ARRANGER.
Note:InordertosenddatatothemicroARRANGERsound
generation,theMIDIThrufunctionmustbeactivatedin
the external sequencer (normally active; the name may be
differentaccordingtothetypeofsequencer).Formoreinfor
mationrefertotheinstructionsmanualofthesequencer.
MIDI IN
The programs
MIDI IN
2.
MIDI OUT
Press GLOBAL, and go to Page 5 MIDI Con

trols. Set the Local parameter to Off (see
page127).
The Song that is played back by the computer

sequencer can select the microARRANGER Programs
throughtheMIDImessagesBankSelectMSBandBank
SelectLSB(bankselection,twomessages)andProgram
Change(programselection).ForalistofProgramsand
MIDIvalues,seePrograms(ProgramChangeorder)
onpage154.
A suggestion for those who program songs on com
puter: Even though it is not essential, you usually set
thebassonchannel2,melodyonchannel4,drumkit
onchannel10,controlforanexternalvoiceharmonizer
onchannel5.
38
MIDI
Playing another instrument with the microARRANGER
PLAYING ANOTHER INSTRUMENT WITH THE

microARRANGER
YoucanusethemicroARRANGERasthemastercon
trollerforyourMIDIsetup.
1. Connect microARRANGERs MIDI OUT to the
otherinstrumentsMIDIIN.
2. Setup the other instruments tracks to the same
channels you want to play from microAR
RANGER. For example, if you wish to play the
Upper1andUpper2trackswiththeotherinstru
ments sound, set the other instrument to receive
onthesamechannelsoftheUpper1andUpper2
tracks(bydefault,channels1and2).
3. Set the general volume of the other instrument
withitsownvolumecontrols.
4. Mute/unmute any track right from the microAR
RANGER front panel. Set each tracks volume
using microARRANGER own VOLUME/VALUE
controls.
5. PlayonmicroARRANGERskeyboard.
Tohearonlytheexpanderssounds,youcanlowerthe
MASTERVOLUMEcontrolonthemicroARRANGER,
or set the Realtime Tracks to the External status (see
Page15Track:Internal/Externalonpage47).
The Sequencer
AnySequencerstrackcandriveachannelonanexter
nal instrument. To set each tracks MIDI output chan
nel,seePage10MIDIOUTChannelsonpage129.
Tohearonlytheexpanderssounds,youcanlowerthe
MASTERVOLUMEcontrolonthemicroARRANGER,
orsettheSongtrackstotheExternalstatus(seePage8
Track:Internal/Externalonpage79).
Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup
(depending on the Sequencer you are using on the
microARRANGER)tosetthechannelsasfollows.
Track
Out Channel
Song 116
116
The Arranger
The Keyboard
microARRANGERsphysicalkeyboardcandriveupto
4 tracks via the MIDI OUT (Upper 13 and Lower).
MIDI output channels are set in Global mode (see
Page10MIDIOUTChannelsonpage129).
As a default situation (Default Setup), each of micro
ARRANGER Realtime Tracks transmit on these chan
nels:
Track
Out Channel
Upper1
Upper2
Upper3
Lower
Whenatrackisinmute,itcanttransmitanyMIDIdata
toanexternalexpanderorsequencerconnectedmicro
ARRANGERsMIDIOUT.
OneofthemostinterestingaspectofMIDI,isthatyou
can use your microARRANGER to play an external
instrumentwithitsonboardarranger.Yes,itshardto
beat the audio quality of microARRANGER, but you
could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still
accustomedto
ToassignsomeofmicroARRANGERStyletrackstoan
externalinstrument,setthemtotheExternalstatus(see
Page15Track:Internal/Externalonpage47).
SelecttheDefaultMIDISetuptosetthechannelsasfol
lows(thisisthedefaultstatusofmicroARRANGER).
Track
Out Channel
Bass
Drums
10
Percussion
11
Acc15
1216
REFERENCE GUIDE
40
Style Play operating mode

Whats a Style?
9. STYLE PLAY OPERATING MODE

The Style Play mode is the bootup operating mode.
Wheninthismode,youcanplayStyles(i.e.automatic
accompaniments), or just play with one to four Real
timetracksonthekeyboard(Upper13andLower).
WHATS A STYLE?
AStyleisarhythm/accompanimentstructure,thatsim
ulatesabandbackingyoursolos.
In a vertical direction, it is composed of 8 different
tracks (Drums, Percussion, Bass, and 5 different har
monic or melodic instruments). You can play on the
keyboardwith4moreRealtimetracks(Upper13and
Lower).
Inahorizontaldirection,itisaseriesofStyleElements
(i.e., the various sets of patterns for each chord and
each of the Intros, Variations, Fills, Breaks and End
ings).
Folder
DIRECT SD pages
*.SET > ST-YLE > USER01
1, 2
*.SET > STYLE > USER02
3, 4
*.SET > STYLE > USER03
5, 6
How to make the DIRECT SD bank

To configure the DIRECT SD bank, save your Styles
into the first folder in the card. Folders are read in
alphabeticalorder.
Note: The following procedures requires you overwrite the
User Style banks. Save these banks before proceeding, to
avoidloosingimportantdata.
1. Insertthecardintothecardslot.
2. PressSDCARDandgototheLoadpage.
STYLES AND PERFORMANCES

StylesandPerformancesarelinkedinmanyways.
WhentheSINGLETOUCHLEDison,selectinga
StylealsochangestheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks
(a Single Touch Setting is selected). The Perfor
mancesettingsareoverridden.
WhentheSTYLECHANGELEDison,selectinga
Performance also selects a Style (the one whose
numberismemorizedwiththePerformance).
When pressing the WRITE button, you can save
thetrackssettingseitherinaPerformance,aStyle
Performance,oraSingleTouchSetting(STS).
3.
4.
5.
UsetheF1(SD)buttontorescantheSDcard.
LoadthreebanksofStyles,tobetransformedinto
theDIRECTSDbank.
GototheSavepage.
CHANGING AND RESETTING THE TEMPO

WhileinthemainpageoftheStylePlaymode,youcan
changetheTempousingtheDIALortheDOWN/and
UP/+buttons.
Inanyotherpage,keeptheSHIFTbuttonpressed,and
usetheDIALtochangetheTempo.
TorecalltheTempostoredinthecurrentStyle,keepthe
SHIFTbuttonpressed,andpressoneoftheDOWN/or
UP/+buttons.
THE DIRECT SD BANK

InadditiontotheinternalmemoryStyles,youcanhave
DIRECTSDStyles,directlyaccessedfromthecard.
Justinsertacard,andpresstheDIRECTSDStylebank.
Thecardslotwillreadthefirst(inalphabeticalorder)
.SET folder in the card, and will give you direct
accesstotheStylesitcontains(noloadingrequired).
BrowsethroughtheDIRECTSDStylesusingthePAGE
buttons. You can have up to 6 pages, and up to 48
DIRECTSDStylesinacard.
6.
WhiletheALLitemisselected,pressF3(OPEN)
toopenit.
7. Use the EF (Scroll Up) and GH (Scroll Down)
VOLUME/VALUEbuttons(ortheTEMPO/VALUE
sectioncontrols)tomovetheSTYLEitemtothe
firstlineofthedisplay,andpressF2(SAVE).
8. SelecttheSDcard(SD)asthetarget,usingtheF1
button.
9. The card directory appears. Use the EF (Scroll
buttons (or the TEMPO/VALUE section controls),
toscrollthecardcontent.Movethefirstfolderof
thedirectorytothefirstlineofthedisplay.
10. PressENTERtwicetosavethebanks.
41
Main page
MAIN PAGE
Thisisthepageyouseeafteryouturntheinstrument
on.
Toaccessthispagefromanotheroperatingmode,press
theSTYLEPLAYbutton.
Note:WhenswitchingfromSongPlaytoStylePlay,aPer
formanceisautomaticallyselected,andvarioustrackparam
etersmaychange.
To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit
pages,presstheEXIT/NObutton.
ToswitchbetweentheRealtime(Keyboard)tracksand
theStyletracks,usetheTRACKSELECTbutton.
Style Play icon
Selected Style
Selected STS or
Performance
press both VOLUME/VALUE buttons. To unmute,

pressbothbuttonsagain.Tochangethevolume,select
thetrack,thenkeeponeofthebuttonspressed.
C (Acc.15 grouped tracks)
Usethesebuttonstoselect,mute/unmuteorchangethe
volume of the instrumental accompaniment tracks
(tracks15,otherthanBass,DrumandPercussion).To
mute these tracks, press both VOLUME/VALUE but
tons. To unmute them, press both buttons again. To
changethevolume,keeponeofthebuttonspressed.
E (Upper 1 Program), F (Upper 2 Program), G (Upper 3
Program), H (Lower Program)
NameoftheProgramsassignedtotheRealtime(Key
board)tracks.Usethesebuttonstoselect,mute/unmute
orchangethevolumeofthecorrespondingtracks.
STYLE TRACKS PAGE

ToseeandedittheStyletracks,pressTRACKSELECT
from the main page. The TRACK SELECT LED turns
on.
Accompaniment (backing) tracks (grouped)

Style Play icon
When on, this icon indicates that the instrument is in

StylePlaymode.
PresstheTRACKSELECTbuttononceagaintogoback
tothemainpage.
Selected Style
AH (Style Track Programs)
CurrentlyselectedStyle.
NameoftheProgramsassignedtotheStyletracks.Use
thesebuttonstoselect,mute/unmuteorchangethevol
umeofthecorrespondingtracks.
Selected STS or Performance
ThelastselectedSingle Touch Setting(STS) orPerfor

mance.
A (Drum/Perc grouped tracks)
Usethesebuttonstoselect,mute/unmuteorchangethe
volumeofbothDrumandPercussiontracks(grouped
together)atthesametime.Tomutethesetracks,press
bothVOLUME/VALUEbuttons.Tounmute,pressboth
buttons again. To change the volume, select the track,
thenkeeponeofthebuttonspressed.
B (Bass track Program name)
Name of the Program assigned to the Bass backing

track. Use these buttons to select, mute/unmute or
changethevolumeoftheBasstrack.Tomutethistrack,
HOW TO SELECT PROGRAMS

YoucanassignadifferentProgramtoeachoftheReal
time(Keyboard)andStyletracks.SeeSelectingaPro
gramonpage25formoreinformation.
AfterselectinganewProgram,saveyourchangesinto
aPerformance,StyleorSTS(seebelowTheWritewin
dowsection).
Note:IfyouselectaProgramwhilegroupedtracks(Drum/
Percussion or ACC) are selected, the Program will be
assignedtothelastselectedtrack.
42
The Write window
THE WRITE WINDOW
MENU
Open this window by pressing the WRITE button.

Here, you can save all track settings into a Perfor
mance, the Realtime (Keyboard) track settings into a
SingleTouchSetting,ortheStyletracksettingsintothe
currentStylePerformance.
From any page, press MENU to open the Style Play

editmenu.ThismenugivesaccesstothevariousStyle
Playeditsections.
When in the menu, select an edit section using the
VOLUME/VALUE (AH) buttons, select an edit page
usingPAGE+,orpressEXITtoexitthemenu.
When in an edit page, press EXIT to go back to the
mainpageoftheStylePlayoperatingmode.
1.
Select the kind of object you want to save your

tracksinto.
SelectthePerfNo.linetosavealltracks(and
the current selected Style settings) into a Perfor
mance. Use the corresponding VOLUME/VALUE
buttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEsectioncontrols,to
select a Performance location in memory. The
nameofthePerformancealreadyatthetargetdes
tinationwillbeshown.
Select the STS No. line to save the Realtime
(Keyboard) tracks into a Single Touch Setting
(STS). Use the corresponding VOLUME/VALUE
buttonsortheTEMPO/VALUEsectioncontrols,to
selectaSingleTouchSettingnumber.
Select the Current Style line, to save the Style
tracksintothecurrentStylePerformance.
If you select
you save
to this location
Performance
All track settings,

selected Style
number, Master
Transpose
Selected Performance
STS
Realtime (Keyboard) track settings
Selected Single Touch

Setting (a part of the current Style)
Current Style
Style track settings,

Master Transpose
Current Style Performance
2.
3.
If you are saving a Performance, you can change

itsname.SelectthePerfnameline.
PressENTERtosavethesettingsinmemory.The
Areyousure?messageappears.PressENTERto
confirm,orEXITtoabort.
Eachiteminthismenucorrespondstoaneditsection.
Eacheditsectiongroupsvariouseditpages.
EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Select an edit section from the Menu, and/or use the
PAGEbuttonstoreachthedesiredpage.
PressEXITtogobacktothemainpageoftheStylePlay
mode.
Alleditpagessharethesamestructure.
Style Play icon
Page header
Page number
Style Play icon

StylePlaymode.
Page header
The header shows the name of the current edit page.

As a general rule, the header is divided into a first
word, identifying the section name (e.g., Mixer:FX
SendisaMixersectionpage),andasecondword,
referringtothepagename(e.g.FXSend).
Section name
Page name
Page number
Thisareashowsthecurrentpagenumber.
AH
EachpairofVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttonsselectsa
different parameter of command, depending on the
43
Page 1 - Mixer: Volume
editpage.Afterselectingaparameter,youcanchange
itsvaluebypressingoneofthetwobuttonsinapair,or
usingtheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
R+63
Off
HardRight.
Thedirect(uneffected)signaldoesnotgo
totheoutputs;onlytheFXsignalisheard
forthistrack.
PAGE 1 - MIXER: VOLUME

ThispageletsyousetthevolumeforeachoftheReal
time(Keyboard)orStyletracks.
UsetheTRACKSELECTbuttontoswitchfromtheReal
time(Keyboard)trackstotheStyletracks,andviceversa.
PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND

This page lets you set the level of the tracks direct
(uneffected)signalgoingtotheInternalFXprocessors.
The effect processors included in microARRANGER
areconnectedinparallel,soyoucandecidewhichper
centageofthedirectsignalshouldbeeffected:
Track
Output
FX Processor
There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play
mode. You can assign them any kind of available
effects,butwefounditconvenienttoarrangethemin
thefollowingway,foralltheStylesincludedwiththe
microARRANGER:
A ReverbprocessorfortheStyletracks.
B ModulatingFXprocessorfortheStyletracks.
C Reverb processor for the Realtime (Keyboard)
tracks.
D Modulating FX processor for the Realtime (Key
board)tracks.
Volume
Tracksvolume.
0127
MIDIvalueofthetracksvolume.
PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN

This page lets you set the pan (position in the stereo
front)foreachtrack.
Toselectaparameterandedititsvalue:
1. UsetheVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttonstoselect
atrack.
2. UsetheF1F4buttonstoselectoneoftheeffect
processors.
3. UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochangethevalue.
Send level
000
Pan
L64
C+00
127
HardLeft.
Center.
Noeffect.Onlythedirect(uneffected)sig
nalgoestotheoutputs.
100% effect. The direct (uneffected) and
effectedsignalsgototheoutputswiththe
samelevel.
44

Page 4 - Tuning: Detune
PAGE 4 - TUNING: DETUNE

Thispageistheplacewhereyoucansetthefinetuning
foreachtrack.
Note
Note in edit, to be detuned. This parameter can be

accessedwhenaUserScaleisselected.
Detune
Notedetune,relativetothestandardEqualtuning.This
parametercanbeaccessedwhenaUserScaleisselected.
PAGE 6 - TUNING: PITCHBEND SENSITIVITY

This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for
theRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
Parameters
Detune
Thisisthefinetuningvalue.
64
Lowestpitch.
00
Standardtuning.
+63
Highestpitch.
PAGE 5 - TUNING: SCALE
TheseparametersshowthePitchBendrangeforeach
track,insemitones.
0112
Maximum up/down pitchbend range (in
semitones).12=1octave.
Off
Nopitchbendallowed.
PAGE 7 - FX: A/B SELECT

This page enables you to select the A and B effects.
Usually,theAeffectisthereverb,andtheBeffectisthe
modulatingeffectfortheStyletracks.
Thispageletsyouprogramthealternativescaleforthe
selected tracks (see Scale Mode on page51). The
remainingtracksusetheScalesetintheGlobalmode
(seeScaleonpage125).
A, B
Scale
Selectedscale.SeeScalesonpage227foralistofthe
availablescales.
Key
ParameterrequiredforsomeScales,whenyoushould
selectapreferredkey.
EffectsassignedtotheAandBeffectprocessors.Usu
ally, A is the reverb, while B is the modulating effect
(chorus, flanger, delay). For a list of the available
effects,seeEffectsonpage175.
ModTrk (Modulating Track)
Source track for modulating MIDI messages. You can

modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message
generatedbyaphysicalcontroller.
B>Asend (B>A Send)
AmountoftheBeffectgoingbacktotheinputoftheA
effect.
45
Page 8 - FX: C/D Select
PAGE 8 - FX: C/D SELECT
PAGE 12 - FX: D EDITING
ThispageletsyouselecttheCandDeffects.Usually,
theCeffectisthereverb,andtheDeffectisthemodu
latingeffectfortheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
This page contains the editing parameters for the D

effect (usually modulating effect for the Realtime
tracks).Formoredetails,see Page9FX:Aediting
above.
Parameters
PAGE 13 - TRACK: EASY EDIT
C, D
EffectsassignedtotheCandDeffectprocessors.Usu
ally, C is the reverb, while D is the modulating effect
In this page you can edit the main parameters of the

Programsassignedtoeachtrack.
Note:AllvaluesarerelativetothevalueoftheoriginalPro
gram.
You can also change the volume for each class of
Drums and Percussion, if the selected track is set in
Drummode(seebelowPage14Track:Mode).

D>Csend (D>C Send)
AmountoftheDeffectgoingbacktotheinputoftheC
effect.
PAGE 9 - FX: A EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the A
effect(usually,reverbfortheStyletracks).
Use the E and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons to scroll

theparameterlist.
Parameters
SeeEffectsonpage175foralistofavailableparame
tersforeacheffecttype.
PAGE 10 - FX: B EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the B
effect (usually modulating effect for the Style tracks).
Formoredetails,seePage9FX:Aeditingabove.
Parameters
PAGE 11 - FX: C EDITING

This page contains the editing parameters for the C
effect(usuallyreverbfortheRealtimetracks).Formore
details,seePage9FX:Aeditingabove.
Parameters
Hereistheeditprocedure:
atrack.
2. Use the F1F4 buttons to select a Program
parameter,oritsvalue.(FortheDrumandPercus
siontracks,seebelowtheDrumtrackssection).
3. Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change the
Programparameteroritsvalue.
Parameters
Attack
Attacktime.Thisisthetimeduringwhich
thesoundgoesfromzero(atthemoment
when you strike a key) to its maximum
level.
Decay
Decay time. Time to go from the final
Attack level to the beginning of the
Release.
Release
Release time. This is the time during
whichthesoundgoesfromthesustaining
(or Decay) phase, to zero. The Release is
triggeredbyreleasingakey.
Cutoff
Filter cutoff. This sets the sound bright
ness.
Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the
width of the frequency range affected by
theFilter.
46

Page 14 - Track: Mode
VibratoRate SpeedoftheVibrato.
VibratoDepth
IntensityoftheVibrato.
VibratoDelay
DelaytimebeforetheVibratobegins,after
thesoundstarts.
Drum tracks
WhenatrackissetinDrumMode(liketheDrumand
Percussiontracks),youcanadjustthevolumeforeach
oftheDrumandPercussioncategories.
KickV
Kickdrumsvolume.
SnareV
Snaredrumsvolume.
TomV
Tomsvolume.
HiHatV
HiHatvolume.
CymbalV Ride,Crashandothercymbalsvolume.
Percus1V
Classicpercussionsetvolume.
Percus2V
Ethnicpercussionsetvolume.
SFXV
Specialeffectsvolume.
Reset
You can reset the parameters value by keeping the
SHIFTbuttonpressed,whilepressingoneoftheselected
track VOLUME/VALUE buttons. After you press the
abovebuttoncombination,theResetwindowappears:
PressENTER/YEStoresetthecurrentlyselectedtrack.
KeepSHIFTpressed,andpressENTER/YES,toresetall
tracks.PressEXIT/NOtoabortandkeepallparameters
unchanged.
PAGE 14 - TRACK: MODE

This page lets you set the polyphony mode for each
track.
Parameters
Drum
ThisisaDrum/Percussiontrack.NoMas
ter or Octave Transpose applies to this
track. You can set a different volume for
each class of percussive instruments (see
Page13Track:Easyeditonpage45).
Poly
Tracks of this kind are polyphonic, i.e.
they can play more than one note at the
sametime.
Mono
Tracks of this kind are monophonic, i.e.
eachnewnotestopsthepreviousnote.
MonoRight AMonotrack,butwithpriorityassigned
totherightmost(highest)note.
47
Page 15 - Track: Internal/External
PAGE 15 - TRACK: INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
PAGE 16 - R.T. CONTROLS: DAMPER
ThispageletsyousettheInternalorExternalstatusfor
eachtrack.ItisveryusefultoletaStyletrackdrivean
externalexpander,or play adigitalpiano withoneof
microARRANGERsRealtimetracks.
Thispageletsyouenable/disabletheDamperpedalfor
eachoftheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
D (Damper)
On
Off
When you press the Damper pedal and

releasethekeys,thetrackssoundiskept
sustained.
The Damper pedal is not active on any
tracksettothisstatus.
E (Expression)
Parameters
Internal
External
The track plays the sounds generated by

theinternalsoundengine.Itdoesnotplay
an external instrument connected to the
MIDIOUT.
The track plays an external instrument
connected to the MIDI OUT. It does not
playtheinternalsounds,thereforesaving
polyphony.
WhenatrackissettoExternal,astrings
of transmitted Control Change and Pro
gramChangedataisshowninsteadofthe
Program name assigned to the track. In
the following example, CC#0 is the Con
trolChange0(BankSelectMSB),CC#32is
theControlChange32(BankSelectLSB),
PCistheProgramChange.
CC#0
Both
CC#32
This parameters allows you to switch the Expression

control on/off on each individual Realtime track. The
Expression control is a relative level control, always
subtractedfromtheVolumevalueofthetrack.
As an example, imagine you have a Piano sound
assigned to Upper 1, and a Strings sound assigned to
Upper2.IfyouturntheExpressionswitchononUpper
2,andoffonUpper1,youcanuseapedaltocontrolonly
theStringsvolume,whilethePianoremainsunchanged.
ToprogramapedalortheAssignableSlidertoactasan
Expression control, see Page 3 Assignable Pedal/
Footswitch, Assignable Slider on page126. You can
onlyassignthisfunctiontoavolumetypepedal,notto
aswitchtypeone.AssigntheKBExpressionoption
tothepedalorAssignableSlider,thenpressWRITEto
savethesettingintotheGlobal.
PAGE 17 - R.T. CONTROLS: JOYSTICK

Thispageletsyouenable/disabletheJoystickforeach
oftheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
PC
The track plays both the internal sounds

and an external instrument connected to
theMIDIOUT.
1. UsetheVOLUME/VALUE(EH)buttonstoselect
atrack.
2. UsetheF3F4buttonstoselecttheXorYparam
eterforthattrack.
status.
48

Page 18 - R.T. controls: Dynamic range
Up1Up3
This enables/disables the left/right movement of the

Joystick(PitchBend,andsometimesthesoundparam
eterscontrol).
Righthand(Upper)tracks.
Off
Thereisnoharmonizationonthistrack.
Normal
This track is included in the harmoniza
tion.
Mute
ThistrackonlyplaystheEnsemblenotes,
butnottheoriginalnote.
This enables/disables the front/rear movement of the

Joystick (Y+: Modulation, and sometimes the sound
parameters control; Y: Various controls, or non
active).
PAGE 18 - R.T. CONTROLS: DYNAMIC RANGE

Thispageletsyouprogramadynamicrangeforeach
oftheRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.Thisisusefultocre
ateasoundmadeofuptothreedynamiclayers,assign
ing each of the Upper tracks to a different dynamic
range.
Asanexample,youmayassigntheEl.Piano1Program
to the Upper 1, and the El.Piano 2 Program to the
Upper 2 track. Then, set Upper 1 to [L=0, H=80], and
Upper 2 to [L=81, H=127]. The El.Piano 1 will play
when playing softer, the El.Piano 2 when playing
louder.
1. UsetheVOLUME/VALUE(EH)buttonstoselect
atrack.
2. UsetheF3F4buttonstoselecttheLorHparam
eterforthattrack.
parametersvalue.
L/H
This parameter pair sets the Lower and Higher

dynamicrangeforthetrack.
0
Lowestvelocityvalue.
127
Highestvelocityvalue.
PAGE 19 - R.T. CONTROLS: ENSEMBLE

This page lets you program the Ensemble function.
This function harmonizes the righthand played mel
odywiththelefthandrecognizedchords.
E(nsemble)
Harmonizationtype.
Duet
Addsasinglenotetothemelody.
Close
Adds a closedposition chord to the mel
ody.
Open1
Adds an openposition chord to the mel
ody.
Open2
As the above, but with a different algo
rhythm.
Block
Blockharmonizationverytypicalofjazz
music.
PowerEnsemble
Addsafifthandanoctavetothemelody,
asheardinhardrock.
FourthsLO Typicalofjazz,thisoptionaddsaperfect
fourthandaminorseventhunderthemel
ody.
FourthsUP As the above, but with notes added over
themelody.
Fifths
ThisaddsaseriesofFifthsbelowtheorig
inalnote.
Octave
Addsoneormoreoctavestothemelody.
Dual
Thisoptionaddstothemelodylineasec
ond note, at a fixed interval set with the
Note parameter. When selecting this
option, a transposition value appears (
24+24semitonestotheoriginalnote).
Brass
TypicalBrasssectionharmonization.
Reed
TypicalReedsectionharmonization.
Trill
Thisoptiontrillsthemelodynote.Youcan
set the trill speed by using the Tempo
parameter(seebelow).
Note: You must play at least two notes with
thisoption!
The played note is repeated in sync with
Repeat
the Tempo parameter (see below). When
playing a chord, only the first note is
repeated.
Echo
As the Repeat option, but with the
repeatednotesfadingawayafterthetime
set with the Feedback parameter (see
below).
Dyn(amics)
Thisparametersetsthevelocitydifferencebetweenthe
righthand melody and the added harmonization
notes.
100
Subtractedvelocityvalue.
Tempo
Note:ThisparameteronlyappearswhentheTrill,Repeator
Echooptionsareselected.
49
Page 20 - Style controls: Drum/Fill
Note value for the Trill, Repeat or Echo Ensemble

options.ThisisinsyncwiththeMetronomeTempo.
Inc/Dec
Feedback
Note:ThisparameteronlyappearswhentheEchooptionis
selected.
Thisparametersetshowmanytimestheoriginalnote/
chordisrepeatedbytheEchooption.
PAGE 20 - STYLE CONTROLS: DRUM/FILL

Inthispageyoucanselectvariousgeneralparameters
fortheStyle.
>1>4
The next higher/lower numbered Varia

tion is selected. When Variation 4 is
reached,anInccommandwillselectVari
ation4again.WhenVariation1isreached,
a Dec command will select Variation 1
again.
FilltoVariation(>1,>2,>3,>4)auto
maticallyselectsoneofthefouravailable
StyleVariationsattheendofthefill.
PAGE 21 - STYLE CONTROLS:

WRAP AROUND / KEYBOARD RANGE
InthispageyoucanprogramtheWrapAroundfunc
tionandtheKeyboardRangefortheStyletracks.
V1V4 Drum Map
The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative

arrangementofpercussiveinstrumentsfortheselected
Drum Kit, without any additional programming. Just
selectaDrumMap, and some percussive instruments
willbereplacedwithdifferentinstruments.
07
DrumMapnumber.Number0isthestan
dardmapping.
Kick D(esignation)
The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick (Bass

Drum)soundwithadifferentKickofthesameDrum
Kit.
Off,13
Kickreplacingtheoriginalone.Offcorre
spondstotheoriginalKick.
Snare D(esignation)
The Snare Designation replaces the original Snare

DrumsoundwithadifferentSnareofthesameDrum
Kit.
Off,13
Snarereplacingtheoriginalone.Offcorre
spondstotheoriginalSnare.
Fill1/2
These parameters set a Variation to be automatically

selectedattheendoftheFill.
Off
ThesameVariation,playingbeforeselect
ingaFill,willbeselectedagain.
1&23&4 The specified Variations will be alterna
tively selected. For example, with the
1&2option,Variation1andVariation2
willbealternativelyselectedaftertheend
oftheFill.
Up/Down The next higher/lower numbered Varia
tionisselected,incycle.AfterVariation4,
an Up command will select Variation 1.
After Variation 1, a Down command will
selectVariation4.
aparameter.
2. Use the F1F4 buttons to move the cursor
betweentheparameteranditsstatusorvalue.
parametersstatusorvalue.
Prog (Program)
This parameter lets you select a different Program,

other than the one recorded into the Style Element
(Variations,Fills,Intros,Endings).
Note: This parameter is automatically set to On each time
youassignaProgramtoanyoftheStyletracks,eitherfrom
thefrontpanelorviaMIDI.
Original
Style tracks always use the original Pro
grams. If you assign a different Program
toaStyletrack,itmayberesettotheorig
inal one when selecting a different Style
Element.
On
YoucanassigndifferentProgramstoeach
Style track, and save them in a Perfor
manceorStylePerformance.Thisbecomes
theonlytracksProgramforallStyleEle
ments.
50

Page 22 - Pads
W (Wrap Around)
Thewraparoundpointisthehighestregisterlimitfor
thebackingtrack.Theaccompanimentpatternswillbe
transposed according to the detected chord. If the
chordistoohigh,theStyletracksmightplayinaregis
ter that is too high, and therefore unnatural. If, how
ever, it reaches the wraparound point, it will be
automaticallytransposedanoctavelower.
The wraparound point can be set for each track in
semitonestepsuptoamaximumof12semitones,rela
tive to the chord root. This value will be the interval
betweenthekeyspecifiedbytheStyleElementandthe
wraparoundpoint.
112
Maximum transposition(in semitones) of
the track, referred to the original key of
thepattern.
KR (Keyboard Range)
This parameter is an on/off switch for the Key Range

parametermemorizedintotheStyle.
Or(iginal) The Keyboard Range is used. When a
track goes over the lower or higher limit
setbythis(hidden)parameter,itistrans
posed, to play into the programmed
range.
Off
NoKeyboardRangeused.
PAGE 23 - PREFERENCES: LOCK

Youcanlockvariousfunctions,toavoidtheycanbe
changedwhenselectingadifferentPerformance,Style
orSingleTouchSetting.
Hint: When turning the instrument on, Performance 1 is

automatically selected. Therefore,if youwish your parame
terstostayunchanged,saveyourpreferreddefaultsettings
into Performance 1 (see The Write window on page42),
andturntheselockson.
Note: These settings are stored in the Global file. After
changingthesesettings,pressWRITEtosavethemintothe
Global. The Write Global window will appear (see The
Writewindowonpage125).
Pads
SoundsorfunctionsassignedtothePads.
Scale
PAGE 22 - PADS
Thispageletsyouselectadifferentsoundorfunction
foreachofthefourPADbuttons.
14
Each of the four PAD buttons. See List of sounds

assignabletothePadsonpage226andListoffunc
tionsassignabletothePadsonpage227.
Note:Functionnamesareprecededbyanasterisk(*)
Volume
VolumeforeachofthefourPadtracks.
Pan
PanforeachofthefourPadtracks.
64
FullyLeft.
00
Centered.
+63
FullyRight.
C Send
Send level to the C Internal FX processor (usually

reverb)foreachofthefourPadtracks.
D Send
SendleveltotheDInternalFXprocessor(usuallymod
ulatingeffect)foreachofthefourPadtracks.
When this lock function is On, the Scale parameter

does not change when selecting a different Perfor
mance,StyleorSingleTouchSetting.
Auto Octave
This lock lets the instrument automatically transpose

the Upper tracks when switching between the FULL
UPPERandtheSPLITKeyboardmodes.
On
When switching to the FULL UPPER or
SPLIT Keyboard Mode, the Upper tracks
transpositionisleftunchanged.
Off
WhenswitchingtotheFULLUPPERKey
board Mode, the Upper tracks Octave
Transposeisautomaticallysetto0.
When switching to the SPLIT Keyboard
Mode,theUppertracksOctaveTranspose
isautomaticallysetto1.
M.Trnsp (Master Transpose)
TheMasterTransposevalueismemorizedintothePer
formanceorStylePerformance.TopreventtheMaster
Transposetobeautomaticallychangedwhenselecting
aStyleorPerformance,thislockshouldbesettoOn.
On
(Default) The lock is engaged. When
selectingaStyleorPerformance,theMas
terTransposewillnotchange.
Off
The lock is turned off. When selecting a
Style or Performance, the Master Trans
pose value may change, according to the
data memorized into the Performance or
StylePerformance.
51
Page 24 - Preferences: controls
PAGE 24 - PREFERENCES: CONTROLS

Inthispageyoucansetvariousgeneralparametersfor
theStyle.
Scale Mode
This parameter determines which tracks will use the

selectedalternativescale(seeScaleonpage44).
Realtimetracks
The scale will only affect the Realtime
(Keyboard)tracks.
Uppertracks
The scale will only affect the Upper 13
Realtime(Keyboard)tracks.
AllTracks The scale will affect all tracks (Realtime,
Style,Pads).
Memory Mode

Chord Recognition Mode
Thisparametersetshowchordsarerecognizedbythe
autoaccompanimentengine.Pleasenotethatwhenin
Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode, the Fingered 3
modeisalwaysselected,andyoumustalwaysplayat
leastthreenotes,toletachordberecognized.
Fingered1 Play one or more notes, according to the
selected Chord Scanning Mode. A full
Major chord will be recognized even if
onlyasinglenoteisplayed.
Fingered2 Youmustalwaysplaythreeormorenotes
for a full chord to be recognized. If you
playjustonenote,aunisonwillbeplayed.
Ifyouplayasuspended5th,asuspended
chord will be played. The full chord will
be recognized when you play three or
morenotes.
Fingered3 Youmustalwaysplaythreeormorenotes
forachordtoberecognized.
OneFinger Youcanalsocomposeachordusingasim
plifiedchordplayingtechnique:
Ifyouplayonlyonenote,aMajorchord
isrecognized.
Playtherootnote,plusawhitekey on
theleft,fora7th.Ex.:C3+B2.
Play the root note, plus a black key on
theleft,foraMinorchord.Ex.:C3+Bb2.
Play the root note, plus a white and a
blackkeyontheleft,foraMinor7th.Ex.:
C3+B2+Bb2.
This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button

works.
Chord
WhenitsLEDison,theMEMORYbutton
keeps the recognized chord in memory.
When its LED is off, the chord is reset
whenraisingthehandfromthekeyboard.
Chord+Lower
keeps the recognized chord in memory,
and keeps the Lower track held until the
next note or chord is played. When its
LEDisoff,thechordisresetwhenraising
the hand from the keyboard, and the
Lowertrackisnotsustained.
Lower
keepstheLowertrackhelduntilthenext
note or chord is played. When off, the
Lowertrackisnotsustainedwhenraising
thehandfromthekeyboard.Thechordis
alwayskeptinmemory.
Velocity Control
SetthisparametertotriggeraFilloraBreaksimplyby
playing louder with your left hand. When playing on
the Lower track with a velocity higher than 95, the
selected Style Element will start. For this function to
work, the SPLIT Keyboard Mode and LOWER Chord
ScanningModemustbeselected.
Off
Thefunctionisturnedoff.
Break,Fill1,Fill2
Whenplayingwithavelocityhigherthan
95 on the Lower track, the selected ele
mentisautomaticallytriggered.
Start/Stop YoucanstartorstoptheStylebyplaying
harderonthekeyboard.
52
Style Record mode

The Styles structure
10. STYLE RECORD MODE

ByenteringtheStyleRecordmode,youcancreateyour
ownStyles,oreditanexistingStyle.
THE STYLES STRUCTURE

The term Style relates with music sequences auto
matically played by the arranger of the microAR
RANGER.AStyleconsistsofapredefined numberof
StyleElements(E)(microARRANGERfeaturestendif
ferentStyleElements:Variation14,Intro12,Fill12,
Ending 12). When playing, these Style Elements can
be selected directly from the control panel, using the
correspondingbuttons.
ToexplaintheStylestructure,wecanuseatreestruc
ture,asshowninthefollowingdiagram:
Pop Ballad
Chord
Variation 1
CV1
Chord Variations (CVs)

Variation 14
Intro 12, Fill 12, Ending 12
CV1 CV6
CV1 CV2
Maj
Drum
Perc
Bass
Acc1
Acc2
Acc3
Acc4
Acc5
CV2
EachStyleElementismadeupofsmallerunits,called
Chord Variations (CV), but not all of them have the
samenumberofCVs.Variations14haveupto6CVs
each,whiletheotherStyleElementshaveonlyupto2
CVs.
Whenyouplayonthechordrecognitionarea(Lower,
UpperorFull,dependingontheChordScanningsec
tiononthecontrolpanel),thearrangerscansthekey
board and determines which chord you are playing.
Then, depending on the selected Style Element, it
determines which Chord Variation (CV) should be
playedforthescannedchord.WhichChordVariation
corresponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the
Style: the Chord Variation Table. Each Style Element
contains a Chord Variation Table, whose prototype is
thefollowing:
6
M7
M7b5
Sus4
Sus2
M7sus4
min
m6
CV3
m7
CV4
m7b5
mM7
CV5
CV6
7b5
7sus4
Variation 2
dim
Variation 3
dimM7
Variation 4
Intro1
aug
aug7
augM7
no 3rd
CV1
CV2
Intro 2
Fill 1
Fill 2
Ending 1
Ending 2
no 3rd, no 5th
After deciding what CV to play, the arranger triggers

therightsequenceforeachtrack.Sinceeachsequence
is written in a particular key (for example, CMajor,
GMajororEmin),thearrangertransposesitaccording
to the scanned chord. Notes in the sequence are care
fully transposed according to the Note Transposition
Tables(NTT),tomakethemworkfinewithallrecog
nizedchords.TheNTTallowsyoutorecordjustsome
Chord Variations, and have all the notes play in the
right place, avoiding dissonances and transposing the
patternnotestothenotesoftherecognizedchord.
Style Record mode
53
Style Import/Export
GoingdeeperintotheStylestructure,wecanseethat
eachChordVariationismadeupofTrackSequences,
andthemicroARRANGERsupports8differenttracks.
DRUM and PERC are used for drum and percussion
sequences, BASS for bass and ACC15 are for accom
paniment sequences (string, guitar, piano or other
accompanimentinstruments).
Justtosummarize,whenyouplayachordonthechord
recognition area, the arranger determines which Style
Element is used, then determines which Chord Varia
tion should be used for the played chord, then Style
sequences for every track of that Chord Variation are
transposed from the original chord to the recognized
chordusingtheNTT,andsooneverytimeyouplaya
chord.
Note:TheBreak andtheCountInarenotStyleElements,
andcannotbeprogrammedbytheuser.Whileinrecord/edit,
theBREAK/COUNTINbuttondoesnotwork.
What to record
RecordingaStyleisamatterofrecordingtracks,inside
aseriesofChordVariations,insideaseriesofStyleEle
ments,insidetheStyleitself.
You dont need to record all Chord Variations for all
StyleElements.Itisoftenonlynecessarytorecordjust
a Chord Variation for each Style Element. Exceptions
are the Intro 1 and Ending 1, where we suggest to
recordbothaMajorandminorChordVariations.
STYLE IMPORT/EXPORT
You can use Korgs Style To Midi application to
exchangeStylesbetweenyourcomputerandthemicro
ARRANGER, through the Standard MIDI File (SMF)
format. The application is freely downloadable from
http://www.korgpa.com/. Please read the included
instructions.
ENTERING THE RECORD MODE

While in the Style Play operating mode, press
RECORD. The following page will appear in the dis
play:
SelectCurrentStyletoeditthecurrentStyle.Ifitis
aFactory Style, you will not be ableto saveit on
the original location; you will select a User Style
instead.
When editing an existing Style, the original Style

Performanceisrecalled,butthefollowingparame
ters are reset to their default values: Drum Map
ping(0),Snare&KickDesignation(Off),Program
(Original),KeyboardRange(Original).Thismeans
that you can hear some differences between the
StyleinplayandthesameStylebeingedited;for
example,resettingtheDrumMappingmayleadto
someinstrumentsreplacement.
AftereditingtheStyle,pleasesaveit(seeExitand
Save/AbortStylebelow).Then,edittheStylePer
formancetoadjustthetrackssettings(Tempo,Vol
ume,Pan,FXSendseepage43andfollowingin
theStylePlayoperatingmodechapter)andsave
itbypressingtheWRITEbutton.
SelectNewStyletostartfromanew,emptyStyle.
AdefaultStylePerformancewillberecalled.When
finished recording, you will save the new Style
ontoaUserStylelocation.
AfterrecordingtheStyle,pleasesaveit(seeExit
andSave/AbortStylebelow).Then,edittheStyle
Performancetoadjustthetrackssettings(Tempo,
Volume,Pan,FXSendseepage43andfollowing
in the Style Play operating mode chapter) and
saveitbypressingtheWRITEbutton.
Note: After a record or edit operation, the Style is
rewritten in memory. When you press START/STOP
there is a delay before you can actually listen to the
Style. This delay is higher with a Style containing
moreMIDIevents.
Note:WhileinRecordmode,allfootswitchesaredis
abled.
LISTENING TO THE STYLE WHILE IN

RECORD/EDIT MODE
WhileyouareinRecord/Editmode,youcanlistento
the selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style,
dependingonthepageyouarein.
To select a Chord Variation, go to the Main page of
the Record/Edit mode (see E (Style Element) and
CV(ChordVariation)onpage55).
WhenyouareintheQuantize,Transpose,Veloc
ity,orDeletepages,youcanlistentotheselected
Chord Variation. Press START/STOP to check
how it works. Press START/STOP again to stop
theplayback.
WhenyouareintheDeleteAll,Copy,StyleEle
ment Controls or Style Control pages, you can
listentothewholeStyle.PressSTART/STOPand
play some chords to do your tests. Select any
Style Element using the control panel buttons
(VARIATION 14, INTRO 12, FILL 12, END
ING 12). Press START/STOP again to stop the
playback.
Note:Whendoingtheabovetests,theFingered3Chord
Scanningmodeisautomaticallyselected.
54
Style Record mode

Exit and Save/Abort Style
EXIT AND SAVE/ABORT STYLE
LIST OF RECORDED EVENTS
When finished editing, you can save your Style in

memory, or abort any change. Press WRITE or
RECORDtogototheWritepage(seeTheWritewin
dowonpage54).
Note: When saving the Style in memory, microAR
RANGERautomaticallycompressesittoreduceitssizeand
savememory.
Hint:Saveoftenwhilerecording,toavoidaccidentallylos
ingyourStyle.
The Style Record mode filters out some events that

maydamagetherightoperationoftheStyle.Hereare
the recorded events, and the most important filtered
outevents.
Control function
CC# (Control Change Number)

Allowed
Note On
Note Off*
THE WRITE WINDOW
Pitch Bend
This page appears when you press the WRITE or

RECORDbuttonwhileinRecordmode.Hereyoucan
savetherecordedoreditedStyleinmemory.
Modulation 1
TosavetheStyletotheinternalmemory,pressthe
A or B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, then press
ENTER.TheAreyousure?messagewillappear.
PressENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.
ToreturntothepreviousStyleRecordpage,leav
ing all untouched and the Style unsaved, press
EXIT.
TodeleteallchangestotheStyle,pressoneofthe
D VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the Abort
command. The Are you sure message? will
appear.PressENTERtoconfirmdeletion,orEXIT
toreturntotheWritepage.
Style name
Use this parameter to change the Styles name. Press

therightAVOLUME/VALUEbuttonto enterediting,
andmodifythenameusingtheUP/DOWNbuttonsto
move the cursor, and the DIAL to select a character.
Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor posi
tion,orDELETEtodeleteit
Modulation 2
Pan
10
Expression
11
CC#12
12
CC#13
13
Damper
64
Filter Resonance
71
Low Pass Filter Cutoff
74
CC#80
80
CC#81
81
CC#82
82
Not allowed
After Touch
Volume
All other Control Change messages
(*) A Note Off will always be inserted at the end of

theChordVariation.
Note: Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded
directlyusingmicroARRANGERintegratedcontrols.
FAST DELETE USING THE CONTROL PANEL

BUTTONS
While in the Main page or the Style Tracks page, you
canusethecontrolpanelbuttonstodeletevariousele
mentsoftheStyle:
DELETE + note
Abort
Whenatrackisselected,youcanusethiskeysequence
to delete a single note or a single percussive instru
ment.
IftheStyleisplaying,thisshortcutdeletestheinstru
ment only while the key is kept pressed, leaving all
othernotesuntouchedwithinthetrack.
SelectthiscommandtodeleteanychangetotheStyle.
DELETE + Track
To (Style number)
Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls, to select a different User Style loca
tioninmemory.
Note:OnlyUserlocationsareavailable.
WhileintheStyleTrackspage,youcandeleteawhole
trackwithasingleshortcut.KeeptheDELETEbutton
pressed, then press one of the VOLUME/VALUE but
tonscorrespondingtothetracktobedeleted.TheAre
you sure? message appear. Press ENTER to confirm,
EXITtoabort.
Style Record mode
55
Main page
MAIN PAGE
After pressing the RECORD button, and selected the
Styletorecord/edit,theMainpageoftheStyleRecord
modeappears.
Style Play icon
Chord
Measure counter
Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in

smallletters(cv:cv1),theChordVariationisempty;whenit
isincapitals(CV:CV1),itisalreadyrecorded
SE:V1V4 Youcanselectoneof6ChordVariationsto
edit.
SE:I1E4 Youcanselectoneof2ChordVariationsto
edit.
R (Recording Mode)
Whenthisiconappearsinthedisplay,youareinStyle
PlayorStyleRecordmode.
This parameters lets you select between the Realtime

andtheSteprecordingmodes.UseoneoftheEVOL
UME/VALUE buttons and the F3 function button to
select this parameter. Change its status using the E
VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the TEMPO/VALUE
controls.
RT
Realtime. This methods allows you to
recordinrealtimeeachpatternoftheStyle.
Stp
Step Record. This method allows you to
enter the events one at a time. See Style
Record procedure below for more infor
mation.
Chord
RL (Recording Length)
While in the Main and Style Tracks page, this area

shows the Original Key/Chord (see Original Key/
Chordonpage56)fortheselectedtrack.
Thisparametersetstherecordinglength(inmeasures)of
theselectedtrack.Itsvalueisalwaysequalto,oradivider
of,theChordVariationLength(seenextparameter).
ThisisnotthetotallengthoftheChordVariation,but
justofthecurrenttrack.Forexample,youmayhavea
ChordVariationeightmeasureslong,withadrumpat
ternrepeatingeachtwomeasures.Ifso,settheCVLen
parameter to 8, and the RecLen parameter to 2
beforestartingrecordingtheDrumtrack.Whensaving
theStyle,orexecutinganyeditoperationontheStyle,
the 2measures pattern will be extended to the full 8
measureslengthoftheChordVariation.
Warning: If you assign CVLen a value lower than
RecLen, the value of RecLen is not immediately
updatedinthedisplay.Therefore,youarestillfreeof
changing the value of CVLen, before the measures
exceedingitsvaluearedeleted(seewarninginCVLen
(ChordVariationLength)below).
However,ifyoupressSTART/STOPtobeginrecording,
therealRecLenvalueischangedtothenewone,evenif
thedisplaystillshowstheoldvalue.
Forexample,youmayhaveCVLen=4andRecLen=4.
IfyousetCVLento2,andpressSTART/STOPtobegin
recording,RecLenisstillshownas4,butitisinreality
set to 2, and recording will cycle for just 2 measures.
After you press START/STOP to stop recording,
RecLenisupdatedto2,andallmeasuresafterthesec
ondmeasurearedeleted.
Style name
Track in record/edit
Style Play icon
Style name
ThisisthenameoftheStyleinrecord/edit.
Measure counter
This counter shows the measure in record. The mea

surerangeisspecifiedbytheRecLenparameter(see
RL(RecordingLength)onpage55).
Track in record/edit
Mosteditinginthiseditmodeareexecutedonasingle
track. While in the main page, the currently selected
track is shown on the upper right area of the display.
The abbreviations are: DR (Drums), PC (Percussion),
BS(Bass),A1A5(Accompaniment15).
To select the track to edit, press TRACK SELECT to
jump tothe Style Tackspage(see Style Tracks page
on page56) and use the VOLUME/VALUE buttons to
selectit.
E (Style Element)
UsetheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselecttheline,
andtheF1buttontoselectthisparameter.
ThisparameterletsyouselecttheStyleElementtoput
in edit. Each Style Element corresponds to one of the
buttonsonthecontrolpanelcarryingthesamename.
Note: When this parameter and the assigned value is in
smallletters(e:v1),theStyleElementisempty;whenitisin
capitals(E:V1),itisalreadyrecorded
V1V4
Variation1toVariation4
I1I2
Intro1toIntro2
F1F2
Fill1toFill2
E1E2
Ending1toEnding2
CV (Chord Variation)
UsetheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselecttheline,
andtheF2buttontoselectthisparameter.Thisparam
eter lets you select the Chord Variation to edit, after
selecting the Style Element this Chord Variation per
tainsto.
CVLen (Chord Variation Length)
This parameter sets the total length (in measures) for

the selected Chord Variation. When playing a Style,
thiswillbethelengthoftheaccompanimentpatternto
becycled,whenthechordcorrespondingtotheChord
Variationisrecognizedonthekeyboard.
Warning: If you reduce the Chord Variation Length
after recording, any measure after the selected length
willbedeleted.BeverycarefulwhensettingtheCVLen
toalowervalueafterrecording!
56
Style Record mode

Style Tracks page
Metro (Metronome)
Thisisthemetronomeheardduringrecording.
Off
Nometronomeclickwillbeheardduring
recording. A onebar precount will be
playedbeforestartingrecording.
On1
Metronome on, with a onebar precount
beforestartingrecording.
On2
Metronome on, with a twobar precount
Resol (Resolution)
Thisparametersetsthequantizationduringrecording.
(1/32)(1/8)
Grid resolution, in musical values. For
example, when you select 1/16, all notes
are moved to the nearest 1/16 division.
When you select 1/8, all notes are moved
tothenearest1/8division.
No quantization
1/16
1/8
Meter
Thisisthemeter(timesignature)oftheStyle.Youcan
edit this parameter only when the Style is empty, i.e.
beforeyoubeginrecordinganything.
VOLUME/VALUEbuttons,tocopytheKeyofthecur
rently selected track to all other tracks of the same
ChordVariation.Thisfunctionisusefultospeeduppat
ternprogramming,andtoavoidhavingdifferenttracks
indifferentkeyswithinthesameChordVariation.
NTT
The Note Transposition Table (NTT) determines how

the arranger will transpose pattern notes, when play
ingachordthatdoesnotexactlymatchtotheoriginal
chord of a Chord Variation. For example, if you only
recordedaChordVariationfortheCMajchord,whena
CMaj7 is recognized on the keyboard the arranger
musttransposesomenotestocreatethemissing7th.
Note:ToconformtoKorgspecifications,itisadvisabletoset
theNTTtoNoTransposeontheIntro1andEnding1.
Root
Therootnote(inCMaj=C)istransposed
tothemissingnotes.
5th
The5thnote(inCMaj=G)istransposedto
themissingnotes.
iSeries
Alloriginalpatternsmustbeprogrammed
on the Maj7 or min7 chords. When
loadingoldKorgiSeriesinstruments,this
optionisautomaticallyselected.
NoTransp Notranspositionapplied.Thepatternwill
alwaysplayasrecorded.Thisisthestan
dard setting of Intro 1 and Ending 1 in
KorgsoriginalStyles.
As recorded with
NTT= Root or 5th
(Key/Chord = CMaj
)
When you play a CM7 When you play a CM7

with NTT= 5th
with NTT= Root
As recorded with
NTT= i-Series
(Key/Chord = CM7
)
When you play a CMaj When you play a CM7

with NTT= i-Series
with NTT= i-Series
Original Key/Chord
This is the tracks original key and chord. Use the D

VOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselecttheline,andtheF
1 and F2 buttons to switch from the key/chord name
andthekey/chordtype(Maj,min).
WheninStylePlaymode,thischordwillbeplayedback
exactlyasitwasrecorded,withoutanyNTTprocessing
(see below). To record just one Chord Variation for a
Style Element, the suggested original key/chord is
maj7.Beverycarefultoplaythe7th+note(i.e.,witha
Cmaj7thkey/chord,theB),toavoidthelackofnotes,
orabadNTTconversionwhenplayingdifferentchords.
Note: To conform to Korg specifications, it is advisable to
recordboththeMajorandminorChordVariationsfor
theIntro1andEnding1StyleElements.
When you select a track, the original key/chord
assigned to the selected track will be activated. All
recorded tracks will play back on that key/chord. For
example,iftheoriginalkey/chordfortheAcc1trackis
A7th,whenselectingtheAcc1tracksalltheremaining
trackswillplayaccordingtotheA7thkey/chord.
Intheaboveexample,youwillrecordtheAcc1trackin
the AMajor key, with notes that will comply with the
A7th chord. This is the pattern that will be recalled
exactlyasitwasrecorded,whenplayinganA7thchord.
CopyingtheKey/Chordvaluetoallothertracksofthe
sameChordVariation.Whileinthispage,youcankeep
theSHIFTbuttonpressed,whilepressingoneofthe[D]
STYLE TRACKS PAGE

While in the main Style Record page, press TRACK
SELECT to jump to this page. Here you can see and
selectanyStyletrack.
Style in record/edit
Style Element-Chord Variation in

record/edit
Style tracks
Style Record mode
57
Step Record page
Program name
Meter
Select a track using the VOLUME/VALUE buttons.

Select a Program using the PROGRAM/PERFOR
MANCEsection.
Whileinthispage,youcansetthetracksvolumeusing
the VOLUME/VALUE buttons. Since the tracks vol
umeismemorizedintheStylePerformanceandnotin
thepattern,thissettingwillnotberecordedandsaved.
However, this will allow youtoplayback louder any
referencetrack,orthetrackyouarerecording.
Meterofthecurrentmeasure.Thisparametercantbe
edited. Youcan setthe Meterinthe Main page of the
Style Record mode, before actually starting recording
(seestep6onpage58formoreinformation).
Track status
Length of the event to be inserted. Use the NOTE

VALUE buttons, on the lower left area of the control
panel,tochangethisvalue.
WhenintheStyleTrackspage,eachtrackcanbeinone
ofthreestatus.
Play
(Visiblestatusicon).Thisstatusisavailable
onlyfornonselectedtracks.Wheninplay,
atrackcanplaybacktherecordedpattern.
Mute
(Hidden status icon). When in this status,
you can play the track on the keyboard,
butyoucantrecordonit.Thisisusefulto
do some preliminary test, before actually
startrecording.
To set a track in mute, first select it, then
press both corresponding VOLUME/
VALUEbuttonstohidethestatusicon.To
set the track in record again, press again
thecorrespondingVOLUME/VALUEbut
tons.
Record
(Flashing status icon). When in this status,
the track is ready to record. Just select a
tracktosetitinrecordstatus.
STEP RECORD PAGE

Access this page from the Main page of the Style
Record mode, by selecting the Stp recording mode
(Rparameter),andpressingSTART/STOP.
Previous event
Event to be inserted
key?
This is a prompt, asking for a note or chord to be

playedon thekeyboard,toenteran eventon thecur
rentstep.
Step value

Dot(.)
Triplet(3)
Notevalue.
Augmentstheselectednotebyonehalfof
itsvalue.
Makestheselectednoteatripletnote.
V (Velocity)
Setthisparameterbeforeenteringanoteorchord.This
willbetheplayingstrength(i.e.,velocityvalue)ofthe
eventtobeinserted.
KBD
Keyboard. You can select this parameter,
by turning all counterclockwise the dial.
When this option is selected, the playing
strength of the played note is recognized
andrecorded.
1127
Velocityvalue.Theeventwillbeinserted
with this velocity value, and the actual
playingstrengthofthenoteplayedonthe
keyboardwillbeignored.
D (Duration)
Relativedurationoftheinsertednote.Thepercentage
isalwaysreferredtothestepvalue.
50%
Staccato.
85%
Ordinaryarticulation.
100%
Legato.
Buttons used in Step Record mode
(a)
TIE button
(b)
Tiesthenotetobeinsertedtothepreviousnote.
REST button
Current position
Step value
Waiting for a keystroke
Insertsarest.
NOTE VALUE buttons
Selectthestepvalue.
(a) section
START/STOP button
Previously inserted event. You may delete this event,

andsetitineditagain,bypressingthe<button.
ExitstheStepRecordmode.
(b) section
Goestothepreviousstep,deletingtheinsertedstep.
Eventtobeinserted.Seethefollowingparametersfor
informationoneachelementofthissection.
>> (Fast Forward)
M (Measure)
Thisisthepositionoftheevent(note,restorchord)to
beinserted.
< (Previous step)
Goestothenextmeasure,andfilltheremainingspace
withrests.
58
Style Record mode

Style Record procedure
STYLE RECORD PROCEDURE

TherearetwodifferentmethodsforrecordingaStyle:
RealtimeandStep.
RealtimeRecordingallowsyoutorecordStylepat
ternsinrealtime.
StepRecordingallowsyoutocreateanewStyleby
enteringthesinglenotesorchordsineachtrack.This
isveryusefulwhentranscribinganexistingscore,or
needingahighergradeofdetail,andisparticularly
suitabletocreatedrumandpercussiontracks.
8.
Atthispoint,ifyouwanttodoaRealtimeRecord
ing go on reading Realtime Record procedure
below.Otherwise,ifyouprefertodoaStepRecord,
jumptoStepRecordprocedureonpage59.
Realtime Record procedure

1. When still in the Main page of the Style Record
mode, press one of the E VOLUME/VALUE but
tons, to select the R parameter. Use these but
tons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols,toselectthe
RT(Realtime)recordingmode.
Preparing to record
1. IfyouliketoeditanexistingStyle,selectthatStyle.
2. Press RECORD to enter the Style Record mode.
You are prompted to select either the Current
Style,oraNewStyle.
2.
Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks

page. Here you can assign the right Program to
each Style track. (For more details, see Style
Trackspageonpage56).
SelectCurrentStyleifyouwanttoeditthecur
rent Style, or make a new Style starting from an
existing one. Select New Style if you want to
startfromscratchwithanemptyStyle.
After you select your preferred option, the Main
pageoftheStyleRecordmodewillappear.
3.
Ifyoulike,youcansetthetempoagainfromthis
page:justusetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
AssignaProgramtoeachtrack,byusingthePRO
GRAM/PERFORMANCEsection.
Ifneeded,settheOctaveTransposeforeachtrack.
Note: The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes
comingfromthekeyboard,andnotfromthearranger.
Selectthetracktoputinrecord.Itsstatusiconwill
beginflashing.
Note: When entering the Record mode, the last
selectedtrackisalreadyinrecord.Whenyoupress
START/STOPafterenteringtheRecordmode,you
canimmediatelystartrecording.
Ifyoulike,youcantryyourpartbeforerecording:
Set the track in mute, by pressing both corre
sponding VOLUME/VALUE buttons; the status
icondisappears.
PressSTART/STOPtoplaybacktheothertracks,
ifalreadyrecorded,andpracticeonthekeyboard.
When you have finished practicing, press
START/STOPtostopthearranger,andunmutethe
trackbypressingbothVOLUME/VALUEbuttons;
thetrackwillbeinrecordagain.
While the status icon is flashing, press START/
STOP to begin recording. Depending on the
Metro(metronome)optionyouselected,a1or
2bars precount may play before the recording
actually begins. When it begins, play freely. The
pattern will last for some measures, according to
theRecLenvalue,thenrestart.
Since the recording will happen in overdub, you
can add notes on any following passage. This is
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
5.
6.
7.
UsetheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,andtheF1
and F2 function keys to select the E (Style Ele
ment)andCV(ChordVariation)parameter.
Note:FormoreinformationontheStyleElementsand
ChordVariations,andtheStylestructureingeneral,see
TheStylesstructureonpage52.
Use the RL (Recording Length) parameter to set
the length (in measures) of the pattern to step
record. Select this parameter using the E VOL
UME/VALUEbuttonsandtheF4functionbutton.
UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstosetthevalue.
Use the Meter parameter to set the Styles meter.
Youcaneditthisparameteronlyifyouselectedthe
NewStyleoptionwhenenteringtheRecordmode.
Set the tempo. Keep the SHIFT button pressed,
andusetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochangethe
tempo.
7.
Style Record mode
59
very useful to record different percussive instru

mentsatanycycleonaDrumorPercussiontrack.
Note: While recording, the tracks Keyboard Range
(seepage68)isignored,andthetrackcanplayoverthe
whole keyboard range. The Local parameter (see
Localonpage127)isalsoautomaticallysettoOn,to
allowplayingonthekeyboard.
8. When finished recording, press START/STOP to
stop the arranger. Select a different track, and go
onrecordingthewholeChordVariation.
Note: You can select a different track only when the
arrangerisnotrunning.
9. When finished recording the Chord Variation,
selectadifferentChordVariationorStyleElement
togoonrecordingthewholeStyle.
10. When finished recording the new Style, press
WRITE or RECORD to save it in memory. The
Writepagewillappear:
2.
Press TRK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks

page. Here you can assign the right Program to
each Style track. (For more details, see Style
Trackspageonpage56).
3.
AssignaProgramtoeachtrack,byusingthePRO
GRAM/PERFORMANCEsection.
Press START/STOP to turn on its LED and enter
theStepRecordpage.(SeeStepRecordpageon
page57formoreinformationoneachparameterof
thispage).
4.
Previous event
(a)
To change the Styles name: press the right A

VOLUME/VALUE button to enter editing, and
modifythenameusingtheUP/DOWNbuttonsto
movethecursor,andtheDIALtoselectacharac
ter.PressINSERTtoinsertacharacteratthecursor
position,orDELETEtodeleteit.
To select a different location in memory, press
oneoftheBVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,thenselect
a location with these buttons or the TEMPO/
VALUEcontrols.
Press ENTER to confirm, or one of the D (Abort)
VOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoabortthesave.The
Areyousure?messagewillappearinthedisplay.
PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.Afterpress
ingENTER,youwillexitfromtheRecordmode.
IfyoupressEXITwhileintheWritepage,youwill
gobacktothepreviousStyleRecordpage,without
anychange.
(b)
Current position
5.
Step Record procedure
6.
1. When still in the Main page of the Style Record

mode, press one of the E VOLUME/VALUE but
tons, to select the R parameter. Use these but
Stprecordingmode.
7.
Step value
Thefirsttwolines(a)arethelatestinsertedevent.
The last two lines (b) are the event currently in
edit,readytobeinserted.
TheEmptyeventmarksthebeginningofthepat
tern,whentherearenoeventsinserted.Itisauto
maticallyinsertedwhenenteringtheRecordmode.
Itwillberemovedwhenaneventisinserted.
TheMaaa.bb.cccparameterin(b)isthecurrent
position. This is the place where the note in edit
willbeinserted.
If you dont want to insert a note at this posi
tion,insertarestinstead,asshowninstep7.
Tojumptothenextmeasure,fillingtheremain
ingbeatswithrests,pressthe>>button.
To change the step value, use the NOTE VALUE
buttons,onthelowerleftareaofthecontrolpanel.
Insertanote,restorchordatthecurrentposition.
To insert a single note, just play it on the key
board.Theinsertednotelengthwillmatchthestep
length. You may change the velocity and relative
duration of the note, by editing the V (Velocity)
and D (Duration) parameters. See V (Velocity)
andD(Duration)onpage57.
60
Style Record mode

Inserting a chord with notes with different velocity

values. You can make the upper or lower note of a
chord,forexample,louderthantheremainingones,to
makethemostimportantnoteemergefromthechord.
Hereishowtoinsertathreenotechord:
1. EdittheVelocityvalueofthefirstnote.
2. Pressthefirstnoteandkeepitpressed.
3. EdittheVelocityvalueofthesecondnote.
4. Pressthesecondnoteandkeepitpressed.
5. EdittheVelocityvalueofthethirdnote.
4. Pressthethirdnote,thenreleaseallnotes.
Inserting a second voice. You can insert passages
where one note is kept pressed, and another voice
movesfreely.
Ex.1:
To insert a rest, just press the REST button. Its

lengthwillmatchthestepvalue.
Totiethenotetobeinsertedtothepreviousone,
presstheTIEbutton.Anotewillbeinserted,tied
to the previous one, with exactly the same name.
Youdontneedtoplayitonthekeyboardagain.
Toinsertachordorasecondvoice,seeChords
andsecondvoicesinStepRecordmodebelow.
8. After inserting a new event, you may go back by
pressing the < button. This will delete the previ
ouslyinsertedevent,andsetthestepineditagain.
9. Whentheendofthepatternisreached,theEnd
Loop (End of Loop) event is shown in the first
two lines of the display (a), and the recording
restartsfromtheM001.01.000position.Anynote
exceeding the pattern length, inserted at its end,
willbereducedtofitthetotallengthofthepattern.
Atthispoint,youmaygoon,insertingnewevents
in overdub mode (the previously inserted events
will not be deleted). This is very useful when
recording adrum orpercussiontrack,whereyou
maywanttorecordthebassdrumonafirstcycle,
thesnaredrumonthesecondcycle,andthehihat
andcymbalsduringthefollowingcycles.
10. When finished recording, press START/STOP to
turnoffitsLED.TheMainpageoftheStyleRecord
modeappears.
Step Time =
On
Off
Release E (continue holding C)
Press E and C
Step Time =
On
Off
Press G
Release G and C
Ex.2:
Step Time =
Step Time =
Tie
When exiting,theRTrecordingmodeisauto
maticallyselected.YoumaypressSTART/STOPto
listentotheStyle.PressSTART/STOPagaintostop
theplayback.
To enter the Step Record mode again, select the
Stprecordingmode,andpressSTART/STOP.
11. From the Main page of the Style Record mode,
pressRECORDtoexittheRecordmode.Youwill
be prompted to assign a new name to the Style,
andselectamemorylocationwheretosaveit.See
The Write window on page54 for information
onhowtosaveaStyle.
On
On
Off
Press C
Press G (continue holding C)
Release G and C
Ex.3:

Step Time =
Step Time =
On
Press F and C
Step Time =
Step Time =
Off
Release F
On
Press G
(continue holding C)
Step Time =
Step Time =
Chords and second voices in Step Record mode

WithmicroARRANGER,youarenotobligedtoinsert
singlenotesinatrack.Thereareseveralwaystoinsert
chordsanddoublevoices.Letslookatsome.
Insertingachord.Whenthekey?promptappearsin
thedisplay,playachordinsteadofa singlenote. The
events name will be the first note of the chord you
pressed,followedbythemarking.
Off
Release G
On
Step Time =
On
Press E
Off
Release D
Press D
Step Time =
Off
Release E and C
Style Record mode
61
Menu
MENU
EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE
From any page of the Style Record mode, press

MENU to open the Style Record edit menu. This
menu gives access to the various Style Record edit
sections.
SelectaneditsectionfromtheMenu,and/orusethe
PressEXITtogobacktothemainpageoftheStyle
Recordmode.
Note:WhiletheStyleisinplay,youcannotaccesstheEdit
sectionpagesfromtheMainpageandtheStyleTrackspage
(seepage55andpage56).Stoptheplaybackbeforepressing
MENU.
Style Play icon
Page header
Page number

VOLUME/VALUE (AH) buttons, select an edit
pageusingPAGE+,orpressEXITtoexitthemenu.
Wheninaneditpage,pressEXITtogobacktothe
main page (or the Style Tracks page) of the Style
Recordmode.
Style Play icon

StylePlaymode.
Page header
Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit sec

tion.Eacheditsectiongroupsvariouseditpages.

Asageneralrule,theheaderisdividedinafirstword,
identifying the section name (e.g., Edit:Quantize is
an Edit section page), and a second word, referring
tothepagename(e.g.Quantize).
Note:WhenswitchingfromtheEditsectionpages(Quan
tize,Transpose,Velocity,Delete)totheotherpages,orvice
versa,theStyle(ifinplay)isautomaticallystopped.
Section name
Page name
Page number
AH
EachpairofVOLUME/VALUE(AH)buttonsselectsa
different parameter of command, depending on the
editpage.Afterselectingaparameter,youcanchange
itsvaluebypressingoneofthetwobuttonsinapair,or
62
Style Record mode

Page 1 - Edit: Quantize
PAGE 1 - EDIT: QUANTIZE
PAGE 2 - EDIT: TRANSPOSE
The quantize function may be used to correct any

rhythm error after recording, or to give the pattern a
groovyfeeling.
Inthispageyoucantransposetheselectedtrack(s).
Note:Aftertransposing,pleasedontforgettoreadjustthe
Original Key/Chord parameter in the Style Record page
(seepage56).
After setting the various parameters, press ENTER to

execute. The Are you sure? message will appear.
PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
E/CV (Style Element/Chord Variation)
(Noneditable)Thesereadonlyparametersshowwhich
Style Element and Chord Variation are currently
selected for editing. See the Main page E (Style Ele
ment) and CV (Chord Variation) parameters on
page55 for information on selecting a different Style
ElementandChordVariation.
Trk (Track)
Usethisparametertoselectatrack.
All
Alltracksselected.
DrumAcc5Selectedtrack.
Resol (Resolution)
This parameter sets the quantization after recording.

Forexample,whenyouselect1/8a,allnotesaremoved
to the nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all
notesaremovedtothenearest1/4division.
No quantization
1/8
1/4

Trk (Track)
All
All tracks selected, apart for tracks set in
Drum mode (like the Drum and Percus
sion tracks). The whole selected Chord
Variationwillbetransposed.
DrumAcc5Singleselectedtrack.
Value
Transpose value (127 semitones).

S / E (Start/End)
Usetheseparameterstosetthestarting(S)andending
(E)pointsoftherangetobetransposed.
If a Chord Variation is four measures long, and you
want to select it all, the Start will be positioned at
1.01.000,andtheEndat5.01.000.
Bottom / Top
(1/32)(1/4)
Gridresolution,inmusicalvalues.Ana
afterthevaluemeansnoswing.Abf
afterthevaluemeansswingquantization.
S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetoquantize.
1.01.000,andtheEndat5.01.000.
Bottom / Top
Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the

keyboardrangetoquantize.Ifyouselectthesamenote
astheBottomandTopparameters,youcanselectasin
glepercussiveinstrumentinaDrumorPercussiontrack.
Note:TheseparametersareavailableonlywhenaDrumor
Percussiontrackisselected.
Usetheseparameterstosetthebottomandtopofthe
keyboardrangetobetransposed.Ifyouselectthesame
noteastheBottomandTopparameters,youcanselect
asinglepercussiveinstrumentinaDrumorPercussion
track.SinceinaDrumKiteachinstrumentisassigned
toadifferentnoteofthescale,transposingapercussive
instrument means assigning the part to a different
instrument.
Style Record mode
63
Page 3 - Edit: Velocity
PAGE 3 - EDIT: VELOCITY
PAGE 4 - EVENT EDIT
In this page you can change the velocity (dynamics)

valueofnotesintheselectedtrack.
TheEventEditpageallowsyoutoediteacheventina
singletrack.SeeEventEditprocedureonpage65for
moreinformationontheeventeditingprocedure.

Trk (Track)
All
All tracks selected. The velocity for all
notes of the whole selected Chord Varia
tionwillbechanged.
Value
Velocity change value (127).

S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetobemodified.
1.01.000,andtheEndat5.01.000.
Bottom / Top
keyboardrangetobemodified.Ifyouselectthesame
asinglepercussiveinstrumentinaDrumorPercussion
track.
Event Type
First value
Second value
Trk (Track)
Trackinedit.Toselectadifferenttrack,pressoneofthe
AVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoopentheGo ToTrack
window.
UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectatrack,and
pressENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.
Selected Style Element and Chord Variation. This

parameter cant be edited. To select a different Style
ElementandChordVariation,pressEXITtogobackto
the Main page of the Style Record mode (see Main
pageonpage55).
Position
Positionoftheeventshowninthedisplay,expressedin
theformaaa.bb.ccc:
aaaisthemeasure
bbisthebeat
cccisthetick(eachquarterbeat=384ticks)
Youcaneditthisparametertomovetheeventtoadif
ferentposition.
Ev (Event)
Type and values of the event shown in the display.

Depending on the selected event, the value may
change. This parameter also shows the (noneditable)
End Loop marking, when the end of a track is
reached.
Event
First value
Second value
Note
Note name
Velocity
Ctrl
Control Change number
Control Change value
Bend
Bending value
Tochangetheeventtype,usetheCVOLUME/VALUE
buttonstoselecttheEventline,thenusethesamebut
tonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectadiffer
enteventtype.
Toselectandedittheeventsvalue,usetheF3andF4
function keys, and use the G/VOLUME/VALUE but
tonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
64
Style Record mode

Page 5 - Event Filter
Length
LengthoftheselectedNoteevent.Thevalueformatis
thesameasthePositionvalue.
Note:Ifyouchangealengthof000.00.000toadifferent
value, you cant go back to the original value. This rather
uncommonzerolengthvaluemaybefoundinsomedrumor
percussiontracks.
PAGE 5 - EVENT FILTER

Thispageiswhereyoucanselecttheeventtypestobe
shownintheEventEditpage.Youcanaccessthispage
by pressing the PAGE+ button, while you are in the
EventEditpage.
Transport, navigation and editing controls

E/F and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons
These buttons are the Scroll to previous event (E/F)

and Scroll to next event (H) controls. They corre
spondstothescrollingarrowsshownonthescreen.
G VOLUME/VALUE buttons
Usethesebuttonstoselectthecorrespondingparame
tervaluearea.
F-3 and F-4 buttons
After selecting the parameter value area with the G

VOLUME/VALUEbuttons,usethesebuttonstoselect,
respectively,thefirstandsecondvalueoftheeventin
edit.
TurnOffthefilterforalleventtypesyouwishtoseein
theEventEditpage.
Note: Some of the events are ghosted, and non editable,
sincethecorrespondingeventsarenoteditableinaStyle.
Note
Notes.
Ctrl
Control Change events. Only the follow
ingControlChangenumbersareallowed.
START/STOP button
PressSTART/STOPandplaysomechordsonthekey
board to test the pattern in edit. Press START/STOP
againtostopthepatternrunning.
Control function
CC# (Control Change Number)
Modulation 1
SHIFT + << or >>
Modulation 2
KeeptheSHIFTbuttonpressedandpressthe<<or>>
buttontoopentheGotoMeasurewindow.
Pan
10
Expression(a)
11
CC#12
12
CC#13
13
Damper
64
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a measure,

thenpressENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.
Filter Resonance
71
Low Pass Filter Cutoff
74
INSERT
CC#80
80
Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the

currentshownPosition.ThedefaultvaluesareType=
Note,Pitch=C4,Velocity=100,Length=192.
After inserting an event, use the C VOLUME/VALUE
buttonstoselect theEventline, and thesame buttons
or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a different
eventtype.
CC#81
81
CC#82
82
DELETE
PresstheDELETEbuttontodeletetheeventshownin
thedisplay.
(a) Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position

(001.01.000). An Expression value is already among the default header
parametersoftheStyleElement.
Bend
PitchBendevents.
Style Record mode
65
Event Edit procedure
EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE

TheEventEditisthepagewhereyoucanediteachsin
gleMIDIeventoftheselectedStyleElement.Youcan,
for example, replace a note with a different one, or
changeitsplayingstrength(i.e.,velocityvalue).Hereis
thegeneraleventeditingprocedure.
1. SelecttheStyletoedit,andpressRECORD.Select
theCurrentStyleoptiontoenterrecording.The
LEDontheRECORDbuttonwillturnon,andthe
MainpageoftheStyleRecordmodewillappear.
Style Element
Chord Variation
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.
3.
UsetheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,andtheF1
and F2 function keys to select the E (Style Ele
ment)andCV(ChordVariation)parameters.
Note:FormoreinformationontheStyleElementsand
ChordVariations,andtheStylestructureingeneral,see
TheStylesstructureonpage52.
Press MENU, and use the VOLUME/VALUE (A
H) buttons to select the Event Edit section. The
EventEditpageappears(seePage4EventEdit
onpage63formoreinformation).
PressPAGEtogobacktotheEventEditpage.
Press the A VOLUME/VALUE button (Trk), to
select the track to edit. The Go To Track window
appears.
UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectatrack,
andpressENTERtoconfirm(orEXITtoabort).
Thelistofeventscontainedintheselectedtrack(in
theStyleElementandChordVariationselectedon
step2)willappearinthedisplay.Thefirststep,or
MeasureStart,iscurrentlyshown.Sinceitcontains
an initialization event, it is not editable and
appears in grey (i.e., written with a ghost
character).
Press one of the H VOLUME VALUE buttons

(ScrollDownarrow),togotothenextstep.Thisis
usuallyanote,thatyoucanedit.
Formoreinformationontheeventtypesandtheir
values,seePage4EventEditonpage63.
10. Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the
Position line. Use these buttons or the TEMPO/
VALUEcontrolstochangetheeventsposition.
Measure
4.
5.
PressSTART/STOPtolistentotheselectedChord
Variation.Ifyoulike,playsomechordsonthekey
board, to test the pattern. Press START/STOP to
stopit.
Press PAGE+ to go to the Event Filter page, and
turnOffthefiltersfortheeventtypesyouwish
toseeinthedisplay(seePage5EventFilteron
page64formoreinformation).
Beat
Tick
11. UsetheCVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectthe
Event line. You may use the C VOLUME/VALUE
buttonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochange
the event type. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE but
tons,andtheF3andF4functionkeystorespec
tively select the first and second value of the
parameter. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE buttons
or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the
selectedvalue.
Event Type
First value
Second value
12. If a Note event is selected, use the D VOLUME/

VALUEbuttonstoselecttheLengthline,anduse
66
Style Record mode

Page 6 - Edit: Delete
thesamebuttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols,
tochangetheeventslength.
Measure
Beat
PAGE 6 - EDIT: DELETE

This page is where you can delete single elements or
MIDIeventsoutoftheStyle.
Tick
After having modified the shown event, you

mayscrolltothenexteventwiththeHVOLUME/
VALUEbuttons(Scrolltonext),ortotheprevious
event with the E/F VOLUME/VALUE buttons
(Scrolltoprevious).
YoumayusetheSHIFT+<<or>>shortcuttogo
toadifferentmeasure(seeSHIFT+<<or>>on
page64)
As described in step 4, you may press START/
STOPandplaysomechordstolistenhowthepat
tern sounds after your changes. Press START/
STOPagaintostopthepatternrunning.
13. Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the
Position shown in the display (a Note event with
default values will be inserted). Use the DELETE
buttontodeletetheeventshowninthedisplay.
14. Whentheeditingiscomplete,youmayselectadif
ferenttrack(gotostep7),oradifferentStyleEle
mentandChordVariation(pressEXITtogoback
totheMainpageoftheStyleRecordmode,thengo
tostep2).
15. When finished editing the whole Style, press
WRITEtoopentheWriteStylepage.

Trk (Track)
All
All tracks selected. After deletion, the
selected Chord Variation will remain
empty.
Ev (Event)
Use the A or E VOLUME/VALUE buttons to

enter the Text Editing mode. Use the UP and
DOWNbuttonstomovethecursor,andthedialto
selectacharacter.
UsetheBVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselecta
target location. The name of the Style already
existingattheselectedlocationisshownafterthe
StyleBankLocationnumber.
Warning: If you select an existing Style and confirm
writing, the older Style is deleted and replaced by the
newone.SavetheStylesyoudontwanttolooseona
card,beforeoverwritingthem.
16. PressENTERtosavetheStyletotheinternalmem
ory, or one of the D VOLUME/VALUE buttons
(Abort) to delete any changes made in Style
Recordmode.WhentheAreyousure?message
appears, press ENTER to confirm, or EXIT to go
backtotheWriteStylepage.
TypeofMIDIeventtodelete.
All
Allevents.Themeasuresarenotremoved
fromtheChordVariation.
Note
Allnotesintheselectedrange.
Dup.Note Allduplicatenotes.Whentwonoteswith
the same pitch are encountered on the
sametick,theonewiththelowestvelocity
isdeleted.
A.Touch
AfterTouchevents.
Note: This kind of data is automatically
removedduringrecording.
P.Bend
PitchBendevents.
PrChange Program Change events, excluding the
bundledControlChange#00(BankSelect
MSB)and#32(BankSelectLSB).
Note: This kind of data is automatically
removedduringrecording.
C.Change All Control Change events, for example
Bank Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft
Pedal
CC00/32CC127
Single Control Change events. Double
Control Change numbers (like 00/32) are
MSB/LSBbundles.
Note: Some CC data are automatically
removed during recording. See the table on
page54 for more information on the allowed
data.
Style Record mode
67
Page 7 - Edit: Delete All
S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetodelete.
1.01.000,andtheEndat5.01.000.
Bottom / Top
PAGE 8 - EDIT: COPY

Here you can copy a track, Chord Variation or Style
ElementinsidethesameStyle,orfromadifferentone.
Furthermore,youcancopyawholeStyle.
Warning: TheCopy operation deletes all data at the target
location(overwrite).
keyboardrangetodelete.Ifyouselectthesamenoteas
theBottomandTopparameters,youcanselectasingle
percussiveinstrumentinaDrumorPercussiontrack.
Note: These parameters are available only when the All or
Noteoptionisselected.
PAGE 7 - EDIT: DELETE ALL

This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style
ElementorChordVariation,orthewholeStyle,reset
tingittothedefaultparametersvalues.

Note:Ifyoucopytoomanyevents onthesametick,the
Toomanyevents!messageappears,andthecopyoperation
isaborted.
Note:WhenyoucopyoveranexistingChordVariation,Pro
gram Change data is not copied, to leave the original Pro
gramsunchangedforthatChordVariation.
Wheninthispage,pressthecorrespondingbuttonon
the control panel to select a Style Element
(VARIATION1ENDING2).

thecontrolpaneltoselectaStyleElement
From Style
Del (Delete)
Use this parameter to select the whole Style, a single

StyleElement,orasingleChordVariation.
All
All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style.
When Del=All and Trk=All, the whole
Styleis deleted,andallparametersset to
thedefaultstatus.
Var1End2 SingleStyleElement.
V1CV1E2CV2
SingleChordVariation.
Trk (Track)
All
All tracks of the selected Style, Style Ele

mentorChordVariation.
DrumAcc5 SingletrackoftheselectedStyle,StyleEle
Use the first parameter to select the source Style to

copythetrack,ChordVariationorStyleElementfrom.
From to Style Element/Chord Variation
Use these parameters to select the source and target

StyleElementsorChordVariations.
Note: You cant copy from a Variation to a different Style
Element(orviceversa),becauseoftheirdifferentstructure.
All
All Style Elements, i.e. the whole Style.
You cant change the target, that is auto
maticallysettoAll.
Var1End2 SingleStyleElement.
V1CV1E2CV2
SingleChordVariation.
From to Track

tracktocopy.
All
All tracks of the selected Style, Style Ele
DrumAcc5 SingletrackoftheselectedStyle,StyleEle
68
Style Record mode

Page 9 - Style Element Controls: Programs
Copying on a Chord Variation with a different

length
You can copy a Chord Element on a different Chord
Elementwithadifferentlength.Justkeepinmindthe
following:
Ifthesourcelengthisadividerofthetargetlength,
thesourceChordVariationwillbemultipliedtofit
the target Chord Variation. For example, if the
source is 4measures long, and the target 8mea
sures,thesourcewillbecopiedtwotimes.
PAGE 10 - STYLE ELEMENT CONTROLS:

EXPRESSION
In this page you can modify the Expression (CC#11)
valueforeachoftheStyletracks.Thisletsyoureduce
the relative level of a track in a single Style Element,
withoutreducingtheoverallVolumeoftheStyle.
Thisisaveryusefulcontrol,whenyouhavedifferent
ProgramsassignedtothesametrackindifferentStyle
Elements, and the internal level of these Programs is
different.
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
If the source length is not a divider of the target

length,thesourceChordVariationwillbecopied
for as many measures as can fit the target Chord
Variation.Forexample,ifthesourceis6measures
long,andthetarget8measures,thesourcewillbe
copiedonce,thenthefist2measureswillbecop
iedtofittheremaining2measures.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
To copy the settings of this page to another Style Ele
ment, keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the
buttonofthetargetStyleElement.
Value
Note:AvoidcopyingonaChordVariationwithadifferent
meter,forexamplea4/4ChordVariationontoa3/4one.
UsethisparametertosettheExpressionvalueforthe
correspondingtrack.

PROGRAMS

KEYBOARD RANGE
InthispageyoucanassignadifferentProgramtoeach
trackoftheselectedStyleElement.EachStyleElement
can have different Programs; after saving the new
Style,pleasedontforgettosettheProgparameterto
Original(seeProg(Program)onpage49),toletthe
Style select the Program bypassing the Style Perfor
mancesettings.
TheKeyboardRangeautomaticallytransposesanypat
ternnotethatwouldotherwiseplaytoohighortoolow
inpitch,comparedtotheoriginalacousticinstrument,
whentransposedbythearranger.Thiswillresultina
more natural sound for each accompaniment instru
ment.
For example, the lower limit for a guitar is E2. If you
play a chord under the E2, the transposed pattern
couldexceedthislimit,andsoundunnatural.ABottom
limitsettoE2fortheguitartrackwillsolvetheprob
lem.
Program
UsethePROGRAM/PERFORMANCEsectiontoassign
aProgramtotheselectedtrack.
Bottom
Top
Note:TheKeyboardRangeisignoredwhilerecording.The
selectedtrackcanplayonthefullrangeofthekeyboard.
Style Record mode
69
Page 12 - Style Element Controls: Chord Variation Table

PAGE 13 - STYLE CONTROLS:

MODE/TENSION
Bottom/Top
In this page you can set the Retrigger mode for the
Styletracks,andactivate/deactivatetheTensionforthe
Accompanimenttracks.
keyboardrangeforthecorrespondingtrack.

CHORD VARIATION TABLE
ThisisthepagewhereyoucanassignaChordVaria
tiontoeachrecognizedchord.Whenachordisrecog
nized, the assigned Chord Variation will be
automatically selected by the arranger to play the
accompaniment.
M (Mode)
EF (Scroll Up), GH (Scroll Down)
Usethesebuttonstoscrolltheavailableparametersin
thedisplay.
Chords / Chord Variation
Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to

eachoftheenlistedchords.
This setting harmonizes the notes of the Bass track or

theAcc15trackstothenewchordwhenthechordis
changed.
Off
Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,thecur
rentnoteswillbestopped.Thetrackwill
remain silent until a new note will be
encounteredinthepattern.
Rt
(Retrigger) The sound will be stopped,
and new notes matching the recognized
chordwillbeplayedback.
Rp
(Repitch) New notes matching the recog
nized chord will be played back, by rep
itching notes already playing. There will
benobreakinthesound.Thisisveryuse
fulonGuitarandBasstracks.
T (Tension)
Tensionaddsnotes(a9th,11thand/or13th)thathave
actually been played to the accompaniment, even if
they havent been written in the Style pattern. This
parameter specifies whether or not the Tension
includedintherecognizedchordwillbeaddedtothe
Acc15tracks.
On
TheTensionwillbeadded.
Off
NoTensionwillbeadded.
70
Song Play operating mode

The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format
11. SONG PLAY OPERATING MODE

TheSongPlayoperatingmodeiswhereyoucanlisten
toSongs(playeddirectlyfromthecard),andplayalong
with the Song on the four Realtime (Keyboard) tracks
(Upper 13, Lower). Since the microARRANGER is
equipped with two onboard sequencers, you can play
twoSongsatthesametime.Thisisveryusefultomix
betweentwoSongsduringaliveperformance.
THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE

FORMAT
ThenativeSongfileformatofthemicroARRANGERis
the Standard MIDI File (SMF), an universal standard
setbyallmanufacturers.Youcanreadthesefileswith
anymusicalinstrumentorcomputer.
A difference could be in the sound played by each
track. If you recorded a Song with the microAR
RANGER(Songmode),usingonlyGeneralMIDIpro
grams, you can play the same Song on virtually any
other musical instrument or computer. If you used
KORG native programs, you cannot reproduce the
samesoundsoninstrumentsfromotherbrands.
When you read SMFs in Song Play mode, there is no
problem reading files made using only General MIDI
sounds. Sounds could be different when playing a
Songmadeonadifferentinstrument:despitethewide
compatibility of microARRANGER with other, non
standardformats,differencesmayarise.
Ifso,gototheSongoperatingmodeandloadtheSMF.
Then, manually reassign the nonmatching Programs,
replacingthemwithsimilarProgramsonthemicroAR
RANGER. Then, save theSMFagain, andyou willbe
abletoplayitinSongPlaymodewiththecorrectPro
grams.
TRANSPORT CONTROLS
Youcanusetheseparatetransportcontrolsforeachof
thetwoonboardsequencers.UsetheSEQ1controlsfor
Sequencer 1, and SEQ2 controls for Sequencer 2. See
SEQUENCERTRANSPORTCONTROLSSEQ1and
SEQ2onpage18formoreinformation).
SELECTING A SONG COMPOSING ITS

PROGRESSIVE NUMBER
Each Song on a card (up to 9,999) has a progressive
number assigned. You can see this number before the
SongsnameintheSongSelectpage.
While in the Main, Song Select, or Lyrics page, the

STYLE section doubles as a numeric keypad. You can
useitforcomposingthe4digitnumbercorresponding
totheSongyouwishtoselect;thefolderselectedinthe
Song Select page will become the current folder. This
way,youcanspeeduptheSongretrieval.
Selecting a Song in the Song Select page

1. OpentheSongSelectpage.
2. Selectthecardandopenthefoldercontainingthe
Songtobeselected.Thisfolderwillbeusedalsoin
theMainandLyricspage.
3. Composethe4digitnumbercorrespondingtothe
Songyouwishtoselect(forexample:iftheSongis
number1043,dial1,0,4,3).
Afterthefourthdigithasbeeninserted,thewindow
automaticallydisappears,andtheSongisselected.
IftheSongnumberisjust1,2or3digitlong,dialthe
number,thenpressENTERtoconfirm(forexample:
iftheSongisnumber52,dial5,2,ENTER).
Note:IfnoSongcorrespondstothedialednumber,the
Songnotavailablemessageappears.Pressanybutton
tomakeitdisappear.
Selecting a Song in the Main page

WhiletheS1orS2fieldisselected,composethenumber
correspondingtotheSongyouwishtoselect.Thecur
rentfolderistheoneselectedintheSongSelectpage.
MIDI CLOCK
Selecting a Song in the Lyrics page
InSongPlaymodetheMIDIClockisalwaysgenerated
bytheinternalsequencer,eveniftheClockparameter
issettoExternal(seeClockonpage127).microAR
RANGERtransmitsonlytheMIDIClockmessagegen
eratedbySequencer1.
Compose the number corresponding to the Song

you wish to select. The current folder is the one
selectedintheSongSelectpage.
SWITCHING BETWEEN SEQUENCERS

DURING EDITING
The microARRANGER is equipped with a double

sequencer.EachSongcanplayamaximumof16tracks,
foratotalof32sequencertracks.
In addition, you can play on the keyboard with four
additionalRealtimetracks(Upper13andLower).You
canedittheVolume,Mutestatus,andProgramselection
forthesetracksonthemainpageoftheSongPlaymode.
When you enter Edit mode, you can edit the selected
sequencers parameters. Go to the main page of Song
Playmode,andselecttheS1(Abuttons)orS2(Bbut
tons) to select the sequencer you wish to edit (see
Mainpageonpage73).
REALTIME AND SEQUENCER TRACKS
71
Master Volume, Sequencer Volume, BALANCE
When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play
mode,theRealtimetracksarethesameastheStylePlay
mode. A quick way to select Programs and Effects for
theRealtimetracksischoosingadifferentPerformance.
WhileinSongPlay,pressG.QUANTIZE.Thefollowing
windowwillappear.
MASTER VOLUME, SEQUENCER VOLUME,

BALANCE
WhiletheMASTERVOLUMEslidercontrolsthegen
eral volume of the instrument, you can use the ACC/
SEQ VOLUME slider to control only the Sequencers
tracksvolume.ThisletsyouadjusttheSequencersvol
ume alone, while the Realtime (Keyboard) tracks are
notaffectedbythisslider.
UsetheBALANCEslidertomixbetweenSequencer1
and Sequencer 2. Move it to the center for the maxi
mumvolumeofbothsequencers.
PressEXITtoexitthiswindow.
Enable
Enables/disablethe quantize.It isautomatically set to

Off each time the instrument is turned on, or when
selectingadifferentSong.
NStart (Note Start)
EFFECTS IN SONG PLAY MODE

The microARRANGER is equipped with four effect
processors,orDSPs(DigitalSignalProcessors).InSong
Playmodeyoucanhavetwoorfoureffectsatthesame
time,dependingonthemidifileyouarereading.
Note:WhenplayingbackaSongthatmakesuseofallfour
effects (AD), you cant edit any parameter devoted to the
effects.Theseparametersappeargreyedoutinthedisplay.
ASongcreatedonthemicroARRANGER(inSong
orBackingSequencemode)canuseupto4effects
(usually 2 reverbs + 2 modulating effects); each
trackmayusetheA/BorC/Dpair.
AStandardMIDIFilewillonlyuse2effects(usu
ally1reverb+1modulatingeffect).Thisletsyou
usetheremaining2effectsfortheRealtimetracks.
Whenusingbothsequencersatthesametime,and
the S2 FX Mode is set to A/B Mode (see
page80),theyonlyusetheA/Bpair,whiletheC/D
pairisreservedtotheRealtime(keyboardtracks).
Whenusingbothsequencersatthesametime,and
the S2 FX Mode is set to C/D Mode (see
page80), Sequencer 1 uses the A/B pair, while
Sequencer2usestheC/Dpair,sharingitwiththe
Realtime(keyboardtracks).
GROOVE QUANTIZE WINDOW

You can apply a realtime groovequantization to
Sequencer1.Groovequantizationisawayofchangingthe
music groove during the playback, moving notes to the
nearestaxisofarhythmicgrid.Pleasefeelfreetoexperi
ment:thisfunctionisagreatsourceofmusicalinvention.
Enables/disablesthequantizationoftheNoteOnevent
(i.e.beginningofthenote).
NDurat (Note Duration)
Enables/disablesthequantizationoftheNoteOffevent
(i.e.thelengthofthenote).
Res (Resolution)
Coarsequantizegrillresolution.Thisparameteristhe
main quantization value, to be varied with the Acc,
SwingandWindowvalues.
(1/32)(1/4)
Grid resolution, in musical values (a 3
afterthevaluemeanstriplet).Forexam
ple, when you select 1/8, all notes are
moved to the nearest 1/8 division. When
you select 1/4, all notes are moved to the
nearest1/4division.
No quantization
1/8
1/4
Acc (Accuracy)
Accuracy percentage of quantize. For example, if

Acc=50, and the note is 20 tics away from the coarse
grid,itismovedtothegridofonly10tics.
0
Noaccuracy.Thequantizeisnotexecuted.
100
Maximum accuracy. The note is moved
exactlyatthegridposition.
Swing
Asymmetryofquantization.Gridaxisaremovedtothe
nearestgridaxis.
0
Evennumbered axis are totally moved
overthepreviousoddnumberedaxis.
50
Axisareperfectlyequidistant.
72

The Write window
100
Evennumbered axis are totally moved

overthefollowingoddnumberedaxis.
Swng=50
Swng=25
Swng=75
Window
Areaofquantizeintervention,borderingthegridaxis.
0
The quantize window corresponds to the
axis.Noquantizationhappens.
100
Thequantizewindowextendstothenear
estwindow;alleventsarequantized.
Win=0
Win=50
the saved Setup is automatically recalled, and all

parametersarereset.
GloballysettingtheInternalFXparametersallows
you, for example, to assign to all Songs a Reverb
suitableforthevenuewhereyouareperforming,
withouthavingtomodifyanyoftheSongs.(This
istrueonlyfornonmicroARRANGER/80Songs).
GloballysettingtheInternal/Externalstatusallows
you, for example, to send the Piano track of all
Songs to a dedicated expander (just set globally
thePianotracktotheExternalmode).
ThePlay/Mutestatusallowsyoutogloballymute
tracksthatyoudontwanttoplayduringashow,
forexamplethemelodytrack.(Thisistureonlyfor
nonmicroARRANGER/80Songs).
For more information on the Internal FX settings for
theSongPlaymode,seePage3Mixer:FXsendA/B
or Page 3 Mixer: FX send C/D, and following, on
page76.
Here is the procedure to save the Seq1+Seq2 Setup in
memory.
1. PressWRITE.TheWritepageappears.
Win=100
THE WRITE WINDOW

You can save onto the internal memory a Seq1+Seq2
Setup. There is a separate Setup for each of the two
onboardsequencers.
This Setup memorizes the Internal FX settings, the
Internal/External status of each track, and the Play/
Mutestatusofeachtrack.WhenanewSongisselected,
2.
Ifyouconfirm,theSetupissavedintotheGlobal.
YoumaythensavethisSetuponthecardtogether
withtheGlobaldata.
73
Main page
MAIN PAGE
Bar number
Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another

operatingmode.
Note: When switching from Style Play to Song Play, the
Song Setup is automatically selected, and various track
parametersmaychange.
Press EXIT/NO to access this page from the Menu or
anyoftheSongPlayeditpages.
ToseetheSongstracks,usetheTRACKSELECTbut
ton to switch from the main page (showing the Real
time tracks), to the other tracks. Pressed a first time,
you will see tracks 18 (enlightened TRACK SELECT
LED); a second press will show tracks 916 (flashing
TRACKSELECTLED);pressedagain,youwillgoback
totheRealtimetracks(TRACKSELECTLEDswitched
off).
Selected Sequencer
Song Play icon
Page header
Measure number
Thiscountershowsthecurrentbarnumberpositionof
theselectedSong.
A (S1:SongName)
Pressedafirsttime(withaSongalreadyselected)this
buttonpairselectsSequencer1.Pressedasecondtime
(orwithnoSongselected),itopenstheSongSelection
page(seeSongSelectpageonpage74),allowingfor
selection of a single Song or a Jukebox file for
Sequencer1.
If you select another Song, while a Song is in play
within the same Sequencer, the new Song will start
playing.
Whilethisparameterisselected,youcanselectaSong
bycomposingitsprogressivenumber(seeSelectinga
Songcomposingitsprogressivenumberonpage70).
B (S2:SongName)
Pressedafirsttime(withaSongalreadyselected)this
buttonpairselectsSequencer2.Pressedasecondtime
(orwithnoSongselected),itopenstheSongSelection
page(seeSongSelectpageonpage74),allowingfor
selectionofasingleSongforSequencer2.
If you select another Song, while a Song is in play
within the same Sequencer, the new Song will start
playing.
Whilethisparameterisselected,youcanselectaSong
bycomposingitsprogressivenumber(seeSelectinga
Songcomposingitsprogressivenumberonpage70).
C (Lyrics)
Song select commands
Song Play icon
Whenon,thisiconshowsthattheinstrumentisinSong
Playmode.
Page header
This line shows the currently selected sequencer, and

the assigned Song (S1:Song Name or S2:Song
Name).
WhennoSongisassignedtothecurrentsequencer,this
line shows only the selected sequencer number (S1:
orS2:,dependingontheselectedsequencer).
When no sequencer or Song is selected, only the No
Songtextappears.
Press either A (S1:) or B (S1:) to switch between
Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2. When one of the
sequencers is selected, the sequencer number is also
shownattherightofthemetronomeTempo.
WhenaJukeboxfileisinplay,itsnameappearsonthe
pageheader.
Selected Sequencer
These indicators show if the currently selected

sequencerisSeq1orSeq2.UsetheAandBVOLUME/
VALUEbuttonstoselectasequencer.
Open the Lyrics page (see The Lyrics page on

page74).Lyricswillbeshownonlyifincludedintothe
selectedSong,andcompatiblewithastandardformat
thatmicroARRANGERcanrecognize.
E (Upper 1 Program), F (Upper 2 Program), G (Upper 3
Program), H (Lower)
NameoftheProgramsassignedtotheRealtime(Key
board)tracks.Usethesebuttonstoselect,mute/unmute
orchangethevolumeofthecorrespondingtracks.
TRACKS 18 PAGE
Toseeandedittracks18,pressTRACKSELECTfrom
themainpage.TheTRACKSELECTLEDturnson.
PresstheTRACKSELECTbuttontwice,togobackto
themainpage.
AH (Tracks 18 Programs)
Name of the Programs assigned to tracks 18. Use

74

Tracks 916 page
TRACKS 916 PAGE

Toseeandedittracks916,pressTRACKSELECTonce
fromtheTracks18page,ortwicefromthemainpage.
TheTRACKSELECTLEDbeginsflashing.
PresstheTRACKSELECTbuttonagain,togobackto
themainpage.
F-1 (SD)
Pressthisbuttonafterreplacingacardinthecardslot.
The new card will be read, and the file list shown on
thedisplaywillbeupdated.
F-2 (SELECT)
Selectstheitemonthefirstlineinthedisplay(Songor
Jukeboxfile).IfaSongisalreadyplaying,itstops,and
the new Song starts playing. You are returned to the
Mainpage.
F-3 (OPEN)
Opens the selected folder (item whose name begins

with ).
F-4 (CLOSE)
Closes the current folder, returning to the parent

(upper)folder.

SONG SELECT PAGE

ThispageappearswhenyoupresseithertheA(S1:)orB
(S2:)buttonwhileyouareinthemainpage.Youcanalso
accesstheSongSelectpagebypressingPAGE+.
PressEXIT(orPAGE)togobacktothemainpageofthe
SongPlayoperatingmode,withoutselectingaSong.
While in this page, select a Song for the selected

Sequencer,oraJukeboxfileforSequencer1.
Note:Thereisaseparateworkingdirectoryforeachonboard
sequencer.
THE LYRICS PAGE

This page shows the lyrics and chord abbreviations
includedinthemidifile(ifany).
Toaccessthispage,selecttheLyricscommand,orpress
PAGE+ twice, from the main page of the Song Play
mode(seeMainpageonpage73).
Chords
Exitfromthisdisplay,andgobacktothemainpageof
theSongPlaymode,bypressingtheEXITbutton.
WhiletheSongisplaying,thetextflowsinthedisplay,
andthechordabbreviations(ifany)willappearonthe
chords area of the display. The lyrics at the current
positionareunderlined:
AC (File, folder)
Movethe.MID,.KARor.JBXfile,orfolder,tobe
selectedtothefirstlineofthedisplay.Toselecta file,
presstheF2(SELECT)button.Toopenafolder,press
theF3(OPEN)button.
The
symbolidentifiesafolder.
EF (Scroll Up)
Scroll the list up. Keep SHIFT pressed and press one of
thesebuttonstojumptothepreviousalphabeticalsection.
A (1)
Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of

Sequencer1.
B (2)
Press this button pair to show Lyrics and Chords of

Sequencer2.
GH (Scroll Down)
PLAYING A JUKEBOX FILE
Scrollthelistdown.KeepSHIFTpressedandpressone
ofthesebuttonstojumptothenextalphabeticalsection.
With Sequencer 1, you can select a Jukebox file (a file

with the .JBX extension) instead of a single Song.
75
Menu
ThisletsyouplayalistofSongswithoutmultipleselec
tions.
Eachitemofthismenucorrespondstoaneditsection.
Eacheditsectiongroupsmanyeditpages.
EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

PressEXITtogobacktothemainpageoftheSongPlay
mode.
Selected Sequencer
Note:TheJukeboxfilecanbeassignedtotheSequencer
1only.
Note: To create a Jukebox file, go to the Jukebox page (see
page79).
Warning:ShouldyoudeleteaSongincludedintotheJuke
box list currently in play, the sequencer will stop, and the
No Song message will appear. At this point, press
SHIFT+>>(Seq1)togotothenextSong,andpressPLAY/
STOPagain.
Song Play icon
Page header
Page number
Transport controls
WhenyouselectaJukeboxfile,Sequencer1transport
controlsareslightlydifferentthanwithsingleSongs.
<<and>> Pressed alone, these buttons are the
RewindandFastForwardcommands.
Keep the SHIFT button pressed,
and press these buttons to scroll to the
previousornextSongintheJukeboxlist.
PAUSE
Pauses the Song at the current position.
Press PAUSE or PLAY/STOP to start the
Songplayingagain.
PLAY/STOP Starts or stops the current Song. When
you stop the Song, the sequencer goes
backtomeasure1ofthecurrentSong.
IftheJukeboxpageisopen,youcanstart
from the Song at the first line of the dis
play.SeePage9Jukeboxonpage79.
MENU
From any page, press MENU to open the Song Play
editmenu.ThismenugivesaccesstothevariousSong
Playeditsections.
Wheninthemenu,selectasectionusingtheVOLUME/
VALUEbuttons,pressPAGE+toselectapage,orpress
EXITtoexitthemenu.
SongPlaymodemainpage.
Song Play icon

SongPlaymode.
Page header

Usually,theheaderisdividedintoafirstword,identi
fying the section name (e.g., Mixer:FX Send is a
Mixersectionpage),andasecondword,referringto
thepagename(e.g.FXSend).
Section name
Page name
Selected Sequencer
These indicators show if the currently selected

sequencerisSeq1orSeq2.GototheMainpageanduse
the A and B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select a
sequencer.
Page
AH
EachpairofVOLUME/VALUEbuttonsselectadiffer
ent parameter of command, depending on the edit
page.
76

PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN
Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16

sequencertracks.PressbothVOLUME/VALUEbutton
tomute/unmutethecorrespondingtrack.
A muted track remains muted even when selecting a
differentSong.
Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between
Songtracks18,Songtracks916,andbackagain.
HereyoucanadjustthepanforeachSongtrack.
Pan
64
+00
+63
Off
HardLeft.
Center.
HardRight.
forthistrack.
PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND A/B

(uneffected) signal going to the A and B Internal FX
processors(usuallyassignedtoSequencer1).
UsetheTRACKSELECTbuttontoswitchfromtracks
18totracks916.
effects (AD), you cant edit any effect parameter. These
parametersappeargreyedoutinthedisplay.
77
Page 3 - Mixer: FX send C/D
Note:WhenyoustoptheSong,orselectadifferentSong,the
defaulteffectsareselectedagain.Youcan,however,stopthe
Song,changetheeffects,thenstarttheSongagain.Editthe
SonginSongmodetopermanentlychangetheeffects.
atrack.
2. Use the F1F4 buttons to select a parameter for
thattrack.
parametersvalue.

This page lets you select the A and B effects. Usually,
theAeffectisareverb,whiletheBeffectisamodulat
ingeffect.
Effects A and B are usually reserved to Sequencer 1.
Youcan,however,createSongsbyusingallfoureffects
inSongmode.DependingonthestatusoftheS2FX
Modeparameter,thiseffectpaircouldbereservedto
Sequencer2,too(seepage80).
Parameters
000
127
samelevel.
PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX SEND C/D

(uneffected) signal going to the C and D Internal FX
processors.
Note: You can access this page only while editing the
Sequencer2,andtheS2FXModeparameterissettoCD
Mode(seepage80).
18totracks916.
A, B

B>Asend (B>A Send)
effect.
atrack.
thattrack.
parametersvalue.
Parameters
000
127
samelevel.
theCeffectisareverb,whiletheDeffectisamodulat
ingeffect.
Effects C and D are usually reserved to Sequencer 2
and the Realtime tracks. You can, however, create
SongsusingallfoureffectsinSongmode.Depending
on the status of the S2 FX Mode parameter,
Sequencer 2 might also use the A/B effect pair (see
page80).
78

Page 5 - FX: A editing
C, D

D>Csend (D>C Send)
effect.

effect(usually,reverbforSequencer1).
Use the EF and GH VOLUME/VALUE button pairs

toscrolltheparameterlist.
UsetheADVOLUMME/VALUEbuttonpairstoselect
andeditaparameter.
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to edit the selected
parameter.
Parameters

effect(usuallymodulatingeffectforSequencer1).For
moredetails,seePage5FX:Aeditingabove.

effect.YoucanaccessthispageonlywhentheS2FX
ModeparameterissettoC/D(seeS2FXModeon
page80).Formoredetails,seePage5FX:Aediting
above.
Note: C and D effects are used also by the Realtime (Key
board)tracks.

effect.YoucanaccessthispageonlywhentheS2FX
ModeparameterissettoC/D(seeS2FXModeon
page80).Formoredetails,seePage5FX:Aediting
above.
Note: C and D effects are used also by the Realtime (Key
board)tracks.

Songtrack.
18totracks916.
Parameters
Drum
track.
Poly
sametime.
Mono
79
Page 8 - Track: Internal/External
PAGE 9 - JUKEBOX
eachtrack.ItisveryusefultoletaSongtrackdrivean
externalexpander.
18totracks916.
TheJukeboxfunctionletsyouplayalistofSongs(127
max), at the simple touch of a button. You can play a
JukeboxfilebyselectingitintheSongSelectpage(see
PlayingaJukeboxfileonpage74),justasifitwasa
normalSong.
Parameters
Internal
External

MIDIOUT.
playtheinternalsounds,thereforesaving
polyphony.
CC#0
Both
CC#32
PC

theMIDIOUT.
In this page, you can create, edit and save a Jukebox

file. If a Jukebox file is already selected into a
Sequencer,youwillenterthispagewiththatfileready
tobeedited.Otherwise, youwillenter thispagewith
anemptyNEW_NAME.JBXfile.
Tocreateanewfile,evenwhenaJukeboxfileisalready
selected, press SHIFT+ F4 (Del), and confirm with
ENTER(seebelowtheF4(Del)paragraph).
WhenyoupressPLAY/STOPfromthispage,theJuke
box playback begins from the currently selected Song
(i.e.,theSongonthefistlineofthedisplay).
F-1 (SAVE)
Press this button to save the Jukebox file to the card.

TheJukeboxSavepageappears,allowingyou tosave
yourfiletothecard.
Note:Youcansaveyour.JBXfileonlyinthesamefolder
astheSongsinthelist.
Youcancreateanewfile,oroverwriteanexistingone.
1. Movetothefirstlineofthedisplaythe.JBXfile
you wanttosave your list into. Select an existing
file if you want to overwrite it. Select the
NEW_NAME.JBXitemtocreateanewfile.
Use the EF (Scroll Up) and GH (Scroll Down)
VOLUME/VALUEbuttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUE
controlstoscrollthelist.
2. If you are making a new file, when the
NEW_NAME.JBXitemisonthefirstlineofthe
display,pressoneoftheAVOLUME/VALUEbut
tons. You are prompted to assign a name to the
selecteditem:
3.
80

Page 10 - Preferences
4.

Whenyouhavefinishedwritinganame,pressF2
(SAVE) to confirm. The Are you sure? message
appears.PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
F-2 (Add)
AddsaSongattheendofthecurrentlist.Youcanadd
upto127Songsinalist.
Note:AJukeboxlistcanincludeonlySongscontainedinthe
samefolder.
F-3 (Ins)
InsertsaSongatthecursorposition(i.e.,thefirstlineof
the display). All subsequent Songs are moved to the
next highernumbered slot. You can add up to 127
Songsinalist.
Note:AJukeboxlistcanincludeonlySongscontainedinthe
samefolder.
F-4 (Del)
ThiscommandletsyoudeletetheSongonthefirstline
ofthedisplay.
Pressed while keeping SHIFT pressed, the
wholeJukeboxlistisdeleted.(Theinstrumentasksfor
aconfirmationwiththeAreyousure?message;press
ENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort).
TheJukeboxfilenamechangestoNEW_NAME.JBX.
PAGE 10 - PREFERENCES
Inthispage,youcansetvariousgeneralparameters.
LinkMeasure
The two sequencers Tempo are linked
together.TheTempodatawrittenintothe
Songs are ignored. Adjust the Tempo
Startoneofthesequencers,bypressingits
own PLAY/STOP control. Then, start the
other sequencer, by pressing the other
PLAY/STOPcontrol;thesecondsequencer
startsatthenextmeasure.
LinkBeat The two sequencers Tempo are linked
together.TheTempodatawrittenintothe
Songs are ignored. Adjust the Tempo
Startoneofthesequencers,bypressingits
own PLAY/STOP control. Then, start the
other sequencer, by pressing the other
PLAY/STOPcontrol;thesecondsequencer
starts at the next beat (quarter or octave,
dependingontheSongsTimeSignature).
S2 FX Mode
This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer

2.Whena4effectsSongisloaded,allfoureffectsare
used,independentlyfromthissetting.
AB
TheAandBeffectpairisused.Sequencer
2sharesitseffectswithSequencer1.
CD
TheCandDeffectpairisused.
Note: When this parameter is set to CD,
Sequencer 2 shares its effects with the Realtime
(Keyboard)tracks,sotheseeffectscanbechanged
eitherselectingaSongforSequencer2,orselect
ingaPerformance(unlessthePerformanceFX
ModeparameterissettoOffseebelow).
Performance FX Mode
UsetheADVOLUME/VALUEbuttonpairstoselecta
parameter.
Note:Youcanalwaysstartbothsequencerssimultaneously.
StartbothsequencerssimultaneouslybykeepingSHIFTheld
downwhilepressingoneofthePLAY/STOPcontrols.
Link Mode
ThetwoonboardSequencerscanworkeachwithadif
ferent Tempo (Off), or use the same Tempo (Link
modes).
Off
The sequencers Tempo are not linked.
EachsequencerusesitsownTempo.
ThisparameterselectstheeffectsmodeforthePerfor
mance.
Off
WhenselectingaPerformance,noeffectis
selected.
CD
ThePerformanceselectstheCandDeffect
pair.
Note:WhenboththisparameterandtheS2
FXModeparameteraresettoCD,Sequencer
2 shares its effects with the Realtime (Key
board) tracks, so these effects can be changed
either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2, or
selectingaPerformance.
81
Saving a list of Songs
SAVING A LIST OF SONGS
How to save a list of Songs contained in a

Jukebox file
How to save a list of Songs contained in a

folder
1. Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play opera

tivemode.
2. ToselectanexistingJukeboxfile,pressoneofthe
A (S1:) VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the
LoadSongpage.
If you are creating a new Jukebox file, press
MENUinstead,selecttheJukeboxpage,andjump
tostep7.
3. Use the F3 (OPEN) and F4 (CLOSE) buttons to
browsethroughthefoldersinsidethecard.
4. Movethefoldersandfilestoselecttothefirstline
ofthedisplay.UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols,or
theEF(ScrollUp)andGH(ScrollDown)VOL
UME/VALUEbuttons.
5. When the Jukebox file you are looking for is
selected,pressF2(SELECT)toselectit.
6. OncetheJukeboxfileisselected,pressMENUand
selecttheJukeboxpage.
7. WhileyouareintheJukeboxpage,pressSHIFT+
F2tosavethelist.
8. A dialog box will appear, asking you to insert a
new card into the card slot. Insert the card, and
Note: When saved, the text file will be named after the
selected Jukebox file. For example, a Jukebox file named
Dummy.jbx will generate a Dummy.txt file. A new,
unnamedJukeboxfilewillgenerateaNew_name.txtfile.If
afilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthecard,itwillbe
overwrittenwithoutwaitingforanyconfirmation.
Thelistwillincludetheprogressivenumberassignedtoeach
Song,filenamesinMSDOSformat(8.3),thetotalnumber
offilesinthelist.
Forthecorrectdisplayandprintingofthelistonapersonal
computer, use a fixed size (i.e., nonproportional) character
inyourtexteditor.
1. Press SONG PLAY to select the Song Play opera

tivemode.
2. PressoneoftheA(S1:)VOLUME/VALUEbutton
toselecttheLoadSongpage.
3. Use the F3 (OPEN) and F4 (CLOSE) buttons to
browsethroughthefoldersinsidethecard.
4. Movethefolderyouarelookingfortothefirstline
ofthedisplay.UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols,or
theEF(ScrollUp)andGH(ScrollDown)VOL
UME/VALUEbuttons.
5. Oncethefolderisselected,pressSHIFT+F2.
6. A dialog box will appear, asking you to insert a
new card into the card slot. Insert the card, and
Note:Thetextfilewillcontainalistof*.mid,*.karand
*.jbx files only (i.e., the files you can select using the
numerickeypadseeSelectingaSongcomposingitspro
gressivenumberonpage70).Foldersanddifferentkindsof
fileswillnotbeincluded.
When saved, the text file will be named after the selected
folder.Forexample,afoldernamedDummywillgenerate
a Dummy.txt file. If a file with the same name already
existsonthecard,itwillbeoverwrittenwithoutwaitingfor
anyconfirmation.Afilecontainingthelistofallvalidfiles
containedintotherootofthecardwillgenerateaRoot.txt
file.
Thelistwillincludetheprogressivenumberassignedtoeach
Song,filenamesinMSDOSformat(8.3),thetotalnumber
offilesinthelist.
Forthecorrectdisplayandprintingofthelistonapersonal
computer, use a fixed size (i.e., nonproportional) character
inyourtexteditor.
Warning:Whilethelistmaycontainmorethan9999files,
you cant select Songs outside the 00019999 range when
usingthenumerickeypad.
82
Backing Sequence operating mode

Transport controls
12. BACKING SEQUENCE OPERATING MODE

TheBackingSequencemodeletsyourecordaliveper
formance with the Styles. The front panel controls
work mostly as in Style Play mode, but here you are
recording what you are playing. After recording, the
result is a new Song made of the Realtime tracks and
theStyletracks.
TRANSPORT CONTROLS
WheninBackingSequencemode,useSEQ1transport
controls (PLAY/STOP, PAUSE). See SEQUENCER
TRANSPORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 on
REALTIME RECORDING MODE

While in Backing Sequence mode, you can record a
new Song in realtime mode (i.e., recording exactly
what you play). Realtime (Keyboard) tracks will be
Song tracks 14, Pads will be Song tracks 58, while
StyletrackswillbeSongtracks916.
1. EntertheBackingSequencemode.
2. PressRECORD.Youwillbepromptedtoselectthe
RealtimeRecordingmode,ortheChord/AccStep
Mode.
THE BACKING SEQUENCE, SONG AND

SONG PLAY MODES
The Backing Sequence and Song modes are linked
together: go to Backing Sequence mode to record a
Song,andswitchtoSongmodetoeditit.
Since they use the same sequencer and memory area,
recording a new Song in Backing Sequence mode
deletestheSongloadedinSongmode.
Note:TheSongiskeptinRAM,sosaveitbeforeturningthe
instrumentoff,oritwillbelost.
Warning:WhenswitchingtoSongPlay,theSongisdeleted,
sinceBackingSequence,SongandSongPlaysharethesame
sequencer (Sequencer 1). The Erase Song? message
appears.PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtostayinBacking
Sequencemode,andavoiddeletingtheSong.
3.
Press one of the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons to

selecttheRealtimeRecordingmode.TheRealtime
Recordingpageappears(seeRealtimeRecording
pageonpage85).
4.
ThelastselectedStyleiscurrentlyselected.Should
itnotbetherightone,selectadifferentStyletostart
recordingwith.(SeeSelectingaStyleonpage26).
The last selected Performance or STS is currently
selected. If you prefer, select a different Perfor
mance or STS. (See Selecting a Performance on
page25, and Selecting a Single Touch Setting
(STS)onpage26).
Select the status of the Backing Sequence tracks,
usingtheG(RT)andH(Ch/Acc)buttonpairs.(RT
stays for Realtime/Keyboard; Ch/Acc stays for
Chord/Accompaniment, i.e. the Style tracks). To
recordallyouplayonthekeyboard,plustheauto
matic accompaniment, leave their status to REC
(seeRealtimeRecordingpageonpage85).
Warning:TrackssettoRECareautomaticallydeleted
when starting recording. Set a track to the PLAY sta
tus, when you dont want to delete it. For example, if
you are recording a Realtime (Keyboard) part on and
existingStyletrack,settheCh/AccparametertoPLAY,
andtheRTtracktoREC.
Start recording by pressing the left PLAY/STOP
button(ortheSTART/STOPbutton).Afteracount
in(seeMetro(Metronome)onpage85),youcan
startrecording.
HOW TO PLAYBACK A SONG

You can load a Standard MIDI File, and play it back
whileinBackingSequencemode.
Note:WhenintheMainpage(BackingSequencePlay)the
keyboarddoesntplay.
1. Enter the Backing Sequence mode. The Backing
SequencePlaybackpageappears(seepage83).
5.
6.
2.
3.
4.
PressoneoftheB(LoadSong)VOLUME/VALUE
buttonstoloadaSong(seeLoadSongpageon
page84). You can load any Standard Midi File
(fileswiththe.MIDor.KARextension).
PressPLAY/STOPtostarttheplayback.
PressPLAY/STOPagaintostoptheplayback.The
playbackisautomaticallystoppedattheendofthe
Song.
7.
83
Chord/Acc Step recording
Playasolointro,orstarttheautoaccompaniment
with the START/STOP button. To start with the
Style playing right from bar 1, keep the chord
pressed during the precount, and press START/
STOP before the end of the precount. Otherwise,
the Style will start playingfrom thenext bar,fol
lowingtheonewhereyoupressedSTART/STOP.
SinceyoucanuseanyStylecontrol,youcouldstartwith
the usual combinations (INTRO, ENDING, FILL see
PlayingaStyle(AutomaticAccompaniment)on
Note: While in Backing Sequence mode, you cant
recordtheSYNCHRO,FADEIN/OUT,TAPTEMPO/
RESET,ACCOMPANIMENTVOLUMEcontrols.
8. Playyourmusic.YoucanevenstoptheStylebypress
ingSTART/STOP.Ifyou stoptheStylewhile record
ing,startitagainwiththeSTART/STOPbutton.
9. Whenfinishedrecordingyourperformance,press
the left PLAY/STOP button. The RECORD LED
willturnoff,andyouwillgobacktothePlayback
page(seeHowtoplaybackaSongbefore).
TherecordedSongwillbeautomaticallyconverted
totheStandardMIDIFileformat.
10. Atthispoint,youcanedittheSonginSongmode
(seeSongoperatingmodeonpage88),orsaveit
toacard(seeSaveSongpageonpage84).
Warning: The recorded Song is in RAM (Random
AccessMemory),andwillbedeletedwhenturningthe
instrument off, or entering Record again (either in
BackingSequenceorSongmode).SavetheSongtothe
card,ifyouwishtopreserveit.
CHORD/ACC STEP RECORDING

While in the Backing Sequence operative mode, you
canentertheChord/AccStepModetocreateoreditthe
Style (Chord/Acc) part of a Song. This mode lets you
enterchordsevenifyouarenotakeyboardplayer,or
fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style
controls,duringtheRealtimeRecordingmode.
You can edit only Songs created on the microAR
RANGER,Pa50,Pa60orPa80(BackingSequencemode),
providedthatyouhavethesameStylesinthesameloca
tions. When saving a Song created in Backing Sequence
mode,allChord/Accdataispreserved,andcanbeloaded
later,tobeeditedusingtheChord/AccStepMode.
Here is how to enter the Chord/Acc Step Mode, and
executeyourediting:
1. PressB.SEQtoentertheBackingSequencemode.
2. PressRECORD.Youwillbepromptedtoselectthe
Realtime Recording mode or the Chord/Acc Step
Mode.
3.
Press one of the B (Chord/Acc Step Mode) VOL

UME/VALUEbuttonstoentertheStepMode.The
Chord/Acc Step modepage appears(see Chord/
AccStepRecordingpageonpage85).
4.
SelecttheM(easure)parameter,andgotoadiffer
ent position into the Song, using the TEMPO/
VALUEcontrols,ortheAVOLUME/VALUE but
tons.Alternatively,youcanmovethelocatorusing
the<>and<<>>buttons.SeeTransportcontrols
onpage87.
Selecttheparametertypetoinsert,editordeleteat
thecurrentposition.Ifanarrow( )appearsnextto
aparameter,theshowneventhasbeeninsertedat
thecurrentposition.
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the
selectedevent.DeleteitusingtheDELETEbutton.
When editing a parameter without the arrow ( )
nexttoit,aneweventisinserted.
Exit the Chord/Acc Step Mode by pressing the
RECORDbutton.
PressSTART/STOPtolistentotheresultsofyour
editing.Iftheyarefine,savetheBackingSequence
onacard.
5.
6.
7.
8.
MAIN PAGE (BACKING SEQUENCE PLAY)

ThisisthemainpageoftheBackingSequencemode.
Toaccessthispagefromanotheroperatingmode,press
theB.SEQbutton.
Note:Wheninthispage,thekeyboarddoesntplay.
Backing Sequence icon
Page header
Backing Sequence icon

BackingSequencemode.
Page header
ThisheadershowsthenameoftheselectedSong.
B (Load Song)
Use these buttons to select a Song (i.e., a Standard

MIDI File). The Song Select page opens, and you can
selectaSong(seebelowLoadSongpage).
84

Load Song page
C (Save Song)
ThiscommandsavestherecordedSongasaStandard
MIDIFile.Thefileisautomaticallyaddedthe.MID
extension.Afterpressingthiscommand,theSaveSong
pageappears(seeSaveSongpageonpage84).
D (Select Tempo)
Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE sec

tiontoselecttheTempo.Whenyouselectthisparame
ter,theVALUELEDturnsoff.
F (Metro)
Usethesebuttonstoturnthemetronomeon/offduring
playback.
G (Meter)
This noneditable parameter shows the starting meter

(ortimesignature)oftheselectedSong.
H (Tempo mode)
ThissetstheTempochangemode.
Man(ual)
When the cursor is on the D (Select
Tempo) parameter, you can change the
Tempo using the TEMPO/VALUE section
controls. The Song will be played back
usingthemanuallyselectedtempo.
Auto
TheTemporecordedintotheSongwillbe
usedinstead.
The new card will be read, and the file list shown on the
display will be updated.
F-2 (LOAD)
LoadtheSongatthefirstlineofthedisplay.
F-3 (OPEN)
Openstheselectedfolder(filewhosenamebeginswith
the symbol).
F-4 (CLOSE)

(upper)folder.
SAVE SONG PAGE

The recorded Song is contained in RAM, and is lost
whenturningtheinstrumentoff.TheSongisalsolost
when you overwrite it in Record mode, or when
switching to the Song Play mode. You must save to a
cardanySongyouwishtopreserve.
1. If you are in Record mode (RECORD LED on),
stopthesequencerandpressRECORDtogoback
totheBackingSequencePlaybackpage.
2. Select the Save Song button. The Save Song page
appears.
LOAD SONG PAGE

ThispageappearswhenyoupressPAGE+oreitherthe
B(LoadSong)buttonswhileyouareinthemainpage.
PressEXITtogobacktothemainpageoftheBacking
Sequenceoperatingmode,withoutselectingaSong.
3.
4.
AC (File, folder)
Movethefileorfoldertobeselectedtothefirstlineof
thedisplay.Toselectafile,presstheF2(SELECT)but
ton.Toopenafolder,presstheF3(OPEN)button.
The
5.
EF (Scroll Up)
Scrollthelistup.KeepSHIFTpressedandpressoneof
thesebuttonstojumptothepreviousalphabeticalsec
tion.
GH (Scroll Down)
of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical sec
tion.
TEMPO/VALUE section
Thesecontrolsscrollthelistupordown.
F-1 (SD)
Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot.
6.
pressingF4(CLOSE).
Whenintheselectedfolder,youcansavetheSong
overanexistingfile,orcreateanewfile.
Tooverwriteanexistingfile,moveittothefirst
lineofthedisplay.
Tocreateanewfile,movetheNEW_NAME.MID
85
Realtime Recording page
REALTIME RECORDING PAGE

While you are in Backing Sequence mode, press
RECORD, then one of the A VOLUME/VALUE but
tons, to access the Realtime Recording mode. The
RECORDLEDturnson.
Metro (Metronome)
This parameter sets the metronome mode during

recording.
Off
Themetronomecanbeheardonlyduring
theprecount.
On1
The metronome plays during recording.
Recording begins with a 1bar precount.
Startrecordingafterbar1.
On2
The metronome plays during recording.
Recording begins with a 2bar precount.
Startrecordingafterbar1.
RT/Pads
Ch/Acc
Style
This noneditable parameter shows the selected Style.

IfnoStyleisselected,thenamewillbeempty.Youcan
select a different Style, using the STYLE section (see
SelectingaStyleonpage26).
Theseparametersletyoudecidethetrackstatusduring
recording.
RT/Pads: This Backing Sequence track includes the
four Realtime (Keyboard) tracks, and the four Pads.
TheywillbeSongtracks18,asinthefollowingtable:
RT/Pad track
Song track/Channel
This noneditable parameters shows the remaining

recordingspaceinmemory,asapercentage.
Upper 1
Upper 2
Perf or STS (Performance or STS)
Upper 3
Lower
Pad 1
Pad 2
Pad 3
Pad 4
099%
ThisnoneditableparametershowstheselectedPerfor
manceorSTS(dependingonthelastitemselected).If
no Performance or STS is selected, the name will be
empty. You can select a different Performance, using
the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE section (see Select
ing a Performance on page25). To select one of the
fourSTSforthecurrentStyle,usetheF1F4buttons.
Resol (Resolution)
Use this parameter to set the quantization during

recording. Quantization is a way of correcting timing
errors;notesplayedtoosoonortoolateraremovedto
the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid, set with this
parameter,thusplayingperfectlyintime.
Hi
Noquantizationapplied.
(1/32)(1/8)
example,whenyouselect1/8,allnotesare
moved to the nearest 1/8 division. When
you select 1/4, all notes are moved to the
nearest1/4division.
Hi (no quantization)
1/16
1/8
Sel.Tempo (Select Tempo)

Ch/Acc:ThisBackingSequencetrackincludesallStyle
tracks,includingrecognizedchords.TheywillbeSong
tracks916.
MUTE
The track is muted. If this tracks has
alreadybeenrecorded,itwillnotbeheard
during recording of the other Backing
Sequencetrack.
PLAY
The track is in play. If there are recorded
data,theywillbeheardduringrecording
oftheotherBackingSequencetrack.
REC
The track is in record. All previously
recordeddatawillbedeleted.
CHORD/ACC STEP RECORDING PAGE

While you are in Backing Sequence mode, press
RECORD,thenoneoftheBVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,
to access the Chord/Acc Step Recording mode. The
RECORDLEDturnson.
86

Chord/Acc Step Recording page
Side arrow ( )
The small arrow next to a parameter means that its

valueiseffectiveatthecurrentposition.Forexample,if
you are at the M003.01.000 position, and an arrow
lightsupnexttotheChordparameter,thismeansthat
achordchangehappensattheM003.01.000position.
M(easure)
Thisisthelocator.Itshowsthecurrentpositionofthe
Step Editor. To go to a different position within the
Song, select this parameter, then use the TEMPO/
VALUE controls, the A VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or
the<>buttons(whilethe<<>>buttonsletyoumoveto
thepreviousorfollowingmeasure).Whenusingoneof
these controls, the locator moves in steps of 1/8 (192
ticks),orjumpstothenextevent.
Thelocatorsformatisasfollows:
the current position appears next to it,

press DELETE to delete the Tempo
Changeatthecurrentposition.
Note: If the side arrow doesnt appear, the
eventwasnotselectedatthecurrentposition,
andwillnotbedeleted.
SHIFT+DELETE
When the Tempo parameter is selected,
press SHIFT + DELETE to delete all
Tempo Change events, starting from the
currentpositiontotheendoftheSong.To
delete all Tempo Change events in the
Song,gobacktotheM001.01.000position,
andpressSHIFT+DELETE.
Note: All events on the very first tick
(M001.01.000),likePerf,Style,Tempo,Chord,
StyleElementselection,cannotbedeleted.
Style
Measure:Measureorbarnumber.
Beat:DividerintheTimeSignatureratio(e.g.,aquar
terina3/4time).
Tick: Minimal sequencers resolution. The microAR
RANGER internal sequencers feature a resolution of
384ticksperquarter.
INSERT
When the Measure parameter is selected,
pressINSERTtoinsertameasurestarting
from the current position. All Chord/Acc
eventscontainedintothecurrentmeasure
will be moved to the following measure.
TheeventattheMxxx.xx.000position(i.e.,
exactly at the beginning of the measure,
likeaTimeSignatureorStylechange)will
notbemoved.
DELETE
press DELETE to delete the current mea
sure. All Chord/Acc event contained into
the following measures are moved to the
currentmeasure.
SHIFT+DELETE
pressSHIFT+DELETEtodeleteallevents
in the Style tracks, starting from the cur
rent position to the end of the Song. To
delete all events in the Style tracks, go
back to the M001.01.000 position, and
pressSHIFT+DELETE.
(M001.01.000), like Style, Tempo, Chord,
StyleElementselection,cannotbedeleted.
ThisisthelastselectedStyle.ToinsertaStylechangeat
thecurrentposition,followthestandardselectingpro
cedureusingthebuttonsoftheSTYLEsection.
Note:AnyStyleChangeinsertedafterthebeginningofthe
measure(i.e.,toapositionotherthanMxxx.01.000)willbe
effective at the following measure. For example, if a Style
ChangeeventhasbeeninsertedatM004.03.000,theselected
StylewillbeeffectivelyselectedatM005.01.000.(Thisworks
exactlyasinStylePlaymode).
Note:WheninsertingaStyleChange,youmayalsoinserta
TempoChangeatthesameposition.AStyleChangewillnot
automaticallyinserttheStylesTempo.
DELETE
WhentheStyleparameterisselected,and
the side arrow ( ) showing that a Style
Changeeventhasbeenselectedatthecur
rent position appears next to it, press
DELETEtodeletetheStyleChangeatthe
currentposition.
SHIFT+DELETE
When the Style parameter is selected,
pressSHIFT+DELETEtodeleteallStyle
Change events, starting from the current
positiontotheendoftheSong.Todelete
all Style Change events in the Song, go
back to the M001.01.000 position, and
pressSHIFT+DELETE.
(M001.01.000), like Perf, Style, Tempo,
Chord, Style Element selection, cannot be
deleted.
Tempo
Perf
ThisistheTempoChangeparameter.ToinsertaTempo
Changeeventatthecurrentposition,selectthisparam
eterandusetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochangeits
value.
DELETE
When the Tempo parameter is selected,
and the side arrow ( ) showing that a
TempoChangeeventhasbeenselectedat
This is the last selected Performance. Select a Perfor

mancetorecalltheStyleitmemorizes.ToinsertaPer
formance change at the current position, follow the
standard selecting procedure using the buttons of the
PROGRAM/PERFORMANCEsection.
Note:TheSTYLECHANGELEDisautomaticallyturned
onwhenenteringtheChord/AccStepMode.Thismeansthat
Measure
Beat
Tick
87
How to delete a whole Song
selectingaPerformanceautomaticallyselectstheStylemem
orizedintothePerformance.
The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically
disabled,meaningthatyoucantchangetheRealtime(Key
board)trackswhileinChord/AccStepMode.
When the Perf parameter is selected, and
DELETE
thesidearrow( )showingthataPerfor
manceChangeeventhasbeenselectedat
the current position appears next to it,
press DELETE to delete the Performance
Changeatthecurrentposition.
SHIFT+DELETE
WhenthePerfparameterisselected,press
SHIFT + DELETE to delete all Perfor
mance Change events, starting from the
currentpositiontotheendoftheSong.To
deleteallPerformanceChangeeventsin
theSong,gobacktotheM001.01.000posi
tion,andpressSHIFT+DELETE.
(M001.01.000), like Perf, Style, Tempo,
Chord, Style Element selection, cannot be
deleted.
SE (Style Element)
ThisistheStyleElement(i.e.,aVariation,Fill,Intro,or
Ending). The length of the selected Style Element is
alwaysshownonthemeasurecounter,atthetopofthe
display:
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the

selected parameter. You can also play a chord, and it
willbe automaticallyrecognized. While recognizing a
chord,thestatusoftheBASSINV.buttonwillbecon
sidered.
No chord means that the accompaniment will not
play at the current position (apart for the Drum and
Percussion tracks). To select the No chord option,
pressF1toselecttheNamepartoftheChord,thenuse
theTEMPO/VALUEsectiontoselecttheverylastvalue
(CB,Off).
Note: If you replace a chord with a different one, please
remember that the Lower track will not be automatically
changed.
Transport controls
WhileinStepMode,youcanusevariouscontrolpanel
buttonstoaccomplishtheeditingprocedure.
<< or >> (Rewind or Fast Forward)
Usethesebuttonstomovetothepreviousorfollowing
measure. These commands are effective even if the
M(easure)parameterisnotselected.
< or > (Previous or Next Step)
Usethesebuttontogotothepreviousornextstep(1/8,
or192ticks).Ifaneventislocatedbeforetheprevious
ornextstep,thelocatorstopsonthatevent.Forexam
ple,ifyouarepositionedonM001.01.000,andnoevent
exists before M001.01.192, the > button moves to the
M001.01.192location.IfaneventexistsonM001.01.010,
the>buttonstopstotheM001.01.010location.
These commands are effective even if the M(easure)
parameterisnotselected.
+ < or > (Previous or Next Event)
This will let you know where to place the following

StyleElementChange.Forexample,ifyouinsertedan
Intro event lasting for 4 measures, you can insert 4
emptymeasureafterthisevent,andaVariation event
attheendoftheIntro,beginningatthe4themptymea
sure.
Off means that the accompaniment will not play at
the selected position only the Realtime tracks will
play.
Hint: Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the
autoaccompanimentmuststop,attheendoftheSong.
Chord
Use the D VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the

Chordline.UsetheF1F4buttonstoselectthepartof
thechordyouwishtoedit.
Name
Type
Tension
Extension
KeeptheSHIFTbuttonpressedwhilepressingthe<or
> button, to move to the previous or next recorded
event.
HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG

YoucandeleteawholeSongwiththesimpleSHIFT+
DELETEbuttonsequence.
1. EntertheBackingSequencemode.Youmustbein
the main page of the mode. If you are in Record
mode,gobacktothePlaybackmode.
2. PressSHIFT+DELETE.
3. The Delete Song? message appears. Press
ENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
88
Song operating mode

Transport controls
13. SONG OPERATING MODE

TheSongoperatingmodeisthefullfeaturedonboard
sequencer,whereyoucancreatefromscratchoredita
Song. You can also use this mode to edit the initial
parametersofaStandardMIDIFile,eithermadewith
anexternalsequencerorwithmicroARRANGERown
SongandBackingSequencemodes.
YoucansavetheeditedSongasaStandardMIDIFile
(.MIDfile),andplaybackiteitherinSongPlay,Back
ingSequenceorSongmode.
ForapracticalexampleofSongediting,seeEditinga
Songonpage32.
TRANSPORT CONTROLS
While in Song mode, use the SEQ1 transport controls
for the Song playback. See SEQUENCER TRANS
PORT CONTROLS SEQ1 and SEQ2 on page18 for
moreinformation).
MAIN PAGE
PressSONGtoaccessthispagefromanotheroperating
mode.
Note: When switching from Style Play to Song, the Song
Setupisautomaticallyselected,andvarioustrackparameters
maychange.
Press EXIT/NO to access this page from the Menu or
anyoftheSongPlayeditpages.
ToseetheSongstracks,usetheTRKSELECTbuttonto
switchfromtheMainpagetotheTrackspages.Pressed
a first time, you will see tracks 18 (enlightened TRK
SELECT LED); a second press will show tracks 916
(flashingTRKSELECTLED);pressedagain,youwillgo
backtotheMainpage(TRKSELECTLEDswitchedoff).
Song icon
Page header
Bar number
MASTER VOLUME AND SEQUENCER VOLUME

You can use the MASTER VOLUME and ACC/SEQ
VOLUME sliders to set the volume. See Master Vol
ume,SequencerVolume,BALANCEonpage71.
MovetheBALANCEslidertothecenter(ortheleft)for
the maximum volume of the sequencer (Song mode
reliesonSequencer1).
Song icon
THE SONGS AND THE STANDARD MIDI FILE

FORMAT
Whenon,thisiconshowsthattheinstrumentisinSong
mode.
The native Song format for microARRANGER is the

StandardMIDIFile.SeeTheSongsandtheStandard
MIDIFileformatonpage70.
When saving a Song as a SMF, an empty measure in
automaticallyinsertedtothebeginningoftheSong.This
measurecontainsvariousSonginitializationparameters.
WhenaSMFisloaded,theemptymeasureisautomati
callyremoved.
ThislineshowstheselectedSongname.
FAST TRACK DELETION

When you are in the Main page of the Song Record
mode, and the Song tracks are shown in the display,
keeptheDELETEbuttonpressed,andpressoneofthe
VOLUME/VALUE buttons corresponding to the track
to delete. The Are you sure? message will appear.
PressENTERtodeletethetrack,orEXITtoabort.
HOW TO DELETE A WHOLE SONG

WhileintheMainpage,youcandeleteawholeSong,
withthesimpleSHIFT+DELETEbuttonsequence.
1. Enter the Song mode. You must be in the Main
page of the mode. If you are in Record mode, go
backtothePlaybackmode.
2. PressSHIFT+DELETE.
3. The Delete Song? message appears. Press
ENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
Page header
Bar number
Thiscountershowsthecurrentbarnumberpositionof
theselectedSong.
B (Load Song)
Use these buttons to select a Song (i.e., a Standard

MIDI File). The Song Select page opens, and you can
selectaSong(seebelowSongSelectpage).
C (Save Song)
This command saves the edited Song as a Standard

MIDIFile.Afterpressingthiscommand,theSaveSong
pageappears(seeSaveSongpageonpage90).
D (Select Tempo)

Note: The tempo is always record in overwrite mode (old
dataisreplacedbythenewdata).
F (Metro)
Usethesebuttonstoturnthemetronomeon/offduring
playback.
G (Meter)
This noneditable parameter shows the starting meter

(ortimesignature)oftheselectedSong.
H (Tempo mode)
ThissetstheTempochangemode.
Song operating mode
89
Tracks 18 page
Man(ual)
Auto
When the cursor is on the D (Select

Tempo) parameter, you can change the
Tempo using the TEMPO/VALUE section
controls. The Song will be played back
usingthemanuallyselectedtempo.
The Tempo recorded to the Song will be
used.
SONG SELECT PAGE

ThispageappearswhenyoupressPAGE+oreitherthe
B(LoadSong)buttonswhileyouareinthemainpage.
Press EXIT to go back to the Main page of the Song
operatingmode,withoutselectingaSong.
TRACKS 18 PAGE
Toseeandedittracks18,pressTRACKSELECTfrom
themainpage.TheTRACKSELECTLEDturnson.
PresstheTRACKSELECTbuttontwice,togobackto
themainpage.
AC (File, folder)
Movethefileorfoldertobeselectedtothefirstlineof
thedisplay.Toselectafile,presstheF2(LOAD)but
ton.Toopenafolder,presstheF3(OPEN)button.
The
EF (Scroll Up)
Scrollthelistup.

GH (Scroll Down)
Scrollthelistdown.
TEMPO/VALUE section
F-1 (SD)
TRACKS 916 PAGE

Toseeandedittracks916,pressTRACKSELECTonce
fromtheTracks18page,ortwicefromthemainpage.
TheTRACKSELECTLEDbeginsflashing.
PresstheTRACKSELECTbuttonagain,togobackto
themainpage.
Press this button after replacing a card in the card slot.

The new card will be read, and the file list shown on the
display will be updated.
F-2 (LOAD)
LoadtheSongatthefirstlineofthedisplay.
F-3 (OPEN)
Openstheselectedfolder(filewhosenamebeginswith
the symbol).
F-4 (CLOSE)

(upper)folder.

90
Song operating mode

Save Song page
SAVE SONG PAGE
Master Transpose saved with the Song
The new or edited Song is contained in RAM, and is

lostwhenturningtheinstrumentoff.TheSongisalso
lostwhenyouoverwriteitinBackingSequenceRecord
mode,orwhenswitchingtotheSongPlaymode.You
mustsavetoacardanySongyouwishtopreserve.The
SongissavedasaStandardMIDIFile(SMF).
Note:WhensavingaSongasaSMF,anemptymeasurein
automatically inserted to the beginning of the Song. This
measurecontainsvariousSonginitializationparameters.
1. Ifyouareinaneditpage,pressEXITtogobackto
theMainpage.
2. Select the Save Song button. The Save Song page
appears.
When saving a Song, the Master Transpose value is

saved with the Song. Since this value is saved as Sys
temExclusivedata,itispreservedwhenplayingback
theSonginSongPlaymode.
Hint:SincetheMasterTransposeisaglobalparameter,load
ingaSongwithanonstandardtranspositionmayresultin
unwantedtransposingwhenloadingotherSongsthatdonot
containtheirowntranspositiondata.TotransposeaSongit
is advisable to use the EditTranspose function; you can
accessthisfunctionbypressingtheMENUbuttonandone
of the E VOLUME/VALUE buttons (see Page 18 Edit:
Transposeonpage100).
YoumayalsolocktheMasterTransposeforvarioustracks,to
avoidunwantedtransposition.SeePage2MasterTrans
poseonpage126oftheGlobalchapter.
As a general rule, you should use the Master Transpose
(TRANSPOSEbuttonsonthecontrolpanel)whenyouneed
totransposetheRealtimetrackstogetherwiththeSong.You
should use the EditTranspose function (Song Edit mode)
whenonlytheSonghastobetransposed.
Note: The Master Transpose value is always shown in the
upperrightcornerofthedisplay:
3.
4.
5.
6.
pressingF4(CLOSE).
Whenintheselectedfolder,youcansavetheSong
over an existing midifile (a file with a .MID
extension),orcreateanewmidifile.
Tooverwriteanexistingmidifile,moveittothe
firstlineofthedisplay.
Tocreateanewmidifile,movethe
NEW_NAME.MIDitemtothefirstlineofthe
display.
arepromptedtoassignanametothenewfile:
Play/Mute status saved with the Song

When saving a Song, the Play/Mute status is saved
with the Song. This status is preserved when playing
backthesameSonginSongPlaymode.
REALTIME RECORD PROCEDURE

Here is the general procedure to follow for the Real
timeRecording.
1. PressSONGtoentertheSongmode.
2. Press RECORD to enter the Song Record
mode.You are now in the Main page of the Song
Record mode, and you can prepare your record
ing.(Formoredetails,seeSongRecordpageon
page92).
3.
4.
Be sure one of the Overdub or Overwrite record

ing options is selected (see Rec (Record mode)
onpage92).
Set the tempo. There are two ways of changing
tempo:
Keep the SHIFT button pressed, and use the
TEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochangethetempo.
Move the cursor to the Sel.Tempo parameter,
and use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to change
tempo.
Song operating mode
91
Step Record procedure
5.
PressTRKSELECTtoswitchtotheSongTracks1
8page.
STEP RECORD PROCEDURE

The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by
enteringthesinglenotesorchordsineachtrack.Thisis
very useful when transcribing an existing score, or
needing a higher grade of detail, and is particularly
suitabletocreatedrumandpercussiontracks.
1. WhileintheMainscreenoftheSongmode,press
RECORD to enter the Song Record mode. The
MainpageoftheSongRecordmodewillappear.
PressthebuttonagaintoswitchtotheSongTracks
916page.
2.
6.
Ifyoulike,youcansetthetempoagainfromthese
pages:justusetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
7. AssigntherightProgramtoeachtrack.
8. Selectthetracktoputinrecord.Itsstatusiconwill
automaticallybeginflashing.
9. Whilethestatusiconisflashing,pressPLAY/STOP
to begin recording. Depending on the Metro
option you selected, a 1 or 2bars precount may
playbeforetherecordingactuallybegins.Whenit
begins,playfreely.
IfyouselectedtheAutoPunchrecordingmode,
the recording will begin only when reaching the
Startpoint.
IfyouselectedthePedalPunchrecordingmode,
pressthepedalwhenyouwanttobeginrecording.
Pressitagaintofinishrecording.
Note:ThePunchfunctionswillnotworkonanempty
Song.Atleastonetrackmustalreadyberecorded.
10. When finished recording, press PLAY/STOP to
stopthesequencer.Selectadifferenttrack,andgo
onrecordingthewholeSong.
11. When finished recording the new Song, press
RECORDtoexittheRecordmode.The Songwill
besavedinmemory.
Warning: Save the Song to a card, to avoid it is lost
whenturningtheinstrumentoff.
Note: When exiting the Record mode, the Octave
Transposeisautomaticallyresetto0.
12. Edit the new Song; press the MENU page, and
selectthevariouseditpages.
3.
UsetheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectthe
Rec(RecordingMode)parameter.Usethesebut
Step Dub (Step Overdub) or the StepOwr
(StepOverwrite)recordingmode.
The Step Overdubmode letsyou addevents to
theexistingevents.
The Step Overwrite mode will overwrite all
existingevents.
Press SEQ1 PLAY/STOP to turn its LED on, and
enter the Step Record page. (See Step Record
page on page93 for more information on each
parameterofthispage).
Previous event
(a)
(b)
Current position
Step value
4.
Thefirsttwolines(a)arethelatestinsertedevent.
Thesecondtwolines(b)aretheeventcurrentlyin
edit,readytobeinserted.
The Empty event marks the beginning of the
Song,whentherearenoeventsinserted.Itisauto
matically inserted when entering the Record
mode. It will be removed when an event is
inserted.
TheMaaa.bb.cccparameterin(b)isthecurrent
position. This is the place where the note in edit
willbeinserted.
If you dont want to insert a note at this posi
tion,insertarestinstead,asshowninstep6.
92
Song operating mode

Song Record page
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Tojumptothenextmeasure,fillingtheremain
ingbeatswithrests,pressthe>>button.
To change the step value, use the NOTE VALUE
buttons,onthelowerleftareaofthecontrolpanel.
Insertanote,restorchordatthecurrentposition.
To insert a single note, just play it on the key
board.Theinsertednotelengthwillmatchthestep
length. You may change the velocity and relative
duration of the note, by editing the V (Velocity)
and D (Duration) parameters. See V (Velocity)
andD(Duration)onpage94.
To insert a rest, just press the REST button. Its
lengthwillmatchthestepvalue.
Totiethenotetobeinsertedtothepreviousone,
presstheTIEbutton.Anotewillbeinserted,tied
to the previous one, with exactly the same name.
Youdontneedtoplayitonthekeyboardagain.
Toinsertachordorasecondvoice,seeChords
andsecondvoicesbelow.
After inserting a new event, you may go back by
pressing the < button. This will delete the previ
ouslyinsertedevent,andsetthestepineditagain.
Whenfinishedrecording,pressSEQ1PLAY/STOP
to turn off its LED. The Main page of the Song
Recordmodeappearsagain.
From the Main page of the Song Record mode,

pressRECORDtoexittheRecordmode.Whilein
the Main page of the Song mode, you may press
SEQ1 PLAY/STOP to listen to the Song, or select
the Save Song command to save the Song to the
card.
SONG RECORD PAGE

While in the Song mode, press RECORD to enter the
SongRecordmode.TheSongRecordpageappears.
Rec (Record mode)
Setthisparametertoselectarecordingmode.
Overdub
Thenewlyrecordedeventswillbemixed
toanyexistingevents.
Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace
anyexistingevents.
AutoPunch Recordingwillautomaticallybeginatthe
Sposition,andstopattheEposition
(seethefollowingline).
Note:TheAutoPunchfunctionwillnotwork
on an empty Song. At least one track must
alreadyberecorded.
PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a
pedalsettothePunchIn/Outfunction,
and will finish when pressing the same
pedalagain.
Note:ThePedalPunchfunctionwillnotwork
on an empty Song. At least one track must
alreadyberecorded.
StepDub
Step Overdub. This recording mode lets
you enter events one at a time, adding
eventstotheexistingevents.
StepOwr
StepOverwrite. Thisrecordingmodelets
you enter events one at a time, overwrit
ingallexistingevents.
Trk (Track)
Trackinrecord.
116
One of the 16 tracks selected. To select a
track,gototheTrackpages(seeTracks1
8 page on page89 and Tracks 916
pageonpage89).
Chords and second voices
S/E (Start/End)
WithmicroARRANGER,youarenotobligedtoinsert
singlenotesinatrack.Thereareseveralwaystoinsert
chords and double voices. For more information, see
theChordsandsecondvoicesinStepRecordmode
sectiononpage60oftheStyleRecordmodechapter.
TheseparametersappearonlywhentheAutoPunch
recording mode is selected. They set the starting and
endingpointsofthePunchrecording.
Metro (Metronome)
Thisisthemetronomeheardduringrecording.
Off
Nometronomeclickwillbeheardduring
recording. A onebar precount will be
playedbeforestartingrecording.
On1
Metronome on, with a onebar precount
Metronome on, with a twobar precount
On2
Song operating mode
93
Step Record page
Resol (Resolution)
Use this parameter to set the quantization during

recording. Quantization is a way of correcting tim
ing errors; notes played too soon or too later are
moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid, set
withthisparameter,thusplayingperfectlyintime.
Hi
Noquantizationapplied.
(1/32)(1/8)
example,whenyouselect1/16,allnotes
are moved to the nearest 1/16 division.
Whenyouselect1/8,allnotesaremoved
tothenearest1/8division.
STEP RECORD PAGE

Access this page from the Main page of the Song
Record mode, by selecting the StepDub or Ste
pOwrrecordingmode(Recparameter),andpress
ingSEQ1PLAY/STOP.
Previous event
(a)
(b)
No quantization
Current position
1/16
Step value
(a) section
1/8
Meter
This is the meter (or time signature) of the Song. You

can edit this parameter only when the Song is empty,
i.e. before you begin recording anything. To insert a
meterchangeinthemiddleoftheSong,usetheInsert
Measurefunction(seepage101).
Sel.Tempo (Select Tempo)
Select this parameter to use the TEMPO/VALUE con

trolstosetthetempo.
Note:YoucanalwayschangetheTempo,whenotherparam
etersareselected,bykeepingtheSHIFTbuttonpressed,and
rotatingtheDIAL.
Note: The tempo is always record in overwrite mode (old
dataisreplacedbythenewdata).
Tempo (Tempo mode)
Thisparametersetsthewaytempoeventsareread.
Record
All Tempo changes made during record
ingwillberecordedtotheMasterTrack.
Auto
The Sequencer plays back all recorded
Tempoevents.NonewTempoeventsare
recorded.
Manual
The latest manual Tempo setting (made
using the TEMPO/VALUE controls) is
considered the current Tempo value. No
Tempo change will be recorded. This is
very useful to record the Song much
slowerthanitsactualTempo.
Previously inserted event. You may delete this event,

andsetitineditagain,bypressingthe<button.
(b) section
Eventtobeinserted.Seethefollowingparametersfor
informationoneachelementofthissection.
M (Measure)
Thisisthepositionoftheevent(note,restorchord)to
beinserted.
Meter
Meterofthecurrentmeasure.Thisparametercantbe
edited.YoucansetaMeterchangebyusingtheInsert
functionoftheEditmenu,andinsertinganewseriesof
measures with a different Meter (see Page 22 Edit:
InsertMeasuresonpage101).
key?
This is a prompt, asking for a note or chord to be

playedon thekeyboard,toenteran eventon thecur
rentstep.
Step value
Length of the event to be inserted. Use the NOTE

VALUE buttons, on the lower left area of the control
panel,tochangethisvalue.

Dot(.)
Triplet(3)
Notevalue.
Augmentstheselectednotebyonehalfof
itsvalue.
Makestheselectednoteatripletnote.
V (Velocity)
Setthisparameterbeforeenteringanoteorchord.This
willbetheplayingstrength(i.e.,velocityvalue)ofthe
eventtobeinserted.
KBD
Keyboard. You can select this parameter,
by turning all counterclockwise the dial.
When this option is selected, the playing
strength of the played note is recognized
andrecorded.
94
Song operating mode

Menu
1127
Velocityvalue.Theeventwillbeinserted
with this velocity value, and the actual
playingstrengthofthenoteplayedonthe
keyboardwillbeignored.
D (Duration)
Relativedurationoftheinsertednote.Thepercentage
isalwaysreferredtothestepvalue.
50%
Staccato.
85%
Ordinaryarticulation.
100%
Legato.
MENU
Whileinanypage,pressMENUtoopentheSongedit
menu.ThismenugivesaccesstothevariousSongedit
sections.
VOLUME/VALUE (AH) buttons, select an edit page
mainpageoftheSongoperatingmode.
Buttons used in Step Record mode

TIE button
Tiesthenotetobeinsertedtothepreviousnote.
REST button
Insertsarest.
NOTE VALUE buttons
Selectthestepvalue.
SEQ1 PLAY/STOP button
ExitstheStepRecordmode.
< (Previous step)
Goestothepreviousstep,erasingtheinsertedevent.
>> (Fast Forward)
Goestothenextmeasure,andfilltheremainingspace
withrests.
EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE

Press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Song
mode.
Song icon
Page header
Page number
Track status icons
Song icon

Songmode.
Page header

Usuallytheheaderisdividedinafirstword,identify
ing the section name (e.g., Mixer:FX Send is a
Mixersectionpage),andasecondword,referringto
thepagename(e.g.FXSend).
Section name
Page name
Page
Song operating mode
95
AH
EachpairofVOLUME/VALUEbuttonsselectadiffer
ent track, parameter of command, depending on the
editpage.
Track status icons
PAGE 2 - MIXER: PAN

HereyoucanadjustthepanforeachSongtrack.
Aseriesoficonsneareachtrackshowthetracksstatus.
Selected track or parameter. When this
symbol appears, you can execute any
availableoperationontheselecteditem.
(noicon)
Trackinplayoralreadyrecorded.
The track is in mute, or does not contain
data.

Here you can adjust the volume for each of the 16
sequencertracks.PressbothVOLUME/VALUEbutton
tomute/unmutethecorrespondingtrack.
A muted track remains muted even when selecting a
differentSong.
Pan
64
+00
+63
Off
HardLeft.
Center.
HardRight.
forthistrack.
PAGE 3 - MIXER: FX BLOCK

Thispageletsyouselectapairofeffectprocessor(AB
orCD)foreachoftheSongtrack.
96
Song operating mode

Page 4 - Mixer: FX Send A/B (or C/D)
PAGE 4 - MIXER: FX SEND A/B (OR C/D)
PAGE 5 - TUNING: DETUNE
(uneffected) signal going to the A and B, or C and D
Internal FX pair. Go to the previous page (Page 3
Mixer:FXBlock)toselectanFXpair.
18totracks916.
Thispageiswhereyoucansetthefinetuningforeach
track.
Detune
atrack.
thattrack.
parametersvalue.
Parameters
000
127
Thisisthefinetuning.
64
Lowestpitch.
0
Standardtuning.
+63
Highestpitch.
PAGE 6 - TUNING: SCALE

Thispageletsyouprogramthealternativescaleforthe
Songtracks.
samelevel.
Scale
Alternative scale for the Song tracks. See Scales on

page227foralistofavailablescales.Toenable/disable
thealternativescaleforeachSongtrack,seePage7
Tuning:PitchBend/Scaleonpage97.
Key
ParameterrequiredforsomeScales,whenyoushould
setapreferredkey.
Note
Note in edit, to be detuned. This parameter can be

accessedwhenaUserScaleisselected.
Detune
Notedetune,comparedtothestandardEqualtuning.This
parametercanbeaccessedwhenaUserScaleisselected.
Song operating mode
97
Page 7 - Tuning: PitchBend/Scale
PAGE 7 - TUNING: PITCHBEND/SCALE

This page lets you program the Pitch Bend range for
theSongtracks.Furthermore,itletsyouactivate/deac
tivatethealternativescaleforeachtrack.
Song,changetheeffects,thenstarttheSongagain.Savethe
Songtopermanentlychangetheeffects.
A, B

B>Asend (B>A Send)
effect.

theCeffectisareverb,whiletheDeffectisamodulat
ingeffect.
Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only.
Youcan,however,assignallfoureffectstoaSong(see
Page3Mixer:FXBlockonpage95).
PB(end)
This parameters shows the Pitch Bend range for each

track,insemitones.
0112
Maximum positive/negative pitchbend
range(insemitones).12=1octave.
Off
Nopitchbendallowed.
Sc(ale)
This parameter lets you activate/deactivate the alternative

scaleforeachtrack.(SeePage6Tuning:Scaleonpage96
formoreinformationonselectinganalternativescale).
Yes
The track is tuned according to the alter
nativescale.
No
ThetrackistunedaccordingtotheGlobal
scale(seeScaleonpage125).
This page lets you select the A and B effects. Usually,

theAeffectisareverb,whiletheBeffectisamodulat
ingeffect.
Standard MIDI Files usually require two effects only.
Youcan,however,assignallfoureffectstoaSong(see
Page3Mixer:FXBlockonpage95).
C, D

D>Csend (D>C Send)
effect.
98
Song operating mode

Page 10 - FX: A editing
PAGE 14 - TRACK: EASY EDIT

effect(usuallyareverb).
In this page you can edit the main parameters of the

Programsassignedtoeachtrack.
Note:AllvaluesarerelativetothevalueoftheoriginalPro
gram.
You can also change the volume for each class of
Drums and Percussions, if the selected track is set in
Drummode(seebelowPage15Track:Mode).
Use the EF and GH VOLUME/VALUE button pairs

toscrolltheparameterlist.
Use the AD VOLUME/VALUE button pairs to select
andeditaparameter.
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to edit the selected
parameter.
Parameters

effect (usually a modulating effect). For more details,
seePage10FX:Aeditingabove.

effect. For more details, see Page 10 FX: A editing
above.
atrack.
2. UsetheF1F4buttonstoselectasoundparame
ter, or its value. (For the Drum and Percussion
tracks,seebelowtheDrumtrackssection).
soundparameteroritsvalue.
Parameters

effect. For more details, see Page 10 FX: A editing
above.
Attack
Attacktime.Thisisthetimeduringwhich
thesoundgoesfromzero(atthemoment
when you strike a key) to its maximum
level.
Decay time. Time to go from the final
Decay
AttackleveltothebeginningoftheRelease.
Release
Release time. This is the time during
whichthesoundgoesfromthesustaining
(or Decay) phase, to zero. The Release is
triggeredbyreleasingakey.
Cutoff
Filter cutoff. This sets the sound bright
ness.
Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to define the
width of the frequency range affected by
theFilter.
VibratoRate SpeedoftheVibrato.
VibratoDepth
IntensityoftheVibrato.
VibratoDelay
DelaytimebeforetheVibratobegins,after
thesoundstarts.
Song operating mode
99
Page 15 - Track: Mode
Drum tracks
WhenatrackissetinDrumMode(liketheDrumand
Percussiontracks),youcanadjustthevolumeforeach
oftheDrumandPercussioncategories.
KickV
Kickdrumsvolume.
SnareV
Snaredrumsvolume.
TomV
Tomsvolume.
HiHatV
HiHatvolume.
CymbalV Ride,Crashandothercymbalsvolume.
Percus1V
Classicpercussionsetvolume.
Percus2V
Ethnicpercussionsetvolume.
SFXV
Specialeffectsvolume.
Reset
Poly

sametime.
Mono

eachtrack.ItisveryusefultoletaSongtrackdrivean
externalexpander.
You can reset the parameters value by keeping the

SHIFT button pressed, while pressing the selected
track VOLUME/VALUE button. When you press the
abovecombination,theResetwindowappears:
PressENTER/YEStoresetthecurrentlyselectedtrack.
KeepSHIFTpressed,andpressENTER/YES,toresetall
tracks. Press EXIT/NO to abort and leave all parame
tersunchanged.

track.
Parameters
Internal
External

MIDIOUT.
play the internal sounds, thus saving
polyphony.
Parameters
Drum
track. You can set a different volume for
each class of percussive instruments
(Page14Track:Easyeditonpage98).
CC#0
Both
CC#32
PC

theMIDIOUT.
100
Song operating mode

Page 17 - Edit: Quantize
PAGE 17 - EDIT: QUANTIZE
PAGE 18 - EDIT: TRANSPOSE
The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after

recording.
HereyoucantransposetheSong,atrackorapartofa
track.


Trk (Track)
Trk (Track)
All
Alltracksselected.
116
Selectedtrack.
All
Alltracksselected(apartforDrumtracks).
116
Selectedtrack.
Resol (Resolution)
Value
This parameter sets the quantization after recording.

Forexample,whenyouselect1/8a,allnotesaremoved
to the nearest 1/8 division. When you select 1/4, all
notesaremovedtothenearest1/4division.
Valueofthetranspose(insemitones).
No quantization
S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetotranspose.
Ifyouwishtoselectafourmeasuresequencestarting
at the beginning of the Song, the Start will be posi
tionedat1.01.000,andtheEndat5.01.000.
Bottom / Top
1/8
1/4
(1/32)(1/4)
Gridresolution,inmusicalvalues.Ana
afterthevaluemeansnoswing.Abf
afterthevaluemeansswingquantization.
keyboard range to transpose. If you select the same
asinglepercussiveinstrumentinaDrumtrack.
PAGE 19 - EDIT: VELOCITY

HereyoucanchangetheVelocityvalueforthenotes.
S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetoquantize.
Bottom / Top
keyboardrangetoquantize.Ifyouselectthesamenote
astheBottomandTopparameters,youcanselectasin
glepercussiveinstrumentinaDrumtrack.
Note: These parameters are available only when a Drum
trackisselected.

Trk (Track)
All
Alltracksselected.
116
Selectedtrack.
Value
Velocitychangevalue.
Song operating mode
101
Page 20 - Edit: Delete
S / E (Start/End)
(E)pointsoftherangetoedit.
Bottom / Top
keyboardrangetoedit. Ifyouselect the samenote as
percussiveinstrumentinaDrumtrack.
PAGE 20 - EDIT: DELETE
Bottom / Top
keyboardrangetodelete.Ifyouselectthesamenoteas
percussiveinstrumentinaDrumtrack.
Note: These parameters are available only when the All or
Noteoptionsareselected.
PAGE 21 - EDIT: CUT MEASURES

InthispageyoucancutmeasuresfromtheSong.
This page is where you can delete MIDI events from

theSong.

AfterselectingtheStartandLengthparameters,press
ENTER to execute. The Are you sure? message will
appear.PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
Afterthecut,thefollowingmeasurearemovedback,to
fillthecutmeasures.
Trk (Track)
Start
All
Alltracksselected.
116
Selectedtrack.
Master
Master track. This is where the Tempo,
ScaleandEffecteventsarerecorded.
Firstmeasurewheretobegincutting.
Ev (Event)
Length
Numberofmeasurestobecut.
PAGE 22 - EDIT: INSERT MEASURES
TypeofMIDIeventtodelete.
All
All events. The measures will not be
removedfromtheSong.
Note
Allnotesintheselectedrange.
Dup.Note Allduplicatenotes.Whentwonoteswith
the same pitch are encountered on the
sametick,theonewiththelowestvelocity
isdeleted.
A.Touch
AfterTouchevents.
PitchBendevents.
P.Bend
PrChange Program Change events, excluding the
bundledControlChange#00(BankSelect
MSB)and#32(BankSelectLSB).
C.Change All Control Change events, for example
Bank Select, Modulation, Damper, Soft
Pedal
CC00/32CC127
Single Control Change events. Double
Control Change numbers (like 00/32) are
MSB/LSBbundles.
InthispageyoucaninsertmeasuresintheSong.You
canalsousethisfunctiontoinsertmeasureswithadif
ferentmeter(timesignature).
S / E (Start/End)
Start
(E)pointsoftherangetodelete.
Firstoftheinsertedmeasures.
AfterselectingtheMeter,StartandLengthparameters,
pressENTERtoexecute.TheAreyousure?message
willappear.PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
Note:YoucannotappendmeasuresaftertheendoftheSong.
ToappendmeasuresusetheRecordorCopyfunction.
Note:YoucannotusethisfunctiononanemptySong.
Meter
Meterofthemeasurestobeinserted.
Length
Numberofmeasurestobeinserted.
102
Song operating mode

Page 23 - Edit: Copy
PAGE 23 - EDIT: COPY
PAGE 24 - EVENT EDIT
Hereyoucancopytracksorphrases.
EnterthispagefromtheMenuoftheSongmode.The
EventEditpageallowsyoutoediteacheventinasin
gle track. See Event Edit procedure on page104 for
moreinformationontheeventeditingprocedure.

Note:Ifyoucopytoomanyeventsonthesametick,the
Toomanyevents!messageappears,andthecopyoperation
isaborted.
Mode
UsethisparametertoselecttheCopymode.
Merge
Copied data are merged with the data at
thetargetposition.
Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target
position.
Warning:Deleteddatacannotberecovered!
Event Type
First value
Second value
Trk (Track)
Trackinedit.Toselectadifferenttrack,pressoneofthe
AVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoopentheGo ToTrack
window.

tracktocopy.
All
All tracks. The target track cannot be
selected.
116
Selectedsourceandtargettracks.
UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectatrack,and
116
One of the ordinary tracks of the Song.
These tracks contains musical data, like
notesandcontrollers.
Master
This is a special track, containing Tempo
changes,Meterchanges,Scale andTrans
posedata,andtheeffectparameters.
S/E
Position
The left S/E parameters are the starting and ending

measuretocopy.Forexample,ifS=1andE=4,thefirst
fourmeasuresarecopied.
Positionoftheeventshowninthedisplay,expressedin
theformaaa.bb.ccc:
aaaisthemeasure
bbisthebeat
cccisthetick(eachquarterbeat=384ticks)
Youcaneditthisparametertomovetheeventtoadif
ferentposition.
Numberoftimesthecopymustbeexecuted.
Ev (Event)
FromTrk (From Track)

ToTrk (To Track)
The right S parameter is the first of the target mea

sures.
Type and values of the event shown in the display.

Depending on the selected event, the value may
change. This parameter also shows the (noneditable)
EndOfTrackmarking,whentheendofthetrackis
reached.
Herearetheeventscontainedinordinarytracks(116).
Event
First value
Second value
Note
Note name
Velocity
Prog
Program Change number
Ctrl
Control Change number
Control Change value
Bend
Bending value
Aftt
Mono (Channel) Aftertouch value
PAft
Note to which the Aftertouch is applied
Poly Aftertouch value
Song operating mode
103
Page 25 - Event Filter
AndherearetheeventscontainedintheMastertrack.
Event
First value
Second value
Tempo
Tempo change
Volume
Master Volume value
change(a)
SHIFT + << or >>
KeeptheSHIFTbuttonpressedandpressthe<<or>>
buttontoopentheGotoMeasurewindow.
Meter
Meter
Scale
One of the available preset Scales
Root note for the

selected Scale
Use the TEMPO/VALUE controls to select a measure,

andpressENTERtoconfirm,orEXITtoabort.
UScale (User
Scale)
One of the available User

Scales
Root note for the

selected Scale
SHIFT + PAUSE
QT (Quarter Tone)
Altered note
Note alteration(b)
QT Clear (Quarter Tone Clearing)
Reset of all Scale

changes
FXType
One of the four available

FX processors
Effect number(c)
FXSend
Feedback Send (B>A or

D>C)
Feedback send
level
(a) Meter changes cant be edited or inserted. To insert a Meter

change, use the Insert function in the Edit section and insert a series
of measures with the new meter. Existing data can then be copied or
entered to these measures
(b) To edit the Quarter Tone settings, select the first value, then
select the scales degree to edit. Edit the second value to change the
tuning of the selected note of the scale.
(c) When selecting a different effect number during this edit, default
settings will be assigned to this event.
Tochangetheeventtype,usetheCVOLUME/VALUE
buttonstoselecttheEventline,thenusethesamebut
tonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectadiffer
enteventtype.
Toselectandedittheeventsvalue,usetheF3andF4
function keys, and use the G/VOLUME/VALUE but
tonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
Whilethesequencerisrunning,keeptheSHIFTbutton
pressed, and press the PAUSE button to display the
eventthatiscurrentlyplaying.ThisiscalledtheCatch
Locatorfunction.
INSERT
Press the INSERT button to insert a new event at the

currentshownPosition.ThedefaultvaluesareType=
Note,Pitch=C4,Velocity=100,Length=192.
Note: You cant insert new events in an empty, non
recordedSong.Toinsertanevent,youmustfirstinsertsome
empty measures. To use the Insert function, press MENU
andoneoftheFVOLUME/VALUEbuttons,thenpressthe
PAGE+buttontwice.
DELETE
PresstheDELETEbuttontodeletetheeventshownin
thedisplay.
PAGE 25 - EVENT FILTER

Thispageiswhereyoucanselecttheeventtypestobe
shownintheEventEditpage.Youcanaccessthispage
bypressingthePAGE+buttonwhileintheEventEdit
page.
Length
LengthoftheselectedNoteevent.Thevalueformatis
thesameasthePositionvalue.
Note:Ifyouchangealengthof000.00.000toadifferent
value, you cant go back to the original value. This rather
uncommonzerolengthvaluemaybefoundinthedrumand
percussiontracksofSongsmadeinBackingSequencemode.
Transport, navigation and editing controls

E/F and H VOLUME/VALUE buttons
These buttons are the Scroll to previous event and

Scrolltonexteventcontrols.Theycorrespondstothe
scrollarrowsshownonthescreen.
G VOLUME/VALUE buttons
Usethesebuttonstoselectthecorrespondingparame
tervaluearea.
F-3 and F-4 buttons
After selecting the parameter value area with the G

VOLUME/VALUEbuttons,usethesebuttonstoselect,
respectively,thefirstandsecondvalueoftheeventin
edit.
SEQ1 PLAY/STOP button
Press PLAY/STOP to listen to the Song in edit. Press

PLAY/STOPagaintostopit.
TurnOnthefilterforalleventtypesyoudonotwishto
seeintheEventEditpage.
Note
Notes.
Prog
ProgramChangevalues.
Ctrl
ControlChangeevents.
T/Meter
Tempo and Meter changes (Master Track
only).
Aftt
Mono(Channel)Aftertouchevents.
PAft
PolyAftertouchevents.
Bend
PitchBendevents.
PaCtl
Controls exclusive of the microAR
RANGER, like the FX and Scale settings.
ThesecontrolsarerecordedtotheMaster
Track, and saved as System Exclusive
data.
104
Song operating mode

Event Edit procedure
EVENT EDIT PROCEDURE

TheEventEditisthepagewhereyoucanediteachsin
gleMIDIeventoftheselectedtrack.Youcan,forexam
ple, replace a note with a different one, or change its
playingstrength.Hereisthegeneraleventeditingpro
cedure.
1. WhileintheMainpageoftheSongmode,loadthe
Song to edit (see Main page on page88). If a
Songisalreadyloadedorjustrecorded,thisstepis
notneeded.
2. Press MENU, and use one of the H VOLUME/
VALUE buttons to select the Event Edit section.
TheEventEditpageappears(seePage24Event
Editonpage102formoreinformation).
8.
Formoreinformationontheeventtypesandtheir
values,seePage24EventEditbelow.
Use the B VOLUME/VALUE buttons to select the
Position line. Use these buttons or the TEMPO/
VALUEcontrolstochangetheeventsposition.
Measure
9.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PressSEQ1PLAY/STOPtolistentotheSong.Press
SEQ1PLAY/STOPagaintostopit.
Press PAGE+ to go to the Event Filter page, and
turnOffthefilterfortheeventtypesyouwishto
seeinthedisplay(seePage25EventFilteron
PressPAGEtogobacktotheEventEditpage.
Press the A VOLUME/VALUE button (Trk), to
select the track to edit. The Go To Track window
appears.
UsetheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstoselectatrack,
andpressENTERtoconfirm(orEXITtoabort).
The list of events contained in the selected track
willappearinthedisplay.
Tick
UsetheCVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectthe
Event line. You may use the C VOLUME/VALUE
buttonsortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrolstochange
the event type. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE but
tons,andtheF3andF4functionkeystorespec
tively select the first and second value of the
parameter. Use the G VOLUME/VALUE buttons
or the TEMPO/VALUE controls to modify the
selectedvalue.
Event Type
3.
Beat
First value
Second value
10. In the case of a Note event, use the D VOLUME/

VALUEbuttonstoselecttheLengthline,anduse
thesamebuttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols,
tochangetheeventslength.
Measure
Beat
Tick
After having modified the shown event, you

mayscrolltothenexteventwiththeHVOLUME/
VALUEbuttons(Scrolltonext),ortotheprevious
event with the E/F VOLUME/VALUE buttons
(Scrolltoprevious).
YoumayusetheSHIFT+<<or>>shortcuttogo
toadifferentmeasure(seeSHIFT+<<or>>on
page103)
Whilethesequencerisrunning,youmayusethe
SHIFT + PAUSE shortcut to move the current
event in the display (see SHIFT + PAUSE on
page103).
As described in step 3, you may press SEQ1
PLAY/STOPtolistentotheSong,andpressSEQ1
PLAY/STOPagaintostopthesequencer.
11. Use the INSERT button to insert an event at the
Position shown in the display (a Note event with
default values will be inserted). Use the DELETE
buttontodeletetheeventshowninthedisplay.
12. Whentheeditingiscomplete,youmayselectadif
ferenttrack(gotostep6).
13. WhenfinishededitingthewholeSong,pressEXIT
togobacktotheMainpageoftheSongmode,and
selecttheSaveSongcommandtosavetheSongthe
card. See Save Song page on page90 for more
informationonsavingaSong.
Program operating mode
105
Main page
14. PROGRAM OPERATING MODE

The Program operating mode is where you can lis
tentoindividualPrograms,andeditthem.
ToselectaProgram,seetheBasicoperationschapter.
In this mode, the selected Program can always be
playedacrossthefullkeyboardrange.
To automatically select the Program to be assigned
to the last selected track, keep the SHIFT button
pressed,andpressthePROGRAMbutton.
Hint: This is useful to see the Bank Select/Program Change
numberswhenprogrammingaSongonanexternalsequencer.
Note:TheProgramusesthesameScaleofthelatestselected
PerformanceorSTS.
MAIN PAGE
HereisthemainpageoftheProgramoperatingmode.
Tempo
Program icon
Page header
gram.Valuesareinthestandard0127MIDInumber
ingformat.
Note:Somemanufacturerscouldusethe1128numbering
system; when connecting your microARRANGER to an
instrumentofthiskind,incrementthePCvalueby1unit.
Effects
In Program mode, the Program uses its own effects
insteadofrelyingonADeffects.Twoeffectprocessors
(FX1andFX2)areavailable.
The MIDI channel

In Program mode, microARRANGER receives and
transmitsonthesamechanneloftheUpper1track.If
the Global channel is assigned, notes can be received
alsoonthischannel.SeePage6MIDIINChannels
on page127 and Page 10 MIDI OUT Channels on
SOUND PROGRAMS AND DRUM PROGRAMS
Program icon
Whenturnedon,thisiconshowsthattheinstrumentis
inProgrammode.
Page header
This line shows the selected Program name. Use the

TEMPO/VALUEcontrols,orthePROGRAM/PERFOR
MANCEsectiontoselectaProgram.(SeeSelectinga
Programonpage25formoreinformation).
Tempo
ThisisthetempoofSequencer1.TheTempoisoneof
the AMSs (see AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)
listonpage123).UsetheSHIFT+DIALcombination
tochangeit.
A (Group)
This noneditable parameter shows which group the

Programisincludedinto.Agroupistheequivalentofa
PROGRAM/PERFORMANCEbutton.
microARRANGERfeaturestwodifferentkindsofPro
grams:
Sound Programs. These are normal instrument
Programs,likepianos,strings,basses.
Drum Programs. These are drum and percussion
kits,whereeachnoteofthekeyboardisadifferent
percussive instrument. You can find Drum Pro
gramsintheDRUMKITandUSERDKbanks.
Before pressingMENUto enterthe editenvironment,
you should select a Program of the type you wish to
editorcreate.
Notes pointing to special Drum Program features are
markedbythe icon.
MENU
WhileinanyotherpageoftheProgramoperativemode,
pressMENUtoopentheProgrameditmenu.Thismenu
givesaccesstothevariousProgrameditsections.
VOLUME/VALUE (AG) buttons, select an edit page
mainpageoftheProgramoperatingmode.
B (CC00)
This noneditable parameter shows the value of the

ControlChange(CC)00message(orBankSelectMSB)
fortheselectedProgram.
C (CC32)

Control Change (CC) 32 message (a.k.a. Bank Select
LSB)fortheselectedProgram.
D (PC)

Program Change (PC) message for the selected Pro
106

Edit page structure
EDIT PAGE STRUCTURE
ERASE PROGRAM/OSCILLATOR

PressEXITtogobacktothemainpageoftheProgram
mode.
Youcaninitializeanyparametervalue,byusingone
ofthefollowingshortcuts:
Program icon Page header
Oscillator in edit
Page number
While in the Basic page, keep the SHIFT button

pressed,andpresstheDELETEbuttontoinitialize
thewholeProgramtoadefaultstatus.
While in an edit page where the Osc abbrevia
tionappearsintheupperrightareaofthedisplay,
keep the SHIFT button pressed, and press the
DELETEbuttontoinitializethecurrentlyselected
oscillatortoadefaultstatus
After you press the shortcut, the Init osc? message
appears.PressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
THE WRITE WINDOW

Parameters
Parameters value
Program icon
ThispageappearswhenyoupresstheWRITEbutton.
Here you can save the Program into a User Program
locationinmemory.
Whenswitchedon,thisiconshowsthattheinstrument
isinProgrammode.
Page header
Theheadershowsthenameofthecurrenteditpage.
Oscillator in edit
When in an edit page where selecting an oscillator is

required,thisareashowstheselectedoscillator.UsetheF
1F4buttonstoselectoneofthefouravailableoscillators.
Page number
Parameters
Select an edit parameter using the AD VOLUME/

VALUEbuttons.Youcanscrolltheparameterlistusing
theEF(ScrollUp)andGH(ScrollDown)VOLUME/
VALUEbuttons.
Parameter value
Use the AD VOLUME/VALUE buttons, or the

TEMPO/VALUE controls, to change the parameter
value.
THE COMPARE FUNCTION

While in edit, you can compare the current Program
with its original values. You cannot edit the Program
whileyouareinComparemode.
KeeptheSHIFTbuttonpressed,andpressENTER
to enter the Compare function. The PROGRAM
LED begins flashing. Play on the keyboard to lis
tentotheoriginalProgram.
Press SHITF + ENTER again to exit the Compare
modeandreturntotheeditedProgram.
HOW TO SELECT OSCILLATORS

While in an edit page requiring an oscillator to be
selected for editing, use the F1F4 buttons to select
oneoftheavailableoscillators.
1. Selectanameandalocation,thenpressENTERto
savetheProgram.
2. The Are you sure? message appears. Press
Warning:IfyouwriteoveranexistingUserProgram,
theProgramwillbedeletedandreplacedbytheoneyou
aresaving(overwrite).Pleasesavetocard anyPro
gramyoudontwanttolose.
Name
Use this parameter to change the Programs name.

Press the right A VOLUME/VALUE button to enter
editing.ModifythenameusingtheUP/DOWNbuttons
tomovethecursor,andtheDIALtoselectacharacter.
Press INSERT to insert a character at the cursor posi
tion,orDELETEtodeleteit
To (Location number)
UsetheBVOLUME/VALUEbuttonstoselectadiffer
ent User Program location in memory. Otherwise,
select this parameter and use the VOLUME/VALUE
controlstoselectthelocation.
Note:YoucantsaveoveraFactoryProgramlocation.
107
Page 1 - Basic
PAGE 1 - BASIC
HereyoucanmakebasicsettingsfortheProgram,such
asbasicoscillatorsettings,theoscillatorcount,andthe
polyphonicmode.
oscillator sound, envelope, and LFO will

bereset(andretriggered)accordingtothe
settingsoftheProgram.
Note: If Legato is On, certain multisamples or keyboard
locationsmayproduceanincorrectpitch.
Priority
ThisparameterisavailablewhentheModeparame
terissettoMono.Itspecifieswhichnotewillbegiven
priority to play when two or more notes are played
simultaneously.
Low
Lowestnotewilltakepriority.
High
Highestnotewilltakepriority.
Last
Lastnotewilltakepriority.
Oscillators
Use this parameter to specify the basic Program type;

whetheritwilluseoneormoreoscillators(uptofour).
DrumProgramsuseonlyoneoscillator.
14
Number of oscillators the Program will
use.Thetotalamountofpolyphonyvaries
depending on the number of oscillators
used by the Program (a maximum of 62
withonly1oscillator,oramaximumof15
with4oscillators).
PAGE 2 - SAMPLE (SOUND PROGRAMS)

Themultisample(s)(waveform)onwhichtheProgram
willbebasedcanbeselectedhereforeachofthefour
oscillators.Eachoscillatorcanuse1or2multisamples,
eachoneassignedtotheHighorLowlayer.
Mode
ThisisthepolyphonicmodeoftheProgram.
Poly
The Program will play polyphonically,
allowingyouplaychords.
Mono
The Program will play monophonically,
producingonlyonenoteatatime.
Single Trigger
terissettoPoly.
Yes
Whenthesamenoteisplayedrepeatedly,
the previous note will be silenced before
thenextnoteissounded,sothatthenotes
donotoverlap.
No
Whenthesamenoteisplayedrepeatedly,
the previous note will not be silenced
beforethenextnoteissounded.
Legato
terissettoMono.
Yes
Legato is on. When multiple noteons
occur, the first noteon will retrigger the
sound, and the second and subsequent
noteonswillnotretrigger.
Whenlegatoison,multiplenoteonswill
not retrigger the voice. If one note is
alreadyonandanothernoteisturnedon,
thefirstvoicewillcontinuesounding.The
oscillator sound, envelope, and LFO will
not be reset, and only the pitch of the
oscillator will be updated. This setting is
effectiveforwindinstrumentsoundsand
analogsynthtypesounds.
No
Legatoisoff.Noteswillalwaysberetrig
geredwhennoteonoccurs.
Whenlegatoisoff,multiplenoteonswill
retrigger the voice at each noteon. The
The internal FlashROM contains 340 different multi

samples(presetmultisamples).
Selected
Usethisparametertoselectanoscillatortoputinedit.
Alternatively,youcanselectoscillatorsusingtheF1F
4buttons.
MS Hi/Lo Bank/Num
Usetheseparameterstoselectadifferentmultisample
foreachoftheHighandLowlayers.Youcanuseveloc
ity to switch between the two multisamples. Reverse,
OffsetandLevelcanbeadjustedindependentlyforthe
HighandLowmultisamples.
Thefirstlineshowsthebank(ROM),whilethesecond
line is for selecting the multisample. The Program
numberappearsattheendofthesecondline.
Themultisampleyouselectfor theHighlayerwillbe
triggered by velocities higher than the value of the
Velocity Switch parameter (see page108). If you do
notwishtousevelocityswitching,settheswitchtoa
valueof001,andselectonlytheHighmultisample.
Note: Each multisample has an upper limit, and may not
producesoundwhenplayedabovethatlimit.
[H/L] Reverse
Themultisamplewillbeplayedinreverse.Inthecase
ofFlashROMmultisamplesthatwereoriginallyspeci
fied to loop, the multisample will be played back in
oneshotreversemode.Ifthemultisamplewasorigi
nallysettoreverse,itwillplaybackwithoutchange.
Yes
Themultisamplewillplaybackinreverse.
No
Themultisamplewillplaybacknormally.
108

Page 2 - DK Samples (Drum Programs)
[H/L] Use Offset
These parameters specify the point where the multi

sample(s) will begin to play. For some multisamples
thisparameterwillnotbeavailable.
Yes
Thesoundwillbeginfromtheoffsetloca
tionpredeterminedforeachmultisample.
No
Thesoundwillstartfromthebeginningof
themultisamplewaveform.
PAGE 2 - DK SAMPLES (DRUM PROGRAMS)

This page appears when you edit a Drum Program.
Here you can select a different percussive sample for
eachlayer(HighandLow)oneachkey.
[H/L] Level
These parameters specify the level of each multisam

ple.
0127
Multisamplelevel.
Note: Depending on the multisample, high settings of this
parameter may cause the sound to distort when a chord is
played.Ifthisoccurs,lowerthelevel.
Velocity Switch
This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low

layers for the selected oscillator. Notes struck harder
thanthisvaluewillbeplayedbytheHighmultisample.
V-Zone Top/Bottom (Velocity Zone)
Hereyoucanspecifythevelocityrangefortheselected
oscillator.
Note:YoucannotsettheBottomVelocityhigherthantheTop
Velocity,northeTopVelocitylowerthantheBottomVelocity.
0127
Assignedvelocity.
Octave
Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected

oscillatorinoctaveunits.Thenormaloctaveofthemul
tisampleis0.
2+1
Octavetransposition.
Transpose
Use this parameter to adjust the pitch of the selected

oscillatorinsemitonestepsoverarangeof1octave.
12+12
Transpositioninsemitones.
Tune
Usethisparametertoadjustthepitchofthesamplein
onecentsteps(asemitoneis100cents)overarangeof
1octave.
1200+1200
Finetunevalueincents.
Delay (ms)
Thisparametersetsadelaytimefromthenoteontothe
real beginning of the sound. With a setting of KeyOff,
thesoundwillbeginwhennoteoffoccurs.Thisisuse
ful to create sounds such as the click that is heard
whenaharpsichordnoteisreleased.Inthiscase,setthe
SustainLevelparameterto0(seepage115).
KeyOff
The sound will begin when the note is
released.
05000
Delaytimeinmilliseconds.
Key
Key in edit. You can press a key on the keyboard to

selectakey.
Assigned
Usethisparametertoturnthesampleon/off.
Yes
Thesampleisassignedtotheselectedkey.
No
The sample is not assigned. The sample
assignedtothenexthighestassignedkey
isusedinstead.
MS Hi/Lo Bank/Num
Use these parameters to select a different multisample

(drumkit)foreachoftheHighandLowlayers.Formore
information,seeMSHi/LoBank/Numonpage107.
[H/L] Level
These parameters specify the level of each multisam

ple. For more information, see [H/L] Level on
page108.
[H/L] Transpose
These parameters transpose the selected multisample.

Usethemtochangethepitchoftheselectedkey.
0
Notranspositionapplied.
64+63
Transposevalueinsemitones.
[H/L] Tune
Usetheseparameterstofinetunetheassignedsample.
0
Nofinetuning.
99+99
Finetuning value in cents (1/100 of a
semitone).
[H/L] Reverse
The multisample will be played in reverse. For more

informationsee[H/L]Reverseonpage107.
[H/L] Use Offset
These parameters specify the point where the multi

sample(s)willbegintoplay.Formoreinformationsee
[H/L]UseOffsetonpage108.
[H/L] Cutoff
Theseparameterssetthecutofffrequencyforthefilter
appliedtotheselectedsample.
[H/L] Resonance
These parameters set the resonance for the filter

appliedtotheselectedsample.
[H/L] Attack
Theseparametersareanoffsettotheselectedsamples
EGAttack.
109
Page 3 - Pitch
[H/L] Decay
Theseparametersareanoffsettotheselectedsamples
EGDecay.
Velocity Switch
This is the velocity value dividing the High and Low

layersfortheselectedsample/key.Notesstrickenharder
thanthisvaluewillbeplayedbytheHighmultisample.
Single Trigger
PAGE 3 - PITCH
Here you can make pitch settings for each oscillator.
Thesesettingsspecifyhowkeyboardlocationwillaffect
thepitchofeachoscillator,andselectthecontrollersthat
will affect the oscillator pitch and specify the depth of
control.Youcanalsospecifytheamountofpitchchange
produced by the Pitch EG and by LFO1 and LFO2,
switchportamentoon/offandspecifyhowitwillapply.
Use this parameter to set the sample as a singletrig

geredone.
Yes
When the same key (note) is played
repeatedly, the previous note will be
stoppedbeforethenewnoteistriggered,
sothattheywillnotoverlap.
No
When the same key (note) is played
repeatedly, the previous note will not be
stoppedbeforethenewnoteistriggered.
Receive Note On
Use this parameter to enable/disable the reception of

theNoteOn(KeyOn)message.
Yes
TheNoteOnmessageisnormallyreceived.
No
The Note On message is not received.
Therefore,thecorrespondingkeyismuted.
Receive Note Off
Use this parameter to enable/disable the reception of

theNoteOff(KeyOff)message.
Yes
Thesoundwillstopassoonasyourelease
thekey.
No
Thesoundwillcontinueplayinguptothe
endofthesample.TheNoteOffmessage
isignored.
Warning:IftheSingleTriggerparameteris
settoNo,andthesoundislooped,thesound
willplayendlessly.Inanemergencysitua
tion, use the Panic command (see START/
STOPonpage14).
Selected
4buttons.
Slope
Normallyyouwillleavethisparameterat+1.0.Positive
(+)valueswillcausethepitchtoriseasyouplayhigher
notes,andnegative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall
asyouplayhighernotes.
Withavalueof0,therewillbenochangeinpitch,and
theC4pitchwillsoundregardlessofthekeyboard
locationyouplay.
ThediagramshowshowthePitchSlopeandpitchare
related:
Pitch
+2
+1
2oct
Exclusive Group
Exclusive Groups are sets of mutually exclusive keys,

stopping each other. For example, if the Open HiHat
and Closed HiHat are assigned the same Exclusive
Group, playing an Open HiHat will stop the Closed
HiHatplaying.
NoExclusiveGroupassigned.Theselected
None
keywillnotbestoppedbyanyotherkey.
1127
ExclusiveGroupsassignedtotheselected
key.Whenyouplaythiskey,allotherkeys
assignedtothesameExclusiveGroupwill
be stopped, and this key will be stopped
byotherkeysassignedtothesameExclu
siveGroup.
Pan
Thisparametersetsthepositioninthestereopanorama
oftheselectedkey.
Send FX1
This parameter sets the FX1 send level for of the

selectedkey.
Send FX2
This parameter sets the FX2 send level for of the

selectedkey.
1oct
1oct
1
C4 C5
1.0+2.0
Key
Pitchslopevalue.
JS (+X)
This parameter specifies how the pitch will change

whenthejoystickismovedallthewaytotheright.A
settingof12produces1octaveofchange.
Forexampleifyousetthisto+12andmovethejoystick
all the way to the right, the pitch will rise one octave
abovetheoriginalpitch.
60+12
Maximumpitchchangeinsemitones.
JS (X)
This parameter specifies how the pitch will change

whenthejoystickismovedallthewaytotheleft.Aset
tingof12produces1octaveofchange.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethejoystickall
thewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfiveoctavesbelowthe
originalpitch.Thiscanbeusedtosimulatethedownward
swoopsthataguitaristproducesusingthetremoloarm.
60+12
Maximumpitchchangeinsemitones.
110

Page 4 - Pitch LFO1
Pitch modulation
Portamento Time
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)
This parameter selects the source that will modulate

thepitchoftheselectedoscillator.SeeAMS(Alternate
ModulationSource)listonpage123.
Intensity
Thisparameterspecifiesthedepthanddirectionofthe
effectproducedbyAMS.Withasettingof0,nomod
ulation will be applied. With a setting of 12.00, the
pitchwillchangeuptooneoctave.
Forexample,ifyousetAMStoJoystick+Yandpush
thejoystick,thepitchwillriseifthisparameterissettoa
positive(+)value,orfallifthisparameterissettoaneg
ative()value.Therangeisamaximumofoneoctave.
12.00+12.00
Parametervalue.
Pitch EG modulation
This parameter sets the portamento time. Increasing

thevaluewillproduceaslowerchangeinpitch.
000127
PortamentotimeinMIDIvalue.
PAGE 4 - PITCH LFO1

InthispageyoucansettheLFO1modulationparame
tersfortheselectedoscillator.
Selected
EG Intensity
modulation that the pitch EG specified on Page 6
Pitch EG will apply to the pitch. With a setting of
12.00,thepitchwillchangeamaximumof1octave.
12.00+12.00
Parametervalue.
4buttons.
Intensity
This parameter selects the source that will modulate

thepitchEGoftheselectedoscillator.SeeAMS(Alter
nateModulationSource)listonpage123).
This parameter specifies the depth and direction of the

pitchmodulationappliedbytheLFO1settingsyoumade
onPage17LFO1.Withasettingof12.00,amaximum
of1octaveofpitchmodulationwillbeapplied.Nega
tive()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
12.00+12.00
Intensitydepthanddirection.
Intensity (AMS Intensity)
JS+Y (JoyStick +Y)

effect that AMS will have. For example, if you set
AMStoVelocityandsetthisvalueto+12.00,theveloc
itywillcontroltherangeofpitchchangeproducedbythe
pitchEGinarangeof1octave.Asyouplaymoresoftly,
thepitchchangewilldrawclosertothepitchEGlevels.
effectthatjoystickmovementinthe+Ydirection(away
from yourself) will have on the pitch modulation
appliedbytheLFO1.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe+Y
directionwillcausetheLFO1toproducedeeperpitch
modulation. With a setting of 12.00 a maximum of 1
octaveofpitchmodulationwillbeapplied.Negative(
)valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
12.00+12.00
Joystickactiondepth.
EG AMS (EG Alternate Modulation Source)
Pitch change (level)

Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Softly played
(Intensity (Pitch EG) setting)
Note-on
Note-off
Strongly played with

a positive (+) value
Note-off
Strongly played with a

negative () value
Note: Intensity (Pitch EG) and AMS will be added to

determine the depth and direction of the pitch modulation
appliedbythepitchEG.
Portamento
Portamento
This parameter turns the portamento effect (smooth

changeinpitchfromonenotetothenext)on/off,and
specifieshowitwillbeapplied.
Note:PortamentowillalsobeswitchedwhenCC#65(Porta
mentoSW)isreceived.
On
Portamentowillbeapplied.
Off
Portamentowillnotbeapplied.
Pitch LFO1 Level modulation

Thisparameter selects thesource thatwillcontrolthe

depthofpitchmodulationproducedbytheLFO1.See
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)listonpage123.
Intensity
effectthatAMSwillhave.Withasettingof0,modula
tionwillnotbeapplied.Withasettingof12.00,theLFO1
willapplyamaximumof1octaveofpitchmodulation.
Negative()settingswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
ForexampleifAMSissettoJoystick+Yandpushthe
joystick,apositive(+)settingofthisparameterwillcause
thepitchmodulationcreatedbyLFO1tobeappliedwith
the normal phase, and a negative () setting will cause
theLFOtobeappliedwithinvertedphase.
111
Page 5 - Pitch LFO2
TheLFO1Intensity,JS+YandAMSsettingswill
be added to determine the depth and direction of the
pitchmodulationappliedbyLFO1.
12.00+12.00
Parametervalue.
Attack Level
Specifies the amount of pitch change when the attack

timehaselapsed.
Release Level
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangewhentherelease
timehaselapsed.
PAGE 5 - PITCH LFO2
Attack/Decay/Release Time
InthispageyoucansettheLFO2modulationparame
ters for the selected oscillator. See Page 4 Pitch
LFO1forinformationonthevariousparameters.
Theseparametersspecifythetimeoverwhichthepitch
changewilloccur.
099
Parametervalue.
Attack Time
Specifies the time over which the pitch will change

fromnoteonuntilitreachesthepitchspecifiedasthe
attacklevel.
Decay Time

after reachingthe attacklevel until itreachesthe nor
malpitch.
Release Time
PAGE 6 - PITCH EG
HereyoucanmakesettingsforthepitchEG,whichcre
atestimevariantchangesinthepitchoftheoscillators.
The depth of pitch change produced by these EG set
tings on the oscillators is adjusted by the Intensity
(AMS1/2Intensity)parameter(seepage111).

fromnoteoffuntilitreachesthepitchspecifiedasthe
releaselevel.
Pitch EG Level modulation

Pitch EG change (level) (AMS=JS-Y/Velocity, Intensity= positive (+) value
Note-on
Note-on
A note played softly with

Start Level Swing set at 0,
Attack Level Swing set to +,
the Joystick pulled on
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
A note played strongly with

Start Level Swing set to 0,
Attack Level Swing set to +,
Note-off

Start Level Swing set to 0,
Attack Level Swing set to ,
AMS1/2 (L) (Alternate Modulation Source 1/2)
Theseparametersselectthesourcethatwillcontrolthe
pitchEGLevelparameters(AMS(AlternateModu
lationSource)listonpage123).
Pitch envelope
Intensity (AMS1/2 Intensity)
Time-varying pitch settings (when Pitch EG Intensity = +12.00)

+99 = approximately 1 octave Attack Level
Note-off
Note-on
0 = pitch when
key is held
(sustained)
Start Level
Time
Release Level
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
99 = approximately 1 octave
Release Time
Start/Attack/Decay/Release Level
Theseparametersspecifytheamountofpitchchange.
Theactualamountofpitchchangewilldependonthe
Intensity (AMS1/2 Intensity) parameter (see below).
For example, with an Intensity setting of +12.00, a
Levelsettingof+99wouldraisethepitchoneoctave,
andaLevelsettingof99wouldlowerthepitchone
octave.
Parametervalue.
99+99
Start Level
Specifiestheamountofpitchchangeatnoteon.
These parameters specify the depth and direction of

the effect applied by AMS1. With a setting of 0, the
levelsspecifiedby Start/Attack/Decay/ReleaseLevel
willbeused.
ForexampleifAMS1isJoystick+Y,pushingthejoy
sticktoturnitonwillchangetheLevelparametersof
the Pitch EG. As the absolute value of Intensity is
increased,thepitchEGlevelswillchangemoregreatly
when the joystick is released. The direction of the
changeisspecifiedbyStartLevelSwingandAttack
Level Swing. When the key pressure is released, the
pitchEGlevelswillreturntotheirownsettings.
IfAMS1issettoVelocity,increasingtheabsolutevalue
ofIntensitywillproduceincreasinglywiderchangein
pitchEGlevelsforstronglyplayednotes.Thedirection
of the change is specified by Start Level Swing and
AttackLevelSwing.Asyouplaymoresoftly,thepitch
changewilldrawclosertothepitchEGlevels.
99+99
Parametervalue.
112

Page 7 - Filter
Start Level Swing
This parameter specifies the direction of change in

Start Level caused by AMS1/2. If Intensity is a
positive(+)value,asettingof+willraisetheEGlevel,
and a setting of will decrease it. With a setting of 0
therewillbenochange.
Attack Level Swing
PAGE 7 - FILTER
Here youcanmakesettingsfor thefiltersthatwill be
used by the oscillators. You can select either a 24 dB/
octave low pass filter with resonance, or a series con
nection of a 12 dB/octave low pass filter and a 12 dB/
octavehighpassfilter.
This parameter specifies the direction of change in

AttackLevelcausedbyAMS1/2.IfIntensityisa
positive(+)value,asettingof+willraisetheEGlevel,
and a setting of will decrease it. With a setting of 0
therewillbenochange.
Pitch EG Time modulation

Pitch EG changes (Time) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = positive (+) value)
Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Selected
Note-off
4buttons.
A note played softly with Attack A note played strongly with
Ti
S i
tt + d
Att k Ti S i
tt +

d Att k Ti S i
tt
AMS(T) (Alternate Modulation Source)
This parameter selectsthe source that will controlthe

Time parameters of the pitch EG (see AMS (Alter
nateModulationSource)listonpage123).
Intensity (AMS(T) Intensity)
effectthatAMSwillhaveontheTimeparameters.
With a setting of 0, the pitch EG times will be just as
specifiedbytheAttack/Decay/ReleaseTimesettings.
Thealternatemodulationvalueatthemomentthatthe
EGreacheseachpointwilldeterminetheactualvalue
oftheEGtimethatcomesnext.
Forexample,thedecaytimewillbedeterminedbythe
alternate modulation value at the moment that the
attacklevelisreached.
Whenthisparameterissettovaluesof16,33,49,66,82,
or99,thespecifiedEGtimeswillspeedupasmuchas
2,4,8,16,32,or64timesrespectively(orsloweddown
to1/2,1/4,1/8,1/16,1/32,or1/64oftheoriginaltime).
ForexampleifAMSissettoVelocity,increasingthe
absolute value of Intensity will allow strongly
played notes to increase the changes in pitch EG
Timevalues.Thedirectionofthechangeisspecified
byAttackTimeSwingandDecayTimeSwing.As
you play more softly, the pitch EG times will more
closelyapproachtheactualsettingsofthepitchEG.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Attack Time Swing
This parameter specifies the direction in which AMS

will affect the Attack Time parameter. With positive
(+)valuesofIntensity,asettingof+willcausethetime
tobelengthened,andasettingofwillcausethetimeto
beshortened.Withasettingof0therewillbenochange.
Decay Time Swing
Specify the direction in which AMS will affect the

DecayTime.Withpositive(+)valuesofIntensity,a
settingof+willcausethetimetobelengthened,anda
settingofwillcausethetimetobeshortened.Witha
settingof0therewillbenochange.
Filter Type
Thisparameterselectsthetypeoffilter(LowPassRes
onant,LowPass&HighPass)fortheselectedoscilla
tor. When the Low Pass & High Pass filter type is
selected,thefilterBwillbeactivated.
Low Pass Resonance: 24 dB/octave low
pass filter with resonance
Low Pass & High Pass: 12 dB/octave
low pass filter and 12 dB/octave high pass
filter in series
Trim
Use this parameter to adjust the level at which the

audiosignaloutputfromtheselectedoscillatorisinput
tofilterA.
Note:Ifthisvalueisraised,thesoundmaydistortifReso
nanceissettoahighvalueorwhenyouplayachord.
Trimlevel.
0099
Frequency A (Cutoff Frequency A)
This parameter specifies the cutoff frequency of filter

A.
Low Pass
Level
0099
This is a filter that cuts the

high-frequency region above the cutoff
frequency.
This is the most common type of filter,
and is used to cut part of the overtone
12dB/oct
components, making an originally bright
24dB/oct
timbre sound more mellow (darker).
When the Filter Type is Low Pass
Frequency Resonance, the cutoff will have a
steeper slope.
Cutofffrequencyvalue.
Resonance A
The resonance emphasizes the overtone components

that lie in the region of the cutoff frequency specified
by Frequency, producing a more distinctive sound.
Increasingthisvaluewillproduceastrongereffect.
0099
Resonancevalue.
113
Page 8 - Filter Modulation
Resonance modulation
Selected
4buttons.
The effect of resonance

Low Pass
Level
Filter keyboard tracking

Tracking Low/High
Low resonance value
High resonance value
Selects the source that will control the Resonance

level.SeeAMS(AlternateModulationSource)liston
page123.
effect that AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) will
have on the resonance level specified by Resonance
A.
For example if Velocity has been selected, changes in
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.
Withpositive(+)values,theresonancewillincreaseas
you play more strongly, and as you play more softly
theresonancewillapproachthelevelspecifiedbythe
Resonancesetting.
Withnegative()values,theresonancewilldecreaseas
you play more strongly, and as you play more softly
theresonancewillapproachthelevelspecifiedbythe
Resonancesetting.
TheresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingtheRes
onanceandIntensity(AMSIntensity)values.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Thesesettingsspecifykeyboardtrackingforthecutoff
frequency of the filter for the selected oscillator. The
way in which the cutoff frequency is affected by the
keyboard location you play can be specified by the
Tracking Low, Tracking High, Ramp Low and
RampHighparameters.
C1G9
Lowest/Highestnoteintherange.
Tracking Low
Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the

specifiednotenumber.
Tracking High
Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the

Ramp
Thisparameterspecifiestheangleofkeyboardtracking.
99+99
Anglevalue.
Here is how cutoff frequency is affected by keyboard
location and the Ramp setting (Intensity to A and
IntensitytoB=+50):
Cutoff frequency
High Ramp=+99
High Ramp=+62
High Ramp=0
High Ramp=43
Low Ramp=+99
Filter B
Low Ramp=+43
Frequency B (Cutoff Frequency B)
Low Ramp=0
ThisparameterspecifiesthecutofffrequencyoffilterB.
ThisparameterwillbedisplayedwhenFilterTypeis
settoLowPass&HighPass.
Low Ramp=62
Low Key
High Key
Key
Low Ramp=99
Ramp Low
Ramp High
High Pass
Level
This filter cuts the low-frequency range that
lies below the cutoff frequency. By cutting
the lower overtones, it lightens the tone.
12dB/oct
Frequency
0099
High Ramp=99
Cutofffrequencyvalue.
PAGE 8 - FILTER MODULATION

These settings let you apply modulation to the cutoff
frequency (Frequency) of the filter for the selected
oscillatortomodifythetone.
If Intensity to Aand Intensity toB areset to+50,

Ramp Low is set to 62 and Ramp High is set to
+62, the angle of the change in cutoff frequency will
correspond to the keyboard location (pitch). This
means that the oscillation that occurs when you
increasetheResonanceAwillcorrespondtothekey
boardlocation.
IfyousetRampLowto+43andRampHighto43,
thecutofffrequencywillnotbeaffectedbykeyboard
location.Usethissettingwhenyoudonotwantthe
cutofffrequencytochangeforeachnote.
Tracking to A/B
WhenFilterTypeisLowPassResonance,parameters
forfilterBwillnotbeeditable(greyedout).
These parameters specify the note numbers at which

keyboard tracking will begin to apply, and set the
Intensity to A and Intensity to B parameters to
specify the depth and direction of the change applied
tofiltersAandB.
For the range of notes between Key Low and Key
High, the cutoff frequency will change according to
thekeyboardlocation(pitch).
99+99
Parametervalue.
114

Page 9 - Filter LFO1
Filter EG modulation
Intensity to B
Changes in cutoff frequency

Note-on
Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Softly played
Note-off
Strongly played
Setting to +
Note-off
Strongly played
Setting to
Velocity to A
effect that velocity will have on the timevarying
changes created by the filter EG (as set on Page 11
FilterEG)tocontrolthefilterAcutofffrequency.
With positive (+) values, playing more strongly will
causethefilterEGtoproducegreaterchangesincutoff
frequency. With negative () values, playing more
stronglywillalsocausethefilterEGtoproducegreater
changesincutofffrequency,butwiththepolarityofthe
EGinverted.
99+99
ValueoftheVelocitytoAparameter.
Velocity to B
effect that velocity will have on the timevarying
changes createdbythefilterEGtocontrolthefilter B
cutofffrequency(seeVelocitytoA).
99+99
ValueoftheVelocitytoBparameter.
EG Intensity to A
Specifiesthedepthanddirectionoftheeffectthatthe
timevarying changes created by the filter 1 EG will
haveonthefilterAcutofffrequency.
With positive (+) settings, the sound will become
brighter when the EG levels set by Filter EG Level
andTimeparametersareinthe+area,anddarker
whentheyareinthearea.
With negative () settings, the sound will become
darkerwhentheEGlevelssetbyFilterEGLeveland
Time parameters are in the + area, and brighter
whentheyareinthearea.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Specifies the depth and direction of the effect that

AMSwillhaveonfilterB.Fordetailsonhowthiswill
apply,refertoEGIntensitytoA.
Note:ThesumofthesettingsforVelocitytoA/B,Inten
sitytoA/B,and(AMS)IntensitytoA/Bwilldetermine
thedepthanddirectionoftheeffectproducedbythefilterEG.
Filter A/B modulation

AMS1(fA/B) (Alternate Modulation Source1 for filter A/B)
Selects the source that will control modulation of the

filterAcutofffrequency.SeeAMS(AlternateModula
tionSource)listonpage123.
Note:ThefilterBparameterswillbedisplayedwhenFilter
Typeonpage112isLowPass&HighPass.
Intensity

AMS1willhave.
When AMS1 is JS X, a positive (+) value for this
parameterwillcausethecutofffrequencytorisewhen
the joystick is moved toward the right, and fall when
thejoystickismovedtowardtheleft.Withanegative(
)valueforthisparameter,theoppositewilloccur.
ThisvalueisaddedtothesettingoftheFilterAFre
quency.
AMS2 (Alternate Modulation Source2)
Selects the source that will control modulation of the

filterAcutofffrequency(seeAMS(AlternateModula
tionSource)listonpage123).
Intensity
selectedsourcewillhave(seeIntensityonpage114).
PAGE 9 - FILTER LFO1

HereyoucanusethefilterLFOtoapplycyclicmodula
tiontothecutofffrequencyofthefilter(fortheselected
oscillator)tocreatecyclicalchangesintone.
EG Intensity to B
timevaryingchangescreatedbythefilterEGwillhave
on the filter B cutoff frequency (see EG Intensity to
A).
99+99
Parametervalue.
EG AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)
Selectsthesourcethatwillcontrolthedepthanddirec
tion of the effect that the timevarying changes pro
ducedbythefilterEGwillhaveonthecutofffrequency
of filters A and B. See AMS (Alternate Modulation
Source)listonpage123.
Intensity to A

AMS will have on filter A. For details on how this
willapply,refertoEGIntensitytoA.
Selected
4buttons.
Intensity to A
Specifies the depth and direction of the modulation

that LFO1 (set on Page 17 LFO1) will have on the
cutoff frequency of filter A. Negative () settings will
invertthephase.
99+99
Parametervalue.
115
Page 10 - Filter LFO2
Intensity to B
Specifythedepthanddirectionofthemodulationthat
LFO1willhaveonthecutofffrequencyoffilterB(see
IntensitytoA).
Change in cutoff
Low setting
99+99
PAGE 11 - FILTER EG
Here you can make settings for the EG that will pro
duce timevarying changes in the cutoff frequency of
filtersAandBfortheselectedoscillator.Thedepthof
theeffectthatthesesettingswillhaveonthefiltercut
off frequency is determined by the Velocity and
Intensityparameters.
High setting
Parametervalue.
Joystick Y to A
BymovingthejoystickintheYdirection(towardyour
self),youcancontrolthedepthatwhichLFO1modu
lates the cutoff frequency of filter A. This parameter
specifiesthedepthanddirectionofthecontrol.
Highersettingsofthisparameterwillproducegreater
increases in the effect of LFO1 on the filter when the
joystickismovedtowardyourself.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Joystick Y to B
BymovingthejoystickintheYdirection(towardyour
self),youcancontrolthedepthatwhichLFO1modu
lates the cutoff frequency of filter B. This parameter
specifies the depth and direction of the control (see
JoystickYtoA).
Filter LFO1 modulation
Selected
4buttons.
Filter envelope
Attack Level
Note-on
The specified
cutoff
frequency
Selectasourcethatwillcontrolthedepthanddirection
ofcutofffrequencychangeforbothfiltersAandB.See
AMS(AlternateModulationSource)list.
Intensity to A

AMSwillhaveonfilterA.
ForexampleifAMSisJoystick+Y,highersettingsof
thisparameterwillallowgreaterchangetobeapplied
toLFO1whenyoupushthejoystick.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Intensity to B
Note-off
Sustain Level
Release
Level
Break
Point
Level
Start
Level
Attack
Time
Decay
Time
Time
Slope
Time
Release
Time
Start/Attack/Break/Sustain/Release Level
These are the envelope segment levels. The result will

dependonthefilterthatwasselectedinFilterType.For
example,withtheLowPassResonancefilter,positive(+)
valuesofEGIntensitywillcausethetonetobebrightened
bypositive(+)levels,anddarkenedbynegative()levels.
99+99
Levelvalue.
Start Level
Thisparameterspecifiesthechangeincutofffrequency
atthetimeofnoteon.

AMSwillhaveonfilterB(seeIntensitytoA).
Attack Level
PAGE 10 - FILTER LFO2
Break Point Level
Adjuststhedepthofthecyclicmodulationappliedby
LFO2(setonPage18LFO2)tothecutofffrequency
offiltersAandB.Formoreinformationontheparame
tersseePage9FilterLFO1onpage114.
Sustain Level
aftertheattacktimehaselapsed.
afterthedecaytimehaselapsed.
that will be maintained from after the slope time has
elapseduntilnoteoffoccurs.
Release Level
thatwilloccurwhenthereleasetimehaselapsed.
Attack/Decay/Slope/Release Time
Theseparametersspecifythetimeoverwhichthefilter
changewilloccur.
099
Timevalue.
116

Page 11 - Filter EG
Filter EG Time modulation
Attack Time
This parameter specifies the time over which the level

willchangefromnoteonuntiltheattacklevelisreached.
Filter 1 EG changes (Time) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)

Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Decay Time
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
This parameter specifies the time over which the level

willchangefromtheattackleveltothebreakpointlevel.
Slope Time
Thisparameterspecifiesthetimeoverwhichthelevel
willchange afterthe decay time has elapsed until the
sustainlevelisreached.
Release Time
Thisparameterspecifiesthetimeoverwhichthelevel
willchangeafternoteonoccursuntilthereleaselevel
isreached.
Filter EG Level modulation

Filter 1 EG changes (level) (AMS = Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)
Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
Strongly played note with Start

Strongly played note with Start
Softly played note with Start
Level Swing, Attack Level Swing, Level Swing, Attack Level Swing, Level Swing, Attack Level Swing,
and Break Level Swing set to + and Break Level Swing set to + and Break Level Swing set to
AMS(L) (Alternate Modulation Source)
This parameter selectsthe source that will controlthe

Level parameters of the filter EG (AMS (Alternate
ModulationSource)listonpage123).

effectappliedbyAMS.Withasettingof0,thelevelsspec
ifiedbyFrequencyA(CutoffFrequencyA)willbeused.
For example, if AMS is Velocity, and you set Start
LevelSwing,AttackLevelSwingandBreakLevel
Swingto+andsetIntensitytoapositive(+)value,
the EG levels will rise as you play more strongly. If
Intensityissettoanegative()values,theEGlevels
willfallasyouplaymorestrongly.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
Start Level Swing
ThisparameterspecifiesthedirectioninwhichAMS
willaffectStartLevel.WhenIntensityhasaposi
tive (+) value, a setting of + for this parameter will
allow AMS to raise the EG level, and a setting of
willallowAMStolowertheEGlevel.Withasetting
of0therewillbenochange.
Attack Level Swing
willaffectAttackLevel.WhenIntensityhasaposi
tive (+) value, a setting of + for this parameter will
Break Level Swing
willaffectBreakPointLevel.WhenIntensityhasa
positive(+)value,asettingof+forthisparameterwill
Strongly played note with

Softly played note with Attack, Strongly played note with
Attack, Decay, Slope and
Decay, Slope and Release
Release Level Swings set to + Release Level Swings set to
Level Swings set to +
AMS1/2(T)
Usethisparametertoselectthesourcethatwillcontrol
the Time parameters of the filter EG. See AMS
(AlternateModulationSource)listonpage123.
Intensity
effectthatAMS1/2(T)willhave.
Forexample,ifAMS1/2(T)issettoFltKTr+/+,theEG
TimeparameterswillbecontrolledbytheKeyboard
Tracking settings. With positive (+) values of this
parameter,positive(+)valuesofRampwilllengthen
the EG times, and negative () values of Ramp will
shortentheEGtimes.Thedirectionofchangeisspeci
fied by Attack Time Swing, Decay Time Swing,
SlopeTimeSwing,andReleaseTimeSwing.
Withasettingof0,thetimesspecifiedbyFrequencyA
(CutoffFrequencyA)willbeused.
IfAMS1/2(T)issettoVelocity,positive(+)valuesof
thisparameterwillcauseEGtimestolengthenasyou
playmorestrongly,andnegative()valueswillcause
EGtimestoshortenasyouplaymorestrongly.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
Attack Time Swing
ThisparameterspecifiesthedirectioninwhichAMS1/
2(T)willaffecttheattacktime.Withpositive(+)values
of Intensity, setting this parameter to + will allow
AMStolengthenthetime,andsettingthisparameterto
willallowAMStoshortenthetime.Withasettingof
0therewillbenochange.
Decay Time Swing
2(T)willaffectthedecaytime.Withpositive(+)values
Slope Time Swing
2(T)willaffecttheslopetime.Withpositive(+)values
Release Time Swing
2(T)willaffectthereleasetime.Withpositive(+)val
uesofIntensity,settingthisparameterto+willallow
117
Page 12 - Amp
PAGE 12 - AMP
PAGE 13 - AMP MODULATION
These parameters control the volume and pan of the

selectedoscillator.
Thesesettingsallowyoutoapplymodulationtoamp
(foreachoscillator)tomodulatethevolume.
Selected
Selected
4buttons.
4buttons.
Level
Volumeoftheselectedoscillator.
Note:ThevolumeofaProgramcanbecontrolledbyCC#7
(volume)and#11(expression).Theresultinglevelisdeter
mined by multiplying the values of CC#7 and #11. The
GlobalMIDIchannelisusedforcontrol.
0127
Volumelevel.
Pan
Pan(stereoposition)oftheselectedoscillator.
This parameter is not available when editing a Drum
Program. Use the individual Pan control for each key
(seePanonpage109).
Random
The sound will be heard from a different
locationateachnoteon.
L001
Placesthesoundatfarleft.
C064
Placesthesoundinthecenter.
R127
Placesthesoundtofarright.
Note:ThiscanbecontrolledbyCC#10(panpot).ACC#10
valueof0or1willplacethesoundatthefarleft,avalueof
64willplacethesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythePan
settingforeachoscillator,andavalueof127willplacethe
soundatthefarright.ThisiscontrolledontheglobalMIDI
channel.
Amplifier keyboard tracking

Theseparametersletyouusekeyboardtrackingtoadjust
thevolumeoftheselectedoscillator.UsetheKeyand
Ramp parameters to specify how the volume will be
affectedbythekeyboardlocationthatyouplay.
Tracking Low/High
These settings specify the note number at which key

boardtrackingwillbegintoapply.Thevolumewillnot
changebetweenTrackingLowandTrackingHigh.
C1G9
Lowest/Highestnoteintherange.
Tracking Low
Keyboard tracking will apply to the range below the

Tracking High
Keyboard tracking will apply to the range above the

Ramp
Theseparametersspecifytheangleofkeyboardtrack
ing.
99+99
Anglevalue.
Here is an example of volume changes produced by
keyboardlocationandRampsettings:
Volume
Pan modulation
Selects the source that will modify pan (see AMS

(AlternateModulationSource)listonpage123).This
changewillberelativetothePansetting.
Ramp Low=+99
Ramp High=+99
Ramp Low=0
Ramp High=0
Ramp Low=99
Ramp High=99
Intensity
Specifies the depth of the effect produced by AMS.

Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSisNote
Number, positive (+) values of this parameter will
causethesoundto movetowardtherightas thenote
numbersincreasebeyondtheC4note(i.e.,asyouplay
higher), and toward the left as the note numbers
decrease(i.e.,asyouplaylower).Negative()valuesof
thisparameterwillhavetheoppositeeffect.
99+99
Parametervalue.
Key Low
Key High
Key
Ramp Low
Withpositive(+)valuesofthisparameter,thevolume
will increase as you play notes below the Tracking
Low note number. With negative () values, the vol
umewilldecrease.
Ramp High
Withpositive(+)valuesofthisparameter,thevolume
willincreaseasyouplaynotesabovetheKeyHigh
notenumber.Withnegative()values,thevolumewill
decrease.
118

Page 14 - Amp LFO1
Amplifier Modulation
Intensity
These parameters specify how the volume of the

selectedoscillatorwillbeaffectedbyvelocity.
Velocity Intensity
With positive (+) values, the volume will increase as

you play more strongly. With negative () values, the
volumewilldecreaseasyouplaymorestrongly.
effect that LFO1 will have on the volume of the
selected oscillator. Negative () values will invert the
LFOwaveform.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
Amplifier LFO1 modulation
Volume change (with positive (+) values of this parameter)

Note-on
Note-off
Softly played
99+99
Note-on
Note-off
Strongly played
Intensityvalue.
EG AMS (Alternate Modulation Source)
Selects the source that will control the volume of the

amp for the selected oscillator (See AMS (Alternate
ModulationSource)listonpage123).Velocitycan
notbeselected.
Intensity
effectthatAMSwillhave.Theactualvolumewillbe
determined by multiplying the value of the changes
producedbytheampEGwiththevaluesofAlternate
Modulation etc., and if the levels of the amp EG are
low, the modulation applied by Alternate Modulation
willalsobeless.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoJoystick+Y,positive(+)
values of this parameter will cause the volume to
increasewhenyoupushthejoystick.HoweveriftheEG
settingsetc.havealreadyraisedthevolumetoitsmaxi
mumlevel,thevolumecannotbeincreasedfurther.
Withnegative()valuesofthisparameter,thevolume
willdecreasewhenthejoystickispushed.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
Use this parameter to select a source that will control

thedepthbywhichLFO1willmodulatethevolume
oftheselectedoscillator.SeeAMS(AlternateModula
tionSource)listonpage123.
Intensity
As the absolute value of this setting is increased, the

effectofAMSonLFO1willincrease.Negative()
valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
PAGE 15 - AMP LFO2

These parameters let you use LFO1 (see Page 17
LFO1onpage120)andLFO2(seePage18LFO2
on page122) to control theselected oscillator volume.
See Page 14 Amp LFO1 for more information on
parametersediting.
PAGE 14 - AMP LFO1
PAGE 16 - AMP EG
These parameters let you use LFO1 (see Page 17

LFO1onpage120)andLFO2(seePage18LFO2on
page122)tocontrolthevolumeoftheselectedoscillator.
These parameters let you create timevarying changes

inthevolumeoftheselectedoscillator.
Selected
Selected
4buttons.
4buttons.
119
Page 16 - Amp EG
Amp envelope
Amp EG Level modulation
Amplifier EG
Note-on
Amp 1 EG changes (Level) (AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value)
Note-off
Attack Level
Note-on
Break Point
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
Sustain
Level
Start
Level
Attack
Time
Note-on
Note-off
Volume
Time
Decay Slope
Time Time
Softly played note when Start

Level Swing=0 and Attack Level
Swing and Breack Level Swing
are set to +
Strongly played note when

Start Level Swing=0 and Attack
Level Swing and Breack Level
Swing are set to +
Strongly played note when

Start Level Swing=0 and Attack
Level Swing and Breack Level
Swing are set to +
Release Time
AMS(L) (Alternate Modulation Source)
Theseparametersaretheleveloftheenvelopesegment.
099
Levelvalue.
Thisparameterspecifiesthesourcethatwillcontrolthe
Level parameters of the amp EG. See AMS (Alter
nateModulationSource)listonpage123.
Start Level
Intensity
Thisparameterspecifiesthevolumelevelatnoteon.If
youwantthenotetobeginataloudlevel,setthistoa
highvalue.
effectthatAMS willhave. For example,if AMS is
Velocity, setting Start Level Swing, Attack Level
SwingandBreakPointLevelSwingto+andsetting
Intensity to a positive (+) value will cause the amp
EG volume levels to increase as you play more
strongly. Setting Intensity to a negative () values
willcausetheampEGvolumelevelstodecreaseasyou
playmorestrongly.Withasettingof0,thelevelswill
beasspecifiedonPage16AmpEG.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
Start/Attack/Break/Sustain/Release Level
Attack Level
This parameter specifies the volume level that will be

reachedaftertheattacktimehaselapsed.
Break Level

reachedafterthedecaytimehaselapsed.
Sustain Level

maintainedfromaftertheslopetimehaselapseduntil
noteoffoccurs.
Start Level Swing
Theseparametersspecifythetimeoverwhichthevol
umechangewilloccur.
099
Timevalue.
willchangeStartLevel.IfIntensityissettoaposi
tive (+) value, setting this parameter to + will allow
AMStoincreasetheEGlevel,andsettingthisparame
tertowillallowAMStodecreasetheEGlevel.Witha
settingof0,nochangewilloccur.
Attack Time
Attack Level Swing
Thisparameterspecifiesthetimeoverwhichthevolume
willchangeafternoteonuntilitreachestheattacklevel.
Ifthestartlevelis0,thiswillbetherisetimeofthesound.
willchangeAttackLevel.IfIntensityissettoapos
itive (+) value, setting this parameter to + will allow
Attack/Decay/Slope/Release Time
Decay Time
This parameter specifies the time over which the vol

umewillchangefromwhenitreachestheattacklevel
untilitreachesthebreakpointlevel.
Slope Time

umewillchangefromwhenitreachesthebreakpoint
leveluntilitreachesthesustainlevel.
Release Time

umewillchangeafternoteoffuntilitreaches0.
Break Point Level Swing
willchangeBreakLevel.IfIntensityissettoapos
itive (+) value, setting this parameter to + will allow
120

Page 17 - LFO1
Amp EG Time modulation
Slope Time Swing
Theseparametersletyouuseanalternatemodulation
sourcetomodifytheampEGtimesthatwerespecified
inAttack/Decay/Slope/ReleaseTimeonpage119.
Amp 1 EG changes (Time)
(AMS=Amp KTrk +/+, Intensity = a positive (+) value)
(When Amp Keyboard Track Low Ramp= a positive (+) value, and
High Ramp = a positive (+) value)
Note-on
Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
Note-off
Low-pitched note played with High -pitched note played with

Attack, Decay, Slope, and
Attack, Decay, Slope, and
Release Time Swing at +
Release Time Swing at
Amp 1 EG changes (Time) (AMS=Velocity, Intensity= a positive (+) value)
Note-on
Note-on
Note-off
Note-on
Note-off
Note-off
Thisparameterspecifiesthedirectionoftheeffectthat
AMS1 will have on Slope Time. With positive (+)
values of Intensity, setting this parameter to + will
allow AMS1 to lengthen the time, and setting it to
willallowAMS1toshortenthetime.Withasettingof0
therewillbenoeffect.
Release Time
AMS1willhaveonReleaseTime.Withpositive(+)
AMS2 (Alternate Modulation Source 2)
This is another alternate modulation source for the

AmpEG.SeeaboveAMS1parameters.
Softly played note with


Release Time Swing at
AMS1(T) (Alternate Modulation Source 1 - Time)
Thisparameterspecifiesthesourcethatwillcontrolthe
Time parameters of the amp EG (see AMS (Alter
nateModulationSource)listonpage123).Withaset
tingofOff,therewillbenomodulation.
Intensity
effect that AMS1 will have. For example, if
AMS1(T) is Amp KTrk +/+, the (Amp) Keyboard
Track settings (see Amplifier keyboard tracking on
page117)willcontroltheEGTimeparameters.With
positive(+)valuesofthisparameter,positive(+)values
of Ramp (Ramp Setting) will cause EG times to be
lengthened, and negative () values of Ramp (Ramp
Setting) will cause EG times to be shortened. The
direction of the change is specified by Attack Time
Swing, Decay Time Swing, Slope Time Swing,
andReleaseTime.
When AMS1(T) is Velocity, positive (+) values will
causeEGtimestolengthenasyouplaymorestrongly,
andnegative()valueswillcauseEGtimestoshorten
asyouplaymorestrongly.Withasettingof0,theEG
times will be as specified by the Amp envelope
parameters(seepage119).
Attack Time Swing
AMS1willhaveonAttackTime.Withpositive(+)
PAGE 17 - LFO1
Inthisandthenextpageyoucanmakesettingsforthe
LFOthatcanbeusedtocyclicallymodulatethePitch,
Filter, and Amp of each oscillator. There are two LFO
units for each oscillator. By setting the LFO1 or LFO2
Intensity to a negative () value for Pitch, Filter, or
Amp,youcaninverttheLFOwaveform.
Wave
This parameter selects the LFO waveform. The num

bersthatappearattherightofsomeoftheLFOwave
forms indicate the phase at which the waveform will
begin.
Triangle
Triangle
90
Triangle
Random
Saw
Step Triangle 4
Triangle wave
Step Triangle 6
Phase will change

randomly at each key-in
Step Saw 4
Step Saw 6
Sawtooth down
Saw
180
Square
Square wave
Sine
Sine wave
Guitar
Guitar vibrato
Decay Time Swing
Exponential
Triangle
AMS1willhaveonDecayTime.Withpositive(+)
Exponential
Saw Down
Exponential
Saw Up
Random1 (S/H):
Conventional sample & hold (S/H) in which the
level changes randomly at fixed intervals of
time
Random2 (S/H):
Both the levels and the time intervals will
change randomly.
Random3 (S/H):
The maximum level and minimum level will
alternate at random intervals of time (i.e., a
square wave with random period).
Random4 (Vector)
Random5 (Vector)
Random6 (Vector)
These types cause Random 13 to change
smoothly. They can be used to simulate the
instability of acoustic instruments etc.
Frequency
SettheLFOfrequency.Asettingof99isthefastest.
0099
Frequencyrate.
121
Page 17 - LFO1
Key Sync
Base Note/Times
ThisparameterspecifiesiftheLFOissynchronizedto
keystrokes.
On
The LFO will start each time you play a
note, and an independent LFO will oper
ateforeachnote.
Off
The LFO effect that was started by the
firstplayed note will continue to be
applied to each newlyplayed note. (In
thiscase, DelayandFadewill beapplied
onlytotheLFOwhenitisfirststarted).
WhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn,theseparametersset
anotelengthrelativeto(Tempo)andthemultiple
(Times) that will be applied to it. These parameters
willdeterminethefrequencyoftheLFO1.Forexample
ifBaseNoteis(quarternote)andTimesis04,the
LFOwillperformonecycleeveryfourbeats.
Even if you change the (Tempo) setting of
Sequencer 1, the LFO will always perform one cycle
everyfourbeats.
Offset

Program.
, ,, ,, ,,

Notevalue.
This parameter specifies the central value of the LFO

waveform.Forexample,withasettingof0asshownin
the following diagram, the vibrato that is applied will
becenteredonthenoteonpitch.Withasettingof+99,
the vibrato will only raise the pitch above the noteon
pitch,inthewayinwhichvibratoisappliedonaguitar.
When Wave is set to Guitar, the modulation will
occuronlyinthepositive(+)directionevenifyouset
Offsetto0.
Hereareoffsetsettingsandpitchchangeproducedby
vibrato
Pitch
offset = 99
offset = 0
offset = +99
Offsetvalue.
Delay
This parameter specifies the time from noteon until

theLFOeffectbeginstoapply.WhenKeySyncisOff,
thedelaywillapplyonlywhentheLFOisfirststarted.
099
Delaytime.
Fade In
This parameterspecifiesthetime fromwhen theLFO

begins to apply until it reaches the maximum ampli
tude.WhenKeySync.isOff,thefadewillapplyonly
whentheLFOisfirststarted.
Here is how Fade In affects the LFO (when Key
SyncisOn):
Note-on
Note-off
Fade
Delay
0099
Times

Program.
01...16
Beatsbeforerestartingthecycle.
Frequency modulation
Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsourcestoadjust
thespeedoftheLFO1fortheselectedoscillator.
AMS1(F) (Alternate Modulation Source1)
Pitch at note-on
99+99
Base Note
Faderate.
Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync

MIDI/Tempo Sync
Thisparameterenables/disablestheLFOsynchroniza
tionwithSequencer1Tempo.
The LFO frequency will synchronize to
On
thetempo(MIDIClock)ofSequencer1.In
thiscase,thevaluesyouspecifiedforFre
quency (see page120) and Frequency
modulation (see page121) will be
ignored.
Selectsthesourcethatwilladjustthefrequencyofthe
selectedoscillatorLFO1(seeAMS(AlternateModula
tionSource)listonpage123).LFO1canbemodulated
byLFO2.
Intensity (AMS1 Intensity)
effectthatAMS1(F)willhave.Whenthisparameteris
set to a value of 16, 33, 49, 66, 82, or 99, the LFO fre
quencybeingcanbeincreasedbyamaximumof2,4,8,
16,32,or64timesrespectively(ordecreasedby1/2,1/4,
1/8,1/16,1/32,or1/64respectively).
Forexample,ifAMS1(F)isNoteNumber,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillcausetheoscillatorLFOto
speedupasyouplayhighernotes.Negative()values
willcausetheoscillatorLFOtoslowdownasyouplay
higher notes. This change will be centered on the C4
note.
If AMS1(F) is set to JS +Y, raising the value of this
parameter will cause the oscillator LFO1 speed to
increase as the joystick is moved away from yourself.
With a setting of +99, moving the joystick all the way
away from yourself will increase the LFO speed by
approximately64times.
99+99
Intensityvalue.
AMS2(F) (Alternate Modulation Source2)
Intensity (AMS2 Intensity)
Makesettingsforasecondalternatemodulationsource
that will adjust the frequency of the oscillator LFO1
(seeaboveAMS1(F)(AlternateModulationSource1)
andIntensity(AMS1Intensity)).
122

Page 18 - LFO2
PAGE 18 - LFO2
HereyoucanmakesettingsfortheLFO2,whichisthe
secondLFOthatcanbeappliedtotheselectedoscilla
tor.SeePage17LFO1formoreinformationonthe
parametersvalue.
HoweverinFrequencymodulation,theLFOcannot
be selected as a modulation source in AMS1 or
AMS2.
PAGE 19 - EFFECTS
HereyoucanselecttwoeffectsforthewholeProgram,
switchthemon/off,andspecifychaining.
Drum samples have their own send level settings (see

Send FX1 and Send FX2 on page109). Use this
parametertoadjustthegeneraloffsetoftheDrumPro
gram.
000127
Effectlevel.
Chain 2>1
Usethisparametertosendtheoutputofeffect2tothe
inputofeffect1.
000127
Level of the signal exiting the effect 2
goingbacktotheeffect1.
Send to Master
This parameters allows you to decide if the direct +

effected signal must go to the Master, or just the
effectedsignal.
Yes
Onlytheeffectedsignalwillbesenttothe
Audio Outputs. The direct (noneffected)
signalwillnotbesent.
No
Boththeeffectedsignalanddirectsignals
willbesenttotheAudioOutputs.
PAGE 20 - FX1 EDITING

Note:Fordetailsontheeffects,refertotheEffectschapter.
FX1/2
Usetheseparameterstoselecttheeffecttypeforeffect
1/2.SeetheEffectschapterformoreinformation.
Note:If000:NoEffectisselected,theoutputfromthemas
tereffectwillbemuted.
Send
Sendlevelforeacheffect.
In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the

FX1(AorC)effectprocessor(usuallyreverb).Seethe
Effectschapterformoreinformation.
PAGE 21 - FX2 EDITING

In this page you can edit the effected assigned to the
FX2 (B or D) effect processor (usually modulating
effect).SeetheEffectschapterformoreinformation.
123
AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list
AMS (ALTERNATE MODULATION SOURCE) LIST

Off
Do not use Alternate Modulation
Pitch EG
Pitch EG
Filter EG
Filter EG within the same oscillator
Amp EG
Amp EG within the same oscillator
LFO1
LFO1 within the same oscillator
LFO2
LFO2 within the same oscillator
Flt KTrk +/+ (Filter Keyboard Track +/+)
Filter keyboard tracking within the same oscillator
Flt KTrk +/ (Filter Keyboard Track +/)
Flt KTrk 0/+ (Filter Keyboard Track 0/+)
Flt KTrk +/0 (Filter Keyboard Track +/0)
Amp KTrk +/+ (Amp Keyboard Track +/+)
Amp keyboard tracking within the same oscillator
Amp KTrk +/ (Amp Keyboard Track +/)
Amp KTrk 0/+ (Amp Keyboard Track 0/+)
Amp KTrk +/0 (Amp Keyboard Track +/0)
Note Number
Note number
Velocity
Velocity
Poly AT (Poly After Touch)(a)
Polyphonic After Touch (transmitted from the microARRANGER only as sequence data)
Channel AT (Channel After Touch)(a)
After Touch (Channel After Touch)
Joystick X
Joystick X (horizontal) axis
Joystick +Y
Joystick +Y (vertical upward) direction (CC#01)
Joystick Y
Joystick Y (vertical downward) direction (CC#02)
JS+Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)(a)

JSY & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
(a)
Joystick +Y (vertical upward) direction and After Touch

Joystick Y (vertical downward) direction and After Touch
Ass.Pedal
Assignable foot pedal (CC#04)
CC#18
CC#18
CC#17
CC#17
CC#19
CC#19
CC#20
CC#20
CC#21
CC#21
Damper
Ddamper pedal (CC#64)
CC#65
Portamento switch (CC#65)
Sostenuto
Sostenuto pedal (CC#66)
CC#80
CC#80
CC#81
CC#81
CC#82
CC#82
CC#83
CC#83
Tempo
Tempo (tempo data from Sequencer 1 clock or external MIDI clock)
(a) After Touch data can only be received via MIDI, or create as a MIDI event in Song Record-Step Recording mode.
Flt KTrk +/+ (Filter Keyboard Track +/+)
+/
Flt KTrk +/ (Filter Keyboard Track +/)

Flt KTrk 0/+ (Filter Keyboard Track 0/+)
Flt KTrk +/0 (Filter Keyboard Track +/0)
Amp KTrk +/+ (Amp Keyboard Track +/+)
Amp KTrk +/ (Amp Keyboard Track +/)
Amp KTrk 0/+ (Amp Keyboard Track 0/+)
Amp KTrk +/0 (Amp Keyboard Track +/0)
+/+
The direction of the effect will be deter

minedbythesign(positiveornegative)of
theRampLoworRampHighsetting.
0/+
The direction of the effect will be deter

minedbythesignoftheRampLowset
ting, and by the opposite sign of the
RampHighsetting(50forasettingof
+50,and+50forasettingof50).
Ramp Low will have no AMS effect.
ThesignoftheRampHighsettingwill
determinethedirectionofitseffect.
124

AMS (Alternate Modulation Source) list
+/0
The sign of the Ramp Low setting will

determine the direction of its effect.
RampHighwillhavenoAMSeffect.
example of Amp
Keyboard Track settings
Amp
Ramp Low
= +50
Ramp High
= +50
Key Low Key High
Note Number
+ max
AMS = Amp KTrk +/+
AMS Intensity = positive (+) value
zero
Depth and direction of modulation
- max
+ max
AMS = Amp KTrk +/
zero

- max
+ max
AMS = Amp KTrk 0/+
zero
- max
+ max
AMS = Amp KTrk +/0
zero
- max
JS +Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick +Y & After Touch/2)
The effect will be controlled by the joystick +Y (verti

cally upward) and by after touch data (received via
MIDI).Inthiscase,theeffectofaftertouchwillbeonly
halfofthespecifiedintensity.
JS Y & AT/2 (Joy Stick Y & After Touch/2)
The effect will be controlled by the joystick Y (verti

callydownward)andbyaftertouchdata(receivedvia
MIDI).Inthiscase,theeffectofaftertouchwillbeonly
halfofthespecifiedintensity.
Global edit environment
125
The Write window
15. GLOBAL EDIT ENVIRONMENT

The Global edit environment is the place where you
cansetmostofthemicroARRANGERglobalfunctions,
i.e.functionsoverridinganyoperatingmode.Thisedit
environment overlaps the current operating mode
(Style,SongPlay,Song,BackingSequence).
PAGE 1 - GENERAL CONTROLS

Thispagecontainsvariousgeneralparameters,setting
thestatusofthekeyboard,thespeakersandthemetro
nome.
THE WRITE WINDOW

Open this window by pressing the WRITE button
while one of the Global pages is in the display. Here,
youcansavevariousglobalsettings.Amongtheglobal
settings saved with this page are also the Preference
parametersoftheStylePlayandSongPlaymode,plus
the Global Protect parameter of the Card mode. The
SplitPointisalsosavedhere.
Vel.Curve (Velocity Curve)
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to

yourtouch.
1
No dynamic control available. Dynamic
valuesarefixed,asinaclassicorgan.
29
Curves,fromthelightestonetothehard
estone.
M.Tune (Master Tune)
Whilethispageisonthedisplay,pressENTERtwice.
Theparametersare saved tothe FlashROM,andwill
stayinmemoryevenwhenturningtheinstrumentoff.
MENU
From any page, press MENU to open the Global edit
menu. This menu gives access to the various Global
editpages.
When in this menu, select a section using the VOL
UME/VALUEbuttons,pressPAGE+toselectapage,or
pressEXITtoexitthemenu.
Wheninapage,pressEXITtogobacktocurrentoper
ating mode (Style Play, Song Play, Song, Backing
Sequence).
This is the master tuning of the instrument. Use it to

adaptyourkeyboardtuningtoanacousticinstrument,
forexampleanacousticpiano.
50
Lowestpitch.
00
Standardpitch(A4=440Hz).
+50
Highestpitch.
Scale
This parameter sets the main scale (or temperament)

forthewholeinstrument,apartfortrackswhereadif
ferent scale is selected by a Performance or STS (see
Scaleonpage44).
SeeScalesonpage227foralistofavailablescales.
Note:YoucannotselectaUserscaleinGlobalmode.
Key
Thisparameterisneededbysomescalestosetthepre
ferredkey(seeScaleonpage44).
Speakers
Thisparameterturnstheinternalspeakersonoroff.
Note: Speakers are always turned on again each time you
turntheinstrumenton.
Met.Vol (Metronome Volume)
Volumeofthemetronome.
40127
Relativevolume,fromminimumtomaxi
mum.
AutoOff
Thisparametersetstheautopoweroffsetting.
Yes
The power will automatically turn off if
you dont play the keyboard or operate
the instruments buttons for a period of
fourhours.
No
Autopoweroffwillnotoccur.
126

Page 2 - Master Transpose
PAGE 2 - MASTER TRANSPOSE
PreOSC
ThispageiswhereyoucanturntheMasterTranspose
onoroff.
Whenthisoptionisselected,allnotesare
transposedimmediatelybeforetheyenter
theinternaltonegenerator.Therefore,the
Scalewillbeappliedbeforetransposition.
Forexample,ifyoualteredanE,andthen
settheMasterTransposeto+1,thealtered
keywillstillbeE(thatwillplayanaltered
F).
Scale
Style/Realtime
ThisisaflagtoturntheMasterTransposeonoroffon
theStyleandRealtime(Keyboard)tracks.
Off
No Master Transpose is applied to the
StyleandRealtimetracks.
Sync
Sync mode. When you press either the
TRANSPOSE [] or [] buttons, the new
transposesettingwillnottakeeffectuntil
the first beat of the next measure is
reached.TheRealtimetrackssoundingat
thetimeofthetransposewillbestopped.
RTime
Realtimemode.Whenyoupresseitherthe
TRANSPOSE [] or [] buttons, the new
transposesettingwilloccurwhenthenext
noteisplayedforboththeStyleandReal
time tracks individually. (Note that any
notes sounding from the Realtime tracks
will be stopped when you press the
TRANSPOSE button) The next key or
chordyoupresswillsoundwiththenew
transposesetting.(Notethatifyouplaya
Realtime track prior to a new chord, the
Realtimetrackwillplayinthenewkeyas
the Style will continue to play in the old
keyuntilanewchordisentered).
Transpose
Tone
generator
PAGE 3 - ASSIGNABLE PEDAL/

FOOTSWITCH, ASSIGNABLE SLIDER
ThispageletsyouprogramtheAssignablePedal/Foot
switch,andtheAssignableSlider.
Seepage225foralistoftheassignablefunctions.The
first functions are switchtype functions, while the
remaining(startingfromMasterVolume)arecontinu
ouslikefunctions.
P/S (Pedal/Switch)
Continuous pedal, or footswitch, connected to the

ASSIGNABLEPDL/SWconnector.
Sld (Slider)
FunctionassignedtotheASSIGNABLESLIDERonthe
frontpanel.
Damper Pol. (Damper Polarity)
Seq 1/2
PolarityoftheDamperpedal.
thetwoonboardSequencerstracks.
Pedal/Sw.Pol. (Pedal/Footswitch Polarity)
PolarityoftheAssignablepedalorfootswitch.
Midi In
thereceivedMIDImessages.
Scales
TheScaleTransposePositionallowsyoutodecidethe
relationbetweentheScaleandtheMasterTranspose.
PostKB
Whenthisoptionisselected,noteswillbe
transposed immediately after they leave
thekeyboard.TheScalewillbeappliedto
thetransposednotes.Forexample,ifyou
altered an E, and then set the Master
Transposeto+1,theEkeywillplayF,and
thealteredkeywillbeE(thatwillplayan
alteredE).
Transpose
Scale
Tone
generator
PAGE 4 - MIDI SETUP

MIDI channels can be automatically configured by
selecting a MIDI Setup. Each of them assigns the best
valuestovariousMIDIparameters,toallowaneasier
connectionwithaparticularMIDIcontroller.
127
Page 5 - MIDI Controls
Note: After selecting a MIDI Setup, you can apply any

changes to each channels settings. To store the changes in
memory,pressWRITEandsavetheGlobalinmemory.
SeeMIDIonpage35formoreinformationonusing
theMIDISetups.
Default
Thisadefaultsetting.Itissuitablebothfor
programming on an external sequencer,
andforplayingmicroARRANGERwitha
masterkeyboard.
MasterKbd Select this setting when you are connect
ingamutemasterkeyboard.
Sequencer1 This setting is for playing a Song
(Sequencer1)withanexternalinstrument
sounds, or for listening to a Song per
formed by an external sequencer using
microARRANGER as a sound generator.
Each track (S1 Tr116) corresponds to a
MIDI channel with the same number (1
16).
Sequencer2 Asabove,butwithSequencer2.
Accordion13
Selectoneofthesesettingswhenconnect
ingaMIDIAccordion.
Ext.Seq
ThissettingisforprogrammingaSongon
anexternalsequencer.
PAGE 5 - MIDI CONTROLS

ThispageletsyouprogramgeneralMIDIparameters.
Internal
MIDI
Internal, i.e. the clock generated by the

microARRANGER Sequencer 1 internal
metronome.
External from MIDI. The microAR
RANGER is slaved to an external instru
mentorsequencer,connectedtoitsMIDI
IN port. The Start/Stop and Play/Stop
commands, and the metronome Tempo,
cannotbeselectedfromthecontrolpanel
ofthemicroARRANGER.Usetheexternal
instrumenttosettheTempo,andstartor
stop the sequencers (Song, Song Play,
Backing Sequence modes) and the
arranger (Style and Backing Sequence
modes).
Clock Send
This parameter turns the clock information on the

MIDIOUTonoroff.
Off
The microARRANGER cannot send the
MIDI Clock signal. You cannot slave
another instrument to the microAR
RANGER, even when connected to the
MIDIOUT.
MIDI
ThemicroARRANGERcansendtheMIDI
Clocksignal.Youcanslaveanotherinstru
ment to the microARRANGER Tempo,
Start/StopandPlay/Stopcommands.Con
necttheotherinstrumenttothemicroAR
RANGERMIDIOUTport.
PAGE 6 - MIDI IN CHANNELS

In this page, you can assign the microARRANGER
trackstoanyoftheMIDIINchannels.UsetheTRACK
SELECT button to switch from channels 18 to chan
nels916.
Local
TheLocalparameterturnsthekeyboardonoroff.
Note: TheLocalparameteris alwaysturnedonagain each
timeyouturntheinstrumenton.
On
When you play on the keyboard, MIDI
data issent to theinternal soundgenera
torandtotheMIDIOUTport.
Off
The keyboard is connected to the MIDI
OUT, but cannot play the internal sound
generator.
Thisisveryusefulwhenworkingwithan
externalsequencer,tosendnotesandcon
trollersfromthekeyboardtotheexternal
sequencer,andthenletthesequencersend
thembacktothesoundgenerator,without
overlapping.SeetheMIDIchapter.
Clock
ThisparameterselectstheMIDIClocksource.
Note:TheClockparameterisalwayssettoInteachtime
youturntheinstrumenton.
Channel
You can assign to each channel one of the following

tracks:
(Off)
Notrackassigned.
Lower
Lowertrack.
Upper13 OneoftheUppertracks.
Drum
Drumtrack.
Perc
Percussiontrack.
Bass
Basstrack.
Acc15
OneoftheAutoaccompanimenttracks.
S1T116 OneofSequencer1tracks.
S2T116 OneofSequencer2tracks.
Global
SpecialchanneltosimulatethemicroAR
RANGERsintegratedcontrols(keyboard,
128

Page 7 - MIDI IN Controls (1)
Control
pedals, joystick) with an external key

board or controller. MIDI messages com
ing on this channel are considered as
being generated by microARRANGERs
integratedcontrollers.
On this special channel, the microAR
RANGER receives MIDI messages to
remotely select Styles, Performances, STS
andStyleElements.Seetablesonpage144
andfollowingformoreinformationonthe
receiveddata
PAGE 8 - MIDI IN CONTROLS (2)

This is another page containing various MIDI IN set
tings, like note transposition for the Realtime tracks.
The transpose parameters are useful to many MIDI
accordionplayers,whoseMIDIinterfacemaytransmit
onanunexpectedoctave.
PAGE 7 - MIDI IN CONTROLS (1)

ThispageiswhereyoucanprogramtheChordRecog
nition channels for the internal arranger, and a fixed
velocityvalueforallnotesappearingattheinput.
UppOct (Upper Octave)
Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN

fortheUppertracks.Forexample,ifyouselectthe+1
value, a received C4 will play a C5 on the microAR
RANGER.
LowOct (Lower Octave)
There are two separate Chord channels. This is very

useful when you must send chords to microAR
RANGER on two channels (like with some MIDI
Accordions).
Chord1 channel
NotesenteringthischannelaresenttotheChordRec
ognitionengine.
Chord2 channel
NotesenteringthischannelaresenttotheChordRec
ognitionengine.
Velocity Input
Use this parameter to set a fixed velocity (dynamics)

valueforallMIDInotesentering.Thisisusefulwhen
playing the microARRANGER with an organ or a
MIDIAccordion.
Normal
Normalvelocityvaluesarereceived.
40127
Allreceivedvelocityvaluesareconverted
totheselectedvalue.
Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN

for the Lower track. For example, if you select the +1
value, a received C4 will play a C5 on the microAR
RANGER.
OctIn (Octave In)
Enables/disables the octave transposition of data

receivedviaMIDI.
On
DatareceivedviaMIDIcanbetransposed,
accordingtotheselectedOctaveTranspo
sition.Forexample,iftheOctaveTranspo
sition is +1, a received C4 will actually
playaC5.
Off
Data received via MIDI cant be trans
posed by the Octave Transposition
applied to the track. For example, if the
Octave Transposition is +1, a received C4
willstillplayaC4.
Mute In
Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can

stillplaydatareceivedviaMIDI.
On
No data received via MIDI on a muted
trackcanbeplayedbymicroARRANGER.
Off
DatareceivedviaMIDIonamutedtrack
canstillplayonthemicroARRANGER.
129
Page 9 - MIDI IN Filters
PAGE 9 - MIDI IN FILTERS

Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data
receivedbythemicroARRANGER.
Lower
Upper13
Drum
Perc
Bass
Acc15
S1T116
S2T116
SQTr0116
Chord
Filters
SelectedMIDIINfilters.
Off
Nofilter.
PitchBend PitchBend.
MonoTouch Mono(orChannel)AfterTouch.
PolyTouch PolyAfterTouch.
PrgChange ProgramChange.
SysExcl
SystemExclusive.
AllCC
AllControlChangemessages.
0127
Control Change message #0127. See
MIDI Controllers on page228 for a list
ofavailableControlChangemessages.
Lowertrack.
OneoftheUppertracks.
Drumtrack.
Percussiontrack.
Basstrack.
OneoftheAutoaccompanimenttracks.
OneofSequencer1tracks.
OneofSequencer2tracks.
Usethesechannelstosenddatagenerated
byatrackwiththesamenameoneitheror
bothonboardsequencersatthesametime.
Usethischanneltosendnotesrecognized
by the Chord Recognition engine to the
MIDIOUT.Thisisuseful,forexample,to
control an external Harmonizer from the
microARRANGER,usingtheLowertrack
toplaychords,evenifthetrackisinmute.
PAGE 11 - MIDI OUT FILTERS

Usethispagetosetupto8filtersfortheMIDIdatasent
bythemicroARRANGER.
PAGE 10 - MIDI OUT CHANNELS

Inthispage,youcanassigntoanyMIDIOUTchannel
one of microARRANGERs tracks. Use the TRACK
SELECT button to switch from channels 18 to chan
nels916.
Channel
You can assign to each channel one of the following

tracks:
(Off)
Notrackassigned.
Filters
SelectedMIDIOUTfilters.
Off
Nofilter.
PitchBend PitchBend.
MonoTouch Mono(orChannel)AfterTouch.
PolyTouch PolyAfterTouch.
PrgChange ProgramChange.
SysExcl
SystemExclusive.
AllCC
AllControlChangemessages.
0127
Control Change message #0127. See
MIDI Controllers on page228 for a list
ofavailableControlChangemessages.
130
Card Edit environment

The WRITE/CARD IN USE LED
16. CARD EDIT ENVIRONMENT

TheCardEditenvironmentistheplacewhereyoucan
manage files. This edit environment overlaps the cur
rent operating mode (Style Play, Song Play, Backing
Sequence,Song,Program).
THE WRITE/CARD IN USE LED

Whenthedriveisreadingorwritingdataonacard,the
WRITE/CARD IN USE indicator lights up. While in a
Cardpage,theWaitmessageappearsinthedisplay;
inthissituation,youcantselectadifferentCardpage
(youcan,however,selectadifferentoperativemode).
Avoid using or storing SD/MMC cards in locations

wheretheymaybesubjecttostrongstaticelectricityor
electricalnoise.
Donotallowdirtorforeignmattertoadheretothe
contacts of an SD/MMC card. If the contacts should
becomesoiled,gentlywipethemoffusingadrycloth.
WhenyouarenotusinganSD/MMCcard,keepitin
theprotectivecasethatwasincludedwiththecardto
preventitfrombeingdamagedbystaticelectricity.
DonotleaveanSD/MMCcardwhereitisaccessible
by infants or children who might place it in their
mouthandswallowit.
Carefully read and observe the owners manual
includedwithyourSD/MMCcard.
Write protecting an SD card
Warning!NeverremoveacardwhentheWRITE/CARDIN
USELEDisturnedon!
SUPPORTED CARDS
Youcanusethefollowingtypesofcardstosaveorload
data to and from the microARRANGERs internal
memory:
SD(HighSpeed,UltraII,SDHC)
MMC
MicroSDwithanSDadapter
MiniSDwithanSDadapter
Note:BeforeyoucanusetheSD/MMCcard,youmustformat
itonthemicroARRANGER.Dontuseyourcomputerordigi
talcameratoformat(initialize)acardyouplantousewiththe
microARRANGER. If the card was formatted on a different
device,itmaynotworkcorrectlywiththemicroARRANGER
Note:TheSD/MMCcardisnotincluded.Itmustbepurchased
separately.
Note:ThemicroARRANGERsupportsSDcardswithapower
supplyvoltageof2.73.6V.
SDcardshaveawriteprotectswitchthatpreventsthe
data from being overwritten accidentally and lost. If
yousetthecardsswitchtotheprotectedsetting,itwill
beimpossibletowriteorerasedataonthecard,orto
formatit.Ifyouneedtosaveediteddataonthecard,
move the switch back to its original unprotected set
ting.
Write-protect
switch
Protected
Inserting/exchanging cards
Insertingacard
Insertthecard,makingsurethatitisorientedcorrectly.
The gold contacts should be facing down, and the
angledcornertoyourright.
SD card slot
SD and MMC card handling

Do not remove the card from the drive while the
microARRANGERisreadingorsavingdata.
The SD/MMC card may be hot immediately follow
inguse.PoweroffthemicroARRANGERandwaitfor
thecardtocoolbeforeremovingit.
SD/MMC cards are precision parts. Do not bend
them,dropthem,orsubjectthemtophysicalshock.
AvoidusingorstoringSD/MMCcardsinlocationsof
extremely high or low temperature such as in direct
sunlight, a closed automobile, or near a heater, or in
locationsofhighhumidityorexcessivedust.
SD card
Removingacard
Pressthecardinwardandreleaseit,andthecardwill
popout.
Note:BeforeyoucanuseanSDcard,youmustformatiton
themicroARRANGER.Thecardmaynotworkifitwasfor
mattedonanotherdevice.

Loading data created with the Pa80/Pa60/Pa50
Organizing your data into separate folders

Wesuggesttoorganizeyourdataintoseparatefolders,
insteadofsavingmanyfilesintotheroot(i.e.,themain
level)ofthecard.Thisallowsforfasteraccessestothe
card,thusaquickerresponseofthemicroARRANGER
toyourCARDcommands.
LOADING DATA CREATED WITH THE PA80/

PA60/PA50
microARRANGER data is perfectly interchangeable
with its Pa80, Pa60 and Pa50 counterparts. The only
data microARRANGER cant load from Pa80/Pa60 is
thefollowing:
DigitalDrawbarPrograms
Input1/2settings
VHG1Vocal/GuitarProcessorBoardsettings
EC5settings
TOHOSTportsetting
AudioOutputrouting
Atthesametime,Pa80andPa60canreadanydatacre
atedwiththemicroARRANGERandPa50.
MYDIR.SET
GLOBAL
BANK01.GBL
PERFORM
BANK01.PRF
1-1 Grand Piano
1-8 Full Strings

BANK02.PRF
2-1 Jazz Brass
2-8 Jazz Strings

BANK.PRF
BANK10.PRF
2-1 Rock Brass
2-8 Rock Strings

PROGRAM
USER01.PCG
CARD STRUCTURE
Eachcard(andtheinternalmemory)cancontainfiles
andfolders.ThedatastructureinmicroARRANGERis
slightly more rigorously determined than in a com
puter, due to the preconfigured data structure inside
the instruments memory. The diagram on the right
shows the global structure of a microARRANGER
card.
Note:Stylebanksfrom1to16(FactoryStyles)canbeseen
inCardmodeonlywhentheFactoryStyleProtectparam
eter is set to Off (see page142), and only when loading or
savingasingleStylebank.
1 Piano 1
64 SynBrass22
USER02.PCG
1 SopranoSax
64 Noise
USERDK.PCG
1 Standard Kit
64 Orchestral Kit
STYLE
BANK01.STY
FILE TYPES
The following tables describe all the file and folder
typesthemicroARRANGERcanmanage.Herearethe
filesyoucanreadorwriteonthemicroARRANGER.
1-1 8 Beat 1
1-16 8 Beat 16
BANK.STY
BANK16.STY
Extension
File/folder type
SET
All the User data. (This is a folder containing other folders).
GBL
Global, Seq1+Seq2 Setup
PRF
Performance
PCG
User Program
STY
User Style
The microARRANGER can also read the following

commontypesofdata.
16-1 Traditional 1
16-8 Traditional 16
USER01.STY
U1-1 User 1
U1-16 User 16
USER02.STY
U2-1 User 1
U2-16 User 16
USER03.STY
Extension
File type
MID
Midi file (Standard MIDI File, SMF)
KAR
Karaoke file
JBX
Jukebox
U3-1 User 1
U3-16 User 16
131
132

File and folder size display
FILE AND FOLDER SIZE DISPLAY

Thesizeofanyfileandfolderinthecardcanbeseenin
thedisplay.
Thesinglefilesizeisalwaysshownontherightofthe
file:
Page header
ThislineshowstheCardpageyouarein.
Card content
These lines show the content of the current folder.

Movetheitemtoselecttothefirstline,usingtheEF
(ScrollUp)andGH(ScrollDown)VOLUME/VALUE
buttons,ortheTEMPO/VALUEcontrols.
Use the Page commands (F1F4) on the last line to
executeanoperationontheselectedfileorfolder.
The symbolbeforeanameidentifiesafolder(i.e.,
afoldercontainingotherfiles).
Page commands
Toseeafoldersize,firstmoveittothefirstlineofthe
display,thenkeeptheSHIFTbuttonpressed,andpress
the F3 (OPEN) function button under the display. A
dialogboxwillappear,showingthesizeofthefolder:
You can use these commands to browse through files

and folders, and to execute data transfer commands
(load, save). Commands may be different in any
Cardpage.UsetheF1F4buttonstoselectthecorre
spondingcommand.
NAVIGATION TOOLS
WheninaCardpage,youcanuseanyofthefollowing
commandstobrowsethroughthefilesandfolders,or
throughthelistofcommands.
PressEXITtoexitthisdialog.
EF (Scroll Up)
PAGE STRUCTURE
HereisthetypicalstructureofaCardpage.
Operating mode icon
Page header
Scrollthelistup.KeepSHIFTpressedandpressoneof
thesebuttonstojumptothepreviousalphabeticalsec
tion.
GH (Scroll Down)
of these buttons to jump to the next alphabetical sec
tion.
TEMPO/VALUE section
F-1 (SD)
Pressthisbuttonafterreplacingacardinthecardslot.
After pressing this button, the new card will be
scanned,andthefilelistshownonthedisplaywillbe
updated.
Card content
Page commands
F-2 (Data transfer command)
Executestheshownoperation.
Operating mode icon
F-3 (OPEN)
WhenintheCardEditenvironment,oneoftheoperat
ingmodesisstillactiveinthebackground.Theoperat
ing mode icon shows which mode is currently active.
Press EXIT to go back to the current operating mode
fromanyoftheCardpages.
Opens the selected folder or bank (files whose name

beginswiththe icon.
F-4 (CLOSE)

(upper)folder.
133
Menu
MENU
Note:Dataloadedfromcard,anddataalreadyinmem
oryismerged.Forexample,ifthereisdatainallthree
USER Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02,
USER03),andthereisonlytheUSER01Stylebankon
the card, the USER01 bank is overwritten, while
USER02andUSER03banksareleftunchanged.
As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory
containingtheUSER01bankyoujustloaded,andthe
oldUSER02andUSER03banks.
From any page, press MENU to open the Card Edit

menu.ThismenugivesaccesstothevariousCardEdit
pages.
When in this menu, select a section using the VOL
UME/VALUEbuttons,pressPAGE+toselectapage,or
pressEXITtoexitthemenu.
Wheninanypage,pressEXITtogobacktothecurrent
operatingmode.
Loading all data of a specified type
PAGE 1 - LOAD
Inthispageyoucanloadfilesfromacardtotheinter
nalmemory.
PressSDCARDandusetheMENUbuttontoreachthis
page.
Loading all the User data

YoucanloadalltheUserdata(Performances,UserPro
grams,UserStyles,Global)withasingleoperation.
1. Insertthesourcecardintothecardslot.
2. PressF1toscanthecardandshowthefilelist.
3. Use the EH (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/
VALUE controls) to select the .SET folder con
tainingthedatayouwishtoload.
Move the folder to the first line of the display. If
thefolderyouarelookingforisinanotherfolder,
usetheF3(OPEN)buttontoopenit.UsetheF4
(CLOSE)buttontogobacktotheparentfolder.
4. Press F2 (LOAD) to confirm the selection. The
Areyousure?messageappears.PressENTERto
Whentheoperationiscompleted(theWaitindi
cator disappears), the source page comes back in
thedisplay,andyoumayperformfurtherloading
operations.
YoucanloadallUserdataofaspecifiedtype(UserPro
grams,UserStyles,Performances)withasingleopera
tion.
4. PressF3(OPEN)toopenthe.SETfolder.Alist
of User data appears (Performance, Program,
Style,Global).
5.
6.
Use the EH (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/

VALUE controls) to move the data type you are
lookingfortothefirstlineofthedisplay.
Press F2 (LOAD) to confirm your selection. The
operations.
Note:Dataloadedfromcard,anddataalreadyinmem
oryaremerged.Forexample,ifthereisdatainallthree
USER Style banks in memory (USER01, USER02,
USER03),andthereisonlytheUSER01Stylebankon
the card, the USER01 bank is overwritten, while
USER02andUSER03banksareleftunchanged.
As a result, you will have a STYLE folder in memory
containingtheUSER01bankyoujustloaded,andthe
oldUSER02andUSER03banks.
134

Page 1 - Load
Loading a single bank

You can load a single bank of User data (User Pro
grams,UserStyles,Performances)withasingleopera
tion. A bank corresponds to a STYLE or PROGRAM/
PERFORMANCEbutton.
of User data appears (Global, Performance, Pro
gram,Style).
5.
6.

PressF3(OPEN)toopentheselectedfolder.Alist
ofUserbanksappears.
9.
Scrolltheavailablelocationsinmemory,usingthe
EH(Scroll)buttons(ortheTEMPO/VALUEcon
trols).
10. When the target bank is selected (i.e., it is in the
firstlineofthedisplay),pressF2(LOAD)toload
thebank.TheAreyousuremessagewillappear.
Warning:Afterconfirming,allUserdatacontainedin
thebankinmemoryisdeleted.
operations.
Loading a single item

YoucanloadasingleUseritem(i.e.,asingleUserPro
gram,asingleUserStyle,orasinglePerformance)with
asingleoperation.
tainingtheitemyouwishtoload.
of User data appears (Global, Performance, Pro
gram,Style).
5.
7.
8.

VALUEcontrols)tomovethedesiredbanktothe
PressF2(LOAD)toconfirmthefileselection.The
listofUserbanksinmemoryappears.
6.
7.
In the page above, the previously selected Style
bank will be loaded into the bank 1 (USER1 but
ton)inmemory.TheexistingStylesinmemorywill
bedeletedandoverwritten.

PressF3(OPEN)toopentheselectedfolder.Alist
ofUserbanksappears.

VALUEcontrols)tomovethedesiredbanktothe
135
Page 2 - Save
8.
PressF3(OPEN)toopentheselectedbank.Alist
ofUseritemsappears.

VALUE controls) to move the desired item to the
10. PressF2(LOAD)toconfirmthefileselection.The
internalmemoryfilelistappears.Ifyouareload
ingasinglefileorbankofStyles,ProgramsorPer
formances, you are prompted to choose a
destination in memory. For example, when load
ing a single Style, after selecting the Load com
mand, a page similar to the following appears in
thedisplay:
PAGE 2 - SAVE
Inthispage,youcansaveUserdatafromtheinternal
memorytoacard.Youcansavefiles,banks,orallthe
Userfilesoftheinternalmemory.
PressSDCARDandusetheMENUorPAGEbuttons
toreachthispage.
9.
In the page above, the previously selected Style

willbeloadedintothelocationU1:1(USER1but
ton, Style 01) in memory. The existing Style in
memorywillbedeletedandoverwritten.
11. Scrolltheavailablelocationsinmemory,usingthe
EH(Scroll)buttons(or theTEMPO/VALUEcon
trols).Whenthetargetlocationisselected(i.e.,itis
inthefirstlineofthedisplay),pressF2(LOAD)to
loadthefile.
Locationsmarkedwitharowofunderscores(__
_)areemptylocations.
12. Once the target location is selected, press F2
(LOAD)toloadthefile.TheAreyousure?mes
sagewillappear.PressENTERtoconfirm,orEXIT
toabort.
Warning:Afterconfirming,theitemyouareoverwrit
inginmemorywillbedeleted.
operations.
Here are the various types of files contained in mem

ory:
The file/folder
type
contains
and will create on

the card
ALL
All the User data in memory
A .SET folder
Style
The USER 0103 Styles
A STYLE folder inside a

.SET folder
Program
The USER Programs and

Drum Kits
A PROGRAM folder inside

a .SET folder
Perform (Performances)
The Performances
A PERFORM folder inside

a .SET folder
.GBL file
The Global. All parameters

within
marked with
the Style Play, Song Play,
Song and Global chapters
are saved in the Global.
A GLOBAL folder inside a

.SET folder
Saving the whole memory content

Youcansavethewholecontentofthememorywitha
singleoperation.
1. Insertthetargetcardintothecardslot.
2. Thewholecontent(All)oftheinternalmemory
isalreadyselected.PressF2(SAVE)toconfirmthe
selection.
3. Thecontentofthetargetcardappears.
4.
Atthispoint,youcan:
Createanew.SETfolder(seeCreatinganew
.SETfolderonpage138).
Saveontoanexisting.SETfolder.
Ifyouaresavingintoanexistingfolder,movethe
desired.SETfoldertothefirstlineofthedisplay,
using the EH (Scroll) buttons (or the TEMPO/
VALUEcontrols).
136

Page 2 - Save
5.
Oncethetargetfolderisselected,pressF2(SAVE)
tosavethefiles.TheAreyousure?messagewill
Warning:Afterconfirming,alldatainthetargetfolder
isdeleted.
the display, and you may perform further saving
operations.
Saving all data of a specific type

You can save all data of a specific type with a single
operation.
is already selected. Press F3 (OPEN) to open the
Allfolder.AlistofUserdatatypesappear(each
typeisaseparatefolder).

operations.
Saving a single bank

You can save a single User bank with a single opera
tion. A bank corresponds to a button on the control
paneloftheinstrument(i.e.abuttonoftheSTYLEsec
tion).
3.
4.
3.
4.
5.

Onceyouhaveselectedthetypeofdatarequired,
pressF2(SAVE)toconfirmtheselection.
Thecontentofthetargetcardappears.
5.
6.
6.
7.
Atthispoint,youcan:
VALUEcontrols).
Oncethetargetfolderisselected,pressF2(SAVE)
Warning:Afterconfirming,alldatainthetargetfolder
isdeleted.
7.
8.

Oncethedatatypeisselected,pressF3(OPEN)to
open the folder and gain access to the separate
banks.

VALUEcontrols)tomovethebanktosavetothe
Onceyouhaveselectedthebankthatyouwantto
save,pressF2(SAVE)toconfirmtheselection.
Thecontentofthetargetcardappears.
Atthispoint,youcan:
137
Page 2 - Save

VALUEcontrols).
9. PressF2(SAVE)toconfirm.Alistofbanksonthe
target card appears. Only banks of the selected
typeareshown.
VALUE controls) to move the target bank to the
11. Oncethetargetbankisselected,pressF2(SAVE)
Warning: If you confirm, any data in the target bank
willbedeleted.
operations.
6.
Once you have selected the bank, press F3

(OPEN)togainaccesstothesinglefiles.
7.
Once you have selected the file that you want to

save,pressF2(SAVE)toconfirmtheselection.
Thecontentofthetargetcardappearsinthedisplay.
8.
Saving a single item

YoucansaveasingleUseritemwithasingleoperation.
3.
4.
5.

Oncethedatatypeisselected,pressF3(OPEN)to
open the folder and gain access to the separate
banks.

VALUEcontrols)tomovethebankcontainingthe
filetosavetothefirstlineofthedisplay.
Atthispoint,youcan:
Save ontoanexisting.SETfolder (saveddata
ismergedwiththeexistingdataonthecard).
9. Ifyouaresavingintoanexistingfolder,movethe
VALUEcontrols).
10. Press F2 (SAVE) to confirm. A list of files on the
target device appears. Only files of the selected
typeareshown.
Locations marked with a row of underscores

(___)areemptylocations.
VALUEcontrols)tomovethetargetlocationtothe
12. Once the target location is selected, press F2
(SAVE)tosavethefile.TheAreyousure?mes
sagewillappear.PressENTERtoconfirm,orEXIT
toabort.
Warning:Ifyouconfirm,anydataatthetargetlocation
willbedeleted.
operations.
138

Page 3 - Copy
Creating a new .SET folder
PAGE 3 - COPY
Whensavingdata(Saveoperations),youcansaveonto
existingfolders,oryoucancreateanew.SETfolder.
Hereishowtodoit.
1. When the file list of the target card is in the dis
play,usetheEH(Scroll)buttons(ortheTEMPO/
VALUEcontrols)tomovetheNEW_NAME.SET
Note:ANEW_NAME.SETitemisalwaysthefirst
iteminanydirectory.
2. When the NEW_NAME.SET item is selected,
Inthispageyoucancopysinglefiles(i.e.,midifilesof
Jukebox files), whole folders (generic or .SET fold
ers), or a generic folders content. Note that you can
copydataonlyinsidethesamecard.
To preserve the data structure integrity, during Copy
operations you cant open a .SET folder, and copy
oneofitsfiles.Youcanonlyopengenericfolders.
toreachthispage.
3.
4.
newfolder,pressF2(SAVE)toconfirm.TheAre
you sure? message will appear. Press ENTER to
Copying a whole folder or folders content

Youcancopyafolder(genericor.SET)intoadiffer
ent folder. If selecting the <current dir> item, you can
copythecurrentfolderscontent,withoutcopyingthe
folder itself. If copying a whole folder, a new folder
withthesamenameiscreatedatthetargetlocation.
Note:DuringtheCopyprocedure,youcantopena.SET
folder.Youcan,anyway,openanygenericfolder.
3. Movethefolderthatyouwanttocopytothefirst
line of the display. If it is contained in another
folder,usetheF3(OPEN)buttontoopenit.Press
F4(CLOSE)togobacktotheprevioushierarchic
level.
Tocopyjustthecurrentfolderscontent,movethe
<currentdir>itemtothefirstlineofthedisplay.
4. Oncetheitemtocopyisonthefirstline,pressF2
(COPY) to confirm the item selection. The win
dowsheaderchangesfromCopyfromtoCopy
to.
5.
Move the target folder to the first line in the dis

play.
To copy into an existing generic folder (not a
.SETfolder),selectthatfolder.
Tocopyintothecurrentfolder,selectthe<current
dir>item.
139
Page 4 - Erase
6.
7.
Oncethetargetisselected,pressF2(COPY).The
Overwrite?messageappears:
Press ENTER to confirm overwriting, EXIT to

avoidit.
When you decide to overwrite, the data you are
copying will replace the existing data on the tar
get.Forexample,ifthesamemidifileexistsonthe
targetfolder,itwillbeoverwritten.IfaUSERbank
exists,itwillbeoverwritten.
Data that doesnt existonthe source folderis left
unchanged.Forexample,iftheUSER03Stylebank
exists on the target folder, but not in the source
folder,itisleftuntouchedaftercopyingtheother
banks.
When you decide not to overwrite, data existing
onthetargetfolderisleftunchanged,thereforeare
notcopied.
The Are you sure? message appears. Press
ENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabortthecopy.
8.
9.
Oncethetargetisselected,pressF2(COPY).The
Overwrite?messageappears:
Press ENTER to confirm overwriting, EXIT to

avoidit.
When you decide to overwrite, the data you are
copying will replace the existing data on the tar
get.Forexample,ifthesamemidifileexistsonthe
targetfolder,itwillbeoverwritten.
Data thatdoesnt existonthe source folderisleft
unchanged. For example, if the MYSONG01.MID
midifile exists on the target folder, but not in the
sourcefolder,itisleftuntouchedaftercopyingthe
otherdata.
When you decide not to overwrite, data existing
onthetargetfolderisleftunchanged,thereforeare
notcopied.
The Are you sure? message appears. Press
ENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabortthecopy.
PAGE 4 - ERASE
Copying a single file
Youcancopyasinglefilefromagenericfoldertoadif
ferentfolder.Thefilemustresideontheroot(themain/
highest folder in the card hierarchy) or into a generic
folder.Youcantcopysinglefilesfroma.SETfolder.
3. Move the folder, containing the file you wish to
copy, to the first line of the display. If it is con
tained in another folder, use the F3 (OPEN) but
tontoopenit.PressF4(CLOSE)togobacktothe
previoushierarchiclevel.
4. PressF3(OPEN)toopenthefoldercontainingthe
filetocopy.
5. Movethefiletocopytothefirstlineofthedisplay.
6. Oncethefileisonthefirstline,pressF2(COPY)
to confirm its selection. The windows header
changesfromCopyfromtoCopyto.
TheErasefunctionletsyouerasefilesandfoldersfrom
cards.
Erase procedure
1. Ifthefiletobedeletediscontainedinacard,insert
thecardintothecardslot.
2. PressF1toselectadevice.Devicesareselectedin
thisorder:SDSSDSD
Device
Type
SD
SD (or MMC) Card
SSD
Solid State Disk (internal memory)
3.
4.
7.
Move the target folder to the first line in the dis

play.
PressF3(OPEN)toopenafolder,F4(CLOSE)to
closeit.
Move the file or folder that you want to erase to

thefirstlineofthedisplay.Ifthefileorfolderyou
are looking for is in another folder, use the F3
(OPEN)buttontoopenit.PressF4(CLOSE)togo
backtotheprevioushierarchiclevel.
PressF2(ERASE)todeletetheselecteditem.The
catordisappears),youarekeptontheErasepage,
andyoumayperformfurthereraseoperations.
140

Page 5 - Format
PAGE 5 - FORMAT
3.
TheFormatfunctionletsyouinitializeacard.
toreachthispage.
4.
Warning:Whenformattingacard,alldataitcontainsislost.
SD Card
This is a very fast format command. This command

rewritesjusttheFAT(FileAllocationTable)ofthecard,
withoutactualreformattingofallsectors.
1. Insertacardintothecardslot.
2. PressF2(FORMAT)toselecttheformattingcom
mand.
3. TheDeletealldata?messageappearsinthedis
play;pressENTERtoconfirm,EXITtoabort.
4. The Press F4 to continue message appears in
the display; press F4 to confirm formatting, or
EXITtoabort.
PressoneoftheAVOLUME/VALUEbuttons.You
Press F2 (CREATE) to confirm. The Are you
sure?messageappears.PressENTERtoconfirm,
EXITtoabort.
PAGE 7 - RENAME
Use the Rename function to change the name of a
folderorafile.Topreservedatastructureconsistence,
youcantrenamesinglefilesinsidea.SETfolder,or
the.SETfoldernameextension.
toreachthispage.
PAGE 6 - NEW DIR

The New Dir function lets you create a new folder in
anyofthecards,orinsideanygenericfolder.Youcant
createoropen.SETfolders,sincethesearereserved
folders,tobecreatedwithaSaveoperation.
toreachthispage.
Rename procedure
1. Insertthecardthatcontainsthefiletoberenamed
intothecardslot.
2. PressF1toscanthecard.
3. Move the item to rename to the first line. Then
arepromptedtochangethename:
4.
New folder procedure
1. Insertacardintothecardslot.
2. PressF1toscanthecard.
Press F2 (RENAME) to confirm. The Are you
sure?messageappears.PressENTERtoconfirm,
EXITtoabort.
141
Page 8 - Utilities 1
PAGE 8 - UTILITIES 1
Thispageincludesasetofcardutilities.
toreachthispage.
KeepSHIFTpressed,andpressENTERtoformat
thecard.
Backup Data
This command starts a backup of all internal factory

data(Styles,Programs,Performances)excludingthe
OperatingSystemitself.
Note:Shouldyounotdoabackupandyourinternaldatais
changed, you can download the data from http://
www.korgpa.com/,oraskyourlocalKORGdealer.
1. SelecttheBackupDatacommand.
ENTERtocontinue,EXITtoabort.
If the card is not formatted, microARRANGER
asksifyouwanttoformatit:
SD info
Select this command to see the name of the inserted

card,andthefreespaceonit.
If pressed without a card inserted, the No card /
Unformatted Press Exit warning appears. Please,
insertacardandpressENTER(orEXITtoabort).
KeepSHIFTpressed,andpressENTERtoformat
thecard.
SSD info
Restore Data
SelectthiscommandtoseethefreespaceontheSolid
StateDisk(SSD),usedasthesystemsinternalmemory.
Thiscommandrestoresthebackupoftheinternalfac
torydata,executedwiththeBackupDatacommand.
Note: ShouldyourFactoryData cardbecomecorrupt,you
candownloadthedatafromhttp://www.korgpa.com/,orask
yourlocalKORGdealer.
Warning:Dontplayonthekeyboardwhilerestoringdata,
andstayintheCardmode.WaituntiltheWaitmessage
disappears,andtheWRITE/CARDINUSELEDturnsoff.
1. Prepare a card containing the Backup folder and
insertitintothedrive.
2. Selectthiscommand.
ENTERtocontinue,EXITtoabort.
4. Waituntilthebackupcardhasbeenread.
5. WhentheWaitmessagehasdisappeared,andthe
WRITE/CARD IN USE LED has turned off, turn
theinstrumentoff,thenonagain.
Note:AttheendofaRestoreDataoperation,theSomefiles
missingerrormessagemayappear.Thisisduetothelackof
Performancebanks1120onolderversionsoftheoperating
systemofPa80,whosedatayouareprobablyreading.How
ever,thisisnotaproblem.PressEXITtoclosethemessage
Save OS
This commandstarts an Operating System backup, to

saveacopyoftheinstrumentsOperatingSystemona
card.
Note:Shouldyounotdoabackupandyourinternaldatais
changed, you can download the data from http://
www.korgpa.com/,oraskyourlocalKORGdealer.
1. SelecttheSaveOScommand.
2. InsertacardandpressENTER.Thefollowingfiles
arecreatedonthecard:
BPaMAR1.SYS
NBPaMAR1.SYS
OSPaMAR1.LZX
If the card is not formatted, microARRANGER
asksifyouwanttoformatit:
142

Page 9 - Utilities 2
PAGE 9 - UTILITIES 2
ThispageincludestheProtectfunctions.
Global Protect
Whenloadinga.SETfile,thisparameter(ifOn)pro
tects the Global from being reprogrammed by the
loaded data. All Global parameters are therefore left
unchanged.
When loading a single .GLB file, this parameter is
ignored, and the Global is overwritten by the loaded
data.
Note:ThisparameterisautomaticallysettoOffwhenturn
ingtheinstrumentoff.
Factory Style Protect
When On, this parameter protects the Factory Styles

(from the 8 BEAT/16 BEAT 1 to the TRAD bank)
frombeingoverwrittenwhenloadingdatafromcard.
Furthermore,youcantaccessthesebankswhensaving
data.
WhenOff,youcanloadorsaveUserStyleseveninto
theFactoryStylesbanks(from8BEAT/16BEAT1to
TRAD).Thisway,youcanpersonalizeyourFactory
Stylebanks.
Please note that the Save All procedure always saves
onlytheUSERStylebanks.
Note:ThisparameterisautomaticallysettoOnwhenturn
ingtheinstrumentoff.
Note: Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data,
reloadtheBackupdata,contactyourKORGdealerorservice
center,ordownloadthedatafromhttp://www.korgpa.com/.
APPENDIX
Factory Data
144
Styles
17. FACTORY DATA

STYLES
Note: You can remotely select Styles on the microARRANGER, by sending it Bank Select MSB (CC#0), Bank Select LSB
(CC#32)andProgramChangemessagesontheControlchannel(seepage128).
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
CC#0 CC#32
CC#0 CC#32
Guitar Bld1
Groove Bld
Guitar Bld2
Diva
Stndrd8Beat
8Bt Analog1
RockBallad1
Unplug8Bt 1
Analogyst
Folk Ballad
Love 8 Beat
8Bt Analog2
PopBallad 2
Half Beat
Trendy Beat
HalfTimeBld
UK 8 Beat
Slow Ballad
CountryBld1
8BeatGroove
6Strings Bt
4/4 Ballad
UK RnB
Std 16Beat 1
Love Ballad
10
PopBallad 1
Std 16Beat 2
NaturalBeat
11
10
HipHop Beat
10
Unpl.16Beat
10
Celtic Bld
12
11
LightRock 1
11
Pop 16Beat1
11
16BtAnalog1
13
12
LightRock 2
12
Pop 16Beat2
12
Color Beat
14
13
Miami Beat
13
Cinema Bld
13
PopBallad 3
15
14
ClassicBeat
14
Windy Beat
14
8Bt Analog3
16
15
Unplug8Bt 2
15
Home Beat
15
16BtAnalog2
PC
Bank: Ballroom
PC
Bank: Dance
PC
Bank: Rock
Slow Pop
HouseGarage
Open Rock 1
Slow Rock 1
House
Open Rock 2
Slow Rock 2
Dream
Pop Rock
Unpl.SlRock
Techno
Fire Rock
BigBnd Fox1
Underground
Hard Rock
Slow Waltz1
Progressive
Heavy Rock
Slow Waltz2
Jungle
RockShuffle
Foxtrot 1
Rap
RockBallad2
BigBnd Fox2
Hip Hop
Half Time
10
Slow Fox
Disco 70
Rock 6/8
11
10
Foxtrot 2
10
80's Dance
10
Abbey Road
12
11
Operetta
11
Love Disco
11
Surf Rock
13
12
BigBnd Fox3
12
Disco Party
12
Pop Shuffle
14
13
Charleston
13
Disco Funky
13
BluesShuffl
15
14
Quick Step
14
Disco Gully
14
60's Rock
16
15
New Jive
15
Twist
15
Rock & Roll
PC
Bank: Soul & Funk
PC
Bank: World 1
PC
Bank: World 2
CC#0 CC#32
0
CC#0 CC#32
Ballad
Soft Beat
CC#0 CC#32
PC
Pop Beat
Bank: 8/16 Beat 2
CC#0 CC#32
PC
Bank: 8/16 Beat 1
PC
CC#0 CC#32
0
CC#0 CC#32
Rubber Funk
OberkrWaltz
Bluegrass
Groove Funk
OberkrPolka
Country 8Bt
Acid Jazz
Bavar.Pop 1
Country16Bt
Double Beat
Bavar.Pop 2
CountryBeat
Groove
Party Polka
Mod.Country
Jazz Funk
Pop Polka
CntryBoogie
Al Swing
Flipper 6/8
CountryShf1
HipHop Funk
Flipper 4/4
CountryShf2
HipHop Soul
Schlager 1
CountryBld2
10
MotownShufl
Schlager 2
Country 3/4
11
10
PopBallad 4
10
Schlager 3
10
Orleans
12
11
RhythmBlues
11
Schlager 4
11
Jig
13
12
Soul
12
PopSchlager
12
CelticDream
14
13
Memphis
13
Trucker
13
Norteno
15
14
Motown
14
Cajun
14
Quebradita
16
15
Gospel
15
Zydeco
15
Tejano
Factory Data
Styles
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
0
PC
Bank: World 3
Hora
Sevillana 1
CC#0 CC#32
0
10
PC
Bank: Latin 1
UnplugBossa
Basic Bossa
CC#0 CC#32
0
11
PC
Bank: Latin 2
Engl. Tango
Orch. Tango
Sevillana 2
L.A. Bossa
Tango.it
Jota
New Bossa
Habanera 1
Copla
Miss Bossa
Habanera 2
Classic 3/4
Lite Bossa
Mambo 1
Bolero
GrooveBossa
Mambo 2
Minuetto
DiscoChaCha
Salsa 1
Baroque
Cha Cha Cha
Salsa 2
10
New Age
Sabor
Mariachi
11
10
Tarantella
10
ChaCha Funk
10
Reggae 1
12
11
Raspa
11
Latin Rock
11
Reggae 2
13
12
Vahde
12
UnplugLatin
12
Reggae 3
14
13
Oriental
13
Beguine 1
13
Pasodoble 1
15
14
Roman
14
Beguine 2
14
PasDobBanda
16
15
Ciftetelli
15
Slow Bolero
15
Pasodoble 2
PC
Bank: Latin Dance
PC
Bank: Jazz 1
PC
Bank: Jazz 2
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
0
12
Samba
Sambalegre
CC#0 CC#32
0
13
Jazz Brush
Med. Swing
CC#0 CC#32
0
14
Big Band 3
Sw. Shuffle
Disco Samba
Slow Swing
FastBigBand
Samba Funk
SwingBallad
LatinBigBnd
Merengue 1
JazzWaltz 1
BigBnd Fox4
Merengue 2
JazzWaltz 2
Dixieland
Cumbia
5/4 Swing
Hollywood
Latin Dance
Mood Swing
Broadway
Batucada
Be Bop
Acid Jazz
10
Rumba
Unpl.Swing1
New Jazz
11
10
Gipsy
10
Unpl.Swing2
10
Latin Jazz
12
11
Rumba Pop
11
B.BndBallad
11
Fusion
13
12
Calypso
12
BigBandMed.
12
Ragtime Pno
14
13
Lambada
13
Big Band 1
13
Shuffle Pno
15
14
Meneito
14
BigBand40's
14
Boogie Pno
16
15
Macarena
15
Big Band 2
15
Bossa Pno
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
0
15
PC
0
Bank: Trad
Ital.Valzer
CC#0 CC#32
0
17
PC
0
Bank: User 1
Foxtrot 3
CC#0 CC#32
0
18
PC
0
Bank: User 2
16Beat John
Valzer
Hully Gully
8 Beat John
GermWaltz 1
Mazurka 3
2Bt Country
GermWaltz 2
Polka 3
Bajon
Laendler
It. Valzer2
Ipanema
WalzMusette
Slow Waltz3
SanbaDeSol
ViennaWaltz
Trad.Bolero
Ricky
Viennese
NewBeguine
Mambo 99
Mazurka 1
SchlagerMx1
PopShuffle2
10
Mazurka 2
SchlagerMx2
Front Beat
11
10
Polka 1
10
Dance Mix
10
Long Train
12
11
Polka 2
11
Soca Dance
11
2000 Hits
13
12
Germ. Polka
12
60's Dance
12
Questions
14
13
Trad. Polka
13
70's Disco
13
8BeatRock1
15
14
Marsch
14
Motown 2
14
8BeatRock2
16
15
FrenchMarsc
15
Dance 80
15
L.A. R & B
145
Factory Data
146
Style Elements
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
0
19
PC
Bank: User 3
Soul 2
Boston Boy
6/8 JazzPop
J-Pop
HipHopFunk2
Schuffle
Jazz Funk 2
Blues
6/8 Swing
10
The Avalon
11
10
6/8 R & B
12
11
Groovin'
13
12
90's Funk
14
13
Party Funk
15
14
6/8 Blues
16
15
Fusion Funk
CC#0 CC#32
0
2931
PC
015
Bank: Direct SD
Page 12, 34, 56
*.SET
STYLE ELEMENTS
Note:YoucanremotelyselectthevariousStyleElementsonthemicroARRANGER,bysendingitProgramChange
messagesontheControlchannel(seepage128).
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
PC
Style Element
80
Var.1
81
Var.2
82
Var.3
83
Var.4
84
Intro 1
85
Intro 2
86
Fill 1
87
Fill 2
88
Ending 1
89
Ending 2
93
Bass Inversion
94
Manual Bass
90
Break/Count IN
91
Fade IN/OUT
92
Memory
95
Tempo Lock
96
Single Touch
97
Style Change
SINGLE TOUCH SETTINGS (STS)

Note:YoucanremotelyselectSingleTouchSettings(STS)onthemicroARRANGER,bysendingitBankSelectMSB(CC#0),
BankSelectLSB(CC#32)andProgramChangemessagesontheControlchannel(seepage128).IfaStyleisalreadyselected,
justsendtheProgramChangemessage.
CC#0
CC#32
The same as the Style to which the STS pertains
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
PC
STS
64
STS 1
65
STS 2
66
STS 3
66
STS 4
Factory Data
147
Programs (bank order)
PROGRAMS (BANK ORDER)
Name
The following table enlists all microARRANGER Fac

tory Programs in the same order as they appear by
pressing the PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE bank but
tons.
Legend:ThetablealsoincludesMIDIdatausedtoremotely
selectthePrograms.CC00:ControlChange0,orBankSelect
MSB. CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC:
ProgramChange.
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Bank: Piano
Grand Piano
121
Class.Piano
121
L/R Piano
121
AcPianoWide
121
Ac. Piano
121
BrightPian
121
ElGranPian
121
ElGrandWide
121
AcPianoDark
121
BrPianoWide
121
90's Piano
121
M1 Piano
121
2000'sPiano
121
ChorusPiano
121
Honky-Tonk
121
Honky-Wide
121
Piano Pad
121
Piano Pad 2
121
PnoStrngPad
121
Pno&Strings
121
PianoLayers
121
Piano&Vibes
121
Harpsichord
121
Harpsi Oct.
121
Harpsi Wide
121
HarpsiK.Off
121
Harpsi Korg
121
Clav
121
Pulse Clav
121
Clav Wah
121
Clav Snap
121
Sticky Clav
121
Bank: E. Piano
ClubElPiano
121
11
DynoTine EP
121
10
Vintage EP
121
Pro-Dyno EP
121
ProStage EP
121
Studio EP
121
StereoDigEP
121
ClassDigiEP
121
EP Phase
121
Hybrid EP
121
Class.Tines
121
PhantomTine
121
10
Sweeping EP
121
12
WhitePad EP
121
13
CC00
CC32
ThinElPiano
121
PC
4
DW8000 EP
121
11
El.Piano 1
121
El.Piano 2
121
DetunedEP 1
121
EP1Veloc.sw
121
60'sElPiano
121
DetunedEP 2
121
EP2Veloc.sw
121
EP Legend
121
R&B E.Piano
121
SynPiano X
121
Vibraphone
121
11
Vibraphone2
121
11
Vibrap.Wide
121
11
Marimba
121
12
Bank: Mallet & Bell
MarimbaWide
121
12
RimbaKeyOff
121
12
MonkeySkuls
121
12
Xylophone
121
13
12
Balaphon
121
Celesta
121
Glocken
121
9
10
Music Box
121
Sistro
121
Orgel
121
10
Digi Bell
121
98
Vs Bell Boy
121
98
Steel Drums
121
114
Warm Steel
121
114
TubularBell
121
14
Church Bell
121
14
Carillon
121
14
KrystalBell
121
98
ChurchBell2
121
14
Tinkle Bell
121
112
Dulcimer
121
15
Santur
121
15
Kalimba
121
108
VeloKalimba
121
108
MalletClock
121
12
Gamelan
121
112
BaliGamelan
121
112
GarbageMall
121
112
Bank: Accordion
Sweet Harm.
121
22
Harmonica
121
22
Harmonica 2
121
22
Cassotto
121
21
Fisa Master
121
21
Fisa 16+8
121
21
Fisa 16+4
121
21
MusetteClar
121
21
Musette 1
121
21
Musette 2
121
21
Accordion
121
21
TangoAccord
121
23
Fisa Tango!
121
23
148
Factory Data
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Akordeon
121
21
DistortionG
121
30
Accordion 2
121
21
Nylon Bossa
121
24
Arab.Accord
121
10
21
NylonKeyOff
121
24
Steel Gtr 2
121
25
AcGtrKeyOff
121
24
Club J.Gtr2
121
26
Vintage S.
121
27
CleanMutGtr
121
28
Stereo Dist
121
30
Nylon Gtr 2
121
24
Gtr Strings
121
24
FingerK.Off
121
25
St12Strings
121
25
Jazz Guitar
121
26
SingleCoil
121
27
Clean Funk
121
28
JoystGtr Y-
121
30
Reso.Guitar
121
12
25
St.Folk Gtr
121
25
Steel&Body
121
25
Hackbrett
121
25
Jazz Man
121
28
DetCleanGtr
121
27
R&R Guitar
121
28
OverdriveGt
121
29
Ukulele
121
24
Mandolin
121
25
Mandol.KOff
121
10
25
MandoTrem
121
11
25
Banjo
121
105
BanjoKeyOff
121
105
Bouzouki
121
104
Tambra
121
104
Finger Tips
121
25
MidToneGtr
121
27
Chorus Gtr
121
27
ProcesElGtr
121
27
NewStra.Gtr
121
27
DistRhytmGt
121
30
Bank: Organ 1
Jimmy Organ
BX3 Velo Sw
ClassiClick
M1 Organ
Jazz Organ
Dist. Organ
RotaryOrgan
DarkJazzOrg
Bx3ShortDec
SuperBXPerc
Percuss.BX3
Killer B
Drawb.Organ
DetDrawbOrg
It60'sOrgan
DrawbOrgan2
Old Wheels
Perc. Organ
Det.PercOrg
Perc.Organ2
Rock Organ
Good Old B
Dirty B
IperDarkOrg
FullDrawbar
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
10
1
4
5
8
5
8
4
7
6
4
2
0
1
2
3
3
0
1
2
0
10
3
5
6
18
18
18
17
16
18
17
16
17
18
17
18
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
16
18
16
16
DWGS Organ
121
16
GospelOrgan
121
16
PercShorDec
Perc.Wheels
DirtyJazOrg
VOX Legend
TeknoOrgBas
ArabianOrg.
121
121
121
121
121
121
8
9
7
11
6
12
18
18
18
16
17
16
Bank: Organ 2
PipeMixture
121
19
WetDistGtr
121
30
FlautoPipes
121
20
SoloDistGtr
121
30
Pipe Tutti
121
19
L&R El.Gtr
121
27
PositiveOrg
121
19
L&R El.Gtr2
121
10
27
ChurchOrg.1
121
19
RhythmElGtr
121
28
ChurchOcMix
121
19
Guitarish
121
27
DetunChurch
121
19
Country Nu
121
11
27
ChurchPipes
121
19
Stra. Chime
121
28
Full Pipes
121
19
MuteMonster
121
30
Reed Organ
121
20
Disto Mute
121
28
Puff Organ
121
20
FunkyCutGtr
121
28
Small Pipe
121
20
MuteVeloGtr
121
28
Bank: Guitar
FeedbackGtr
121
30
NylonGuitar
24
Guitar Pinc
121
29
24
Ped.Steel 2
121
26
25
PedSteelGtr
121
26
25
GtrFeedback
121
31
26
PowerChords
121
30
27
FunkyWhaSw
121
12
27
28
VoxWahChick
121
120
EGHarmonics
121
31
Spanish Gtr
SteelGuitar
12StringGtr
Club J.Gtr1
CleanGuitar
MutedGuitar
121
121
121
121
121
121
121
0
6
0
1
2
0
0
Factory Data
149
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
GtrHarmonic
121
31
Odissey
121
50
Sitar
121
104
Grand Choir
121
11
52
Sitar 2
121
104
Slow Choir
121
10
52
SitarTambou
121
104
Symph. Bows
121
10
48
IndianStars
121
104
Cyber Choir
121
85
Oud
121
105
Choir Light
121
12
52
Kanun
121
107
Vocalesque
121
54
Kanun Trem.
121
107
Synth Voice
121
54
Kanun Mix
121
107
Voice Lead
121
85
Shamisen
121
106
Choir Pad
121
91
Koto
121
107
Halo Pad
121
94
Taisho Koto
121
107
FullVox Pad
121
91
IndianFrets
121
104
Bank: Strings & Vocals

Solo Violin
121
40
StringQuart
121
48
Ens. & Solo
121
11
48
St. Strings
121
48
Analog Str
121
50
i3 Strings
121
48
Oh-AhVoices
121
52
Take Voices
121
52
Slow Violin
121
40
Camera Str.
121
12
48
ArcoStrings
121
48
PC
FreshBreath
121
91
EtherVoices
121
85
DreamVoice
121
54
Humming
121
53
AnalogVoice
121
54
Mmmh Choir
121
52
StringChoir
121
13
52
ClassicVox
121
54
Doolally
121
53
Fresh Air
121
91
Vocalscape
121
54
Heaven
121
91
Airways
121
53
Yang Chin
121
46
LegatoStrng
121
48
MasterPad
121
89
N Strings
121
48
MonoTrumpet
121
56
OhSlowVoice
121
52
Flugel Horn
121
56
TakeVoices2
121
52
TrumptPitch
121
56
SlowAttViol
121
40
TrumpetExpr
121
56
PizzEnsembl
121
45
HardTrombon
121
57
Fiddle
121
110
SoftTrombon
121
57
PizzSection
121
45
Wha Trumpet
121
59
SweeperStr.
121
49
Muted Trp
121
59
AnalogVelve
121
50
Dual Trump
121
56
Aaah Choir
121
52
Warm Flugel
121
56
Oooh Voices
121
52
Trumpet
121
56
Violin
121
40
Trumpet 2
121
56
Viola
121
41
Trombone
121
57
Cello
121
42
Trombone 2
121
57
Contrabass
121
43
PitchTromb
121
57
Tremolo Str
121
44
BeBopCornet
121
56
PizzicatoSt
121
45
DarkTrumpet
121
56
Choir Aahs
121
52
Tuba
121
58
Voice Oohs
121
53
Tuba Gold
121
58
StringsEns1
121
48
Ob.Tuba
121
58
Bank: Trumpet & Trombone
StringsEns2
121
49
Dynabone
121
58
Orches.Harp
121
46
BrightTromb
121
57
60s Strings
121
48
Muted Trp 2
121
59
Oct.Strings
121
48
Bank: Brass
SynStrings3
121
50
Oooh Choir
121
52
Choir Aahs2
121
52
String&Bras
121
48
Dbl Strings
121
45
ArabStrings
121
13
48
SynStrings1
121
50
SynStrings2
121
51
BigBandBrs
121
61
Tight Brass
121
61
Trp & Brass
121
61
Glen&Friend
121
61
MutEnsemble
121
59
Horns & Ens
121
60
Syn Brass
121
62
Orches. Hit
121
55
150
Factory Data
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
BrassSect.1
121
61
Bank: Woodwind
Fat Brass
121
13
61
Trumpet Ens
121
61
Glen & Boys
121
61
MutEnsembl2
121
59
French Horn
121
60
Syn Brass 2
121
63
Brass Hit
121
25
61
AttackBrass
121
61
BrassSect.2
121
61
TromboneEns
121
10
61
Sax & Brass
121
61
Flute Muted
121
73
FrenchHorn2
121
60
Syn Brass 3
121
62
Euro Hit
121
55
TightBrass2
121
12
61
Dyna Brass
121
14
61
Trombones
121
11
61
Brass Band
121
16
61
Brass Pad
121
63
French Sect
121
60
Syn Brass 4
121
63
6th Hit
121
55
Power Brass
121
21
61
Brass Expr.
121
15
61
Dyna Brass2
121
22
61
Film Brass
121
17
61
Brass Slow
121
18
61
ClassicHorn
121
60
ElectrikBrs
121
62
BrassImpact
121
55
Fanfare
121
19
61
Movie Brass
121
20
61
Sfz Brass
121
23
61
Jump Brass
121
62
AnalogBras1
121
62
AnalogBras2
121
63
Syn Brass 5
121
62
Brass Fall
121
26
61
BassHitPlus
121
55
Dbl Brass
121
24
61
Bank: Sax
Tenor Noise
121
66
Alto Breath
121
65
Sweet Sprno
121
64
Barit Growl
121
67
BreathyBari
121
67
Soft Tenor
121
66
SaxEnsemble
121
65
Folk Sax
121
66
Tenor Sax
121
66
Alto Sax
121
65
Soprano Sax
121
64
BaritoneSax
121
67
TenorBreath
121
66
Tenor Growl
121
66
BreathyAlto
121
65
AltSaxGrowl
121
65
CC00
CC32
PC
Jazz Flute
121
73
Old Shaku
121
77
FluteSwitch
121
73
FluteDyn5th
121
73
Flute Frull
121
73
Pan Flute
121
75
Jazz Clarin
121
71
Flute 2
121
73
Double Reed
121
68
EnglisHorn2
121
69
Recorder 2
121
74
Nay
121
72
Orch. Flute
121
73
WoodenFlute
121
73
War Pipes
121
109
ClarinetEns
121
71
Woodwinds
121
71
Small Orch
121
72
Kawala
121
75
Shaku 2
121
77
Whistle 2
121
78
Sect Winds
121
71
Sect Winds2
121
71
Clarinet G
121
71
Folk Clarin
121
71
Oboe
121
68
EnglishHorn
121
69
Bassoon
121
70
Clarinet
121
71
Piccolo
121
72
Flute
121
73
Recorder
121
74
Bambu Flute
121
73
BlownBottle
121
76
Shakuhachi
121
77
Whistle
121
78
Ocarina
121
79
Bag Pipe
121
109
Zurna
121
111
Hichiriki
121
111
Shanai
121
111
Flute Click
121
121
The Pad
121
89
Future Pad
121
91
Air Clouds
121
97
Dark Pad
121
89
Tinklin Pad
121
97
Pods In Pad
121
97
Analog Pad
121
89
Analog Pad2
121
89
Money Pad
121
89
TsunamiWave
121
91
RavelianPad
121
91
AstralDream
121
95
Meditate
121
95
Reso Down
121
97
Sky Watcher
121
90
Bank: Synth 1
Factory Data
151
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
Super Sweep
121
90
Mega Synth
121
90
Wave Sweep
121
90
TecnoPhonic
121
10
90
Cross Sweep
121
90
DarkElement
121
95
Digi IcePad
121
101
Band Passed
121
102
Crimson5ths
121
86
Cat Lead
121
87
Freedom Pad
121
89
Pan Reso
121
102
Noble Pad
121
97
Square Rez
121
11
80
Mellow Pad
121
95
Rezbo
121
11
81
Lonely Spin
121
100
Auto Pilot
121
14
38
Cinema Pad
121
95
MetallicRez
121
84
VirtualTrav
121
88
Square Bass
121
87
Syn Ghostly
121
100
Syn Pianoid
121
12
81
MotionOcean
121
96
Brian Sync
121
84
Moon Cycles
121
102
Arp Twins
121
84
Farluce
121
11
90
Arp Angeles
121
88
Bell Pad
121
98
Big & Raw
121
87
Bell Choir
121
98
Caribbean
121
96
Warm Pad
121
89
Lead Square
121
80
Sweep Pad
121
95
Lead Saw
121
81
Soundtrack
121
97
Calliope
121
82
Sine Pad
121
89
Chiff
121
83
Itopia Pad
121
91
Charang
121
84
Big Panner
121
63
Fifths Lead
121
86
Dance ReMix
121
10
91
Bass & Lead
121
87
Rave
121
97
New Age Pad
121
88
ElastickPad
121
97
Polysynth
121
90
Moving Bell
121
98
Bank: Synth 2
Old Portam
121
80
Power Saw
121
81
Octo Lead
121
81
ElectroLead
121
87
Rich Lead
121
87
ThinAnaLead
121
87
Dance Lead
121
80
Wave Lead
121
80
Sine Wave
121
80
Synchro Cit
121
84
PC
BowedGlass
121
92
MetallicPad
121
93
Crystal
121
98
Atmosphere
121
99
Brightness
121
100
LeadSquare2
121
80
Lead Sine
121
80
Lead Saw 2
121
81
LeadSawPuls
121
81
LeadDblSaw
121
81
Seq. Analog
121
81
Wire Lead
121
84
Soft Wrl
121
87
Wild Arp
121
55
EspressLead
121
87
HipHop Lead
121
87
Acous. Bass
121
32
Analog Lead
121
80
Finger Bass
121
33
Seq Lead
121
81
Picked Bass
121
34
Old&Analog
121
80
Fretl. Bass
121
35
PhatSawLead
121
81
Slap Bass 1
121
36
Glide Lead
121
81
Slap Bass 2
121
37
Gliding Sq.
121
80
SynthBass 1
121
38
Flip Blip
121
55
SynthBass 2
121
39
Power Synth
121
89
AcBass Buzz
121
32
Sine Switch
121
10
80
Fing ElBass
121
33
Reso Sweep
121
90
Pick ElBass
121
34
Syn Sweeper
121
90
Fret. Bass2
121
35
Cosmic
121
93
SuperSwBass
121
36
MotionRaver
121
101
SuperSwBas2
121
36
Sync Kron
121
84
SynBassWarm
121
38
Fire Wave
121
10
81
SynBassReso
121
38
Dig PolySix
121
90
Bass & Ride
121
32
Pop Syn Pad
121
91
FingElBass2
121
33
Noisy Stabb
121
90
PickElBass2
121
34
Bank: Bass
152
Factory Data
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Fretless Sw
121
35
SFX Kit
120
56
Thumb Bass
121
37
Percus.Kit1
120
64
Finger Slap
121
33
Latin P.Kit
120
65
Attack Bass
121
39
TRI-Per.KIT
120
66
Rubber Bass
121
39
ArabianKit1
120
116
FingElBass3
121
33
ArabianKit2
120
117
DarkR&BBass
121
35
Timpani
121
47
Sweet Fret
121
35
Agogo
121
113
Dyna Bass
121
37
Log Drum
121
12
Stick Bass
121
33
Woodblock
121
115
Gtr Bass
121
34
Taiko Drum
121
116
Bass Mute
121
34
Melodic Tom
121
117
Dr. Octave
121
16
38
Synth Drum
121
118
Nasty Bass
121
39
Reverse Cym
121
119
30303 Bass
121
38
Dragon Gong
121
119
Stein Bass
121
34
Castanets
121
115
Euro Bass
121
39
Concert BD
121
116
Jungle Rez
121
39
MelodicTom2
121
117
30303Square
121
38
Rhyt.BoxTom
121
118
Bass Square
121
38
Electr.Drum
121
118
Phat Bass
121
39
Rev Tom
121
117
SynBass Res
121
38
Rev Snare
121
118
Clav Bass
121
38
i30Perc.Kit
120
67
Hammer
121
38
Bank: SFX
AttackPulse
121
39
Goblins
121
101
Digi Bass 1
121
38
Echo Drops
121
102
BlindAsABat
121
12
38
Star Theme
121
103
PoinkerBass
121
39
GtFretNoise
121
120
Digi Bass 3
121
11
38
BreathNoise
121
121
Jungle Bass
121
13
38
Seashore
121
122
Hybrid Bass
121
15
38
Bird Tweet
121
123
Digi Bass 2
121
10
38
AcBassStrng
121
120
Telephone
121
124
Bank: Drum & Perc

Std. Kit1
120
Helicopter
121
125
Std. Kit2
120
Applause
121
126
Std. Kit3
120
Gun Shot
121
127
Std. Kit4
120
SynthMallet
121
98
AcousticKit
120
Echo Bell
121
102
Room Kit1
120
Echo Pan
121
102
Room Kit2
120
12
GtrCutNoise
121
120
Jungle Kit
120
10
Rain
121
122
HipHop Kit1
120
Thunder
121
122
HipHop Kit2
120
13
Wind
121
122
Techno Kit1
120
11
Stream
121
122
Techno Kit2
120
14
Bubble
121
122
Techno Kit3
120
15
Dog
121
123
Power Kit1
120
16
HorseGallop
121
123
Power Kit2
120
17
Bird Tweet2
121
123
Electro Kit
120
24
Telephone 2
121
124
Analog Kit
120
25
Door Creak
121
124
House Kit1
120
26
Door
121
124
House Kit2
120
27
Scratch
121
124
House Kit3
120
28
Wind Chime
121
124
House Kit4
120
29
Car Engine
121
125
Jazz Kit
120
32
Car Stop
121
125
Brush Kit1
120
40
Car Pass
121
125
Brush V.S.2
120
41
Car Crash
121
125
OrchestraK.
120
48
Siren
121
125
Bdrum&Sdrum
120
50
Train
121
125
Factory Data
Name
CC00
CC32
PC
Jetplane
121
125
Starship
121
125
Burst Noise
121
125
Laughing
121
126
Screaming
121
126
Punch
121
126
Heart Beat
121
126
Footsteps
121
126
Machine Gun
121
127
Lasergun
121
127
Explosion
121
127
Ice Rain
121
96
Jaw Harp
121
105
HitInIndia
121
55
Stadium
121
126
153
154
Factory Data
Programs (Program Change order)
PROGRAMS (PROGRAM CHANGE ORDER)
CC00 CC32

toryProgramsinorderofBankSelectProgramChange
number.
MSB.CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC:
ProgramChange.
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
Ac. Piano
Piano
121
AcPianoWide
Piano
121
AcPianoDark
Piano
121
Grand Piano
Piano
121
Class.Piano
Piano
121
L/R Piano
Piano
121
Piano&Vibes
Piano
121
Pno&Strings
Piano
121
BrightPiano
Piano
121
BrPianoWide
Piano
121
Piano Pad
Piano
121
Piano Pad 2
Piano
121
PnoStrngPad
Piano
121
ElGranPiano
Piano
121
ElGrandWide
Piano
121
M1 Piano
Piano
121
90's Piano
Piano
121
2000'sPiano
Piano
121
ChorusPiano
Piano
121
PianoLayers
Piano
121
Honky-Tonk
Piano
121
Honky-Wide
Piano
121
El.Piano 1
E.Piano
121
DetunedEP 1
E.Piano
121
EP1Veloc.sw
E.Piano
121
60'sElPiano
E.Piano
121
Vintage EP
E.Piano
121
Pro-Dyno EP
E.Piano
121
ProStage EP
E.Piano
121
Studio EP
E.Piano
121
R&B E.Piano
E.Piano
121
ThinElPiano
E.Piano
121
10
DynoTine EP
E.Piano
121
11
ClubElPiano
E.Piano
121
El.Piano 2
E.Piano
121
DetunedEP 2
E.Piano
121
EP2Veloc.sw
E.Piano
121
EP Legend
E.Piano
121
EP Phase
E.Piano
121
SynPiano X
E.Piano
121
StereoDigEP
E.Piano
121
ClassDigiEP
E.Piano
121
Hybrid EP
E.Piano
121
Class.Tines
E.Piano
121
10
PhantomTine
E.Piano
121
11
DW8000 EP
E.Piano
121
12
Sweeping EP
E.Piano
121
13
WhitePad EP
E.Piano
121
Harpsichord
Piano
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
Harpsi Oct.
Piano
121
Harpsi Wide
Piano
121
HarpsiK.Off
Piano
121
Harpsi Korg
Piano
121
Clav
Piano
121
Pulse Clav
Piano
121
Clav Wah
Piano
121
Clav Snap
Piano
121
Sticky Clav
Piano
121
Celesta
Mallet & Bell
121
Glocken
Mallet & Bell
121
Sistro
Mallet & Bell
121
10
Music Box
Mallet & Bell
121
10
Orgel
Mallet & Bell
121
11
Vibraphone
Mallet & Bell
121
11
Vibrap.Wide
Mallet & Bell
121
11
Vibraphone2
Mallet & Bell
121
12
Marimba
Mallet & Bell
121
12
MarimbaWide
Mallet & Bell
121
12
RimbaKeyOff
Mallet & Bell
121
12
MonkeySkuls
Mallet & Bell
121
12
Log Drum
Drum & Perc
121
12
MalletClock
Mallet & Bell
121
12
Balaphon
Mallet & Bell
121
13
Xylophone
Mallet & Bell
121
14
TubularBell
Mallet & Bell
121
14
Church Bell
Mallet & Bell
121
14
Carillon
Mallet & Bell
121
14
ChurchBell2
Mallet & Bell
121
15
Dulcimer
Mallet & Bell
121
15
Santur
Mallet & Bell
121
16
Drawb.Organ
Organ 1
121
16
DetDrawbOrg
Organ 1
121
16
It60'sOrgan
Organ 1
121
16
DrawbOrgan2
Organ 1
121
16
DarkJazzOrg
Organ 1
121
16
IperDarkOrg
Organ 1
121
16
FullDrawbar
Organ 1
121
16
DWGS Organ
Organ 1
121
16
Jazz Organ
Organ 1
121
16
GospelOrgan
Organ 1
121
10
16
Good Old B
Organ 1
121
11
16
VOX Legend
Organ 1
121
12
16
ArabianOrg.
Organ 1
121
17
Perc. Organ
Organ 1
121
17
Det.PercOrg
Organ 1
121
17
Perc.Organ2
Organ 1
121
17
Old Wheels
Organ 1
121
17
Percuss.BX3
Organ 1
121
17
M1 Organ
Organ 1
121
17
TeknoOrgBas
Organ 1
121
17
Bx3ShortDec
Organ 1
121
17
RotaryOrgan
Organ 1
121
18
Rock Organ
Organ 1
121
18
BX3 Velo Sw
Organ 1
121
18
Killer B
Organ 1
121
18
Dirty B
Organ 1
121
18
ClassiClick
Organ 1
121
18
Dist. Organ
Organ 1
Factory Data
155
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
18
SuperBXPerc
Organ 1
121
27
CleanGuitar
Guitar
121
18
DirtyJazOrg
Organ 1
121
27
DetCleanGtr
Guitar
121
18
PercShorDec
Organ 1
121
27
MidToneGtr
Guitar
121
18
Perc.Wheels
Organ 1
121
27
Chorus Gtr
Guitar
121
10
18
Jimmy Organ
Organ 1
121
19
ChurchOrg.1
Organ 2
121
27
Vintage S.
Guitar
121
27
ProcesElGtr
Guitar
121
19
ChurchOcMix
Organ 2
121
27
SingleCoil
Guitar
121
19
DetunChurch
Organ 2
121
27
NewStra.Gtr
Guitar
121
19
PipeMixture
Organ 2
121
27
Guitarish
Guitar
121
19
ChurchPipes
Organ 2
121
27
L&R El.Gtr
Guitar
121
19
Full Pipes
Organ 2
121
10
27
L&R El.Gtr2
Guitar
121
19
Pipe Tutti
Organ 2
121
11
27
Country Nu
Guitar
121
19
PositiveOrg
Organ 2
121
12
27
FunkyWhaSw
Guitar
121
20
Reed Organ
Organ 2
121
28
MutedGuitar
Guitar
121
20
Puff Organ
Organ 2
121
28
FunkyCutGtr
Guitar
121
20
Small Pipe
Organ 2
121
28
MuteVeloGtr
Guitar
121
20
FlautoPipes
Organ 2
121
28
Jazz Man
Guitar
121
21
Accordion
Accordion
121
28
R&R Guitar
Guitar
121
21
Accordion 2
Accordion
121
21
Akordeon
Accordion
121
28
Stra.Chime
Guitar
121
28
CleanMutGtr
Guitar
121
21
Musette 1
Accordion
121
28
RhythmElGtr
Guitar
121
21
Musette 2
Accordion
121
28
Clean Funk
Guitar
121
21
MusetteClar
Accordion
121
28
Disto Mute
Guitar
121
21
Fisa 16+8
Accordion
121
29
OverdriveGt
Guitar
121
21
Fisa 16+4
Accordion
121
29
Guitar Pinch
Guitar
121
21
Fisa Master
Accordion
121
30
DistortionG
Guitar
121
21
Cassotto
Accordion
121
30
FeedbackGtr
Guitar
121
10
21
Arab.Accord
Accordion
121
30
DistRhytmGt
Guitar
121
22
Harmonica
Accordion
121
30
JoystGtr Y-
Guitar
121
22
Sweet Harm.
Accordion
121
30
PowerChords
Guitar
121
22
Harmonica 2
Accordion
121
30
MuteMonster
Guitar
121
23
TangoAccord
Accordion
121
23
Fisa Tango!
Accordion
121
24
NylonGuitar
Guitar
121
30
Stereo Dist
Guitar
121
24
Ukulele
Guitar
121
31
GtrHarmonic
Guitar
121
24
NylonKeyOff
Guitar
121
31
GtrFeedback
Guitar
121
24
Nylon Gtr 2
Guitar
121
31
EGHarmonics
Guitar
121
30
WetDistGtr
Guitar
121
30
SoloDistGtr
Guitar
121
24
Nylon Bossa
Guitar
121
32
Acous. Bass
Bass
121
24
AcGtrKeyOff
Guitar
121
32
AcBass Buzz
Bass
121
24
Spanish Gtr
Guitar
121
32
Bass & Ride
Bass
121
24
Gtr Strings
Guitar
121
33
Finger Bass
Bass
121
25
SteelGuitar
Guitar
121
33
Finger Slap
Bass
121
25
12StringGtr
Guitar
121
33
Fing ElBass
Bass
121
25
Mandolin
Guitar
121
33
FingElBass2
Bass
121
25
Steel&Body
Guitar
121
33
FingElBass3
Bass
121
25
Steel Gtr 2
Guitar
121
33
Stick Bass
Bass
121
25
St12Strings
Guitar
121
34
Picked Bass
Bass
121
25
Hackbrett
Guitar
121
34
Pick ElBass
Bass
121
25
FingerK.Off
Guitar
121
34
PickElBass2
Bass
121
25
Finger Tips
Guitar
121
34
Stein Bass
Bass
121
25
St.Folk Gtr
Guitar
121
34
Gtr Bass
Bass
121
10
25
Mandol.KOff
Guitar
121
34
Bass Mute
Bass
121
11
25
MandoTrem
Guitar
121
35
Fretl. Bass
Bass
121
12
25
Reso.Guitar
Guitar
121
35
Fret. Bass2
Bass
121
26
Jazz Guitar
Guitar
121
35
Fretless Sw
Bass
121
26
PedSteelGtr
Guitar
121
35
Sweet Fret
Bass
121
26
Club J.Gtr1
Guitar
121
35
DarkR&BBass
Bass
121
26
Club J.Gtr2
Guitar
121
36
Slap Bass 1
Bass
121
26
Ped.Steel 2
Guitar
121
36
SuperSwBass
Bass
156
Factory Data
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
36
SuperSwBas2
Bass
121
37
Slap Bass 2
Bass
121
37
Thumb Bass
121
37
Dyna Bass
121
38
SynthBass 1
Bass
121
38
SynBassWarm
121
38
SynBassReso
121
38
121
121
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
49
StringsEns2
Strings & Vocals
121
49
SweeperStr.
Strings & Vocals
Bass
121
50
SynStrings1
Strings & Vocals
Bass
121
50
SynStrings3
Strings & Vocals
121
50
Analog Str
Strings & Vocals
Bass
121
50
AnalogVelve
Strings & Vocals
Bass
121
50
Odissey
Strings & Vocals
Clav Bass
Bass
121
51
SynStrings2
Strings & Vocals
38
Hammer
Bass
121
52
Choir Aahs
Strings & Vocals
38
30303 Bass
Bass
121
52
Choir Aahs2
Strings & Vocals
121
38
30303Square
Bass
121
52
Oooh Voices
Strings & Vocals
121
38
Bass Square
Bass
121
52
OhSlowVoice
Strings & Vocals
121
38
SynBass Res
Bass
121
52
Take Voices
Strings & Vocals
121
38
Digi Bass 1
Bass
121
52
TakeVoices2
Strings & Vocals
121
10
38
Digi Bass 2
Bass
121
52
Oooh Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
11
38
Digi Bass 3
Bass
121
52
Aaah Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
12
38
BlindAsABat
Bass
121
52
Mmmh Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
13
38
Jungle Bass
Bass
121
52
Oh-AhVoices
Strings & Vocals
121
14
38
Auto Pilot
Synth 2
121
10
52
Slow Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
15
38
Hybrid Bass
Bass
121
11
52
Grand Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
16
38
Dr. Octave
Bass
121
12
52
Choir Light
Strings & Vocals
121
39
SynthBass 2
Bass
121
13
52
StringChoir
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Attack Bass
Bass
121
53
Voice Oohs
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Rubber Bass
Bass
121
53
Humming
Strings & Vocals
121
39
AttackPulse
Bass
121
53
Doolally
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Euro Bass
Bass
121
53
Airways
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Jungle Rez
Bass
121
54
Synth Voice
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Nasty Bass
Bass
121
54
AnalogVoice
Strings & Vocals
121
39
Phat Bass
Bass
121
54
Vocalesque
Strings & Vocals
121
39
PoinkerBass
Bass
121
54
Vocalscape
Strings & Vocals
121
40
Violin
Strings & Vocals
121
54
ClassicVox
Strings & Vocals
121
40
SlowAttViol
Strings & Vocals
121
54
DreamVoice
Strings & Vocals
121
40
Solo Violin
Strings & Vocals
121
55
Orches. Hit
Brass
121
40
Slow Violin
Strings & Vocals
121
55
BassHitPlus
Brass
121
41
Viola
Strings & Vocals
121
55
6th Hit
Brass
121
42
Cello
Strings & Vocals
121
55
Euro Hit
Brass
121
43
Contrabass
Strings & Vocals
121
55
BrassImpact
Brass
121
44
Tremolo Str
Strings & Vocals
121
55
HitInIndia
SFX
121
45
PizzicatoSt
Strings & Vocals
121
55
Wild Arp
Synth 2
121
45
PizzEnsembl
Strings & Vocals
121
55
Flip Blip
Synth 2
121
45
PizzSection
Strings & Vocals
121
56
Trumpet
Trp & Trbn
121
45
Dbl Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
56
DarkTrumpet
Trp & Trbn
121
46
Orches.Harp
Strings & Vocals
121
56
Trumpet 2
Trp & Trbn
121
46
Yang Chin
Strings & Vocals
121
56
MonoTrumpet
Trp & Trbn
121
47
Timpani
Drum & Perc
121
56
TrumpetExpr
Trp & Trbn
121
48
StringsEns1
Strings & Vocals
121
56
TrumptPitch
Trp & Trbn
121
48
String&Bras
Strings & Vocals
121
56
Dual Trump
Trp & Trbn
121
48
60s Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
56
Flugel Horn
Trp & Trbn
121
48
St. Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
56
Warm Flugel
Trp & Trbn
121
48
LegatoStrng
Strings & Vocals
121
56
BeBopCornet
Trp & Trbn
121
48
i3 Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
57
Trombone
Trp & Trbn
121
48
N Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
57
Trombone 2
Trp & Trbn
121
48
ArcoStrings
Strings & Vocals
121
57
BrightTromb
Trp & Trbn
121
48
Oct.Strings
Strings & Vocals
121
57
HardTrombon
Trp & Trbn
121
48
StringQuart
Strings & Vocals
121
57
SoftTrombon
Trp & Trbn
121
10
48
Symph. Bows
Strings & Vocals
121
57
PitchTromb
Trp & Trbn
121
11
48
Ens. & Solo
Strings & Vocals
121
58
Tuba
Trp & Trbn
121
12
48
Camera Str.
Strings & Vocals
121
58
Ob.Tuba
Trp & Trbn
121
13
48
ArabStrings
Strings & Vocals
121
58
Tuba Gold
Trp & Trbn
Factory Data
157
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
58
Dynabone
Trp & Trbn
121
59
Muted Trp
Trp & Trbn
121
66
TenorBreath
Sax
121
66
Tenor Growl
Sax
121
59
Muted Trp 2
Trp & Trbn
121
66
Folk Sax
Sax
121
59
Wha Trumpet
Trp & Trbn
121
67
BaritoneSax
Sax
121
59
MutEnsemble
Trp & Trbn
121
67
Barit Growl
Sax
121
59
MutEnsembl2
Trp & Trbn
121
67
BreathyBari
Sax
121
60
French Horn
Brass
121
68
Oboe
Woodwind
121
60
FrenchHorn2
Brass
121
68
Double Reed
Woodwind
121
60
French Sect
Brass
121
69
EnglishHorn
Woodwind
121
60
ClassicHorn
Brass
121
69
EnglisHorn2
Woodwind
121
60
Horns & Ens
Brass
121
70
Bassoon
Woodwind
121
61
BrassSect.1
Brass
121
71
Clarinet
Woodwind
121
61
BrassSect.2
Brass
121
71
Jazz Clarin
Woodwind
121
61
Tight Brass
Brass
121
71
Clarinet G
Woodwind
121
61
Glen&Friend
Brass
121
71
Sect Winds
Woodwind
121
61
BigBandBrs
Brass
121
71
Sect Winds2
Woodwind
121
61
Sax & Brass
Brass
121
71
ClarinetEns
Woodwind
121
61
Glen & Boys
Brass
121
71
Woodwinds
Woodwind
121
61
Trp & Brass
Brass
121
71
Folk Clarin
Woodwind
121
61
AttackBrass
Brass
121
72
Piccolo
Woodwind
121
61
Trumpet Ens
Brass
121
72
Small Orch
Woodwind
121
10
61
TromboneEns
Brass
121
72
Nay
Woodwind
121
11
61
Trombones
Brass
121
73
Flute
Woodwind
121
12
61
TightBrass2
Brass
121
73
Jazz Flute
Woodwind
Woodwind
121
13
61
Fat Brass
Brass
121
73
FluteSwitch
121
14
61
Dyna Brass
Brass
121
73
FluteDyn5th
Woodwind
121
15
61
Brass Expr.
Brass
121
73
Flute Frull
Woodwind
121
16
61
Brass Band
Brass
121
73
Orch. Flute
Woodwind
121
17
61
Film Brass
Brass
121
73
Flute Muted
Woodwind
121
18
61
Brass Slow
Brass
121
73
WoodenFlute
Woodwind
121
19
61
Fanfare
Brass
121
73
Bambu Flute
Woodwind
121
20
61
Movie Brass
Brass
121
73
Flute 2
Woodwind
121
21
61
Power Brass
Brass
121
74
Recorder
Woodwind
121
22
61
Dyna Brass2
Brass
121
74
Recorder 2
Woodwind
121
23
61
Sfz Brass
Brass
121
75
Pan Flute
Woodwind
121
24
61
Dbl Brass
Brass
121
75
Kawala
Woodwind
121
25
61
Brass Hit
Brass
121
76
BlownBottle
Woodwind
121
26
61
Brass Fall
Brass
121
77
Shakuhachi
Woodwind
121
62
Syn Brass 1
Brass
121
77
Old Shaku
Woodwind
121
62
Syn Brass 3
Brass
121
77
Shaku 2
Woodwind
121
62
AnalogBras1
Brass
121
78
Whistle
Woodwind
121
62
Jump Brass
Brass
121
78
Whistle 2
Woodwind
121
62
ElectrikBrs
Brass
121
79
Ocarina
Woodwind
121
62
Syn Brass 5
Brass
121
80
Lead Square
Synth 2
121
63
Syn Brass 2
Brass
121
80
LeadSquare2
Synth 2
121
63
Syn Brass 4
Brass
121
80
Lead Sine
Synth 2
121
63
AnalogBras2
Brass
121
80
Old Portam
Synth 2
121
63
Brass Pad
Brass
121
80
Dance Lead
Synth 2
121
63
Big Panner
Synth 1
121
80
Wave Lead
Synth 2
121
64
Soprano Sax
Sax
Synth 2
121
64
Sweet Sprno
Sax
121
65
Alto Sax
Sax
121
80
Sine Wave
121
80
Analog Lead
Synth 2
121
80
Old&Analog
Synth 2
121
65
Alto Breath
Sax
121
80
Gliding Sq.
Synth 2
121
65
SaxEnsemble
Sax
121
10
80
Sine Switch
Synth 2
121
65
BreathyAlto
Sax
121
11
80
Square Rez
Synth 2
121
65
AltSaxGrowl
Sax
121
81
Lead Saw
Synth 2
121
66
Tenor Sax
Sax
121
81
Lead Saw 2
Synth 2
121
66
Tenor Noise
Sax
121
81
LeadSawPuls
Synth 2
121
66
Soft Tenor
Sax
121
81
LeadDblSaw
Synth 2
158
Factory Data
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
81
Seq. Analog
Synth 2
121
91
Itopia Pad
Synth 1
121
81
Power Saw
Synth 2
121
91
Fresh Air
Strings & Vocals
121
81
Octo Lead
Synth 2
121
91
Heaven
Synth 1
121
81
Seq Lead
Synth 2
121
91
Pop Syn Pad
Synth 1
121
81
PhatSawLead
Synth 2
121
91
Future Pad
Synth 1
121
81
Glide Lead
Synth 2
121
91
TsunamiWave
Synth 1
121
10
81
Fire Wave
Synth 2
121
91
FreshBreath
Synth 1
121
11
81
Rezbo
Synth 2
121
91
RavelianPad
Synth 1
121
12
81
Syn Pianoid
Synth 2
121
91
FullVox Pad
Synth 1
121
82
Calliope
Synth 2
121
10
91
Dance ReMix
Synth 1
121
83
Chiff
Synth 2
121
92
BowedGlass
Synth 1
121
84
Charang
Synth 2
121
93
MetallicPad
Synth 1
121
84
Wire Lead
Synth 2
121
93
Cosmic
Synth 1
121
84
Synchro City
Synth 2
121
94
Halo Pad
Synth 1
121
84
Sync Kron
Synth 2
121
95
Sweep Pad
Synth 1
121
84
MetallicRez
Synth 2
121
95
AstralDream
Synth 1
121
84
Brian Sync
Synth 2
121
95
Meditate
Synth 1
121
84
Arp Twins
Synth 2
121
95
DarkElement
Synth 1
121
85
Voice Lead
Strings & Vocals
121
95
Mellow Pad
Synth 1
121
85
EtherVoices
Strings & Vocals
121
95
Cinema Pad
Synth 1
121
85
Cyber Choir
Strings & Vocals
121
96
Ice Rain
Synth 1
121
86
Fifths Lead
Synth 2
121
96
MotionOcean
Synth 1
121
86
Crimson5ths
Synth 2
121
96
Caribbean
Synth 1
121
87
Bass & Lead
Synth 2
121
97
Soundtrack
Synth 1
121
87
Soft Wrl
Synth 2
121
97
Air Clouds
Synth 1
121
87
ElectroLead
Synth 2
121
97
Reso Down
Synth 1
121
87
Rich Lead
Synth 2
121
97
Tinklin Pad
Synth 1
121
87
ThinAnaLead
Synth 2
121
97
Pods In Pad
Synth 1
121
87
EspressLead
Synth 2
121
97
Noble Pad
Synth 1
121
87
HipHop Lead
Synth 2
121
97
Rave
Synth 1
121
87
Square Bass
Synth 2
121
97
ElastickPad
Synth 1
121
87
Big & Raw
Synth 2
121
98
Crystal
Synth 2
121
87
Cat Lead
Synth 2
121
98
SynthMallet
SFX
121
88
New Age Pad
Synth 1
121
98
Vs Bell Boy
Mallet & Bell
121
88
VirtualTrav
Synth 1
121
98
KrystalBell
Mallet & Bell
121
88
Arp Angeles
Synth 1
121
98
Digi Bell
Mallet & Bell
121
89
Warm Pad
Synth 1
121
98
Moving Bell
Synth 1
121
89
Sine Pad
Synth 1
121
98
Bell Pad
Mallet & Bell
121
89
MasterPad
Synth 1
121
98
Bell Choir
Synth 1
121
89
Power Synth
Synth 1
121
99
Atmosphere
Synth 2
121
89
The Pad
Synth 1
121
100
Brightness
Synth 2
121
89
Money Pad
Synth 1
121
100
Lonely Spin
Synth 1
121
89
Dark Pad
Synth 1
121
100
Syn Ghostly
Synth 1
121
89
Freedom Pad
Synth 1
121
101
Goblins
SFX
121
89
Analog Pad
Synth 1
121
101
MotionRaver
Synth 2
121
89
Analog Pad2
Synth 1
121
101
Digi IcePad
Synth 1
121
90
Polysynth
Synth 1
121
102
Echo Drops
SFX
121
90
Reso Sweep
Synth 1
121
102
Echo Bell
SFX
121
90
Sky Watcher
Synth 1
121
102
Echo Pan
SFX
121
90
Syn Sweeper
Synth 1
121
102
Band Passed
Synth 2
121
90
Super Sweep
Synth 1
121
102
Pan Reso
Synth 2
121
90
Wave Sweep
Synth 1
121
102
Moon Cycles
Synth 1
121
90
Cross Sweep
Synth 1
121
103
Star Theme
SFX
121
90
Dig PolySix
Synth 1
121
104
Sitar
Guitar
121
90
Noisy Stabb
Synth 1
121
104
Sitar 2
Guitar
121
90
Mega Synth
Synth 1
121
104
SitarTambou
Guitar
121
10
90
TecnoPhonic
Synth 1
121
104
IndianStars
Guitar
121
11
90
Farluce
Synth 1
121
104
IndianFrets
Guitar
121
91
Choir Pad
Synth 1
121
104
Bouzouki
Guitar
Factory Data
159
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
microARRANGER
GM2
Bank
121
122
Thunder
SFX
121
122
Wind
SFX
Guitar
121
122
Stream
SFX
Oud
Guitar
121
122
Bubble
SFX
105
Jaw Harp
SFX
121
123
Bird Tweet
SFX
106
Shamisen
Guitar
121
123
Dog
SFX
121
107
Koto
Guitar
121
123
HorseGallop
SFX
121
107
Taisho Koto
Guitar
121
123
Bird Tweet2
SFX
121
107
Kanun
Guitar
121
124
Telephone 1
SFX
121
107
Kanun Trem.
Guitar
121
124
Telephone 2
SFX
121
107
Kanun Mix
Guitar
121
124
Door Creak
SFX
121
108
Kalimba
Mallet & Bell
121
124
Door
SFX
121
108
VeloKalimba
Mallet & Bell
121
124
Scratch
SFX
121
109
Bag Pipe
Woodwind
121
124
Wind Chime
SFX
121
109
War Pipes
Woodwind
121
125
Helicopter
SFX
121
110
Fiddle
Strings & Vocals
121
125
Car Engine
SFX
121
111
Shanai
Woodwind
121
125
Car Stop
SFX
121
111
Zurna
Woodwind
121
125
Car Pass
SFX
121
111
Hichiriki
Woodwind
121
125
Car Crash
SFX
121
112
Tinkle Bell
Mallet & Bell
121
125
Siren
SFX
121
112
Gamelan
Mallet & Bell
121
125
Train
SFX
121
112
BaliGamelan
Mallet & Bell
121
125
Jetplane
SFX
121
112
GarbageMall
Mallet & Bell
121
125
Starship
SFX
121
113
Agogo
Drum & Perc
121
125
Burst Noise
SFX
121
114
Steel Drums
Mallet & Bell
121
126
Applause
SFX
121
114
Warm Steel
Mallet & Bell
121
126
Laughing
SFX
121
115
Woodblock
Drum & Perc
121
126
Screaming
SFX
121
115
Castanets
Drum & Perc
121
126
Punch
SFX
121
116
Taiko Drum
Drum & Perc
121
126
Heart Beat
SFX
121
116
Concert BD
Drum & Perc
121
126
Footsteps
SFX
121
117
Melodic Tom
Drum & Perc
121
126
Stadium
SFX
121
117
MelodicTom2
Drum & Perc
121
127
Gun Shot
SFX
121
117
Rev Tom
Drum & Perc
121
127
Machine Gun
SFX
121
118
Synth Drum
Drum & Perc
121
127
Lasergun
SFX
121
118
Rhyt.BoxTom
Drum & Perc
121
127
Explosion
SFX
121
118
Electr.Drum
Drum & Perc
121
118
Rev Snare
Drum & Perc
121
119
Reverse Cym
Drum & Perc
121
119
Dragon Gong
Drum & Perc
121
120
GtFretNoise
SFX
121
120
GtrCutNoise
SFX
121
120
AcBassStrng
SFX
121
120
VoxWahChick
Guitar
121
121
BreathNoise
SFX
121
121
Flute Click
Woodwind
121
122
Seashore
SFX
121
122
Rain
SFX
121
104
Tambra
Guitar
121
105
Banjo
Guitar
121
105
BanjoKeyOff
121
105
121
121
160
Factory Data
Drum Kits
DRUM KITS
CC00 CC32

tory Drum Kit Programs in order of Bank SelectPro
gramChangenumber.
MSB.CC32: Control Change 32, or Bank Select LSB. PC:
ProgramChange.
CC00 CC32
PC
Name
GM2
120
Std. Kit1
120
Std. Kit2
120
Std. Kit3
120
AcousticKit
120
Std. Kit4
120
120
Room Kit1
120
HipHop Kit1
120
10
Jungle Kit
120
11
Techno Kit1
120
12
Room Kit2
120
13
HipHop Kit2
120
14
Techno Kit2
120
15
Techno Kit3
120
16
Power Kit1
120
17
Power Kit2
120
120
24
Electro Kit
120
25
Analog Kit
120
26
House Kit1
57: (remap to 0)
1823: (remap to 16)
PC
Name
120
27
House Kit2
120
28
House Kit3
120
29
House Kit4
120
120
120
120
40
Brush Kit1
120
41
Brush V.S.2
120
120
120
120
120
51: (remap to 116)
120
5255: (remap to 48)
120
120
120
64
Percus.Kit1
120
65
Latin P.Kit
120
66
TRI-Per.KIT
120
67
i30 Perc.Kit
120
6871: (remap to 64)
120
72115: (remap to 0)
120
116
Arabian Kit 1
120
117
Arabian Kit 2
120
GM2
3031: (remap to 24)

32
Jazz Kit
3339: (remap to 32)
4247: (remap to 40)

48
OrchestraK.
49: (remap to 48)

50
56
Bdrum&Sdrum
SFX Kit
5763: (remap to 56)
118127: (remap to 0)
Factory Data
161
Drum Kit instruments
DRUM KIT INSTRUMENTS

Legend: In the Drum
Kit tables, the numer
120xx before each
Drum Kit name is the
Bank
Select
MSB
(CC00) Bank Select
LSB (CC32) Program
Change (PC) number.
Sample enlists both the
sample number in mem
ory, and the sample
name. Excl is the Exl
cusiveparameter:whena
note is struck, all notes
with the same Exclusive
number are stopped. A
rightpointing
arrow
() indicates a velocity
switch.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
Note
G#-1
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
120-0-0: Std. Kit1

Sample
17
125
123
124
37
48
0
12
31
87
2
73
120
119
74
120
119
121
143
281
145
145
74
142
249
213
2
0
73
32
122
37
79
90
79
94
78
89
78
77
104
77
113
106
114
212
107
225
104
198
113
171
168
159
161
158
207
202
224
224
219
182
234
234
181
180
199
200
200
215
216
214
213
220
228
231
178
203
202
243
BD-House 1
99-SD
88-BD
88-SD
SD-Full Room
SD-Processed
BD-Dry 1
BD-Tight
SD-Dry 1
HH1 Closed2
BD-Dry 3
SideStickAmb
SD-Orch.
SD-Orch.Roll
DrumStickHit
SD-Orch.
SD-Orch.Roll
FingerSnaps
Zap2
Noise White
DJ-Scratch2
DJ-Scratch2
DrumStickHit
Zap1
Click
Triangle-Open
BD-Dry 3
BD-Dry 1
SideStickAmb
SD-Dry 2
Hand Claps
SD-Full Room
Tom 2-Floor
HH1 Open 2
Tom 2-Floor
HH2 Foot
Tom 2-Lo
HH1 Open 1
Tom 2-Lo
Tom 2-Hi
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom 2-Hi
Ride-Edge 2
China Cymbal
Ride-Jazz
Tambourin-Acc2
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 1
Vibraslap
Ride-Edge 2
BongoHi-Open
BongoLo-Open
CongaLoMtSlp
CongaHi-Open
CongaLo-Open
TimbaleHi-Rim2
TimbaleLo-Open
Agogo-Bell
Agogo-Bell
Cabasa-Up
MaracasPush
SambaWhistle
SambaWhistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock1
Woodblock1
Cuica-Hi
Cuica-Lo
Triangle-Mute
Triangle-Open
Cabasa-Down
Sleigh Bell
Marc Tree
CastSingle
TimbaleLo-Mute
TimbaleLo-Open
Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
7
7
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-1: Std. Kit2

Sample
0
BD-Dry 1
17
BD-House 1
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
48
SD-Processed
6
BD-Pillow
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
39
SD-Jazz Ring
87
HH1 Closed2
0
BD-Dry 1
72
SideStickDry
32
SD-Dry 2
49
SD-CrackerRoom
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
12
BD-Tight
10
BD-Tubby
73
SideStickAmb
38
SD-Off Center
127 88-Claps
38
SD-Off Center
79
Tom 2-Floor
86
HH1 Closed1
79
Tom 2-Floor
88
HH1 Foot
78
Tom 2-Lo
89
HH1 Open 1
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
77
Tom 2-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
159 CongaLoMtSlp
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
7
7
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-2: Std. Kit3

Sample
17
125
123
124
38
48
6
27
42
87
5
72
69
32
74
120
119
121
143
281
145
145
74
142
249
213
0
10
73
39
127
40
79
92
79
94
78
89
78
77
104
77
113
106
114
212
107
225
104
198
113
171
168
163
161
158
207
202
224
224
219
182
234
234
181
180
199
200
200
215
216
214
213
220
228
231
178
203
202
243
BD-House 1
99-SD
88-BD
88-SD
SD-Off Center
SD-Processed
BD-Pillow
BD-Amb.Rocker
SD-BrushHit
HH1 Closed2
BD-Jazz
SideStickDry
SD-Brasser
SD-Dry 2
DrumStickHit
SD-Orch.
SD-Orch.Roll
FingerSnaps
Zap2
Noise White
DJ-Scratch2
DJ-Scratch2
DrumStickHit
Zap1
Click
Triangle-Open
BD-Dry 1
BD-Tubby
SideStickAmb
SD-Jazz Ring
88-Claps
SD-Amb.Piccolo
Tom 2-Floor
HH2 Closed1
Tom 2-Floor
HH2 Foot
Tom 2-Lo
HH1 Open 1
Tom 2-Lo
Tom 2-Hi
Crash Cymbal 1
Tom 2-Hi
Ride-Edge 2
China Cymbal
Ride-Jazz
Tambourin-Acc2
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 1
Vibraslap
Ride-Edge 2
BongoHi-Open
BongoLo-Open
CongaHiMtSlap
CongaHi-Open
CongaLo-Open
TimbaleHi-Rim2
TimbaleLo-Open
Agogo-Bell
Agogo-Bell
Cabasa-Up
MaracasPush
SambaWhistle
SambaWhistle
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Woodblock1
Woodblock1
Cuica-Hi
Cuica-Lo
Triangle-Mute
Triangle-Open
Cabasa-Down
Sleigh Bell
Marc Tree
CastSingle
TimbaleLo-Mute
TimbaleLo-Open
Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
7
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
162
Factory Data
Note
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
120-0-3: AcousticKit
120-0-4: Std. Kit4
Sample
Excl.
Sample
17
BD-House 1
Off
17
BD-House 1
125 99-SD
Off
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
Off
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
Off
124 88-SD
38
SD-Off Center
Off
38
SD-Off Center
49
SD-CrackerRoom
Off
48
SD-Processed
6
BD-Pillow
Off
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
Off
12
BD-Tight
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
Off
39
SD-Jazz Ring
87
HH1 Closed2
1
87
HH1 Closed2
5
BD-Jazz
Off
2
BD-Dry 3
72
SideStickDry
Off
72
SideStickDry
120 SD-Orch.
7
32
SD-Dry 2
119 SD-Orch.Roll
7
31
SD-Dry 1
74
DrumStickHit
Off
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
7
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
7
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
Off
121 FingerSnaps
Off
143 Zap2
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
Off
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
7
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
7
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
Off
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
Off
142 Zap1
249 Click
Off
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
Off
213 Triangle-Open
3
BD-Normal
Off
2
BD-Dry 3
06 BD-Dry 1BD-Pillow
Off
12
BD-Tight
73
SideStickAmb
Off
73
SideStickAmb
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
3536 SD-Ghost fSD-Ghost p Off
122 Hand Claps
Off
127 88-Claps
37
SD-Full Room
3536 SD-Ghost fSD-Ghost p Off
79
Tom 2-Floor
Off
79
Tom 2-Floor
90
HH1 Open 2
1
90
HH1 Open 2
79
Tom 2-Floor
Off
79
Tom 2-Floor
94
HH2 Foot
1
94
HH2 Foot
78
Tom 2-Lo
Off
78
Tom 2-Lo
89
HH1 Open 1
1
89
HH1 Open 1
78
Tom 2-Lo
Off
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
Off
77
Tom 2-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
Off
104 Crash Cymbal 1
77
Tom 2-Hi
Off
77
Tom 2-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
Off
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
Off
106 China Cymbal
115 Ride-Cup
Off
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
Off
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
Off
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
Off
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
Off
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
Off
198 Vibraslap
114 Ride-Jazz
Off
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
Off
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
Off
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
Off
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
Off
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
Off
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
Off
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
Off
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
Off
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
Off
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
2
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
2
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
3
181 Guiro Short
3
180 Guiro Long
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
Off
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
Off
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
Off
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
4
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
4
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
5
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
5
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
Off
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
Off
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
Off
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
Off
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
6
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
6
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Off
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-8: Room Kit1

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
10
BD-Tubby
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
72
SideStickDry
49
SD-CrackerRoom
127 88-Claps
37
SD-Full Room
79
Tom 2-Floor
86
HH1 Closed1
79
Tom 2-Floor
94
HH2 Foot
78
Tom 2-Lo
96
HH2 Open
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
77
Tom 2-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
7
7
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-9: HipHop Kit1

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
28
BD-Pop 99
21
BD-Hip 3
126 88-Rimshot
60
SD-Ringy
127 88-Claps
67
SD-Vintage6
75
Tom 1-Hi
97
HH-OldClose1
75
Tom 1-Hi
100 HH-OldClose2
75
Tom 1-Hi
98
HH-Old Open1
75
Tom 1-Hi
75
Tom 1-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
75
Tom 1-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
101 HH-Old Open2
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
Factory Data
163
Note
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
120-0-10: Jungle Kit

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
19
BD-Hip 1
29
BD-Deep 88
121 FingerSnaps
66
SD-Vintage5
127 88-Claps
61
SD-Tiny
75
Tom 1-Hi
129 88-HH Open
75
Tom 1-Hi
102 HH-Hip
75
Tom 1-Hi
98
HH-Old Open1
75
Tom 1-Hi
75
Tom 1-Hi
132 88-Crash
75
Tom 1-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
101 HH-Old Open2
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-11: Techno Kit1

Sample
21
BD-Hip 3
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
13
BD-Squash
17
BD-House 1
242 Comp Voice Noise
125 99-SD
127 88-Claps
125 99-SD
139 Real El.Tom
99
HH-Old TiteClos
139 Real El.Tom
103 HH-AlpoClose
139 Real El.Tom
101 HH-Old Open2
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
139 Real El.Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
106 China Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-12: Room Kit2

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
46
SD-Big Rock
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
12
BD-Tight
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
72
SideStickDry
48
SD-Processed
127 88-Claps
47
SD-Yowie
76
Tom 1-Floor
93
HH2 Closed2
76
Tom 1-Floor
94
HH2 Foot
75
Tom 1-Hi
91
HH1 Sizzle
75
Tom 1-Hi
75
Tom 1-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
75
Tom 1-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-13: HipHop Kit2

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
25
BD-Ambi Kick
BD-Dance 99
24
121 FingerSnaps
51
SD-Rap
337 Alkis
55
SD-Hip 2
75
Tom 1-Hi
97
HH-OldClose1
75
Tom 1-Hi
102 HH-Hip
75
Tom 1-Hi
98
HH-Old Open1
75
Tom 1-Hi
75
Tom 1-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
75
Tom 1-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
101 HH-Old Open2
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
164
Factory Data
Note
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
23
BD-Pop Kick
17
BD-House 1
126 88-Rimshot
52
SD-Noise
127 88-Claps
143 Zap2
133 88-Tom
99
HH-Old TiteClos
133 88-Tom
103 HH-AlpoClose
133 88-Tom
101 HH-Old Open2
133 88-Tom
133 88-Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
133 88-Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
215 Cuica-Hi
233 Flexatone
233 Flexatone
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
342 Darbuka 1 DumOp
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off

Sample
13
BD-Squash
59
SD-Hip 6
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
56
SD-Hip 3
58
SD-Hip 5
25
BD-Ambi Kick
11
BD-Gated
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
90
HH1 Open 2
6
BD-Pillow
72
SideStickDry
47
SD-Yowie
59
SD-Hip 6
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
23
BD-Pop Kick
17
BD-House 1
140 PR-House05
70
SD-Chili
127 88-Claps
124 88-SD
257 Tribe
130 99-HH Close
273 Wind
100 HH-OldClose2
296 Amp Noise
131 99-HH Open
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
139 Real El.Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
278 Xylophone Spectr
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
212 Tambourin-Acc2
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
239 Uhh
237 Yeah!
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-16: Power Kit1

Sample
24
BD-Dance 99
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
65
SD-Vintage4
64
SD-Vintage3
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
19
BD-Hip 1
38
SD-Off Center
93
HH2 Closed2
13
BD-Squash
73
SideStickAmb
62
SD-Vintage1
69
SD-Brasser
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
11
BD-Gated
9
BD-Terminator
73
SideStickAmb
50
SD-Dance
122 Hand Claps
49
SD-CrackerRoom
82
Tom Processed
92
HH2 Closed1
82
Tom Processed
88
HH1 Foot
82
Tom Processed
96
HH2 Open
82
Tom Processed
82
Tom Processed
104 Crash Cymbal 1
82
Tom Processed
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-17: Power Kit2

Sample
24
BD-Dance 99
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
65
SD-Vintage4
64
SD-Vintage3
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
19
BD-Hip 1
38
SD-Off Center
93
HH2 Closed2
13
BD-Squash
73
SideStickAmb
62
SD-Vintage1
69
SD-Brasser
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
23
BD-Pop Kick
BD-Gated
11
72
SideStickDry
48
SD-Processed
122 Hand Claps
60
SD-Ringy
82
Tom Processed
93
HH2 Closed2
82
Tom Processed
94
HH2 Foot
82
Tom Processed
96
HH2 Open
82
Tom Processed
82
Tom Processed
104 Crash Cymbal 1
82
Tom Processed
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
Factory Data
165
Note
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
120-0-24: Electro Kit

Sample
19
BD-Hip 1
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
38
SD-Off Center
64
SD-Vintage3
23
BD-Pop Kick
25
BD-Ambi Kick
59
SD-Hip 6
128 88-HH Close
17
BD-House 1
143 Zap2
48
SD-Processed
65
SD-Vintage4
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
15
BD-Dance 2
138 FM El.Tom
141 PR-House06
139 Real El.Tom
127 88-Claps
58
SD-Hip 5
139 Real El.Tom
90
HH1 Open 2
139 Real El.Tom
94
HH2 Foot
139 Real El.Tom
89
HH1 Open 1
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
139 Real El.Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-25: Analog Kit

Sample
271 Explosion
59
SD-Hip 6
3
BD-Normal
47
SD-Yowie
39
SD-Jazz Ring
71
SD-Whopper
23
BD-Pop Kick
24
BD-Dance 99
69
SD-Brasser
86
HH1 Closed1
19
BD-Hip 1
142 Zap1
59
SD-Hip 6
61
SD-Tiny
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
29
BD-Deep 88
29
BD-Deep 88
126 88-Rimshot
124 88-SD
127 88-Claps
124 88-SD
133 88-Tom
128 88-HH Close
133 88-Tom
129 88-HH Open
133 88-Tom
129 88-HH Open
133 88-Tom
133 88-Tom
132 88-Crash
133 88-Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
282 Noise FM Mod
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
134 88-Conga
133 88-Tom
133 88-Tom
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
135 88-Clave
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
215 Cuica-Hi
230 Finger Cymbal
230 Finger Cymbal
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-26: House Kit1

Sample
23
BD-Pop Kick
67
SD-Vintage6
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
50
SD-Dance
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
25
BD-Ambi Kick
9
BD-Terminator
65
SD-Vintage4
143 Zap2
22
BD-Hip 4
142 Zap1
66
SD-Vintage5
310 Mouth Harp
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
21
BD-Hip 3
25
BD-Ambi Kick
141 PR-House06
61
SD-Tiny
127 88-Claps
125 99-SD
257 Tribe
130 99-HH Close
82
Tom Processed
96
HH2 Open
123 88-BD
131 99-HH Open
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
139 Real El.Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
106 China Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
102 HH-Hip
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
239 Uhh
237 Yeah!
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
101 HH-Old Open2
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off

Sample
23
BD-Pop Kick
125 99-SD
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
50
SD-Dance
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
25
BD-Ambi Kick
9
BD-Terminator
65
SD-Vintage4
143 Zap2
22
BD-Hip 4
142 Zap1
66
SD-Vintage5
310 Mouth Harp
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
21
BD-Hip 3
BD-Squash
13
319 Rek-Jingle
65
SD-Vintage4
127 88-Claps
51
SD-Rap
79
Tom 2-Floor
99
HH-Old TiteClos
79
Tom 2-Floor
103 HH-AlpoClose
78
Tom 2-Lo
97
HH-OldClose1
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
77
Tom 2-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
106 China Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
209 Tambourin-Push
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
166
Factory Data
Note
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6

Sample
23
BD-Pop Kick
125 99-SD
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
50
SD-Dance
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
25
BD-Ambi Kick
9
BD-Terminator
65
SD-Vintage4
143 Zap2
22
BD-Hip 4
142 Zap1
66
SD-Vintage5
310 Mouth Harp
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
28
BD-Pop 99
24
BD-Dance 99
141 PR-House06
47
SD-Yowie
127 88-Claps
59
SD-Hip 6
139 Real El.Tom
128 88-HH Close
139 Real El.Tom
128 88-HH Close
139 Real El.Tom
129 88-HH Open
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
104 Crash Cymbal 1
139 Real El.Tom
113 Ride-Edge 2
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
102 HH-Hip
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
215 Cuica-Hi
233 Flexatone
233 Flexatone
101 HH-Old Open2
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off

Sample
23
BD-Pop Kick
125 99-SD
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
50
SD-Dance
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
25
BD-Ambi Kick
9
BD-Terminator
65
SD-Vintage4
143 Zap2
22
BD-Hip 4
142 Zap1
66
SD-Vintage5
310 Mouth Harp
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
21
BD-Hip 3
11
BD-Gated
73
SideStickAmb
31
SD-Dry 1
127 88-Claps
52
SD-Noise
139 Real El.Tom
128 88-HH Close
139 Real El.Tom
129 88-HH Open
139 Real El.Tom
129 88-HH Open
139 Real El.Tom
139 Real El.Tom
132 88-Crash
139 Real El.Tom
111 CYM-99 Ride
108 CymbalReverse
114 Ride-Jazz
211 Tambourin-Acc1
107 Splash Cymbal
136 88-Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
209 Tambourin-Push
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
215 Cuica-Hi
233 Flexatone
233 Flexatone
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-32: Jazz Kit

Sample
17
BD-House 1
125 99-SD
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
39
SD-Jazz Ring
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
6
BD-Pillow
37
SD-Full Room
87
HH1 Closed2
0
BD-Dry 1
73
SideStickAmb
32
SD-Dry 2
42
SD-BrushHit
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
5
BD-Jazz
4
BD-SoftRoom
73
SideStickAmb
31
SD-Dry 1
127 88-Claps
39
SD-Jazz Ring
84
Tom JazzFloor
92
HH2 Closed1
84
Tom JazzFloor
94
HH2 Foot
83
Tom Jazz Hi
91
HH1 Sizzle
83
Tom Jazz Hi
83
Tom Jazz Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
83
Tom Jazz Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
115 Ride-Cup
212 Tambourin-Acc2
105 Crash Cymbal 2
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
112 Ride-Edge 1
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
165 CongaHi-Slap2
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
120-0-40: Brush Kit1

Sample
79
Tom 2-Floor
79
Tom 2-Floor
79
Tom 2-Floor
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
32
SD-Dry 2
5
BD-Jazz
6
BD-Pillow
121 FingerSnaps
86
HH1 Closed1
2
BD-Dry 3
72
SideStickDry
43
SD-BrushTap1
43
SD-BrushTap1
74
DrumStickHit
120 SD-Orch.
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
6
BD-Pillow
BD-Jazz
5
73
SideStickAmb
43
SD-BrushTap1
42
SD-BrushHit
45
SD-BrushSwirl
85
Tom Brush Hi
90
HH1 Open 2
85
Tom Brush Hi
94
HH2 Foot
85
Tom Brush Hi
95
HH2 FootOpen
85
Tom Brush Hi
85
Tom Brush Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
85
Tom Brush Hi
112 Ride-Edge 1
106 China Cymbal
114 Ride-Jazz
212 Tambourin-Acc2
107 Splash Cymbal
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
198 Vibraslap
113 Ride-Edge 2
171 BongoHi-Open
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
161 CongaHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
202 TimbaleLo-Open
224 Agogo-Bell
224 Agogo-Bell
219 Cabasa-Up
182 MaracasPush
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
181 Guiro Short
180 Guiro Long
199 Claves
200 Woodblock1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
216 Cuica-Lo
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
220 Cabasa-Down
228 Sleigh Bell
231 Marc Tree
178 CastSingle
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
202 TimbaleLo-Open
243 Stadium
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
7
7
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
3
3
Off
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
6
6
Off
Factory Data
167
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
Note
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
120-0-41: Brush V.S.2

120-0-48: OrchestraK
120-0-116: Arabian Kit 1
Sample
Excl.
Sample
Excl.
Sample
79
Tom 2-Floor
Off
17
BD-House 1
79
Tom 2-Floor
Off
125 99-SD
79
Tom 2-Floor
Off
123 88-BD
78
Tom 2-Lo
Off
124 88-SD
77
Tom 2-Hi
Off
37
SD-Full Room
32
SD-Dry 2
Off
48
SD-Processed
5
BD-Jazz
Off
0
BD-Dry 1
6
BD-Pillow
Off
12
BD-Tight
121 FingerSnaps
Off
31
SD-Dry 1
86
HH1 Closed1
1
87
HH1 Closed2
2
BD-Dry 3
Off
2
BD-Dry 3
72
SideStickDry
Off
73
SideStickAmb
43
SD-BrushTap1
7
74
DrumStickHit
43
SD-BrushTap1
7
283 Tubular
74
DrumStickHit
Off
225 Cowbell
120 SD-Orch.
7
120 SD-Orch.
7
225 Cowbell
119 SD-Orch.Roll
7
119 SD-Orch.Roll
7
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
Off
121 FingerSnaps
Off
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
Off
86
HH1 Closed1
Off
143 Zap2
281 Noise White
Off
88
HH1 Foot
Off
87
HH1 Closed2
145 DJ-Scratch2
7
89
HH1 Open 1
7
145 DJ-Scratch2
Off
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
7
112 Ride-Edge 1
74
DrumStickHit
Off
74
DrumStickHit
Off
74
DrumStickHit
142 Zap1
Off
142 Zap1
Off
165 CongaHi-Slap2
249 Click
Off
249 Click
Off
249 Click
213 Triangle-Open
Off
213 Triangle-Open
Off
249 Click
5
BD-Jazz
Off
4
BD-SoftRoom
Off
2
BD-Dry 3
116 BD-Orch.
Off
17
BD-House 1
34 BD-Normal BDSoftRoom Off
43
SD-BrushTap1
Off
73
SideStickAmb
Off
72
SideStickDry
120 SD-Orch.
Off
33
SD-Dry 3
4344 SD-BrushTap1SD-BrushTap2 Off
178 CastSingle
Off
337 Alkis
3942 SD-Jazz Ring SDBrushHit Off
120 SD-Orch.
Off
68
SD-AmbiHop
4545 SD-BrushSwirl SDBrushSwirl Off
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
Off
79
Tom 2-Floor
90
HH1 Open 2
1
118 Timpani
Off
88
HH1 Foot
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
Off
79
Tom 2-Floor
94
HH2 Foot
1
118 Timpani
Off
94
HH2 Foot
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
Off
78
Tom 2-Lo
95
HH2 FootOpen
1
118 Timpani
Off
89
HH1 Open 1
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
Off
78
Tom 2-Lo
Off
77
Tom 2-Hi
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
104 Crash Cymbal 1
Off
118 Timpani
Off
104 Crash Cymbal 1
85
Tom Brush Hi
Off
118 Timpani
Off
77
Tom 2-Hi
112 Ride-Edge 1
Off
118 Timpani
Off
113 Ride-Edge 2
106 China Cymbal
Off
118 Timpani
Off
352 Hollo 1
114 Ride-Jazz
Off
118 Timpani
Off
353 Hollo 2
212 Tambourin-Acc2
Off
212 Tambourin-Acc2
Off
211 Tambourin-Acc1
107 Splash Cymbal
Off
107 Splash Cymbal
Off
345 Darbuka 2
225 Cowbell
Off
225 Cowbell
Off
225 Cowbell
104 Crash Cymbal 1
Off
104 Crash Cymbal 1
Off
350 Darbuka D3
198 Vibraslap
Off
198 Vibraslap
Off
219 Cabasa-Up
113 Ride-Edge 2
Off
117 Orch Cymb
Off
339 Bandir Closed
171 BongoHi-Open
Off
171 BongoHi-Open
Off
353 Hollo 2
168 BongoLo-Open
Off
168 BongoLo-Open
Off
168 BongoLo-Open
163 CongaHiMtSlap
Off
163 CongaHiMtSlap
Off
353 Hollo 2
161 CongaHi-Open
Off
161 CongaHi-Open
Off
171 BongoHi-Open
158 CongaLo-Open
Off
158 CongaLo-Open
Off
305 Douf-rim-ak
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
Off
207 TimbaleHi-Rim2
Off
344 Darbuka 1 Closed
202 TimbaleLo-Open
Off
202 TimbaleLo-Open
Off
348 Darbuka D1
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
346 Darbuka 3
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
224 Agogo-Bell
Off
349 Darbuka D2
219 Cabasa-Up
Off
219 Cabasa-Up
Off
341 Darbuka 1 Tek7
182 MaracasPush
Off
182 MaracasPush
Off
341 Darbuka 1 Tek7
234 SambaWhistle
2
234 SambaWhistle
2
343 Darbuka 1 Tek5
234 SambaWhistle
2
234 SambaWhistle
2
359 Tef 1
181 Guiro Short
3
181 Guiro Short
3
360 Tef 2
180 Guiro Long
3
180 Guiro Long
3
320 Rik1
199 Claves
Off
199 Claves
Off
322 Rik3
200 Woodblock1
Off
200 Woodblock1
Off
360 Tef 2
Off
200 Woodblock1
Off
359 Tef 1
200 Woodblock1
215 Cuica-Hi
4
215 Cuica-Hi
4
360 Tef 2
216 Cuica-Lo
4
216 Cuica-Lo
4
318 Rek-dom-ak
214 Triangle-Mute
5
214 Triangle-Mute
5
359 Tef 1
213 Triangle-Open
5
213 Triangle-Open
5
321 Rik2
220 Cabasa-Down
Off
220 Cabasa-Down
Off
361 Tef 3
228 Sleigh Bell
Off
228 Sleigh Bell
Off
360 Tef 2
231 Marc Tree
Off
231 Marc Tree
Off
312 Bells Open
178 CastSingle
Off
178 CastSingle
Off
323 Sagat-HalfOpen
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
6
203 TimbaleLo-Mute
6
324 Sagat-Close
202 TimbaleLo-Open
6
202 TimbaleLo-Open
6
351 Davul
243 Stadium
Off
243 Stadium
Off
357 Ramazan DVL2
(continues on the next page)
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
4
4
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
2
Off
3

Sample
17
BD-House 1
125 99-SD
123 88-BD
124 88-SD
37
SD-Full Room
48
SD-Processed
0
BD-Dry 1
12
BD-Tight
31
SD-Dry 1
87
HH1 Closed2
2
BD-Dry 3
73
SideStickAmb
74
DrumStickHit
283 Tubular
225 Cowbell
225 Cowbell
119 SD-Orch.Roll
121 FingerSnaps
143 Zap2
87
HH1 Closed2
145 DJ-Scratch2
145 DJ-Scratch2
74
DrumStickHit
165 CongaHi-Slap2
249 Click
249 Click
2
BD-Dry 3
12
BD-Tight
72
SideStickDry
33
SD-Dry 3
122 Hand Claps
33
SD-Dry 3
79
Tom 2-Floor
90
HH1 Open 2
79
Tom 2-Floor
94
HH2 Foot
78
Tom 2-Lo
89
HH1 Open 1
78
Tom 2-Lo
77
Tom 2-Hi
104 Crash Cymbal 1
77
Tom 2-Hi
113 Ride-Edge 2
301 Dbk-Tky-Open
300 Dbk-Tky-Mute
211 Tambourin-Acc1
302 Dbk-Tky-Rim
225 Cowbell
302 Dbk-Tky-Rim
219 Cabasa-Up
304 Douf-Dom-ak
307 Douf-Tek-ak 2
168 BongoLo-Open
306 Douf-Tek-ak 1
171 BongoHi-Open
305 Douf-rim-ak
328 Tabla-Dom
348 Darbuka D1
331 Tabla-Tak
329 Tabla-Flam
330 Tabla-Rim
189 Tabla-Na
191 Tabla-Tin
318 Rek-dom-ak
321 Rik2
320 Rik1
322 Rik3
322 Rik3
319 Rek-Jingle
360 Tef 2
318 Rek-dom-ak
359 Tef 1
321 Rik2
322 Rik3
319 Rek-Jingle
312 Bells Open
323 Sagat-HalfOpen
324 Sagat-Close
351 Davul
175 Djembe-Open
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
Off
1
Off
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
4
4
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
2
Off
3
168
Factory Data
(continued)
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
Note
F6
F#6
G6
G#6
A6
A#6
B6
C7
120-0-41: Brush V.S.2

Sample
120-0-48: OrchestraK
Excl.
Sample
Excl.

Sample
356 Ramazan DVL1
358 Ramazan DVL3
355 Kup 2
83
Tom Jazz Hi
355 Kup 2
354 Kup 1
2
BD-Dry 3
354 Kup 1
Excl.
3
3
5
5
5
Off
Off
Off

Sample
175 Djembe-Open
301 Dbk-Tky-Open
312 Bells Open
323 Sagat-HalfOpen
324 Sagat-Close
351 Davul
5
BD-Jazz
361 Tef 3
Excl.
3
3
5
5
5
Off
Off
Off
Factory Data
169
Note
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
C-1
C#-1
D-1
D#-1
E-1
F-1
F#-1
G-1
G#-1
A-1
A#-1
B-1
C0
C#0
D0
D#0
E0
F0
F#0
G0
G#0
A0
A#0
B0
C1
C#1
D1
D#1
E1
F1
F#1
G1
G#1
A1
A#1
B1
C2
C#2
D2
D#2
E2
F2
F#2
G2
G#2
A2
A#2
B2
C3
C#3
D3
D#3
E3
F3
F#3
G3
G#3
A3
A#3
B3
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
E4
F4
F#4
G4
G#4
A4
A#4
B4
C5
C#5
D5
D#5
E5
F5
F#5
G5
G#5
120-0-50: Bdrum & Sdrum

Sample
Excl.
257 Tribe
Off
142 Zap1
Off
133 88-Tom
Off
123 88-BD
Off
123 88-BD
Off
22
BD-Hip 4
Off
23
BD-Pop Kick
Off
19
BD-Hip 1
Off
18
BD-House 2
Off
28
BD-Pop 99
Off
123 88-BD
Off
138 FM El.Tom
Off
28
BD-Pop 99
Off
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
Off
25
BD-Ambi Kick
Off
24
BD-Dance 99
Off
23
BD-Pop Kick
Off
22
BD-Hip 4
Off
21
BD-Hip 3
Off
19
BD-Hip 1
Off
18
BD-House 2
Off
16
BD-Dance 3
Off
15
BD-Dance 2
Off
13
BD-Squash
Off
30
BD-Klanger
Off
29
BD-Deep 88
Off
29
BD-Deep 88
Off
123 88-BD
Off
12
BD-Tight
Off
29
BD-Deep 88
Off
17
BD-House 1
Off
14
BD-Dance 1
Off
16
BD-Dance 3
Off
20
BD-Hip 2
Off
26
BD-Amb.Crackle
Off
29
BD-Deep 88
Off
17
BD-House 1
Off
23
BD-Pop Kick
Off
12
BD-Tight
Off
1
BD-Dry 2
Off
Off
2
BD-Dry 3
7
BD-Woofer
Off
3
BD-Normal
Off
0
BD-Dry 1
Off
10
BD-Tubby
Off
3
BD-Normal
Off
0
BD-Dry 1
Off
3
BD-Normal
Off
6
BD-Pillow
Off
116 BD-Orch.
Off
11
BD-Gated
Off
10
BD-Tubby
Off
8
BD-MondoKill
Off
10
BD-Tubby
Off
9
BD-Terminator
Off
15
BD-Dance 2
Off
138 FM El.Tom
Off
133 88-Tom
Off
29
BD-Deep 88
Off
16
BD-Dance 3
Off
33
SD-Dry 3
Off
37
SD-Full Room
Off
38
SD-Off Center
Off
39
SD-Jazz Ring
Off
31
SD-Dry 1
Off
41
SD-Paper
Off
65
SD-Vintage4
Off
69
SD-Brasser
Off
47
SD-Yowie
Off
49
SD-CrackerRoom
Off
46
SD-Big Rock
Off
59
SD-Hip 6
Off
48
SD-Processed
Off
50
SD-Dance
Off
52
SD-Noise
Off
62
SD-Vintage1
Off
47
SD-Yowie
Off
70
SD-Chili
Off
139 Real El.Tom
Off
125 99-SD
Off
124 88-SD
Off
120-0-56: SFX Kit

Sample
0
296
235
153
148
154
145
286
287
292
294
290
291
143
258
144
145
74
143
249
224
289
286
287
286
121
246
245
256
255
248
247
244
260
261
145
231
262
263
264
265
254
266
281
267
298
258
269
270
271
252
253
250
259
272
Excl.
181
209
210
211
211
212
212
209
212
319
233
230
BD-Dry 1
Off
197
Amp Noise
Off
172
Chinese Gong
Off
173
DJ-BD Rub
Off
170
DJ-Scratch3c
Off
211
DJ-SD Rub
Off
224
DJ-Scratch2
Off
273
GtCutNois1
Off
224
GtCutNois2
Off
174
E.GtrPick1
Off
200
Gtr Scratch1
Off
199
Dist.Slide1
Off
201
Dist.Slide2
Off
225
Zap2
Off
200
GunShot 1
Off
179
DJ-Scratch1
7
184
DJ-Scratch2
7
217
DrumStickHit
Off
186
Zap2
Off
182
Click
Off
184
Agogo-Bell
Off
219
Fret Noise
Off
190
GtCutNois1
Off
192
GtCutNois2
Off
198
GtCutNois1
Off
189
FingerSnaps
Off
214
Laughing
Off
116
Scream
Off
213
Punch
Off
181
Heart-Beat
Off
311
Footsteps 2
Off
180
Footsteps 1
Off
232
Applause
Off
231
DoorCreak
Off
182
DoorSlam
Off
122
DJ-Scratch2
Off
127
Marc Tree
Off
144
Car Engine
Off
145
Car Stop
Off
150
Car Pass
Off
234
Car Crash
Off
234
Crickets
Off
165
Train
Off
166
Noise White
Off
161
Helicopter
Off
158
Swish Terra
Off
215
GunShot 1
Off
216
MachineGun
Off
208
Laser gun
Off
207
Explosion
Off
206
Dog
Off
202
Gallop
Off
135
136
Bird 1
Off
Rainstick
Off
121
Thunder
Off
196
120-0-64: Percus.Kit1
Sample
Excl.
Guiro Short
Tambourin-Push
Tambourin-Pull
Tambourin-Acc1
Tambourin-Acc1
Tambourin-Acc2
Tambourin-Acc2
Tambourin-Push
Tambourin-Acc2
Rek-Jingle
Flexatone
Finger Cymbal
Tsuzumi
BongoHi-Slap
BongoHi-Stk1
BongoLo-Stk
Tambourin-Acc1
Agogo-Bell
Wind
Agogo-Bell
BongoHi-Stk2
Woodblock1
Claves
Woodblock2
Cowbell
Woodblock1
CastDouble
Baya-Open
Shaker1
Baya-Mute1
MaracasPush
Baya-Open
Cabasa-Up
Tabla-Open
Tabla-Mute1
Vibraslap
Tabla-Na
Triangle-Mute
BD-Orch.
Triangle-Open
Guiro Short
Jingle Bell
Guiro Long
Marc Tree LP
Marc Tree
MaracasPush
Hand Claps
88-Claps
DJ-Scratch1
DJ-Scratch2
DJ-HitRub
SambaWhistle
SambaWhistle
CongaHi-Slap2
CongaHeel
CongaHi-Open
CongaLo-Open
Cuica-Hi
Cuica-Lo
Timbale-Paila
TimbaleHi-Rim2
TimbaleHi-Rim1
TimbaleLo-Open
88-Clave
88-Cowbell
FingerSnaps
Taiko Rim
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
Off
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
120-0-65: Latin P.Kit

Sample
240
238
237
241
214
213
233
230
136
179
178
121
121
99
236
197
197
197
116
116
224
224
158
159
164
165
137
161
214
213
159
162
165
211
161
170
170
173
202
174
202
211
208
205
208
205
207
206
318
318
318
319
227
200
201
225
182
227
219
217
225
220
220
Hit It
Yeah!-Solo
Yeah!
Uhhhh Solo
Triangle-Mute
Triangle-Open
Flexatone
Finger Cymbal
88-Cowbell
CastDouble
CastSingle
FingerSnaps
FingerSnaps
HH-Old TiteClos
Metal Hit
Tsuzumi
Tsuzumi
Tsuzumi
BD-Orch.
BD-Orch.
Agogo-Bell
Agogo-Bell
CongaLo-Open
CongaLoMtSlp
CongaHi-Slap1
CongaHi-Slap2
88-Maraca
CongaHi-Open
Triangle-Mute
Triangle-Open
CongaLoMtSlp
CongaHiMute
CongaHi-Slap2
Tambourin-Acc1
CongaHi-Open
BongoLo-Stk
BongoLo-Stk
BongoHi-Stk1
TimbaleLo-Open
BongoHi-Stk2
TimbaleLo-Open
Tambourin-Acc1
Timbale-Paila
TimbaleHi-Edge
Timbale-Paila
TimbaleHi-Edge
TimbaleHi-Rim2
TimbaleHi-Rim1
Rek-dom-ak
Rek-dom-ak
Rek-dom-ak
Rek-Jingle
Mambo Bell
Woodblock1
Woodblock2
Cowbell
MaracasPush
Mambo Bell
Cabasa-Up
Shaker1
Cowbell
Cabasa-Down
Cabasa-Down
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
7
7
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
1
1
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Factory Data
170
(continued)
Note
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
115
117
118
119
120
A5
A#5
B5
C6
C#6
D6
D#6
E6
F6
F#6
G6
G#6
A6
A#6
B6
C7
C#7
D7
D#7
E7
F7
F#7
G7
G#7
A7
A#7
B7
C8
C#8
D8
D#8
E8
F8
F#8
G8
G#8
A8
A#8
B8
C9
120-0-50: Bdrum & Sdrum

Sample
124 88-SD
125 99-SD
55
SD-Hip 2
44
SD-BrushTap2
43
SD-BrushTap1
42
SD-BrushHit
42
SD-BrushHit
42
SD-BrushHit
45
SD-BrushSwirl
45
SD-BrushSwirl
45
SD-BrushSwirl
31
SD-Dry 1
33
SD-Dry 3
46
SD-Big Rock
68
SD-AmbiHop
54
SD-Hip 1
62
SD-Vintage1
56
SD-Hip 3
67
SD-Vintage6
143 Zap2
58
SD-Hip 5
71
SD-Whopper
69
SD-Brasser
62
SD-Vintage1
125 99-SD
71
SD-Whopper
71
SD-Whopper
50
SD-Dance
50
SD-Dance
125 99-SD
125 99-SD
60
SD-Ringy
120-0-56: SFX Kit

Excl.
Sample
Off
273 Wind
Off
281 Noise White
Off
274 Stream
Off
275 Bubble
Off
299 Cat
Off
251 Bird 2
Off
308 Growl
Off
243 Stadium
Off
277 Telephone Ring
Off
276 ChurchBell
Off
244 Applause
Off
244 Applause
Off
243 Stadium
Off
281 Noise White
Off
258 GunShot 1
Off
266 Train
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
120-0-64: Percus.Kit1
Sample
195 Taiko Open
143 Zap2
119 SD-Orch.Roll
120 SD-Orch.
117 Orch Cymb
117 Orch Cymb
336 Udu-f-open
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
290 Dist.Slide1
291 Dist.Slide2
286 GtCutNois1
287 GtCutNois2
292 E.GtrPick1
293 E.GtrPick2
294 Gtr Scratch1
295 Gtr Scratch2
289 Fret Noise
288 Power Chord
288 Power Chord
296 Amp Noise
Excl.
Off
Off
5
5
6
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
120-0-65: Latin P.Kit

Sample
220 Cabasa-Down
334 Tambourin-Mute2
333 Tambourin-Open
332 Tambourin-Mute
332 Tambourin-Mute
333 Tambourin-Open
336 Udu-f-open
175 Djembe-Open
183 MaracasPull
183 MaracasPull
215 Cuica-Hi
180 Guiro Long
181 Guiro Short
181 Guiro Short
216 Cuica-Lo
199 Claves
234 SambaWhistle
234 SambaWhistle
323 Sagat-HalfOpen
323 Sagat-HalfOpen
324 Sagat-Close
311 Jingle Bell
231 Marc Tree
231 Marc Tree
228 Sleigh Bell
340 Bongo Roll
140 PR-House05
140 PR-House05
17
BD-House 1
125 99-SD
29
BD-Deep 88
124 88-SD
39
SD-Jazz Ring
48
SD-Processed
0
BD-Dry 1
27
BD-Amb.Rocker
40
SD-Amb.Piccolo
86
HH1 Closed1
6
BD-Pillow
73
SideStickAmb
Excl.
Off
Off
5
5
6
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
3
3
Off
Off
4
4
5
5
5
Off
Off
Off
2
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Factory Data
Note
0
C-1
1
C#-1
2
D-1
3
D#-1
4
E-1
5
F-1
6
F#-1
7
G-1
8
G#-1
9
A-1
10
A#-1
11
B-1
12
C0
13
C#0
14
D0
15
D#0
16
E0
17
F0
18
F#0
19
G0
20
G#0
21
A0
22
A#0
23
B0
24
C1
25
C#1
26
D1
D#1
27
28
E1
29
F1
30
F#1
31
G1
32
G#1
33
A1
34
A#1
35
B1
36
C2
37
C#2
38
D2
39
D#2
40
E2
41
F2
42
F#2
43
G2
44
G#2
45
A2
46
A#2
47
B2
48
C3
49
C#3
50
D3
51
D#3
52
E3
53
F3
54
F#3
55
G3
56
G#3
57
A3
58
A#3
59
B3
60
C4
61
C#4
62
D4
63
D#4
64
E4
65
F4
66
F#4
67
G4
68
G#4
69
A4
70
A#4
71
B4
72
C5
73
C#5
74
D5
75
D#5
76
E5
77
F5
78
F#5
79
G5
80
G#5
81
A5
82
A#5
120-0-66: TRI-Per.KIT
Sample
322
321
320
319
318
303
195
317
316
315
314
313
196195
197
175175
177176
185184
186187
188303
190190
191194
192193
189193
192
116
257
121
122
214
213
179
178
179
180
181
180
198
199
135
216216
215215
202
200
204
200
203
200
205
207
226
206
227
208208
168
225
169
225
171
174
172172
158158
160
159
163
161161
162
166
164
167
165
224
Excl.
Rik3
Off
Rik2
Off
Rik1
Off
Rek-Jingle
Off
Rek-dom-ak
Off
Djembe-Bass
Off
Taiko Open
Off
Pand-Pattern4
Off
Pand-Pattern3
Off
Pand-Pattern2
Off
Pand-Pattern1
Off
Pand-Open
Off
Taiko RimTaiko Open
Off
TsuzumiTsuzumi
Off
Djembe-OpenDjembe-Open
Off
Djembe-SlapDjembe-Mute
Off
Baya-GheBaya-Open
Off
Baya-Mute1Baya-Mute2
Off
Baya-Mute5Djembe-Bass
Off
Tabla-OpenTabla-Open
Off
Tabla-TinTabla-Mute3
Off
Tabla-Mute1Tabla-Mute2
Off
Tabla-NaTabla-Mute2
6
Tabla-Mute1
Off
BD-Orch.
Off
Tribe
Off
FingerSnaps
Off
Hand Claps
Off
Triangle-Mute
1
Triangle-Open
1
CastDouble
Off
CastSingle
Off
CastDouble
Off
Guiro Long
2
Guiro Short
2
Guiro Long
2
Vibraslap
Off
Claves
Off
88-Clave
Off
Cuica-LoCuica-Lo
3
Cuica-HiCuica-Hi
Off
TimbaleLo-Open
Off
Woodblock1
Off
TimbaleLo-Rim
Off
Woodblock1
Off
TimbaleLo-Mute
Off
Woodblock1
Off
TimbaleHi-Edge
Off
TimbaleHi-Rim2
Off
ChachaBell
Off
TimbaleHi-Rim1
Off
Mambo Bell
Off
Timbale-PailaTimbale-Paila
Off
BongoLo-Open
Off
Cowbell
Off
BongoLo-Slap
Off
Cowbell
Off
BongoHi-Open
Off
BongoHi-Stk2
Off
Off
BongoHi-SlapBongoHi-Slap
CongaLo-OpenCongaLo-Open
Off
CongaLoSlap
Off
CongaLoMtSlp
Off
CongaHiMtSlap
Off
CongaHi-OpenCongaHi-Open
Off
CongaHiMute
Off
CongaHeel
Off
CongaHi-Slap1
Off
CongaToe
Off
CongaHi-Slap2
Off
Agogo-Bell
Off
120-0-67: i30 Perc.Kit

Sample
209
212
189
233
230
197
172
173
170
211
224
273
224
174
200
199
201
225
200
179
184
217
186
182
184
219
190
192
198
189
214
116
213
181
311
180
232
231
182
122
127
144
145
150
234
234
165
166
161
158
215
216
208
207
206
202
135
136
121
196
195
143
Tambourin-Push
Tambourin-Acc2
Tabla-Na
Flexatone
Finger Cymbal
Tsuzumi
BongoHi-Slap
BongoHi-Stk1
BongoLo-Stk
Tambourin-Acc1
Agogo-Bell
Wind
Agogo-Bell
BongoHi-Stk2
Woodblock1
Claves
Woodblock2
Cowbell
Woodblock1
CastDouble
Baya-Open
Shaker1
Baya-Mute1
MaracasPush
Baya-Open
Cabasa-Up
Tabla-Open
Tabla-Mute1
Vibraslap
Tabla-Na
Triangle-Mute
BD-Orch.
Triangle-Open
Guiro Short
Jingle Bell
Guiro Long
Marc Tree LP
Marc Tree
MaracasPush
Hand Claps
88-Claps
DJ-Scratch1
DJ-Scratch2
DJ-HitRub
SambaWhistle
SambaWhistle
CongaHi-Slap2
CongaHeel
CongaHi-Open
CongaLo-Open
Cuica-Hi
Cuica-Lo
Timbale-Paila
TimbaleHi-Rim2
TimbaleHi-Rim1
TimbaleLo-Open
88-Clave
88-Cowbell
FingerSnaps
Taiko Rim
Taiko Open
Zap2
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
Off
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
171
172
Factory Data
Note
83
B5
84
C6
85
C#6
86
D6
87
D#6
88
E6
89
F6
90
F#6
91
G6
92
G#6
93
A6
94
A#6
95
B6
96
C7
97
C#7
98
D7
99
D#7
100
E7
101
F7
102
F#7
103
G7
104
G#7
105
A7
106
A#7
107
B7
108
C8
109
C#8
110
D8
111
D#8
112
E8
F8
113
114
F#8
115
G8
115
G#8
117
A8
118
A#8
119
B8
120
C9
(continued)
120-0-66: TRI-Per.KIT
Sample
224
Agogo-Bell
183182 MaracasPullMaracasPush
217217 Shaker1Shaker1
218218 Shaker2Shaker2
221220 Cabasa-TapCabasa-Down
219221 Cabasa-UpCabasa-Tap
222223 Caxixi-HardCaxixi-Soft
209
Tambourin-Push
211211 Tambourin-Acc1Tambourin-Acc1
210
Tambourin-Pull
212
Tambourin-Acc2
228228 Sleigh BellSleigh Bell
234
SambaWhistle
234
SambaWhistle
229
RapSleighBell
234
SambaWhistle
231
Marc Tree
234
SambaWhistle
312
Bells Open
259
Rainstick
235
Chinese Gong
250
Bird 1
250
Bird 1
251
Bird 2
279
Cricket Spectrum
231
Marc Tree
Excl.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
4
4
Off
4
5
4
5
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
120-0-67: i30 Perc.Kit

Sample
119 SD-Orch.Roll
120 SD-Orch.
117 Orch Cymb
117 Orch Cymb
336 Udu-f-open
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
155 Orchestra Hit
290 Dist.Slide1
214 Triangle-Mute
213 Triangle-Open
233 Flexatone
312 Bells Open
223 Caxixi-Soft
179 CastDouble
179 CastDouble
121 FingerSnaps
121 FingerSnaps
236 Metal Hit
236 Metal Hit
Excl.
5
5
6
6
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
3
3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Factory Data
173
Performances
PERFORMANCES
AllPerformancesareusereditable.UsethefollowingtableasamodelforyourownPerfomancelists.
Note:YoucanremotelyselectPerformancesonthemicroARRANGER,bysendingitBankSelectMSB(CC#0),BankSelect
LSB(CC#32)andProgramChangemessagesontheControlchannel(seepage128).
#
1
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 1
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 2
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 3
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 5
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 6
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 7
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
PC
Bank: 9
CC#0 CC#32
1
PC
Bank: 10
CC#0 CC#32
1
10
PC
Bank: 11
CC#0 CC#32
1
11
PC
12
PC
Bank: 13
CC#0 CC#32
1
13
PC
Bank: 14
CC#0 CC#32
1
14
PC
Bank: 15
CC#0 CC#32
1
15
PC
16
PC
0
Bank: 17
CC#0 CC#32
1
17
PC
0
Bank: 18
CC#0 CC#32
1
18
PC
0
Bank: 19
CC#0 CC#32
1
19
Bank: 16
CC#0 CC#32
Bank: 12
CC#0 CC#32
Bank: 8
CC#0 CC#32
Bank: 4
PC
0
Bank: 20
174
Factory Data
MIDI Setup
MIDI SETUP
DEFAULT
Master Kbd
Sequencer1
Sequencer 2
Accordion 1
S1_Tr 1
Global
S1_Tr 1
S2_Tr 1
Global
S1_Tr 2
S1_Tr 2
S2_Tr 2
Lower
S1_Tr 3
S1_Tr 3
S2_Tr 3
Bass
S1_Tr 4
S1_Tr 4
S2_Tr 4
S1_Tr 5
S1_Tr 5
S2_Tr 5
S1_Tr 6
S1_Tr 6
S1_Tr 7
S1_Tr 8
9
10
MIDI IN
Channel
Accordion 2
Accordion 3
Ext. Seq
Upp1
Upp1
S1_Tr 1
Lower
Lower
S1_Tr 2
Bass
S1_Tr 3
Upp2
Upp2
S1_Tr 4
Upp3
Upp3
S1_Tr 5
S2_Tr 6
S1_Tr 6
S1_Tr 7
S2_Tr 7
S1_Tr 7
S1_Tr 8
S2_Tr 8
S1_Tr 8
S1_Tr 9
S1_Tr 9
S2_Tr 9
Bass
S1_Tr 9
S1_Tr 10
S1_Tr 10
S2_Tr 10
Drum
Drum
Drum
S1_Tr 10
11
S1_Tr 11
S1_Tr 11
S2_Tr 11
Perc
Perc
Perc
S1_Tr 11
12
S1_Tr 12
S1_Tr 12
S2_Tr 12
Acc1
Acc1
Acc1
S1_Tr 12
13
S1_Tr 13
S1_Tr 13
S2_Tr 13
Acc2
Acc2
Acc2
S1_Tr 13
14
S1_Tr 14
S1_Tr 14
S2_Tr 14
Acc3
Acc3
Acc3
S1_Tr 14
15
S1_Tr 15
S1_Tr 15
S2_Tr 15
Acc4
Acc4
Acc4
S1_Tr 15
16
S1_Tr 16
S1_Tr 16
S2_Tr 16
Acc5
Acc5
Acc5
S1_Tr 16
1 Upp1
Upp1
S1_Tr 1
S2_Tr 1
Upp1
S1_Tr 1
S2_Tr 1
Upp. 1
Upp2
Upp2
S1_Tr 2
S2_Tr 2
Upp2
S1_Tr 2
S2_Tr 2
Upp3
Upp3
S1_Tr 3
S2_Tr 3
Upp3
S1_Tr 3
S2_Tr 3
Lower
Lower
S1_Tr 4
S2_Tr 4
Lower
S1_Tr 4
S2_Tr 4
S1_Tr 5
S2_Tr 5
S1_Tr 5
S2_Tr 5
S1_Tr 6
S2_Tr 6
S1_Tr 6
S2_Tr 6
S1_Tr 7
S2_Tr 7
S1_Tr 7
S2_Tr 7
S1_Tr 8
S2_Tr 8
S1_Tr 8
S2_Tr 8
Bass
Bass
S1_Tr 9
S2_Tr 9
Bass
S1_Tr 9
S2_Tr 9
10
Drum
Drum
S1_Tr 10
S2_Tr 10
Drum
S1_Tr 10
S2_Tr 10
11
Perc
Perc
S1_Tr 11
S2_Tr 11
Perc
S1_Tr 11
S2_Tr 11
12
Acc1
Acc1
S1_Tr 12
S2_Tr 12
Acc1
S1_Tr 12
S2_Tr 12
13
Acc2
Acc2
S1_Tr 13
S2_Tr 13
Acc2
S1_Tr 13
S2_Tr 13
14
Acc3
Acc3
S1_Tr 14
S2_Tr 14
Acc3
S1_Tr 14
S2_Tr 14
15
Acc4
Acc4
S1_Tr 15
S2_Tr 15
Acc4
S1_Tr 15
S2_Tr 15
16
Acc5
Acc5
S1_Tr 16
S2_Tr 16
Acc5
S1_Tr 16
S2_Tr 16
MIDI IN Velocity
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
110
110
Normal
Normal
Chord 1 Chann.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Chord 2 Chann.
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
MIDI OUT
Channel
Effects
175
Diagrams
18. EFFECTS
microARRANGER is equipped with four powerful
Effect Processors (A, B, C, D). You can send them the
internaltracks.
Note
MIDI(CC#19)
MIDI(CC#20)
DIAGRAMS
MIDI(CC#21)
The following instructions show the signal path dia

gram for each of the effect types. The signal coming
from the tracks (Send) is mono. Before entering an
effect processor, it is split in two wires (Left and
Right),andprocessedinstereo.Thesignalisthenout
putinstereofromtheeffectprocessor,andsenttothe
Mixoutput(Left&Right,theheaphonesortheinternal
speakers).
Effect Block
Send
Modulation source
Diagram
Left
Off
No modulation
Gate1
Portamento Switch
Sostenu: #66
Sostenuto Pedal
MIDI(CC#80)
MIDI(CC#81)
MIDI(CC#82)
MIDI(CC#83)
Tempo
Whenthe
symbolisencoutered,aDynamicMod
ulationcanbeappliedtothecorrespondingparameter.
The following table shows the available modulation
sources.
Note
Prta.SW: #65
Right
DYNAMIC MODULATION SOURCES
Modulation source
Damper: #64
FILTER/DYNAMIC
Filter and dynamics control effects
000: No Effect
Select this option when you do not use any effects.
Whenthisoptionisselected,theeffectismuted.
001: Amp Simulat

(Stereo Amp Simulation)
Gate1+Dmpr
Thiseffectsimulatesthefrequencyresponsecharacter
istics of guitar amplifiers. It is also effective for organ
anddrumsounds.
Gate2
Gate2+Dmpr
Note Nr
Note Number
Velocity
Note Velocity
Stereo In - Stereo Out

Left
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation Filter
ATouch
After Touch
JS X
Joystick Left/Right
JS+Y: CC#01
Joystick Forward
JS-Y: CC#02
Joystick Backward
MIDI(CC#04)
Right
Wet / Dry
MIDI(CC#12)
Wet/Dry
Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds
MIDI(CC#13)
MIDI(CC#16)
MIDI(CC#18)
MIDI(CC#17)
Amplifier Type
Selects the type of guitar amplifier
SS, EL84, 6L6

Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Selects the modulation source of the effect balance
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance
100...+100
176
Effects
Filter/Dynamic
002: Compressor
003: Limiter
(Stereo Compressor)
(Stereo Limiter)
Thiseffectcompressestheinputsignaltoregulatethe
levelandgiveapunchyeffect.Itisusefulforguitar,
piano, and drum sounds. This is a stereo compressor.
Youcanlinkleftandrightchannels,oruseeachchan
nelseparately.
TheLimiterregulatestheinputsignallevel.Itissimilar
totheCompressor,exceptthattheLimitercompresses
only signals that exceed the specified level to lower
unnecessarypeaksignals.TheLimiterappliesapeak
ingtype EQ to the trigger signal (which controls the
degree of the Limiter effect), allowing you to set any
bandwidthtobecovered.Thiseffectisastereolimiter.
Youcanlinkleftandrightchannels,oruseeachchan
nelindividually.

Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
LEQ
HEQ
Compressor
Output Level
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Envelope - Control
LEQ
Output Level
Compressor
EQ Trim
Left
Wet / Dry
HEQ
Gain Adjust
Right
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Side PEQ
Envelope - Control
+
Envelope Select
Envelope Select
L/R Mix, L/R Individually
Determines whether the left and right channels are linked or used separately
Sensitivity
Sets the sensitivity
1...100
Attack
Sets the attack level
1...100
EQ Trim
Sets the EQ input level
0...100
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

Sets the gain of Low EQ
15.0...+15.0dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

Sets the gain of High EQ
15.0...+15.0dB
0...100
Gain Adjust
Wet / Dry
Envelope Select
L/R Mix, L Only, R Only, L/R Individually
Selects from linking both channels, controlling only from left channel, only
from the right channel, or controlling each channel individually
Ratio
Sets the signal compression ratio
Threshold [dB]
Sets the level above which the compressor is applied
100...+100
e
Src
Off...Tempo
Table , Selects the modulation source of the effect balance, on page 175
Amt
Table , Sets the modulation amount of the effect balance, on page 175
1...100
Release
Sets the release time
1...100
Src
Selects the modulation source for the output gain
Inf, 38...+24dB
,
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the output gain
63...+63
Side PEQ Insert

Toggles between on/off of the trigger signals EQ
Off, On
Trigger Monitor
Switches between effect output monitor and trigger signal monitor
Off, On
100...+100
a: Envelope Select
This parameter selects whether the left and right channels are
linked to control both signals simultaneously, or whether each
channel is controlled independently.
b: Sensitivity, f: Output Level
The Sensitivity parameter sets the sensitivity of the compressor. If this parameter is set to a higher value, lower level
sounds will be boosted. With a higher Sensitivity, the overall
volume level is higher. To adjust the final volume level, use
the Output Level parameter.
40...0dB
Attack
Sets the attack time
Gain Adjust [dB]

Sets the output gain
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Table , Sets the balance between the effect and dry sounds, on page 175
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the compressor output level
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the compressor output level
Limiter
Right
Output Level
Sets the output level of the compressor
Trigger Monitor
Envelope - Control
Side PEQ Cutoff [Hz]

Sets the EQ center frequency for the trigger signal
g
Q
Sets the EQ bandwidth for the trigger signal
Gain [dB]
Sets the EQ gain for the trigger signal
20...12.00kHz
0.5...10.0
18.0...+18.0dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Compressor - Sensitivity
Level
Wet
Louder
Sensitivity=100
Dry
Sensitivity=40
Time
c: Attack
This parameter controls the attack level.
Compressor - Attack
Level
Attack=80
Attack=20
Wet
Dry
Time
a: Envelope Select
When L/R Mix is selected for this parameter, the left and right
channels are linked to control the Limiter using the mixed signal. If L Only (or R Only) is selected, the left and right channels are linked, and the Limiter is controlled via only the left
(or right) channel.
With L/R individually, the left and right channels control the
Limiter individually.
b: Ratio, c: Threshold [dB], e: Gain Adjust [dB]
This parameter sets the signal compression Ratio. Compression is applied only when the signal level exceeds the
Threshold value.
Effects
177
Filter/Dynamic
Adjust the output level using the Gain Adjust parameter,

since compression causes the entire level to be reduced.
004: MBandLimit
(Multiband Limiter)
Limiter - Threshold / Ratio

Ratio=1.0 : 1
Output Level
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Threshold
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Louder
Ration=Inf : 1
This effect applies the Limiter to the low range, mid

range,andhighrangeoftheinputsignal.Youcancon
troldynamicsforeachrangetoadjustthesoundpres
sureofthelowrange,midrange,andhighrangeina
differentwayfromtheEQ.
Louder
Wet: Mono In - Mono Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out
Input Level
Left
Level
Dry
Band-Pass Filters
Low
Ratio=1.0 : 1
Ratio=2.0 : 1
Ratio=4.0 : 1
Threshold
Mid
Wet / Dry
Limiter
Envelope - Control
Low Offset
Limiter
Envelope - Control
High Mid Offset
Ratio=Inf : 1
Gain Adjust
Limiter
Time
d: Attack, d: Release
These parameters set the attack time and release time. A
higher attack time will cause the compression to be applied
more slowly.
Right
Envelope - Control
High Offset
Wet / Dry
Ratio
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
Threshold [dB]
Attack
1...100
Fx:003
Release
1...100
Fx:003
Low Offset [dB]

Gain of the low-range trigger signal
40...0dB
Mid Offset [dB]

Gain of the mid-range trigger signal
40...0dB
High Offset [dB]

Gain of the high-range trigger signal
40...0dB
40...0dB
Fx:003
Limiter - Attack / Release

Threshold
Dry
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Ratio=Inf : 1
Attack=100
Release=100
Wet
Gain Adjust [dB]

Sets the output gain
Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003,
Release
Attack
f: Side PEQ Insert, g: Side PEQ Cutoff [Hz], g: Q, g: Gain

[dB]
These parameters are used to set the EQ applied to the trigger signal.
The Limiter determines whether the compression is applied or
not, based on the post-EQ trigger signal. Setting the equalizer
allows you to set the Limiter to respond to any frequency
band.
f: Trigger Monitor
Setting this parameter On will cause the trigger signal to be
output, instead of the effect sound. Use this parameter to
check the trigger signal with EQ applied.
Usually, set this to Off.
Src
Selects the modulation source for the output gain
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the output gain
Off...Tempo
63...+63
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
e: Low Offset [dB], f: Mid Offset [dB], g: High Offset [dB]

These parameters set the gain of the trigger signal.
For example, if you do not want to apply compression to the
high range, reduce the High Offset value down below the
Threshold level. In this way, the high range limiter will not
respond, and compression will not be applied.
178
Effects
Filter/Dynamic
005: Gate
The Attack and Release parameters set the Gate attack time
and release time.
(Stereo Gate)
Gate - Threshold
This effect mutes the input signal if its level is lower

thanthespecifiedlevel.Italsoreversestheonandoff
operationofthegate,andusesNoteOnandOffmes
sagestoturnthegateonandoff.
Output Level
Louder
Threshold
Louder
Input Level
Left
Wet / Dry
Gate - Attack / Release
Delay
Gate
Threshold
Envelope - Control
Envelope - Control
Envelope Select
Delay
Dry
Gate
Right
Wet / Dry
Gate+Sus
Envelope Select
D-mod, L/R Mix, L Only, R Only
Selects from Control via the modulation source, mixing the left and right signals, Only left, and Only right
,
a
Src
Off...Gate2+Dmpr
Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select =
D-mod
b
Polarity
Switches between non-reversed and reversed Gate on/off
+,
Threshold
Sets the level to which the Gate is applied
0...100
Attack
1...100
Release
1...100
Delay Time [msec]

Sets the delay time of the gate input
0...100msec
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Attack=1
Release=1
Wet
Attack=100
Release=100
Release
Attack
e: Delay Time
This parameter sets the delay time of the Gate input. If the
sound has a very fast attack, increase the delay time so that
the signal will be input after the Gate is opened. This will preserve the attack part of the sound.
006: OD/HGainWah
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Wah)
ThisdistortioneffectutilizesanOverdrivemodeanda
HiGain mode. Controlling the wah effect, the 3band
EQ, and the amp simulation will allow you to create
versatile distortion sounds. This effect is suitable for
guitarandorgansounds.
100...+100
a: Envelope Select, a: Src

The Envelope Select parameter selects whether the gate
on/off is triggered by the level of the input signal, or controlled
directly by the modulation source. The Src parameter specifies the modulation source, selected from Off to
Gate2+Dpmr.
With Envelope Select = L/R Mix, the left and right channel
signal mixture will trigger the gate on/off. When L Only or R
Only is selected, the gate is controlled by either of the channel signals.
b: Polarity
This parameter reverses the Gate on/off operation. With a
negative value, the gate is closed when the input signal level
exceeds the Threshold. The gate operation controlled by the
modulation source is also reversed.
c: Threshold, d: Attack, d: Release
This parameter sets the signal level below which Gate is
applied when Envelope Select is set to L/R Mix, L Only, or
R Only.
Wet

Left
Wet / Dry
Pre Low-cut
Wah
Mode: Overdrive / Hi-Gain

Drive
3 Band PEQ
Amp Simulation
Driver
Output Level
Direct Mix
Right
Wet / Dry
D-mod
Wah
Switches Wah on/off
a
Off, On
,
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that switches the Wah on and off
Sw
Toggle, Moment
Selects the switching mode for the modulation source that switches the Wah
on and off
Wah Sweep Range

Sets the range of Wah
10...+10
,
b
Wah Sweep Src
Selects the modulation source that controls the Wah
c
Drive Mode
Switches between overdrive and hi-gain distortion
Off...Tempo
Overdrive, Hi-Gain
Drive
Sets the degree of distortion
1...100
d
Pre Low-cut
Sets the low range cut amount of the distortion input
Output Level
Sets the output level
e
Src
Selects the modulation source for the output level
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the output level
0...10
0...50
Off...Tempo
50...+50
Effects
179
Filter/Dynamic
Low Cutoff [Hz]

Sets the center frequency for Low EQ (shelving type)
20...1.0kHz
(Stereo Parametric 4-Band EQ)
f
Gain [dB]
Table , Sets the gain of Low EQ, on page 176
18...+18dB
Mid1 Cutoff [Hz]

300...10.00kHz
Sets the center frequency for Mid/High EQ 1 (peaking type)
g
Q
Sets the band width of Mid/High EQ 1
Gain [dB]
Sets the gain of Mid/High EQ 1
007: Param.4B Eq
0.5...10.0
This is a stereo 4band parametric equalizer. You can

selectpeakingtypeorshelvingtypeforBand1and4.
ThegainofBand2canbecontrolledbydynamicmod
ulation.
18...+18dB

Left
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4

PEQ
Mid2 Cutoff [Hz]

500...20.00kHz
h
Q
Gain [dB]
Direct Mix
Sets the amount of the dry sound mixed to the distortion
Trim
0.5...10.0
PEQ
PEQ
LEQ
HEQ
LEQ
Trim
18...+18dB
PEQ
Wet / Dry
PEQ
HEQ
PEQ
PEQ
PEQ
Right
0...50
Wet / Dry
D-mod
i
Speaker Simulation
Switches the speaker simulation on/off
Off, On
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Trim
Sets the input level
Band1 Type
Selects the type of Band 1
Peaking, Shelving-Low
Band4 Type
Selects the type of Band 4
Peaking, Shelving-High
100...+100
a: Wah
The Wah parameter switches the wah effect on/off.
a: Sw
This parameter sets how the wah effect is switched on and off
via the modulation source.
When Sw = Moment, the wah effect is usually turned off. It
is turned on only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
When a value for the modulation source is less than 64, off speed
is selected, and when the value is 64 or higher, on is selected.
b: Wah Sweep Range, b: Wah Sweep Src

This parameter sets the sweep range of the wah center frequency. A negative value will reverse the direction of sweep.
The wah center frequency can be controlled by the modulation source specified in the Wah Sweep Src parameter.
d: Drive, e: Output Level
The degree of distortion is determined by the level of input
signal and the setting of Drive. Raising the Drive setting
will cause the entire volume level to increase. Use the Output
Level parameter to adjust the volume level. The Output
Level parameter uses the signal level input to the 3-Band
EQ. If clipping occurs at the 3-Band EQ, adjust the Output
Level parameter.
d: Pre Low-cut
Cutting the signal in the low range before it is input to the Distortion will create a sharp distortion.
g: Q, h: Q
These parameters set the bandwidth of each equalizer. The
higher the value, the narrower the band becomes.
Band2 Dynamic Gain Src

Selects the modulation source of the Band 2 gain
Off...Tempo
Amt [dB]
Sets the modulation amount of Band 2 gain
18...+18dB
Band1 Cutoff [Hz]

Sets the center frequency of Band 1
20...1.00kHz
Q
Sets the bandwidth of Band 1
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
Sets the gain of Band 1
18.0...+18.0dB
Band2 Cutoff [Hz]

f
50...10.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
When Sw = Toggle, the wah effect is switched between on

and off each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
The switch will be turned on/off each time the value of the modulation source exceeds 64.
0...100
18.0...+18.0dB
,
Band3 Cutoff [Hz]

g
300...10.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band4 Cutoff [Hz]

h
500...20.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Band1 Type, c: Band4 Type

Selects a filter type for Band 1 and 4.
Parametric 4EQ - Band1, Band4 Type
+Gain
3dB
Band4 Type=Shelving High
Band4 Type=Peaking
0dB
Gain
Band1 Type=Shelving Low

Band1 Type=Peaking
3dB
Band1 Cutoff
Band4 Cutoff
180
Effects
Filter/Dynamic
d: Band2 Dynamic Gain Src, d: Amt [dB], f: Gain [dB]

You can control the gain of Band 2 using the modulation
source.
Parametric 4EQ - Band2 Dynamic Gain Control
You can configure a 21-Band Graphic EQ ranging from 80Hz

to 18kHz if you route three Graphic 7Band EQ effects in
series, with a setting of 7:Low, 9:Mid, and 11:High for each
EQ.
D-mod
+15dB
009: Wah/AutoWah
Band2 Cutoff
+6dB
+6dB
0dB
0dB
(Stereo Wah/Auto Wah)
Band2 Cutoff
9dB
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0
Band2 Dynamic Gain Amt[dB]= +9.0
D-mod
Thisstereowaheffectallowsyoutocreatesoundsfrom
vintagewahpedalsimulationtoautowahsimulation,
andmuchbroaderrangesettings.
Band2 Gain[dB]= +6.0

Band2 Dynamic Gain Amt[dB]= 15.0
008: Graph.7B Eq

Left
Wet / Dry
(Stereo Graphic 7 Band EQ)
Wah
Envelope Sens
Thisisastereo7bandgraphicequalizer.Thebargraph
of the gain setting for each band gives you a clear,
visual idea of frequency responses. You can select a
center frequency setting for each band from twelve
types,accordingtothesound.
Wah
Frequency Bottom
Sets the lower limit of the wah center frequency
0...100
Frequency Top
Sets the upper limit of the wah center frequency
0...100
Sweep Mode
Auto, D-mod, LFO
Selects the control from auto-wah, modulation source, and LFO
,
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7

Right
Wet / Dry
Type
1:Wide 1, 2:Wide 2, 3:Wide 3, 4:Half Wide 1, 5:Half Wide 2, 6:Half
Wide 3, 7:Low, 8:Wide Low, 9:Mid, 10:Wide Mid, 11:High, 12:Wide High
Selects a combination of center frequencies for each band
Trim
Sets the input level
Band1 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band2 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band3 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band4 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band5 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band6 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
Band7 [dB]
18.0...+18.0dB
0...100
0...100
Envelope Sens (Envelope Sensitivity)

Sets the sensitivity of auto-wah
0...100
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Src
Selects the modulation source of LFO speed
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO speed
100...+100
0.02...20.00Hz
,
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
Switches between using the frequency of the LFO speed and using the
tempo and notes
,
BPM
Selects MIDI Clock and assigns tempo
MIDI, 40...240
Base Note
, , , , , , ,
Selects the type of notes that specify the LFO speed
Times
Sets the number of notes that specify the LFO speed
x1...x16
Resonance
Sets the resonance amount
0...100
Low Pass Filter

Switches the Wah Low Pass Filter on and off
Off, On
100...+100
a: Type
This parameter selects a combination of center frequencies
for each band. Each center frequency is shown on the right
edge of the LCD.
Response
Sets the response speed when Sweep Mode = Auto or D-mod
Envelope Shape
Sets the sweep curve of auto-wah
Src
Off...Tempo
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the wah when Sweep Mode=D-mod
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Amt
Wet / Dry
Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 Band5 Band6 Band7
Trim
LFO
Right
Left
Trim
Sweep Mode
Auto
D-mod
LFO

Wet / Dry
Envelope Shape
Response
D-mod
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
181
Filter/Dynamic
a: Frequency Bottom, a: Frequency Top

The sweep width and direction of the wah filter are determined by the Frequency Top and Frequency Bottom settings.
Sweep Mode=D-mod
Frequency
Top=75
Wah
Higher
Bottom=60
(Stereo Random Filter)

Thisstereobandpassfilterusesastepshapewaveform
andrandomLFOformodulation.Youcancreateaspe
cialeffectfromfilteroscillation.
Wah
Left
Woo
Wet / Dry
Top=30
Woo
Bottom=25
Higher
Frequency
010: Random Filt
Filter
D-mod
Higher
Zero
D-mod
Higher
Zero
Max
Max
Filter
Right
Sweep Mode=Auto
Wet / Dry
Frequency
Frequency
LFO Phase
Wah
Bottom=75
Wah
Higher
Higher
Top=75
Wah
Woo
Woo
Bottom=25
LFO: Step-Tri/Random
Envelope
Top=25
LFO Waveform
Selects LFO Waveform
LFO Phase [degree]

Sets the LFO phase difference between the left and right
Woo
Envelope
Time
Envelope
Time
b: Sweep Mode
This parameter changes the wah control mode. Setting
Sweep Mode to Auto will select an auto-wah that sweeps
according to envelope changes in the input signal level. Autowah is frequently used for funk guitar parts and clav sounds.
When Sweep Mode is set to D-mod, you can control the filter directly via the modulation source in the same way as a
wah pedal.
When Sweep Mode is set to LFO, the effect uses LFO to
sweep in cycle.
c: Envelope Sens (Envelope Sensitivity)
This parameter sets the sensitivity of auto-wah. Increase the
value if the input signal is too low to sweep. Reduce the value
if the input signal is so high that the filter is stopped temporarily.
c: Envelope Shape
This parameter determines the sweep curve for auto-wah.
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c
LFO Step Freq (Frequency) [Hz]

Sets the LFO step speed (speed that changes in steps)
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO step speed
20.00...+20.00Hz
0.05...50.00Hz
,
50.00...+50.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009,
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
x1...x16
Fx:009
Step Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the LFO step speed
,
f
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the LFO step speed
value = 0...+100
g
Time
d: LFO Frequency [Hz], e: BPM/MIDI Sync

When BPM/MIDI Sync=Off, the LFO speed uses the LFO
Frequency parameter setting. When BPM/MIDI Sync=On,
the LFO speed follows the BPM, Base Note, and Times
settings.
e: BPM, e: Base Note, e: Times
One cycle of LFO sweep is obtained by multiplying the length
of a note () (selected for Base Note, in relation to the
tempo specified in (BPM, or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM
is set to MIDI) by the number specified in the Times parameter.
0.02...20.00Hz
,
Envelope Shape
value = 0...100
180...+180
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed
Amt
Level
Envelope
Step-Tri, Random
x1...x32
Manual
Sets the filter center frequency
0...100
Depth
Sets the modulation depth of filter center frequency
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source of filter modulation
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of filter modulation
100...+100
Resonance
0...100
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
,
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: LFO Waveform, c: LFO Frequency [Hz],

d: LFO Step Freq (Frequency) [Hz]
When LFO Waveform is set to Step-Tri, LFO is a stepshape, triangle waveform. The LFO Frequency parameter
sets the original triangle waveform speed. Changing the LFO
Step Freq parameter enables you to adjust the width of the
steps.
182
Effects
Filter/Dynamic
When LFO Waveform is set to Random, the LFO Step

Freq parameter uses a random LFO cycle.
011: Excit/Enhan
(Stereo Exciter/Enhancer)
Random Filter LFO
ThiseffectisacombinationoftheExciter,whichaddsa
punch to the sound and the Enhancer, which adds
spreadandpresence.
LFO Frequency
LFO Step Freq

LFO Step Freq
Step-Tri
Random
Left
Wet / Dry
LEQ
b: LFO Phase [degree]

Offsetting the left and right phases alters how modulation is
applied to the left and right channels, creating a swelling
affect.
HEQ
Exciter
EQ Trim
Delay
EQ Trim
Delay
Depth
Exciter
Enhancer
LFO Phase
0
Right
+90 +180 [degree]
Wet / Dry
D-mod
180
90
0 [degree]
e: BPM, f: Step Base Note, f: Times

The width of an LFO step, or a cycle of random LFO, is
obtained by multiplying the length of a note () (selected
for Step Base Note, in relation to the tempo specified in
BPM, or the MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI) by
the number specified in the Times parameter.
j: Wet/Dry
The effect sounds phase will be reversed when you set this
parameter in the range of values from Wet to 1:99.
Exciter Blend
Sets the intensity (depth) of the Exciter effect
100...+100
,
Src
Selects the modulation source of the Exciter intensity
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the Exciter intensity
100...+100
Emphatic Point
Sets the frequency to be emphasized
b
0...70
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source of the frequency to be emphasized
Amt
70...+70
Sets the amount of modulation of the frequency to be emphasized
Enhancer Dly L (Enhancer Delay L) [msec]

Sets the delay time for the Enhancer left channel
0.0...50.0msec
Enhancer Dly R (Enhancer Delay R) [msec]

Sets the delay time for the Enhancer right channel
0.0...50.0msec
Enhancer Depth
0...100
Sets the determines to what degree the Enhancer effect is applied
e
Src
Selects the modulation source of the Enhancer width
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the Enhancer width
100...+100
EQ Trim
Sets the 2-band EQ input level
0...100
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15.0...+15.0dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

Table , Sets the gain of High EQ, on page 176
15.0...+15.0dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Exciter Blend
This parameter sets the depth (intensity) of the Exciter effect.
Positive values give a frequency pattern (to be emphasized)
different from negative values.
b: Emphatic Point
This parameter sets the frequency to be emphasized. Higher
values will emphasize lower frequencies.
c: Enhancer Dly L [msec], d: Enhancer Dly R [msec]
These parameters set the delay time for the Enhancer left
and right channel. Specifying a slightly different delay time for
the left and right channel will add a stereo image, depth, and
width to the sound.
Effects
183
Filter/Dynamic
012: Sub Oscill
013: Talking Mod
(Stereo Sub Oscillator)
(Talking Modulator)
Thiseffectaddsverylowfrequenciestotheinputsig
nal. It is very useful when simulating a roaring drum
soundoremphasizingpowerfullowrange.Thiseffect
isdifferentfromtheequalizerinthatyoucanaddvery
lowrangeharmonics.Youcanalsoadjusttheoscillator
frequencytomatchaparticularnotenumber,foruseas
anoctaver.
This effect adds an unusual character, like a human

voice, to the input signal. Modulating the tone via
dynamic modulation, you can create an interesting
effectthatsoundsasiftheguitarorsynthesizeristalk
ing.
Left
Wet / Dry

Left
Wet / Dry
Talking Modulator
A-I-U-E-O
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens Pre LPF
D-mod
Note No.
Fixed Frequency
Note Interval, Fine
Fixed
Sine Oscillator
OSC Mode Pitch
Right
Note (Key Follow)
D-mod
Envelope Sens Pre LPF
LFO
Envelope Shape
Right
OSC Mode
Note (Key Follow), Fixed
Determines whether the oscillator frequency follows the note number or
whether it is fixed
Note Fine
Fine adjustment of the oscillator frequency
100...+100
Off...Tempo
Voice Top
Selects a vowel sound at the top end of control
A, I, U, E, O
10.0...80.0Hz
Voice Center
Selects a vowel sound in the center of control
A, I, U, E, O
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC
Mode=Fixed
Voice Bottom
Selects a vowel sound at the bottom end of control
A, I, U, E, O
Envelope Pre LPF

1...100
Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for which very low harmonics are
added

Sets the sensitivity with which very low harmonics are added
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
f
Envelope Shape
Sets the oscillators volume envelope curve
0...100
BPM
Times
100...+100
a: OSC Mode, b: Note Interval, b: Note Fine

The OSC Mode parameter selects the oscillator operation
mode. When Note (Key Follow) is selected, the oscillators
frequency is determined based on the note number, allowing
you to use it as an octaver. The Note Interval parameter sets
the pitch offset from the original note number by semitone
steps. The Note Fine parameter allows you to fine-tune in
steps of cents.
d: Envelope Pre LPF
This parameter sets the upper limit of the frequency range to
which very low harmonics are added. Adjust this parameter if
you do not want to add lower harmonics to the higher range.
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Amt
Bottom, 1...49, Center, 51...99, Top
Src
Selects the modulation source that controls the voice pattern
Amt
80...+80Hz
Sets the oscillator frequency modulation amount when OSC Mode=Fixed
d
Sweep Mode
D-mod, LFO
Switches between modulation source control and LFO control
Manual Voice Control
Voice pattern control
Note Interval
48...0
Sets the pitch difference from the note number when OSC Mode=Note (Key
Follow)
Fixed Frequency [Hz]

Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode=Fixed
c
D-mod
LFO
Wet / Dry
a
a
Wet / Dry
Voice Top: A
Voice Center: I
Voice Bottom: U
Sweep Mode
x1...x16
Fx:009
Formant Shift
Sets the frequency to which the effect is applied
100...+100
Resonance
Sets the Level of resonance of the voice pattern
0...100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: Voice Top, d: Voice Center, e: Voice Bottom

These parameters assign vowels to the top, center, and bottom position of the controller.
E.g.: When Voice Top=A, Voice Center=I, and Voice Bottom=U:
If Sweep Mode is set to D-mod and Ribbon is selected as
the modulation source, moving your finger from the right to
left of the ribbon controller will change the sound from a to
i, then u.
184
Effects
Filter/Dynamic
If Sweep Mode is set to LFO, the sound will change cyclically

from a to i, u, i, then a.
014: Decimator
(Stereo Decimator)
Talking Modulator Control

Voice Bottom
Voice Center
Voice Top
A
I
U
E
Thiseffectcreatesaroughsoundlikeacheapsampler
by lowering the sampling frequency and data bit
length.Youcanalsosimulatenoiseuniquetoasampler
(aliasing).
D-mod
JS X
Ribbon
JS +Y
JS Y
etc
Max
Zero

Left
+ Max
Wet / Dry
High Damp Output Level
Pre LPF Resolution
Decimator
+ Max
Zero
h: Formant Shift
This parameter adjusts the frequency level to which the effect
is applied. If you wish to apply the effect to a higher-range
sound, set this parameter to a higher value; to apply the effect
to a lower-range sound, set this to a lower value.
h: Resonance
This parameter sets the intensity of resonance for the voice
pattern. A larger value will add more character to the sound.
D-mod
Sampling Frequency
LFO
Decimator
Pre LPF
Resolution
High Damp Output Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
Off, On
Selects whether the harmonic noise caused by a decrease in sampling frequency is generated or not
High Damp [%]

Sets the ratio of cut of the high range
0...100%
Sampling Freq (Sampling Frequency) [Hz]

Sets the sampling frequency
b
1.00k...48.00kHz
Src
Selects the modulation source of the sampling frequency
Off...Tempo
Amt
48.00k...+48.00kHz
Sets the modulation amount of the sampling frequency
LFO Frequency [Hz]
Sets the LFO speed
c
0.02...20.00Hz
Src
Amt
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
Depth
Sets the depth of the sampling frequency LFO modulation
d
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the LFO modulation source of the sampling frequency
Amt
Sets the LFO modulation amount of the sampling frequency
100...+100
Resolution
Sets the data bit length
Output Level
Sets the output level
0...100
4...24
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source for the output level
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the output level
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Pre LPF
If a sampler with a very low sampling frequency receives very
high-pitched sound that could not be heard during playback, it
could generate pitch noise that is unrelated to the original
sound. Set Pre LPF to ON to prevent this noise from being
generated.
If you set the Sampling Freq to about 3kHz and set Pre
LPF to OFF, you can create a sound like a ring modulator.
e: Resolution, f: Output Level
If you set a smaller value for the Resolution parameter, the
sound may be distorted. The volume level may also be
changed. Use Output Level to adjust the level.
Effects
185
Pitch/Phase Mod.
015: Analog Rec
PITCH/PHASE MOD.
(Stereo Analog Record)

Thiseffectsimulatesthenoisecausedbyscratchesand
dustonanalogrecords.Italsoreproducessomeofthe
modulationcausedbyawarpedturntable.
Pitch/phase modulation effects
016: Chorus
(Stereo Chorus)

Left
Wet / Dry
EQ Trim
Pre EQ
EQ Trim
Pre EQ
Analog Record
Simulation
Thiseffectaddsthicknessandwarmthtothesoundby
modulatingthedelaytimeoftheinputsignal.Youcan
addspreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseofthe
leftandrightLFOsfromeachother.
Left
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LEQ
HEQ
Chorus
Speed [RPM]
Sets the r.p.m. of a record
33 1/3, 45, 78
Flutter
Sets the modulation depth
0...100
Noise Density
Sets the noise density
0...100
Noise Tone
Sets the noise tone
0...100
Noise Level
Sets the noise level
0...100
EQ Trim
LEQ
Chorus
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Src
Selects the modulation source for the noise level
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the noise level
100...+100
Click Level
Sets the click noise level
e
0...100
LFO Waveform
LFO Phase [degree]

Triangle, Sine
180...+180
Fx:010
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Off...Tempo
Off...Tempo
Amt
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the click noise level
100...+100
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
EQ Trim
Table , Sets the EQ input level, on page 176
Q
Sets the EQ band width
Gain [dB]
Sets the EQ gain
0...100
300...10.00kHz
100...+100
b: Flutter
This parameter enables you to set the depth of the modulation caused by a warped turntable.
e: Click Level
This parameter enables you to set the level of the click noise
that occurs once every rotation of the turntable. This simulation reproduces record noise, and the noise generated after
the music on a vinyl record finishes.
BPM
Times
18.0...+18.0dB
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
x1...x16
Fx:009
L Pre Delay [msec]

Sets the delay time for the left channel
0.0...50.0msec
R Pre Delay [msec]

Sets the delay time for the right channel
0.0...50.0msec
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...+20.00Hz
Base Note

Fx:009
0.5...10.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
LFO: Tri / Sine
Src
Selects the modulation source for the click noise level
Pre EQ Cutoff [Hz]

Sets the EQ center frequency
g
HEQ
EQ Trim
Depth
Sets the depth of LFO modulation
g
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source of the LFO modulation depth
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the LFO modulation depth
100...+100
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15.0...+15.0dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15.0...+15.0dB
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010,
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
e: L Pre Delay [msec], f: R Pre Delay [msec]

Setting the left and right delay time individually allows you to
control the stereo image.
186
Effects
Pitch/Phase Mod.
017: Harm.Chorus
(Stereo Harmonic Chorus)
This effect applies chorus only to higher frequencies.
This can be used to apply a chorus effect to a bass
soundwithoutmakingthesoundthinner.Youcanalso
usethischorusblockwithfeedbackasaflanger.
Left
Low Level
Chorus/Flanger
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
High/Low Split Point
Wet / Dry
High Level
High Level
Chorus/Flanger
h: Feedback
Sets the feedback amount of the chorus block. Increasing the
feedback will allow you to use the effect as a flanger.
018: MTap Ch/Dly

(Multitap Chorus/Delay)
ThiseffecthasfourchorusblockswithadifferentLFO
phase. You can create a complex stereo image by set
ting each blocks delay time, depth, output level, and
pan individually. You can also fix some of the chorus
blockstocombinethechorusanddelayeffects.
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In -Stereo Out
Low Level
Right
Left
Tap1 Delay
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Tap2 Delay
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Wet / Dry
LFO Waveform
Tap3 Delay
Tap4 Delay
Triangle, Sine
Right
LFO Phase [degree]

Amt
Off...Tempo
BPM
Pre Delay [msec]

Sets the delay time from the original sound
Depth
Level
Sets the Tap1 output level
0...30
L6...L1, C, R1...R6
0...570msec
Depth
Sets the Tap2 chorus depth
0...30
Level
0...30
Pan
Sets the Tap2 stereo image
Amt
100...+100
Tap3(090) [msec]
Sets the Tap3 (LFO phase=90 degrees) delay time
L6...L1, C, R1...R6
0...570msec
Depth
0...30
Level
0...30
100...+100
Pan
h
High Damp [%]
Sets the high range damping amount of the chorus block
0...570msec
0...100
1...100
0.02...13.00Hz
0...30
Off...Tempo
High/Low Split Point

Sets the frequency split point between the low and high range
Wet / Dry
Depth
Src
Feedback
Sets the feed back amount of the chorus block
0...100%
L6...L1, C, R1...R6
Low Level
Sets the low range output level
0...100
Tap4(270) [msec]
0...100
Depth
0...30
High Level
Sets the high range (chorus) output level
Level
0...30
Pan
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
0...570msec
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Tap2(180) [msec]
x1...x16
Fx:009
0.0...50.0msec
Pan
Pan
Base Note

Fx:009
Level
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Times
Pan
Pan
Tap1(000) [msec]
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
Level
Level
LFO: Triangle
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Pan
0 [degree]
180 [degree]
90 [degree]
270 [degree]
180...+180
Fx:010
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Level
Tap1 Feedback
Sets the Tap1 feedback amount
100...+100
f
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source of Tap1 feedback amount and effect balance
Amt
Sets the Tap1 feedback amount and modulation amount
g: High/Low Split Point

This parameter sets the frequency that splits the high and low
range. Only the high range will be sent to the chorus block.
L6...L1, C, R1...R6
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
g
Amt
100...+100
Effects
187
Pitch/Phase Mod.
019: Ensemble
020: Flanger
This Ensemble effect has three chorus blocks that use

LFO to create subtle shimmering, and gives three
dimensional depth and spread to the sound, because
thesignalisoutputfromtheleft,right,andcenter.
(Stereo Flanger)
Wet: Mono In - Stereo Out / Dry: Stereo In - Stereo Out

Left
Wet / Dry
This effect gives a significant swell and movement of

pitchtothesound.Itismoreeffectivewhenappliedto
asoundwithalotofharmonics.Thisisastereoflanger.
You can add spread to the sound by offsetting the
phaseoftheleftandrightLFOsfromeachother.
Left
Ensemble
Wet / Dry
Flanger
Feedback
Right
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Shimmer
Flanger
LFO
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Speed
Sets the LFO speed
a
1...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Depth
b
LFO: Tri / Sine
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Shimmer
Sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO waveform
LFO Shape
Determines how much the LFO waveform is changed
100...+100
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Fx:010
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
100...+100
c: Shimmer
This parameter sets the amount of shimmering of the LFO
waveform. Increasing this value adds more shimmering, making the chorus effect more complex and richer.
Triangle, Sine
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
0.0...50.0msec
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Delay Time [msec]

LFO Waveform
0...100
LFO Shape
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
f
Depth
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
Ensemble LFO
Level
Feedback
Sets the feedback amount
Shimmer
100...+100
g
High Damp [%]
Sets the feedback damping amount in the high range
0...100%
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010,
Time
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: LFO Shape
Changing the LFO waveform shape controls the peak sweep
of flanging effects.
LFO Shape
LFO Shape = 0...+100
LFO Shape = 0...100
LFO Waveform=Sine
g: Feedback, h: Wet/Dry
The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback
value is different. The harmonics will be emphasized when
the effect sound is mixed with the dry sound if you set a posi-
188
Effects
Pitch/Phase Mod.
tive value for both Feedback and Wet/Dry, and if you set a
negative value for both Feedback and Wet/Dry.
g: High Damp [%]
This parameter sets the amount of damping of the feedback
in the high range. Increasing the value will cut high-range harmonics.
022: Envel.Flang
(Stereo Envelope Flanger)
This Flanger uses an envelope generator for modula
tion.Youwillobtainthesamepatternofflangingeach
timeyouplay.YoucanalsocontroltheFlangerdirectly
usingthemodulationsource.
021: RandomFlang

Left
(Stereo Random Flanger)
Wet / Dry
Flanger
Thestereoeffectusesastepshapewaveformandran
dom LFO for modulation, creating a unique flanging
effect.
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right

Left
D-mod
Wet / Dry
D-mod
EG Attack/Decay
Flanger
Feedback
High Damp
Flanger
Right
LFO Phase
EG
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
L Dly Bottom [msec] (L Delay Bottom)

Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the left channel
0.0...50.0msec
Fx:009
L Dly Top [msec] (L Delay Top)

Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the left channel
0.0...50.0msec
Fx:009
R Dly Bottom [msec] (R Delay Bottom)

Sets the lower limit of the delay time on the right channel
0.0...50.0msec
Fx:009
R Dly Top [msec] (R Delay Top)

Sets the upper limit of the delay time on the right channel
0.0...50.0msec
Fx:009
a
Wet / Dry
b
a
Delay Time [msec]

LFO Waveform
LFO Phase [degree]

LFO Frequency [Hz]
Sets the LFO speed
0.0...50.0msec
180...+180
Fx:010

Sets the LFO step speed (speed that changes in steps)
e
Amt
0.05...50.00Hz
Fx:010,
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
x1...x16
Fx:009
Step Base Note

Fx:010,
Times
Depth
Feedback
x1...x32
Fx:010
0...100
100...+100
Fx:020
i
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Fx:020
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010, 020,
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
EG Attack
Sets the EG attack speed
1...100
EG Decay
Sets the EG decay speed
1...100
Feedback
100...+100
Fx:020
High Damp [%]

50.00...+50.00Hz
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009, 010
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG (when EG is selected for
Sweep Mode), or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep (when
D-mod is selected for Sweep Mode)
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
BPM
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:010,
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source used for both LFO speed and step speed
Amt
Sweep Mode
EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope generator or by
the modulation source
,
Step-Tri, Random
Fx:010
0...100%
Fx:020
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010, 020,
g
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: Sweep Mode, c: Src

This parameter switches the flanger control mode. With
Sweep Mode = EG, the flanger will sweep using the envelope generator. This envelope generator is included in the
envelope flanger, and not related to the Pitch EG, Filter EG, or
Amp EG.
The Src parameter selects the source that starts the envelope generator. If you select, for example, Gate, the envelope
generator will start when the note-on message is received.
When Sweep Mode = D-mod, the modulation source can
control the flanger directly. Select the modulation source
using the Src parameter.
The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for
the Src parameter is smaller than 64, and the effect is on when the
value is 64 or higher. The Envelope Generator is triggered when the
value changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher.
d: EG Attack, d: EG Decay
Attack and Decay speed are the only adjustable parameters
on this EG.
Effects
189
Pitch/Phase Mod.
023: Phaser
024: RandomPhser
(Stereo Phaser)
(Stereo Random Phaser)
This effect creates a swell by shifting the phase. It is

very effective on electric piano sounds. You can add
spreadtothesoundbyoffsettingthephaseoftheleft
andrightLFOsfromeachother.
This is a stereo phaser. The effect uses a stepshape

waveformandrandomLFOformodulation,creatinga
uniquephasingeffect.
Left
Wet / Dry

Left
Phaser
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Resonance
High Damp
Resonance
Phaser
High Damp
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO Shape
LFO Waveform
a
LFO Shape
100...+100
Fx:020
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Fx:010
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Amt
LFO Waveform
LFO Phase [degree]

Triangle, Sine
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c

Sets the LFO step speed
20.00...+20.00Hz
Amt
0.05...50.00Hz
Fx:010,
50.00...+50.00Hz
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009, 010
Base Note

Fx:009
x1...x16
Fx:009
Manual
0...100
Times
Depth
0...100

Step Base Note
Fx:010,
Src
Selects the modulation source for the LFO modulation depth
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Resonance
100...+100
Times
High Damp [%]

Sets the resonance damping amount in the high range
0...100
Depth
0...100
Resonance
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Fx:023
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010, 023,
100...+100
g: Resonance, h: Wet/Dry
The peak shape of the positive and negative Feedback value
is different. The harmonics will be emphasized when the
effect sound is mixed with the dry sound, if you set a positive
value for both Resonance and Wet/Dry, and if you set a
negative value for both Resonance and Wet/Dry.
g: High Damp [%]
This parameter sets the amount of damping of the resonance
in the high range. Increasing the value will cut high-range harmonics.
100...+100
Fx:023
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
x1...x32
Fx:010
Manual
0...100%
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010,
x1...x16
Fx:009
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:010,
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
180...+180
Fx:010
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source commonly used for LFO speed and step
speed
Amt
Off...Tempo
BPM
Step-Tri, Step-Sin, Random

Fx:010
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
190
Effects
Pitch/Phase Mod.
025: Envel.Phser
026: BiphaseMod.
(Stereo Envelope Phaser)
(Stereo Biphase Modulation)
Thisstereophaserusesanenvelopegeneratorformod
ulation. You will obtain the same pattern of phasing
each time you play. You can also control the Phaser
directlyusingthemodulationsource.
This stereo chorus effect adds two different LFOs

together.YoucansettheFrequencyandDepthparame
ters for each LFO individually. Depending on the set
tingoftheseLFOs,verycomplexwaveformswillcreate
ananalogtype,unstablemodulatedsound.

Left
Wet / Dry

Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Chorus/Flanger
Resonance
High Damp
Feedback
High Damp
Phaser
High Damp
Chorus/Flanger
Right
D-mod
D-mod
EG Attack/Decay
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
Sweep Mode
180 [degree]
EG
LFO1: Tri / Sine
LFO2: Tri / Sine
L Manu Bottom (L Manual Bottom)

0...100
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel
Fx:009
a
L Manu Top (L Manual Top)
0...100
Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the left channel
Fx:009
R Manu Bottom (R Manual Bottom)

0...100
Sets the lower limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel
Fx:009
Sweep Mode
EG, D-mod
Determines whether the flanger is controlled by the envelope generator or by
the modulation source
Fx:022,
c
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that triggers the EG (when EG is selected for
Sweep Mode), or modulation source that causes the flanger to sweep (when
D-mod is selected for Sweep Mode)
EG Attack
Sets the EG attack speed
1...100
Fx:022
EG Decay
Sets the EG decay speed
1...100
Fx:022
Resonance
High Damp [%]

Amt
100...+100
LFO Phase Sw
0 degree, 180 degree
Switches the LFO phase difference between left and right
0.02...30.00Hz
Src
Selects the modulation source of LFO1&2 speed
LFO2 Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO2 speed
Off...Tempo
30.00...+30.00
0.02...30.00Hz
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 speed
Depth1
Sets the depth of LFO1 modulation
e
0...100%
Fx:023
Src
Off...Tempo
Triangle, Sine
100...+100
Fx:023
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010, 023,
LFO2 Waveform
Selects LFO2 waveform
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 speed
Triangle, Sine
LFO1 Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO1 speed
b
R Manu Top (R Manual Top)
0...100
Sets the upper limit of the frequency range for the effect on the right channel
Fx:009
LFO1 Waveform
Selects LFO1 waveform
30.00...+30.00
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source of LFO1&2 modulation depth
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO1 modulation depth
100...+100
Depth2
Sets the depth of LFO2 modulation
0...100
f
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of LFO2 modulation depth
100...+100
L Pre Delay [msec]

0.0...50.0msec
Fx:016
R Pre Delay [msec]

0.0...50.0msec
Fx:016
Feedback
100...+100
Fx:017
i
High Damp [%]
Sets the damping amount in the high range
0...100%
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010,
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Bi-Phase Modulation LFO
LFO1
Depth1
LFO2
Depth2
100...+100
Effects
191
Pitch/Phase Mod.
027: Vibrato
(Stereo Vibrato)
Thiseffectcausesthepitchoftheinputsignaltoshim
mer. Using the AutoFade allows you to increase or
decreasetheshimmeringspeed.
Left
Wet / Dry
Vibrato
Vibrato
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
AutoFade
LFO Shape
Fade-In Delay
d: LFO Frequency Mod, a: AUTOFADE Src, a: Fade-In

Rate
b: Fade-In Delay [msec]
When LFO Frequency Mod is set to AUTOFADE, you can
use the modulation source selected in AUTO FADE Src as a
trigger to automatically fade in the modulation amount. When
BPM/MIDI Sync is set to On, you cannot use this.
The Fade-in Rate parameter specifies the rate of fade-in.
The Fade-in Delay parameter determines the time from
AutoFade modulation source ON until the fade-in starts.
The following is an example of fade-in where the LFO speed
is increased from 1.0Hz to 4.0Hz when a note-on message
is received.
AUTOFADE Src=Gate1, LFO Frequency [Hz]=1.0
LFO Frequency Mod=AUTOFADE, Amt=3.0
LFO Frequency
AUTOFADE Src
Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade
Off...Tempo
,
a
Fade-In Rate
Sets the rate of fade-in
1...100
The effect is off when a value for the dynamic modulation source
specified for the AUTOFADE Src parameter is smaller than 64,
and the effect is on when the value is 64 or higher. The AutoFade
function is triggered when the value changes from 63 or smaller to
64 or higher.
AUTOFADE
Fade-In Delay [msec]

Sets the fade-in delay time
00...2000msec
Gate1 Signal
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
Note On
c
LFO Shape
d
LFO Frequency Mod

D-mod, AUTOFADE
Switches between D-mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modulation
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
100...+100
Fx:020
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Amt
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
Depth
g
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
AUTOFADE
AutoFade
AUTOFADE Src=Gate1
LFO Frequency[Hz]=1.0
LFO Freq. Mod=AUTOFADE
Amt=+3.0
Fade-In Rate
Fade-In Dealy
All Note Off

LFO Frequency
=1.0+3.0=4.0Hz
LFO Frequency
=1.0Hz
192
Effects
Pitch/Phase Mod.
028: AutoFadeMod.
029: 2Voice Res
(Stereo Auto Fade Modulation)
This effect resonates the input signal at a specified

pitch.Youcansetthepitch,outputlevel,andpanset
tings for two resonators individually. You can control
theresonanceintensityviaanLFO.
Thisstereochorus/flangereffectenablesyoutocontrol
theLFOspeedandeffectbalanceusingautofade,and
youcanspreadthesoundbyoffsettingthephaseofthe
leftandrightLFOsfromeachother.

Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp
Left
Wet / Dry
Resonator
Trim
Delay
Feedback
Resonator
Trim
High Damp
High Damp
Delay
Level
Pan
Level
Pan
Resonance
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
D-mod
Wet / Dry
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sine
Invert: On/Off
Pitch, Fine [cent]
LFO
Control Mode
LFO Shape
Manual
AutoFade
LFO Frequency
Wet / Dry
AUTOFADE Src
Selects the modulation source that starts AutoFade
a
Rate
Sets the rate of fade-in
Fade-In Dly (Fade-In Delay) [msec]
Sets the fade-in delay time
LFO Waveform
Off...Tempo
Control Mode
Switches the controls of resonance intensity
a
Fx:027,
1...100
Fx:027
00...2000msec
Fx:027
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Fx:010
LFO Frequency Mod

D-mod, AUTOFADE
Switches between D-mod and AUTOFADE for the LFO frequency modulation
Fx:027
LFO Frequency [Hz]
Sets the LFO speed
Src
Amt
Mod. Depth
100...+100
Sets the amount of resonance intensity control via LFO/D-mod
c
High Damp [%]

Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range
0.0...500.0msec
100...+100
0...100%
Voice1: Level
Sets the Voice1 output level
0...100
Pan
Sets the Voice1 stereo image
L6...R6
Voice2: Pitch
Sets the Voice2 Pitch for resonance
C0...B8
g
Fine [cent]
Fine-adjusts the voice 2 pitch for resonance
0...200
100...+100
Fx:020
Voice2: Resonance
Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode = Manual
High Damp [%]
Sets the damping amount of resonant sound in the high range
100...+100
0...100%
Voice2: Level
Sets the Voice2 output level
0...100
Pan
Sets the Voice2 stereo image
L6...R6
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
50...+50
0...100%
Fx:020
Wet/Dry Mod
D-mod, AUTOFADE
Switches between D-mod and AUTOFADE for the effect balance modulation
Fx:027
Amt
50...+50
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010, 020,
j
C0...B8
Voice1: Resonance
Sets the intensity of resonance when Control Mode = Manual
20.00...+20.00Hz
Voice1: Pitch
Sets the voice1 Pitch for resonance
Fine [cent]
Fine-adjusts the voice 1 pitch for resonance
Off...Tempo
R Delay Time [msec]

Sets the right channel delay time
High Damp [%]

0...100
0.0...500.0msec
Feedback
Trim
Sets the input level at the resonator
0.02...20.00Hz
L Delay Time [msec]

Sets the left channel delay time
Depth
0.02...20.00Hz
D-mod Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that controls resonance intensity
Off, On
b
100...+100
Fx:020
LFO/D-mod Invert
Reverses the Voice 1 and 2 control when LFO/D-mod is selected
LFO Frequency [Hz]
Sets the LFO speed
Triangle, Sine
LFO Shape
Manual, LFO, D-mod

,
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Control Mode, e: Voice1: Resonance, h: Voice2:

Resonance
This parameter determines the resonance intensity.
When Control Mode = Manual, the Resonance parameter
sets the intensity of resonance. If the Resonance parameter
has a negative value, harmonics will be changed, and resonance will occur at a pitch one octave lower.
Effects
193
Pitch/Phase Mod.
ThiseffectsimulatestheDopplereffectofamoving
soundwithachangingpitch,similartothesirenofan
passing ambulance. Mixing the effect sound with the
drysoundwillcreateauniquechoruseffect.
Left
Doppler
Wet / Dry
Pan Depth
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO
-mod
Trigger
LFO Mode = 1-Shot
LFO Mode
Switches LFO operation mode
a
Src
Off...Tempo
When LFO Mode is set to 1-Shot, this modulation source triggers the LFO
LFO Sync
Off, On
Switches between LFO reset on and off when LFO Mode is set to Loop
LFO Frequency [Hz]
Sets the LFO speed
Loop, 1-Shot
,
Src
Amt
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Off...Tempo
BPM
20.00...+20.00Hz
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source of pitch variation
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of pitch variation
100...+100
Pan Depth
Sets the panning of the moving sound
100...+100
,
Src
Selects the modulation source of panning
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of panning
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: LFO Mode, a: Src, b: LFO Sync

The LFO Mode parameter switches LFO operation mode.
When Loop is selected, the Doppler effect will be created
repeatedly. If LFO Sync is set to On, the LFO will be reset
when the modulation source specified with the Src parameter is turned on.
When LFO Mode is set to 1-Shot, the Doppler effect is created only once when the modulation source specified in the
Src field is turned on. At this time if you do not set the Src
parameter, the Doppler effect will not be created, and no
effect sound will be output.
The effect is off when a value for the modulation source specified for
the Src parameter is smaller than 64, and the effect is on when the
value is 64 or higher. The Doppler effect is triggered when the value
changes from 63 or smaller to 64 or higher.
e: Pitch Depth
With the Doppler effect, the pitch is raised when the sound
approaches, and the pitch is lowered when the sound goes
away. This parameter sets this pitch variation.
f: Pan Depth
This parameter sets the width of the stereo image of the effect
sound. With larger values, the sound seems to come and go
from much further away. With positive values, the sound
moves from left to right; with negative values, the sound
moves from right to left.
Doppler - Pitch / Pan Depth
Pitch
Pan Depth
= (+) value
Pan Depth
= () value
Pitch Depth
Original Pitch
Center
Left
Right
Pan Depth
<
<
<
Louder
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
Higher
030: Doppler
Pitch Depth
Sets the pitch variation of the moving sound
Lower
When Control Mode = LFO, the intensity of resonance varies according to the LFO. The LFO sways between positive
and negative values, causing resonance to occur between
specified pitches an octave apart in turn.
When Control Mode = D-mod, the resonance is controlled
by the dynamic modulation source. If JS X or Ribbon is
assigned as the modulation source, the pitch an octave
higher and lower can be controlled, similar to when LFO is
selected for Control Mode.
a: LFO/D-mod Invert
When Control Mode = LFO or D-mod, the controlled phase
of either Voice 1 or 2 will be reversed. When the resonance
pitch is set for Voice 1 (Resonance has a positive value),
Voice 2 will resonate at a pitch an octave below (Resonance
has a negative value).
d: Voice1: Pitch, d: Fine [cent], g: Voice2: Pitch, g: Fine
[cent]
The Pitch parameter specifies the pitch of resonance by note
name. The Fine parameter allows for fine adjustment in
steps of cents.
e: High Damp [%], h: High Damp [%]
This parameter sets the damping amount of resonant sound
in the high range. Lower values will make a metallic sound
with a higher range of harmonics.
< < <<<<<< >>>>>> > >
Volume
>
>
Louder
>
194
Effects
Pitch/Phase Mod.
031: Scratch
Thiseffectisappliedbyrecordingtheinputsignaland
movingthemodulationsource.Itsimulatesthesound
ofscratchesyoucanmakeusingaturntable.
Left
a: Scratch Source, b: Response

The Scratch Source parameter enables you to select the
modulation source that controls simulation. The value of the
modulation source corresponds to the playback position. The
Response parameter enables you to set the speed of the
response to the modulation source.
Scratch Source
Wet / Dry
Start
Direct
Mix
Scratch
Rec Control
Scratch
Scratch Source
Wet / Dry
D-mod
D-mod
Envelope Control
Input
Envelope Select
Scratch Source
Selects the modulation source for simulation control
Response
Sets the speed of the response to the Scratch Source
Off...Tempo
,
0...100
Envelope Select
D-mod, Input
Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modulation source or the input signal level
,
c
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Envelope Select
is set to D-mod
Threshold
Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input
0...100
Response
Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording
0...100
Direct Mix
Selects how a dry sound is mixed
Always On, Always Off, Cross Fade
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
JS X
Ribbon
JS+Y
JSY
etc
-mod
End
Recorded Sound
Right
D-mod
Playback Position
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Scratch!
Max
Zero
Zero
+ Max
+ Max
c: Envelope Select, c: Src, d: Threshold

When Envelope Select is set to D-mod, the input signal will
be recorded only when the modulation source value is 64 or
higher.
When Envelope Select is set to Input, the input signal will
be recorded only when its level is over the Threshold value.
The maximum recording time is 1365msec. If this is
exceeded, the recorded data will start being erased from the
top.
e: Response
This parameter enables you to set the speed of the response
to the end of recording. Set a smaller value when you are
recording a phrase or rhythm pattern, and set a higher value if
you are recording only one note.
f: Direct Mix
With Always On, a dry sound is usually output. With Always
Off, dry sounds are not output. With Cross Fade, a dry sound
is usually output, and it is muted only when scratching.
Set Wet/Dry to Wet to use this parameter effectively.
Effects
195
Mod./P.Shift
b: LFO Phase [degree]

This parameter determines the difference between the left
and right LFO phases. A higher value will simulate the autopan effect in which the sound is panned between left and
right.
MOD./P.SHIFT
Other modulation and pitch shift effects
032: Tremolo
(Stereo Tremolo)
033: EnvelTremol
Thiseffectmodulatesthevolumeleveloftheinputsig
nal. The effect is stereo, and offsetting the LFO of the
leftandrightphasesfromeachotherproducesatrem
oloeffectbetweenleftandright.
(Stereo Envelope Tremolo)

Left
Thiseffectusestheinputsignalleveltomodulateaste
reo tremolo. You can simulate a tremolo effect that
becomes deeper as it fades out while the level gets
lower.
Wet / Dry

Left
Tremolo
Wet / Dry
Tremolo
Tremolo
Tremolo
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
LFO Phase
LFO Shape
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine, Vintage, Up, Down
Envelope
LFO Shape
100...+100
Fx:020
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c

Sets the envelope sensitivity of the input signal
LFO Waveform
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
100...+100
Fx:020
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Fx:032
0.02...20.00Hz
Envelope Amount [Hz]

20.00...+20.00Hz
Sets the changes of the LFO speed according to the input signal level
Depth
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
0...100
Envelope Amount
100...+100
Sets the changes of the modulation depth according to the input signal level
Src
Selects the modulation source of the depth of modulation
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the depth of modulation
100...+100
Depth
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
a:LFO Waveform
This parameter selects the LFO waveform. Vintage wave
simulates the characteristics of the tremolo created on a guitar amplifier. Combining this effect with the Amp Simulation
will make a realistic, vintage tremolo amplifier sound.
Tremolo - LFO Waveform
Triangle
Sine
Vintage
Up
Down
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
LFO Shape
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Base Note

Fx:009
Triangle, Sine, Vintage
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Times
100...+100
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM
0...100
Envelope Shape
Sets the envelope curve shape of the input signal
Off...Tempo
Amt
Envelope Shape
Envelope Sens
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Wet / Dry
LFO Shape
100...+100
d: LFO Frequency [Hz], d: Envelope Amount [Hz],

e: Depth, e: Envelope Amount
These parameters set the modulation via an envelope (input
signal level).
The LFO speed is obtained by adding the LFO Frequency
value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the input
signal. The LFO modulation depth is obtained by adding the
Depth value to the Envelope Amount value multiplied by the
input signal level.
ThefollowingexampleindicatesthattheDepth
is0withanLFOFrequencyof1.0Hzandthemaxi
muminput,andthattheDepthis100withaFre
quencyof8.0Hzwithzeroinput.
LFO Frequency [Hz]=8.0, Envelope Amount [Hz]=7.0
196
Effects
Mod./P.Shift
Depth=100, Envelope Amount=100
Depth
Shimmer
Level
Louder
Dry Envelope
LFO Frequency[Hz]=8.0
Envelope Amount[Hz]= 7.0Hz
Depth=100
Envelope Amount= 100
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Time
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
034: Auto-Pan
f
(Stereo Auto Pan)

ThisAutoPaneffectpanssoundbetweenleftandright.
Itisstereo,andshiftingtheleftandrightLFOphases
fromeachotherwillsimulatethesoundoftheleftand
right channels crossing over each other by turns, or
chasingeachother.
Left
Wet / Dry
Pan
Depth
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
a: LFO Shape
You can change the panning curve by modifying the LFO
waveform.
b: LFO Phase
This parameter determines the difference in the left and right
LFO phases. When you change the value gradually from 0,
the sound from the left and right channels will chase each
other around. If you set the parameter to +180 or 180, the
sound from each channel will cross over each other.
You need to input different sounds to each channel in order
for this parameter to be effective.
LFO Phase
Stereo Auto Pan - LFO Phase

LFO: Tri / Sin
LFO Shape
LFO Phase = 90 degrees
L-In
L-In
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
100...+100
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Src
Amt
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
x1...x16
Fx:009
R-In
L-In
L-In
Left
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
R-In
L-In
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
L-In
L-In
R-In
R-In
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
R-In
R-In
R-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
L-In
LFO Shape
R-In
R-In
R-In

L-In
Right
Center
Output Stereo Image
R-In
L-In
R-In
Effects
197
Mod./P.Shift
035: Phaser/Trem
(Stereo Phaser + Tremolo)
ThiseffecthasastereophaserandtremoloLFOslinked
together. Swelling phaser modulation and tremolo
effectssynchronizewitheachother,creatingasoothing
modulation effect.Itis suitableforelectric piano type
sounds.
Left
Wet / Dry
Phaser
Tremolo
Phaser Wet / Dry
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry
Tremolo
Phaser
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO Type
LFO
LFO Shape
LFO Phase
offset the timing of the phaser peak and control a subtle

movement and rotation of the sound.
f: Phaser WetDry, i: Wet/Dry
The Phaser Wet/Dry parameter sets the balance between
the phaser output and the dry sound. The Wet/Dry parameter sets the balance between the final phaser and tremolo
output level and the dry sound.
036: RingModulat
(Stereo Ring Modulator)
This effect creates a metallic sound by applying the
oscillatorstotheinputsignal.UsetheLFOorDynamic
Modulationtomodulatetheoscillatortocreatearadi
calmodulation.Matchingtheoscillatorfrequencywith
anotenumberwillproducearingmodulationeffectin
specifickeyranges.
Left
Type:
Phs - Trml...Phs LR - Trml LR
Selects the type of the tremolo and phaser LFOs
Ring Modulator
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Sets the phase difference between the tremolo and phaser LFOs
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
Pre LPF
Ring Modulator
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Amt
Right
Off...Tempo
Note No.
Sine Oscillator
OSC Mode Pitch
Note Offset, Fine

LFO
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
Pre LPF
0...100
Sets the damping amount of the high range input to the ring modulator
BPM
OSC Mode
Fixed, Note (Key Follow)
Switching between specifying the oscillator frequency and using a note
number
Phaser Manual
Sets the phaser frequency range
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Fixed Frequency [Hz]

0...12.00kHz
Sets the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is set to Fixed Fx:,
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
d
Resonance
Sets the phaser resonance amount
Phaser Depth
Sets the phaser modulation depth
0...100
Phaser Wet/Dry
Wet...2:99, Dry, 2:99...Wet
Sets the balance between the phaser effect and dry sounds
Tremolo Shape
Sets the degree of the tremolo LFO shaping
Tremolo Depth
Sets the tremolo modulation depth
100...+100
Fx:020
Src
Amt
0...100
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
100...+100
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
,
Times
LFO Depth
Sets the depth of LFO modulation for the oscillator frequency
100...+100
a: Type, a: LFO Phase [degree]

Select the type of phaser LFO and tremolo LFO for the Type
parameter. How the effect sound moves or rotates depends
on the type of LFO. Selecting LFO Phase enables you to
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
LFO Frequency [Hz]

0.02...20.00Hz
Sets the LFO speed of the oscillator frequency modulation
Fx:009,
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the tremolo modulation depth
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the tremolo modulation depth
Note Offset
48...+48
Sets the pitch difference from the original note when OSC Mode is set to
Note (Key Follow)
Note Fine
Fine-adjusts the oscillator frequency
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode
is set to Fixed
Amt
12.00...+12.00kHz
Sets the modulation amount of the oscillator frequency when OSC Mode is
set to Fixed
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source for the phaser modulation depth
Amt
Sets the modulation amount for the phaser modulation depth
Fixed
Note (Key Follow)
20.00...+20.00Hz
Times
Wet / Dry
Fixed Frequency
Base Note

Fx:009
Wet / Dry
Pre LPF
x1...x16
Fx:009
0...100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
198
Effects
Mod./P.Shift
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
037: Detune
Using this effect, you can obtain a detune effect that
offsets the pitch of the effect sound slightly from the
pitch of the input signal. Compared to the chorus
effect,amorenaturalsoundthicknesswillbecreated.
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Detune
Delay
Feedback
Input Level
Right
Wet / Dry
Pitch Shift [cent]

Sets the pitch difference from the input signal
a
100...+100cent
Src
Selects the modulation source of the pitch shift
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the pitch shift
b
100...+100cent
Delay Time [msec]

Sets the delay time
0...1000msec
Feedback
100...+100
c
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Input Level Dmod [%]

Sets the modulation amount of the input level
100...+100
,
Src
Selects the modulation source for the input level
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Amt
d: Input Level Dmod [%], d: Src

This parameter sets the dynamic modulation of the input
level.
Input Level D-mod
Input Level
Input Level
x1.0
x1.0
Amt= +50
Amt= 50
Amt= 100
Louder
Amt= +100
Louder
a: Pre LPF
This parameter enables you to set the damping amount of the
high range sound input to the ring modulator. If the input
sound contains lots of harmonics, the effect may sound dirty.
In this case, cut a certain amount of high range.
b: OSC Mode
This parameter determines whether or not the oscillator frequency follows the note number.
c: Fixed Frequency [Hz]
This parameter sets the oscillator frequency when OSC
Mode is set to Fixed.
d: Note Offset, d: Note Fine
These parameters for the oscillator are used when OSC
Mode is set to Note (Key Follow). The Note Offset sets the
pitch difference from the original note in semitone steps. The
Note Fine parameter fine-adjusts the pitch in cent steps.
Matching the oscillator frequency with the note number produces a ring modulation effect in the correct key.
x0.5
D-mod
Higher
Zero
x0.5
Max
D-mod
Higher
Zero
Max
Effects
199
Mod./P.Shift
038: PitchShift
(Pitch Shifter)
This effect changes the pitch of the input signal. You
can select from three types: Fast (quick response),
Medium, and Slow (preserves tonal quality). You can
also create an effect in which the pitch is gradually
raised(ordropped)usingthedelaywithfeedback.
Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level
High Damp
Pitch Shifter
Delay
Pre
Input Level
Post
Feedback Position
Feedback
Right
Mode
Switches Pitch Shifter mode
Pitch Shift [1/2tone]
Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a semitone
Src
Selects the modulation source of pitch shift amount
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount
Wet / Dry
Slow, Medium, Fast
24...+24
,
Off...Tempo
24...+24
Fine [cent]
Sets the pitch shift amount by steps of a cent
100...+100cent
,
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of pitch shift amount
100...+100cent
Delay Time [msec]

Sets the delay time
Feedback Position
Switches the feedback connection.
Feedback
0...1000msec
Pre, Post
100...+100
f
High Damp [%]
0...100%
100...+100
Fx:037,
g
Src
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Mode
This parameter switches the pitch shifter operating mode.
With Slow, tonal quality will not be changed too much. With
Fast, the effect becomes a Pitch Shifter that has a quick
response, but may change the tone. Medium is in between
these two. If you do not need to set too much pitch shift
amount, set this parameter to Slow. If you wish to change the
pitch significantly, use Fast.
b: Pitch Shift [1/2tone], b: Src, b: Amt, c: Fine [cent], c:
Amt
The amount of pitch shift will use the value of the Pitch Shift
plus the Fine value. The amount of modulation will use the
c: Amt value plus d: Amt.
Modulation Source is used both for Pitch Shift and Fine.
e: Feedback Position, f: Feedback
When Feedback Position is set to Pre, the pitch shifter output is again input to the pitch shifter. Therefore, if you specify
a higher value for the Feedback parameter, the pitch will be
raised (or lowered) more and more each time feedback is
repeated.
If Feedback Position is set to Post, the feedback signal will
not pass through the pitch shifter again. Even if you specify a
higher value for the Feedback parameter, the pitch-shifted
sound will be repeated at the same pitch.
200
Effects
Mod./P.Shift
039: PitShiftMod.
040: RotarySpeak
(Pitch Shift Modulation)
(Rotary Speaker)
This effect modulates the detuned pitch shift amount

usinganLFO,addingaclearspreadandwidthtothe
sound by panning the effect sound and dry sound to
theleftandright.Thisisespeciallyeffectivewhenthe
effectsoundanddrysoundoutputfromstereospeak
ersaremixed.
This effect simulates a rotary speaker, and obtains a

morerealisticsoundbysimulatingtherotorinthelow
range and the horn in the high range separately. The
effectalsosimulatesthestereomicrophonesettings.
Left
Wet / Dry
Horn

Left
Wet / Dry
Rotary Speaker
Horn/Rotor
Balance
Mic Distance
Mic Spread
Rotor
Pitch Shifter
Speaker Simulation
Right
Wet / Dry
D
D-mod
D-mod
-mod
Pan
Right
Wet / Dry
Mode Switch: Rotate/Stop

Speed Switch: Slow/Fast
Manual Speed Control
LFO: Tri / Sqr
Pitch Shift [cent]

Sets the pitch difference from the input signal
100...+100cent
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Square
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
c
Mode Switch
Switches between speaker rotation and stop
a
Amt
Speed Switch
Switches the speaker rotation speed between slow and fast
Off...Tempo
20.00...+20.00Hz
b
BPM
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:009
Base Note

Fx:009
Times
x1...x16
Fx:009
Depth
Sets the LFO modulation depth for pitch shift amount
100...+100
,
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Pan
Sets the panning effect sound and dry sound separately
L, 1:99...99:1, R
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Pitch Shift Mod - Pitch Shift / Depth
Manual Speed Ctrl (Manual Speed Control)

Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source in case the rotation speed is changed directly
,
0...100
Horn Ratio
Stop, 0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (high-range side) horn rotation speed. Standard value is 1.00.
Selecting Stop will stop the rotation
Rotor Acceleration
0...100
Determines how quickly the rotor rotation speed in the low range is switched
e
Rotor Ratio
Stop, 0.50...2.00
Adjusts the (low-range side) rotor rotation speed. Standard value is 1.00.
Selecting Stop will stop the rotation
f
Horn/Rotor Balance
Rotor, 1...99, Horn
Sets the level balance between the high-range horn and low-range rotor
Mic Distance
Sets the distance between the microphone and rotary speaker
0...100
Mic Spread
Sets the angle of left and right microphones
0...100
100...+100
a: Pitch Shift [cent], e: Depth

These parameters set the amount of pitch shift and amount of
modulation by means of the LFO.
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that toggles between slow and fast
Horn Acceleration
How quickly the horn rotation speed in the high range is switched
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
,
g
Slow, Fast
Sw
Toggle, Moment
Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between slow
and fast
BPM/MIDI Sync
Off, On
tempo and notes
Fx:009,
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that toggles between rotation and stop
Sw
Toggle, Moment
Selects switching mode of the modulation source that toggles between rotation and stop
0.02...20.00Hz
Fx:009,
Src
Rotate, Stop
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Higher
Pitch
Lower
Original Pitch
LFO Waveform=Triangle
Depth (+value)
Pitch Shift (+ value)
LFO Waveform=Square
Depth (value)
f: Pan, g: Wet/Dry
The Pan parameter pans the effect sound and dry sound to
the left and right. With L, the effect sound is panned left, and
the dry sound is panned right. With a Wet/Dry = Wet setting,
the effect and dry sound will be output in a proportion of 1:1.
a: Sw
This parameter sets how the modulation source switches
between rotation and stop.
When Sw = Toggle, the speaker rotates or stops alternately
each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
Each time the value for the modulation source exceeds 64, the
speaker rotates or stops alternately.
When Sw = Moment, the speaker is rotating. It stops only

when you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
Effects
201
Mod./P.Shift
Rotation will occur when the value of the modulation source is less
than 64, and will stop when the value is 64 or greater.
b: Sw
This parameter sets how the rotation speed (slow and fast) is
switched via the modulation source.
When Sw = Toggle, the speed is switched between slow
and fast each time you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
source in the Manual Speed Ctrl field. If manual control is

not necessary, set this field to Off.
d: Horn Acceleration, e: Rotor Acceleration
On a real rotary speaker, the rotation speed is accelerated or
decelerated gradually after you switch the speed. The Horn
Acceleration parameter sets the speed at which the rotation
is accelerated or decelerated.
g: Mic Distance, g: Mic Spread
This is a simulation of stereo microphone settings.
Slow/fast will alternate each time the value of the modulation source
exceeds 64.
Rotary Speaker - Mic Placement

Mic Spread
Microphone
When Sw = Moment, the speed is usually slow. It becomes

fast only when you press the pedal or operate the joystick.
Mic Distance
Microphone
Mic Distance
When a value for the modulation source is less than 64, slow
speed is selected, and when the value is 64 or higher, fast is
selected.
c: Manual Speed Ctrl

If you wish to control the speaker rotation speed manually, not
switching between Slow and Fast, select the modulation
Rotary Speaker (Top View)
202
Effects
ER/Delay
042: AutoReverse
ER/DELAY
(Auto Reverse)
This effect records the input signal and automatically
playsitinreverse(theeffectissimilartoatapereverse
sound).
Early reflection and delay effects
041: Early Refl

(Early Reflections)

Left
Thiseffectisonlytheearlyreflectionpartofareverber
ationsound,andaddspresencetothesound.Youcan
selectoneofthefourdecaycurves.
Wet / Dry
Direct
Mix
Auto Reverse
Rec/Reverse Play
Control
Right
Left
Wet / Dry
D-mod
EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
D-mod
Envelope Control
Input
Envelope Select
LEQ
HEQ
Pre Delay
Early Reflections
Rec Mode
Sets the recording mode
Reverse Time [msec]

Sets the maximum duration of the reverse playback
EQ Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Single, Multi
20...1320msec
Envelope Select
D-mod, Input
Selects whether the start and end of recording is controlled via the modulation source or the input signal level
,
Type
Sharp, Loose, Modulated, Reverse
Selects the decay curve for the early reflection
ER Time [msec]
Sets the time length of early reflection
Pre Delay [msec]

0...200msec
Sets the time taken from the original sound to the first early reflection
Threshold
Sets the recording start level when Envelope Select is set to Input
EQ Trim
Sets the input level of EQ applied to the effect sound
Response
Sets the speed of the response to the end of recording
Direct Mix
Selects how a dry sound is mixed
c
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source that controls recording when Envelope Select
is set to D-mod
10...800msec
0...100
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15.0...+15.0dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15.0...+15.0dB
g
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Type
This parameter selects the decay curve for the early reflection.
Early Reflections - Type
Sharp
Loose
Modulated
0...100
Fx:031
Always On, Always Off, Cross Fade

Fx:031
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: Rec Mode, b: Reverse Time

When Rec Mode is set to Single, you can set up to
1320msec for Reverse Time. If recording starts during the
reverse playback, the playback will be interrupted.
When Rec Mode is set to Multi, you can make another
recording during the reverse playback. However, the maximum Reverse Time is limited to 660msec.
If you wish to record a phrase or rhythm pattern, set Rec
Mode to Single. If you record only one note, set Rec Mode
to Multi.
The Reverse Time parameter specifies the maximum duration of the reverse playback. The part in excess of this limit
will not be played in reverse. If you wish to add short pieces of
the reverse playback of single notes, make the Reverse
Time shorter.
Reverse
Rec Mode/Reverse Time
Rec
Dry
Pre Delay
0...100
Reverse Rec
Reverse Envelope Select = Input
ER Time
Input
Time
Rec Mode = Single
Rec Mode = Multi
Reverse Time
Reverse Time
Effects
203
ER/Delay
c: Envelope Select, c: Src, d: Threshold

These parameters select the source to control the start and
end of recording.
When Envelope Select is set to D-mod, the input signal will
be recorded only when the value of the modulation source
selected by the Src parameter is 64 or higher.
When Envelope Select is set to Input, the input signal will
be recorded only when its level exceeds the Threshold level.
When recording is completed, reverse playback starts immediately.
e: High Damp [%], e: Low Damp [%]

These parameters set the damping amount of high range and
low range. The tone of the delayed sound becomes darker
and lighter as it feeds back.
g: Spread
This parameter sets the pan width of the effect sound. The
stereo image is widest with a value of 50, and the effect
sound of both channels is output from the center with a value
of 0.
044: Cross Delay

043: L/C/R Delay
(Stereo/Cross Delay)
This multitap delay outputs three Tap signals to the

left,right,andcenterrespectively.Youcanalsoadjust
theleftandrightspreadofthedelaysound.
Thisisastereodelay,andcanbyusedasacrossfeed
backdelayeffectinwhichthedelaysoundscrossover
between the left and right by changing the feedback
routing.

Left
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
L Delay
Left
Level
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
High Damp Low Damp
C Delay
Spread
Level
Input Level D-mod
Level
Input Level D-mod
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Delay
Stereo/Cross
Feedback
Spread
R Delay
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Right
Wet / Dry
Stereo/Cross
Right
Wet / Dry
L Delay Time [msec]

Sets the delay time of TapL
0...1360msec
a
Level
Sets the output level of TapL
C Delay Time [msec]
Sets the delay time of TapC
0...50
Stereo/Cross
Switches between stereo delay and cross-feedback delay
L Delay Time [msec]

0.0...680.0msec
0...1360msec
R Delay Time [msec]

0.0...680.0msec
0...50
b
Level
Sets the output level of TapC
R Delay Time [msec]
Sets the delay time of TapR
c
Level
Sets the output level of TapR
L Feedback
Sets the feedback amount for the left channel
0...1360msec
0...50
Feedback (C Delay)
Sets the feedback amountof TapC
100...+100
Src
Selects the modulation source of the TapC feedback amount
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback amount
100...+100
Src
Selects the modulation source of feedback amount
Off...Tempo
Amt L
Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback
100...+100
R Feedback
Sets the feedback amount for the right channel
100...+100
Amt R
Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback
100...+100
High Damp [%]

0...100%
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

Sets the damping amount in the low range
0...100%
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043

100...+100
Fx:037,

Src
Spread
Sets the width of the stereo image of the effect sound
Src
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
0...50
Amt
100...+100
Spread
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
50...+50
Fx:043
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Fx:037,
100...+100
Stereo, Cross
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
204
Effects
ER/Delay
045: M.Tap Delay
046: Modul.Delay
(Stereo Multitap Delay)
(Stereo Modulation Delay)
The left and right Multitap Delays have two taps

respectively.Changingtheroutingoffeedbackandtap
output allows you to create various patterns of com
plexeffectsounds.
ThisstereodelayusesanLFOtosweepthedelaytime.
The pitch also varies. You will obtain a delay sound
with swell and shimmering. You can also control the
delaytimeusingamodulationsource.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Feedback
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Input Level D-mod
High Damp Low Damp (1)

Mode
Tap1 Level
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
(2)
Mode
(1)
Delay
Tap1=(1)
Tap2=(2)
Spread
Feedback
(2)
Delay
Feedback
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
-mod
Mode: Normal
Mode: Cross Feedback
Mode: Cross Pan1
Mode: Cross Pan2
LFO Sync
Response
LFO: Tri / Sine
D-mod
L/R: +/+ +/
LFO Shape
LFO
LFO Phase Modulation Mode
Mode
Normal, Cross Feedback, Cross Pan1, Cross Pan2
Switches the left and right delay routing
Tap1 Time [msec]

Sets the Tap1 delay time
0.0...680.0msec
Tap2 Time [msec]

0.0...680.0msec
Tap1 Level
D-mod Modulation
Reversed L/R control by modulation source
b
100...+100
Src
Selects the modulation source of the Tap2 feedback amount
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the Tap2 feedback amount
100...+100
Src
Selects the modulation source that controls delay time
Response
Sets the rate of response to the modulation source
0...100
Feedback (Tap2)
Modulation Mode
LFO, D-mod
Switches between LFO modulation control and modulation source control
LFO Waveform
L/R:+/+, L/R:+/
,
Off...Tempo
0...30
Triangle, Sine
c
LFO Shape
d
LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
LFO Sync
Switches LFO reset off/on
100...+100
Fx:020
0.02...20.00Hz
Off, On
,
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Src
Selects the modulation source that resets the LFO
Off...Tempo
100...+100
Fx:037,
L LFO Phase [degree]

Sets the phase obtained when the left LFO is reset
180...+180
180...+180

h
Src
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
R LFO Phase [degree]

Sets the phase obtained when the right LFO is reset
Spread
100...+100
L Depth
Sets the depth of the left LFO modulation
0...200
R Depth
Sets the depth of the right LFO modulation
0...200
Fx:043,
Src
Off...Tempo
Selects the modulation source of the effect sounds stereo image width
Amt
100...+100
Sets the modulation amount of the effect sounds stereo image width
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
R Delay Time [msec]

Sets the right delay time
0.0...500.0
L Feedback
Sets the feedback amount of left delay
100...+100
R Feedback
Sets the feedback amount of right delay
100...+100
100...+100
a: Mode
You can change how the left and right delay signals are
panned by modifying the routing of the left and right delay as
shown in the figure above. You need to input different sounds
to each channel in order for this parameter to be effective.
d: Tap1 Level
This parameter sets the output level of Tap1. Setting a different level from Tap2 will add a unique touch to a monotonous
delay and feedback.
0.0...500.0
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
L Delay Time [msec]

Sets the left delay time
Wet/Dry
Wet...1:99, Dry, 1:99...Wet
Fx:010,
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: D-mod Modulation
When the modulation source is used for control, this parameter reverses the left and right modulation direction.
e: LFO Sync, e: Src,
f: L LFO Phase [degree], f: R LFO Phase [degree]
The LFO can be reset via a modulation source.
The Src parameter sets the modulation source that resets
the LFO. For example, you can assign Gate as a modulation
Effects
205
ER/Delay
source so that the sweep always starts from the specified

point.
L LFO Phase and R LFO Phase set the phase obtained
when the left and right LFOs are reset. In this way, you can
create changes in pitch sweep for the left and right channels
individually.
The effect is off when a value of the modulation source specified in
the Src parameter is 63 or smaller, and the effect is on when the
value is 64 or higher. The LFO is triggered and reset to the L LFO
Phase and R LFO Phase settings when the value changes from
63 or smaller to 64 or higher.
047: Dynam.Delay
(Stereo Dynamic Delay)
Thisstereodelaycontrolsthelevelofdelayaccording
totheinputsignallevel.Youcanusethisasaducking
delay that applies delay to the sound only when you
playkeysatahighvelocityoronlywhenthevolume
levelislow.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Feedback
Spread
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Right
FB
Out
Attack, Release
Envelope
Wet / Dry
Control Target
Threshold
Control Target
Selects from no control, output, and feedback
None, Out, FB
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Spread
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
+,
Threshold
Sets the level to which the effect is applied
0...100
Offset
Sets the offset of level control
0...100
Attack
Sets the attack time of level control
1...100
Release
Sets the release time of level control
1...100
L Delay Time [msec]

0.0...680.0msec
R Delay Time [msec]

0.0...680.0msec
Feedback
100...+100
Amt
a: Control Target
This parameter selects no level control, delay output control
(effect balance), or feedback amount control.
a: Polarity, b: Threshold, b: Offset, c: Attack, d: Release
The Offset parameter specifies the value for the Control
Target parameter (that is set to None), expressed as the ratio
relative to the parameter value (the Wet/Dry value with
Control Target=Out, or the Feedback value with Control
Target=FB).
When Polarity is positive, the Control Target value is
obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset
value (if the input level is below the threshold), or equals the
parameter value if the input level exceeds the threshold.
When Polarity is negative, Control Target value equals the
parameter value if the input level is below the threshold, or is
obtained by multiplying the parameter value by the Offset
value if the level exceeds the threshold.
The Attack and Release parameters specify attack time
and release time of delay level control.
a
Polarity
Reverses level control
100...+100
Fx:043
Dynamic Delay
Level
Dry
Threshold
Envelope
Wet
Release
Attack
(Ducking Delay)
Control Target=Out
Polarity= ()
Delay Time
Wet
Control Target=Out
Polarity= (+)
Time
100...+100
206
Effects
ER/Delay
048: AutoPan Dly
049: LCR BPM Dly
(Stereo Auto Panning Delay)
The L/C/R delay enables you to match the delay time

with the song tempo. You can also synchronize the
delay time with the arpeggiator or sequencer. If you
program the tempo before performance, you can
achieveadelayeffectthatsynchronizeswiththesong
inrealtime.Delaytimeissetbynotes.
Note:Withextremevalues,thesyncmaybelost.
This stereodelay effect pans the delay sound left and

rightusingtheLFO.
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp
Pan
Delay
Depth
Feedback
Pan
Delay
Left
Wet / Dry
High Damp Low Damp

Right
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
L Delay
Level
LFO Phase
LFO: Tri / Sin
LFO Shape
High Damp Low Damp
C Delay
Spread
Level
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
L Delay Time [msec]

R Delay
Level
0.0...680.0msec
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
L Feedback
R Delay Time [msec]
100...+100
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times

Base Note x Times
Base Note x Times
0.0...680.0msec
b
R Feedback
100...+100
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Triangle, Sine
100...+100
Fx:020
LFO Phase [degree]

180...+180
Fx:034
Panning Frequency [Hz]

Sets the panning speed
Panning Depth
Sets the panning width
0.02...20.00Hz
Off...Tempo
Amt
Set the modulation amount of the panning width
100...+100
100...+100
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapC
x1...x16
0...50
R Delay Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapR
,
d
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapR
Level
Sets the output level of TapR
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
0...50
Level
Sets the output level of TapC
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
x1...x16
C Delay Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapC
,
0...100
Src
Selects the modulation source for the panning width
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the delay time for TapL
Level
Sets the output level of TapL
d
LFO Shape
MIDI, 40...240
,
L Delay Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the delay time for TapL
,
LFO Waveform
BPM
x1...x16
0...50
Feedback (C Delay)
Sets the feedback amount of TapC
100...+100
Src
Selects the modulation source for the TapC feedback
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the TapC feedback
100...+100
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043

100...+100
Fx:037,
g
Src
h
Spread
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
0...50
Fx:043
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
207
ER/Delay
a: BPM, b: L Delay Base Note, b: Times, c: C Delay Base

Note,
c: Times, d: R Delay Base Note, d: Times
The delay time is the length of the note obtained by multiplying the Base Note parameter by the Times value, in relation
to the tempo specified by the BPM parameter (or the MIDI
Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI).
051: Seq. Delay

(Sequential Delay)
Thisfourtapdelayenablesyoutoselectatempoand
rhythmpatterntosetupeachtap.
Left
Pan
050: BPM Delay
Wet / Dry
Input Level D-mod
(Stereo BPM Delay)
This stereo delay enables you to set the delay time to

matchthesongtempo.
Note:Withextremevalues,thesyncmaybelost.
Delay
High Damp Low Damp
Feedback
Input Level D-mod
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Left
Wet / Dry
Rythm Pattern
High Damp Low Damp
Delay
Input Level D-mod
Feedback
BPM
Rhythm Pattern
Selects a rhythm pattern
... 3
Tap1 Pan
Sets the panning of Tap1
L, 1...99, R
Tap2 Pan
L, 1...99, R
Tap3 Pan
L, 1...99, R
R>
----, OVER!!
Display the error message if the right channel delay time exceeds the upper
limit
Tap4 Pan
L, 1...99, R
L Delay Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the left channel delay time
Fx:049,
Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the feedback
100...+100
High Damp Low Damp
Input Level D-mod
Delay
Right
Wet / Dry
Tempo
BPM
BPM
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
Base Note x Times
Adjust [%]
BPM
a
MIDI, 40...240
Fx:049,
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the left channel delay time
Adjust [%]
Fine-adjust the left channel delay time
Adjust [%]
Fine-adjust the right channel delay time
2.50...+2.50%
x1...x16
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt L
Sets the modulation amount of the left channel feedback
100...+100
100...+100
e
Amt R
Sets the modulation amount of the right channel feedback
100...+100
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043

100...+100
Fx:037,
h
Src
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0...100%
Fx:043
Low Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043

100...+100
Fx:037,
f
Src
2.50...+2.50%
100...+100
High Damp [%]

e
Fx:049
L Feedback
R Feedback
Fx:049
Times
Sets the number of notes to specify the right channel delay time
x1...x16
R Delay Base Note

Selects the type of notes to specify the right channel delay time
Fx:049,
MIDI, 44...240
,
Off...Tempo
Fx:037
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
a: BPM, b: Rhythm Pattern

With the tempo specified by the BPM parameter (or the
MIDI Clock tempo if BPM is set to MIDI), the length of one
beat equals the feedback delay time, and the interval
between taps becomes equal. Selecting a rhythm pattern will
automatically turn the tap outputs on and off. When BPM is
set to MIDI, the lower limit of the BPM is 44.
208
Effects
Reverb
056: Rev. Room
REVERB
Reverb effects
Theseeffectssimulatetheambienceofreverberationin
concerthalls.
052: Rev. Hall

This halltype reverb simulates the reverberation of
midsizeconcerthallsorensemblehalls.
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflections
that make the sound tighter. Changing the balance
betweentheearlyreflectionsandreverbsoundallows
youtosimulatenuances,suchasthetypeofwallsofa
room.
057: R.BriteRoom
Thisroomtypereverbemphasizestheearlyreflections
thatmakethesoundbrighter.See056:ReverbRoom.
053: RevSmthHall

Left
(Smooth Hall)
Wet / Dry
ER Level
ERs
EQ Trim
This halltype reverb simulates the reverberation of

largerhallsandstadiums,andcreatesasmoothrelease.
LEQ
Pre Delay Thru
HEQ
Reverb
Pre Delay
Reverb Level
ERs
EQ Trim
054: RevWetPlate
ER Level
Right
Wet / Dry
This plate reverb simulates warm (dense) reverbera

tion.
Reverb Time [sec]

Sets the reverberation time
0.1...3.0sec
055: RevDryPlate
High Damp [%]

Thisplatereverbsimulatesdry(light)reverberation.
Pre Delay [msec]

Sets the delay time from the dry sound
0...100%
0...200msec
Fx:052
b
Pre Delay Thru [%]
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay sound

Wet / Dry
Pre Delay Thru
EQ Trim
LEQ
ER Level
Sets the level of early reflections
0...100
Reverb Level
Sets the reverberation level
0...100
EQ Trim
0...100
Reverb
Pre Delay
EQ Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
Reverb Time [sec]

0.1...10.0sec
0...100%
Pre Delay [msec]

Sets the delay time from the dry sound
Pre Delay Thru [%]
Sets the mix ratio of non-delay sound
c
0...100%
EQ Trim
0...100
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
b: Pre Delay [msec], b: Pre Delay Thru [%]

The Pre Delay sets the delay time to the reverb input, allowing you to control spaciousness.
Using the Pre Delay Thru parameter, you can mix the dry
sound without delay, emphasizing the attack of the sound.
Reverb - Hall / Plate Type
Louder
Level
Dry
Reverb
Pre Delay Thru
Time
Pre Delay
Reverb Time
15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
0...200msec
Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

f
a
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Fx:052
HEQ
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
c: ER Level, d: Reverb Level

These parameters set the early reflection level and reverb
level.
Changing these parameter values allows you to simulate the
type of walls in the room. That is, a larger ER Level simulates a hard wall, and a larger Reverb Level simulates a soft
wall.
Reverb - Room Type
Level
Dry
ER
(Early Reflections)
Louder
Left
Reverb
Time
Pre Delay Thru

Pre Delay
Reverb Time
Effects
209
Mono Mono Chain
059: Par4Eq-Wah
MONO MONO CHAIN
(Parametric 4-Band EQ Wah/Auto Wah)
Effects that combine two mono effects connected in

series
058: Par4Eq-Exc
Thiseffect combinesamonotypefourbandparamet
ric equalizer and a wah. You can change the order of
theconnection.
(Parametric 4-Band EQ Exciter)
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
ricequalizerandanexciter.
Wah/Auto Wah
Wah
Trim

Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Right
Sweep Mode
Exciter
Envelope
D-mod
+
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Auto
D-mod
LFO
LFO
Trim
Right
Wet / Dry
[E] Trim
Sets the parametric EQ input level
[E] Band1 Cutoff [Hz]
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
50...5.00kHz

Sets the center frequency for Band 3
Q
Gain [dB]
e
20...1.00kHz

Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
Q
Q

0...100
Gain [dB]
d
300...10.00kHz
e
500...20.00kHz
[X] Exciter Blend

100...+100
Fx:011
[X] Emphatic Point

Sets the frequency range to be emphasized
0...70
Fx:011
Amt
Q
Q
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
300...10.00kHz
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
500...20.00kHz
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
[W] Frequency Bottom

0...100
Fx:009
Frequency Top
0...100
Fx:009
[W] Sweep Mode

Auto, D-mod, LFO
Fx:009,
Src
Off...Tempo
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
50...5.00kHz
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
0.5...10.0
Fx:006


18...+18dB
20...1.00kHz
18...+18dB
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
0...100
Gain [dB]

18...+18dB
18...+18dB
Q
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
[E] Trim
[W] LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
h
100...+100
0.02...20.00Hz
Resonance
0...100
LPF
Switches the wah low pass filter on and off
Off, On
Routing
PEQ WAH, WAH PEQ
Changes the order of the parametric equalizer and wah connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
210
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
060: 4EqPhsrChFl
(Parametric 4-Band EQ Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypefourbandparamet
ricequalizerandachorus/flanger.
Left
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
061: Par4Eq-Phsr
(Parametric 4-Band EQ Phaser)
Parametric 4Band EQ
However, if a mono-input type effect is connected after this

effect, the left and right sounds may cancel each other, eliminating the chorus/flanger effects.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypefourbandparamet
ricequalizerandaphaser.
Chorus/Flanger
Trim
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Right
Phaser
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Trim
[E] Trim
Q
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB

50...5.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB

50...5.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
300...10.00kHz
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
18...+18dB

500...20.00kHz
[F] Delay Time [msec]

Sets the delay time
0.0...50.0msec
[F] LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
Triangle, Sine
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
LFO Waveform
[P] LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
0...100
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[F] Depth
Feedback
[F] Cho/Flng Wet/Dry
Sets the effect balance of the chorus/flanger
100...+100
Fx:020
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 020
i
Output Mode
Selects the output mode for the chorus/flanger
Normal, Wet Invert
Amt
[P] Manual
0...100
[P] Depth
0...100
Resonance
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry
Sets the phaser effect balance
100...+100
Fx:023
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 023
i
Output Mode
Selects the phaser output mode
100...+100
i: Output Mode
When Wet Invert is selected, the right channel phase of the
chorus/flanger effect sound is inverted. This creates pseudostereo effects and adds spread.
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Q
20...1.00kHz

500...20.00kHz
Q
0...100
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB

[E] Trim
300...10.00kHz
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
Q
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
0.5...10.0
Fx:006

Right
20...1.00kHz
Gain [dB]
Resonance
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Phaser Wet / Dry

b
0...100
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:060
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
211
Mono Mono Chain
062: P4Eq-TapDly
063: Cmp-AutoWah
(Parametric 4-Band EQ Multitap Delay)
(Compressor Wah/Auto Wah)
ricequalizerandamultitapdelay.
This effect combines a monotype compressor and a

wah.Youcanchangetheorderoftheconnection.
Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Parametric 4Band EQ
Compressor
Delay
Trim
High Damp (1)
Wah/Auto Wah
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Feedback
Wet / Dry
Routing
Multitap Delay
(2)
Comp
Wah
Output Level
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
Right
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
D-mod
-mod
D
a
[E] Trim
Q
18...+18dB

50...5.00kHz
Q
Gain [dB]
Q
Gain [dB]
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
[D] Tap1 Time [msec]

0...680msec
0...100
Fx:045

0...680msec
Feedback
100...+100
Dry, 2:98...98:2, Wet
h
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Fx:043
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Table , Sets the modulation amount of the
effect balance, on page 175
100...+100
Output Level
Sets the compressor output level
0...100
Fx:002
[C] EQ Trim
0...100
[C] Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

0...100
Fx:009
Frequency Top
0...100
Fx:009
[W] Sweep Mode

Auto, D-mod, LFO
Fx:009,

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
[W] Resonance
0...100
Low Pass Filter

Off, On
Routing
CMP WAH, WAH CMP
Switches the order of the compressor and wah connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[D] Mt.Delay Wet/Dry

Sets the multitap delay effect balance
1...100
Fx:002
Src
Off...Tempo
f
Tap1 Level
[C] Attack
Table , Sets the attack level, on page 176
18...+18dB
500...20.00kHz
1...100
Fx:002
300...10.00kHz
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
[C] Sensitivity
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
LFO
LFO
0...100
20...1.00kHz
Wet / Dry
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
212
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
064: Cmp-AmpSim
065: Cmp-OD/HiG
(Compressor Amp Simulation)
(Compressor Overdrive/Hi.Gain)
This effect combines a monotype compressor and an

ampsimulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffect
connection.
This effect combines a monotype compressor and an

overdrive/highgain distortion. You can change the
orderoftheeffectconnection.

Left
Routing
Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Compressor
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
HEQ
Wet / Dry
Routing
Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Comp
Comp
Output Level
Driver
Output Level
Output Level

Drive
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
1...100
Fx:002
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
[C] EQ Trim
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
[C] Sensitivity
Output Level
Right
0...100
Fx:002
15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
[A] Amplifier Type

SS, EL84, 6L6
Routing
CMP AMP, AMP CMP
Switches the order of the compressor and amp simulation connection
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
[O] Drive Mode

Switches between overdrive and high-gain distortion
Overdrive, Hi-Gain
c
Drive
1...100
Fx:002
0...100

[C] Sensitivity
[O] Output Level

Sets the overdrive output level
d
Fx:006,
Src
Selects the modulation source for the overdrive output level
Amt
Sets the modulation amount of the overdrive output level
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
1...100
Fx:006
0...50
Off...Tempo
50...+50
[O] Low Cutoff [Hz]

20...1.00kHz
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
e
g
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
[O] Mid1 Cutoff [Hz]

300...10.00kHz
100...+100
f
Q
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB

500...20.00kHz
g
Q
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
Routing
CMP OD, OD CMP
Switches the order of the compressor and overdrive connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
213
Mono Mono Chain
066: Cmp-Par.4Eq
067: Cmp-ChorFlg
(Compressor Parametric 4-Band EQ)
(Compressor Chorus/Flanger)

fourband parametric equalizer. You can change the

chorus/flanger. You can change the order of the effect
connection.

Left
Routing
Compressor
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus/Flanger
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Comp
Output Level
Comp
Trim
Chorus/Flanger
+
Output Level
Feedback
Right
Right
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
[C] Sensitivity
1...100
Fx:002
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
[E] Trim
Q
50...5.00kHz
Q
Gain [dB]
Q
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
[C] EQ Trim
0...100

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

Sets the delay time
0.0...50.0msec

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[F] Depth
18...+18dB
0...100
g
Feedback
300...10.00kHz
0.5...10.0
Fx:006

500...20.00kHz
100...+100
Fx:020
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 020
h
Output Mode
18...+18dB
Normal, Wet Invert
Routing
CMP FLNG, FLNG CMP
Switches the order of the compressor and chorus/flanger connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
j
Routing
CMP PEQ, PEQ CMP
Switches the order of the compressor and parametric EQ connection
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
1...100
Fx:002
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[C] Sensitivity
0.5...10.0
Fx:006


Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
18...+18dB
Q
20...1.00kHz
Gain [dB]
Gain [dB]
0...100
Envelope - Control
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
h: Output Mode, i: Routing

When Wet Invert is selected, the right channel phase of the
chorus/flanger effect sound is inverted. This creates pseudostereo effects and adds spread.
However, if a mono-input type effect is connected after this
effect, the left and right sounds may cancel each other, eliminating the chorus/flanger effects.
When Routing is set to FLNGCMP, Output Mode will be
set to Normal.
214
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
068: Cmp-Phaser
069: Cmp-MTapDly
(Compressor Phaser)
(Compressor Multitap Delay)

phaser.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectconnec
tion.

multitapdelay.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffect
connection.
Left
Compressor
EQ Trim LEQ
Envelope - Control
Phaser
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Resonance
Phaser Wet / Dry
1...100
Fx:002
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
[C] EQ Trim
0...100

Right
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

Sets the LFO speed
15...+15dB
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[P] Manual
[P] Depth
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
[C] EQ Trim
0...100

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

0...680msec
Tap1 Level
0...100
Fx:045

0...680msec
Feedback
100...+100
g
Resonance
1...100
Fx:002
0...100
0...100
[C] Sensitivity
0.02...20.00Hz
Wet / Dry
15...+15dB
100...+100
Fx:023
[D] High Damp [%]

Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 023

Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:067
Routing
CMPDLY, DLYCMP
Switches the order of the compressor and multitap delay connection
h
Output Mode
Routing
CMPPHS, PHSCMP
Switches the order of the compressor and phaser connection
Fx:067
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Delay
High Damp (1)

Output Level
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
[C] Sensitivity
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry

Feedback
Comp
Right
Multitap Delay
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Comp
Output Level
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Phaser
HEQ
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0...100%
Fx:043
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
215
Mono Mono Chain
070: Lim-Par.4Eq
071: Lim-ChorFlg
(Limiter Parametric 4-Band EQ)
(Limiter Chorus/Flanger)
This effect combines a monotype limiter and a four

bandparametricequalizer.Youcanchangetheorderof
theeffectconnection.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypelimiterandachorus/
flanger.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectconnec
tion.

Left
Routing
Limiter

Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Routing
Parametric 4Band EQ
Chorus/Flanger
Limiter
Limiter
Chorus/Flanger
Limiter
Trim
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Right
Envelope - Control
[L] Ratio
Threshold [dB]
40...0dB
Fx:003
[L] Attack
1...100
Fx:003
[L] Gain Adjust [dB]

Sets the limiter output gain
[E] Trim
Q
Q

Q
Gain [dB]
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
300...10.00kHz
500...20.00kHz
[L] Attack
1...100
Fx:003
Release
1...100
Fx:003

Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine

Sets the delay time
e
0.0...50.0msec
Depth
0...100
Feedback
f
100...+100
Fx:020
[F] EQ Trim
0...100
[F] Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 020
h
Output Mode
i
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:067
Routing
LMTFLNG, FLNGLMT
Switches the order of the limiter and chorus/flanger connection
Fx:067
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
18...+18dB
j
Routing
LMTPEQ, PEQLMT
Switches the order of the limiter and parametric EQ connection
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
40...0dB
Fx:003
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
Threshold [dB]
18...+18dB
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[L] Ratio
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
50...5.00kHz
Gain [dB]
20...1.00kHz
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
0...100


Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003
18...+18dB
Gain [dB]
1...100
Fx:003
Gain [dB]
Q
Envelope - Control
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
Release
Right
Wet / Dry
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Feedback
100...+100
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
216
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
072: Lim-Phaser
073: Lim-MTapDly
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypelimiterandaphaser.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectconnection.
(Limiter Multitap Delay)

Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Limiter
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypelimiterandamulti
tap delay. You can change the order of the effect con
nection.
Phaser
Left
Resonance
Feedback
Phaser Wet / Dry

Right
Limiter
Delay
Gain Adjust High Damp (1)
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Multitap Delay
Limiter
Normal
+
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Gain Adjust
Envelope - Control
Wet / Dry
Routing
Phaser
Limiter
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Right
[L] Ratio
Envelope - Control
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
Wet / Dry
a
Threshold [dB]
40...0dB
Fx:003
[L] Attack
1...100
Fx:003
Release
1...100
Fx:003
[L] Ratio
Threshold [dB]

Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[P] Manual
0...100
[P] Depth
0...100
f
Resonance
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry
100...+100
Fx:023
Output Mode
h
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:067
Routing
LMTPHS, PHSLMT
Switches the order of the limiter and phaser connection
Fx:067
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
1...100
Fx:003
Release
1...100
Fx:003

Tap1 Level
Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003
0...680msec
0...100
Fx:045

0...680msec
Feedback (Tap2)
100...+100

Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
f
High Damp [%]
g
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[L] Attack
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 023
40...0dB
Fx:003
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
0...100%
Fx:043
Routing
LMTDLY, DLYLMT
Switches the order of the limiter and multitap delay connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
217
Mono Mono Chain
074: Exc-Compr
(Exciter Compressor)
075: Exc-Limiter
This effect combines a monotype exciter and a com

pressor.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectconnec
tion.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypeexciterandalimiter.
Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectconnection.
(Exciter Limiter)

Left
Limiter
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Exciter
Wet / Dry
Routing
Exciter
Left
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Limiter
Exciter
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Gain Adjust
Comp
Exciter
Output Level
Right
Envelope - Control
Right
Envelope - Control
[X] Exciter Blend

[X] Emphatic Point

[X] EQ Trim
[X] Exciter Blend

100...+100
Fx:011
[X] Emphatic Point

0...70
Fx:011
[X] EQ Trim
0...100
[X] Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
[C] Sensitivity
1...100
Fx:002
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
f
Output Level
g
0...100
Fx:002
100...+100
Fx:011
0...70
Fx:011
0...100

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
[L] Ratio
1.0:1...50.0:1, Inf:1
Fx:003
[L] Threshold [dB]

40...0dB
Fx:003
[L] Attack
1...100
Fx:003
Release
1...100
Fx:003
Routing
XCTCMP, CMPXCT
Switches the order of the exciter and compressor connection

Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Routin
XCTLMT, LMTXCT
Switches the order of the exciter and limiter connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Inf, 38...+24dB
Fx:003
100...+100
j
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
218
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
076: Exc-ChorFlg
077: Exc-Phaser
(Exciter Chorus/Flanger)
(Exciter Phaser)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypelimiterandachorus/
flanger.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypelimiterandaphaser.
Left
Wet / Dry
Exciter
Left
Wet / Dry
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
EQ Trim LEQ
HEQ
+
EQ Trim LEQ
Chorus/Flanger
Exciter
Feedback
Normal
Output Mode
[X] Exciter Blend

[X] Emphatic Point

[X] EQ Trim
Phaser Wet / Dry

Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
100...+100
Fx:011
0...70
Fx:011
0...100

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
[X] Exciter Blend

[X] Emphatic Point

[X] EQ Trim

Sets the delay time
0.0...50.0msec

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[F] Depth
0...100
100...+100
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[P] Manual
0...100
[P] Depth
0...100
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry

100...+100
Fx:023
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 023
Output Mode
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:060
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Amt
15...+15dB
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:060
Src
Off...Tempo

Resonance
h
Output Mode
0...100
100...+100
Fx:020
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 020
0...70
Fx:011
g
Feedback
100...+100
Fx:011

Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Resonance
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Right
Phaser
Exciter
HEQ
Phaser
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
219
Mono Mono Chain
078: Exc-MTapDly
079: OD/HG-Amp S
(Exciter Multitap Delay)
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Amp Simulation)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypeexciterandamulti
tapdelay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypeoverdrive/highgain
distortionandanampsimulation.Youcanchangethe

Left
Wet / Dry
Multitap Delay
Exciter
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
EQ Trim LEQ HEQ
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Feedback
Delay
Exciter
High Damp (1)
(2)
Amp Simulation
3 Band PEQ
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Driver
Output Level
Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
[X] Exciter Blend

[X] Emphatic Point

[X] EQ Trim
100...+100
Fx:011
0...70
Fx:011
[O] Drive Mode

Drive
0...100

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB

0...680msec
[O] Output Level

b
0...100
Fx:045
Fx:006,
0...50
Off...Tempo
50...+50
[O] Low Cutoff [Hz]

20...1.00kHz
18...+18dB

0...680msec
Gain [dB]
Feedback (Tap2)
100...+100

300...10.00kHz
[D] High Damp [%]


0...100%
Fx:043
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB

500...20.00kHz
e
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
Q
Gain [dB]
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
1...100
Fx:006
Src
Amt
e
Tap1 Level
Overdrive, Hi-Gain
Q
Gain [dB]
100...+100
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
[A] Amplifier Type

SS, EL84, 6L6
Routing
ODAMP, AMPOD
Switches the order of the overdrive and amp simulation connection
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
220
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
080: OD/HG-ChoFl
081: OD/HG-Phser
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Chorus/Flanger)
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Phaser)
distortion and a chorus/flanger. You can change the
distortion and a phaser. You can change the order of
theeffectconnection.

Left
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Driver
Chorus/Flanger
Output Level
Drive
Normal
Output Mode
Feedback
Phaser
Driver
Output Level
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
[O] Drive Mode

Fx:006,
Src
Amt
Off...Tempo
20...1.00kHz
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
0.5...10.0
Fx:006

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
18...+18dB
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
18...+18dB
Q
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
0.0...50.0msec
Depth
0...100
Feedback
18...+18dB

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 020
Output Mode
Amt
100...+100
Depth
0...100
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry

100...+100
Fx:023
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 023
Output Mode
i
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:067
Routing
OD PHS, PHS OD
Switches the order of the overdrive and phaser connection
Fx:067
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
0...100
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:067
Routing
OD FLNG, FLNG OD
Switches the order of the overdrive and chorus/flanger connection
Fx:067
[P] Manual
Resonance
100...+100
Fx:020
Gain [dB]

Sets the delay time
20...1.00kHz

500...20.00kHz
18...+18dB

50...+50
[O] Low Cutoff [Hz]

Gain [dB]

500...20.00kHz
Gain [dB]
Off...Tempo

300...10.00kHz
18...+18dB
Q
Src
0...50

300...10.00kHz
Gain [dB]
Fx:006,
Amt
50...+50
[O] Low Cutoff [Hz]

1...100
Fx:006
[O] Output Level

0...50
Q
Overdrive, Hi-Gain
Drive
1...100
Fx:006
[O] Output Level

Wet / Dry
Drive
Phaser Wet / Dry
[O] Drive Mode

Overdrive, Hi-Gain
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
LFO: Tri / Sine
LFO: Tri / Sine
Resonance

Drive
Right
Right
Phaser
3 Band PEQ
3 Band PEQ
Wet / Dry
Routing
Chorus/Flanger
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
221
Mono Mono Chain
082: OD/HG-MTDly
083: Wah-AmpSim
(Overdrive/Hi.Gain Multitap Delay)
(Wah/Auto Wah Amp Simulation)
distortionandamultitapdelay.
This effect combines a monotype wah and an amp

simulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectcon
nection.

Left
Wet / Dry
Multitap Delay
Overdrive / Hi-Gain
Left
Wet / Dry
Routing
3 Band PEQ
Delay
Driver
Output Level
Wah/Auto Wah
Feedback
High Damp (1)
Amp Simulation
(2)
Mt.Dly Wet / Dry
Wah

Drive
Right
Wet / Dry
Right
[O] Drive Mode

Overdrive, Hi-Gain
Drive
Fx:006,
Src
Amt
0...50
50...+50
b
20...1.00kHz
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB

300...10.00kHz
Gain [dB]
18...+18dB

500...20.00kHz
e
Q
18...+18dB

0...680msec
Tap1 Level
0...100
Fx:045

0...680msec
Feedback
100...+100

Dry, 2:98...98:2, Wet
h
High Damp [%]
0...100%
Fx:043
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0...100
Fx:009
[W] Sweep Mode

Auto, D-mod, LFO
Fx:009,

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
[W] Resonance
0...100
Low Pass Filter

Off, On
[A] Amplifier Type

Routing
WAH AMP, AMP WAH
Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection
SS, EL84, 6L6
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet

Wet/Dry
Frequency Top
0.5...10.0
Fx:006
Gain [dB]
0...100
Fx:009
Src
Off...Tempo
0.5...10.0
Fx:006

a
Off...Tempo
[O] Low Cutoff [Hz]

Q
LFO
1...100
Fx:006
[O] Output Level

Wet / Dry
LFO
Sweep Mode
Envelope
Auto
-mod D-mod
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
222
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
084: Decim-Amp S
[D] Output Level

Sets the decimator output level
0...100
Fx:014
[C] Sensitivity
1...100
Fx:002
[C] Attack
1...100
Fx:002
Output Level
0...100
Fx:002
(Decimator Amp Simulation)

This effect combines a monotype decimator and an
ampsimulation.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffect
connection.
[D] Pre LPF
Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off
Off, On
Fx:014
0...100%
Routing
DECICMP, CMPDECI
Switches the order of the decimator and compressor connection
1.00k...48.00kHz
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
a
High Damp [%]
Sets the ratio of high-range damping
[D] Sampling Freq [Hz] (Sampling Frequency)
b
Resolution
4...24
Fx:014
[D] Output Level

Sets the decimator output level
0...100
Fx:014
[A] Amplifier Type

Routing
DECIAMP, AMPDECI
Switches the order of the wah and amp simulation connection
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
SS, EL84, 6L6
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
086: AmpS-Tremol
(Amp Simulation Tremolo)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypeampsimulationand
atremolo.
Src
Off...Tempo

Left
100...+100
Amt
Wet / Dry
Amp Simulation
Tremolo
Tremolo
085: Decim-Cmp
(Decimator Compressor)
Right
This effect combines a monotype decimator and a

compressor.Youcanchangetheorderoftheeffectcon
nection.
Wet / Dry
Routing
Compressor
Decimator
High Damp
Output Level
Right
[T] LFO Frequency [Hz]

Sets the LFO speed
100...+100
Fx:020
[T] Depth
0.02...20.00Hz
0...100
Wet / Dry
Envelope - Control
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[D] Pre LPF

Turn the harmonic noise caused by lowered sampling on and off
a
High Damp [%]
Sets the ratio of high-range damping
[D] Sampling Freq [Hz] (Sampling Frequency)
Off, On
Fx:014
0...100%
1.00k...48.00kHz
b
Resolution
Triangle, Sine, Vintage, Up, Down

Fx:032
b
LFO Shape
Comp
Decimator
Pre LPF
SS, EL84, 6L6
Output Level
Resolution
LFO Shape
[A] Amplifier Type

[T] LFO Waveform

Left
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri/Sin/Vintage/Up/Down
4...24
Fx:014
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Effects
223
Mono Mono Chain
087: Ch/Fl-MTDly
088: Phser-ChoFl
(Chorus/Flanger Multitap Delay)
(Phaser Chorus/Flanger)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypechorus/flangeranda
multitapdelay.
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypephaserandachorus/
flanger.

Left
Left
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
Multitap Delay
Chorus/Flanger
Phaser
Chorus/Flanger
Feedback
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Delay (2)
(1)
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry High Damp
Resonance
Feedback
Right

Sets the delay time
Chorus/Flanger
EQ LEQ HEQ
Trim
Phaser
Feedback
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
0.0...50.0msec
Normal
Output Mode
Wet Invert
Cho/Flng
Wet / Dry
Right
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine
Phaser
Mt.Dly
Wet / Dry
Wet / Dry
LFO: Tri / Sine

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
a
Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
[F] Depth
0...100
[P] Manual
0...100
Depth
0...100
c
Feedback
d
[F] EQ Trim
0...100

15...+15dB
[P] Phaser Wet/Dry

100...+100
Fx:023
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet
Fx:010, 023

Sets the LFO speed
0.02...20.00Hz
LFO Waveform
Triangle, Sine
e
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]
f
Resonance
100...+100
Fx:020

15...+15dB

Sets the delay time
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 020

0...680msec
0.0...50.0msec
Depth
0...100
g
Tap1 Level
Feedback
0...100
Fx:045

0...680msec
Feedback (Tap2)
100...+100
100...+100
Fx:020
[F] EQ Trim
0...100
h
15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
g
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
i
High Damp [%]

0...100%
Fx:043
Wet...2:98, Dry, 2:98...Wet

Fx:010, 020
h
Output Mode
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
Normal, Wet Invert

Fx:060
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
224
Effects
Mono Mono Chain
089: Rev-Gate
(Reverb Gate)
Thiseffectcombinesamonotypereverbandagate.
Threshold
Sets the gate threshold level

Left
Wet / Dry
Reverb
EQ Trim
Pre Delay
Reverb
Gate
LEQ HEQ
Wet / Dry
Input Reverb Mix
Input
Envelope - Control
Gate+Dmpr
D-mod Envelope Select
Gate
0.1...10.0sec
a
High Damp [%]
b
c
[R] EQ Trim
0...100
[R] Pre LEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
Pre HEQ Gain [dB]

15...+15dB
[R] Reverb Balance

Sets the reverb effect balance
Fx:005
[G] Attack
1...100
Fx:005
Release
1...100
Fx:005
Src
Off...Tempo
Amt
100...+100
0...100%
[R] Pre Delay [msec]

0...200msec
Sets the delay time of the reverb sound and gate control signal
+,
Wet/Dry
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
j
[R] Reverb Time [sec]
[G] Polarity
Switches between non-invert and invert of the gate on/off state
0...100
Reverb
Balance
Right
[G] Input Reverb Mix

Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
Sets the balance between the dry and reverb sounds of the gate control signal.
Dry, 1:99...99:1, Wet
[G] Envelope Select

D-mod, Input
Switches between modulation source control and input signal control
f
Src
Off...Gate2+Dmpr
Selects the modulation source that controls the gate when Envelope Select
is set to D-mod
f: Envelope Select, f: Src, g: Input Reverb Mix, g: Threshold

The Envelope Select parameter enables you to select
whether turning the gate on and off is triggered by the input
signal level or controlled directly by the modulation source.
You can select from Off to Gate2+Dmpr for the Src parameter
to specify the modulation source.
When Envelope Select is set to Input, the gate is controlled
by the level of signals that are the combination of the dry
sound and the reverb sound. When the signal level exceeds
the threshold, the gate opens and the reverb sound is output.
Normally, set Input Reverb Mix to Dry (the gate is controlled
only by the dry sound). If you wish to extend the gate time, set
the Input Reverb Mix value higher and adjust the Threshold value.
Assignable parameters
225
List of functions assignable to the Footswitch
19. ASSIGNABLE PARAMETERS

LIST OF FUNCTIONS ASSIGNABLE TO THE
FOOTSWITCH
The following functions can be assigned to a foot
switch.
Function
Meaning
Style Change
Single Touch
Same functions of the control panel buttons

with the same name
Style Up
Selects the next Style
Style Down
Selects the previous Style
Function
Meaning
Perform. Up
Selects the next Performance
Off
No function assigned
Perform. Down
Selects the previous Performance
Start/stop
Program Up
Selects the next Program
Play/Stop Seq1
Program Down
Selects the previous Program
Play Stop Seq2
STS Up
Selects the next STS
Synchro
STS Down
Selects the previous STS
Tap tempo/Rst
STS1
Selects the STS #1
Tempo lock
STS2
Selects the STS #2
Intro 1
STS3
Selects the STS #3
Ending 1
STS4
Selects the STS #4
Intro 2
Punch In/Out
Turns the Punch Recording on/off
Ending 2
FX CC12 Sw.
Fill 1
FX CC13 Sw.
Fill 2
Standard FX controllers
Same functions of the control panel buttons
with the same name
Fx A mute
Mute of the Internal FX A
C.In / Break
Fx B mute
Mute of the Internal FX B
Variation 1
Fx C mute
Mute of the Internal FX C
Variation 2
Fx D mute
Mute of the Internal FX D
Variation 3
All Fx mute
Mute of all Internal FXs
Variation 4
Drum mute
Mute of the Drum track
Variation up
Perc mute
Mute of the Percussion track
Variation down
Bass mute
Mute of the Bass track
Fade in/out
Acc1 mute
Mute of the Acc1 track
Memory
Acc2 mute
Bass inversion
Acc3 mute
Manual Bass
Acc4 mute
Upper 1 Mute
Mute of the Upper 1 track
Acc5 mute
Upper 2 Mute
Acc 1/5 mute
Mute of all Acc tracks
Upper 3 Mute
Ens. on/off
Ensemble on/off
Lower Mute
Mute of the Lower track
Quarter tone
Quarter Tone on/off
Song Melody Mute
Mute of the Songs track 4 (usually, the Melody

track)
Chord Latch
Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is

released
Song Drum&Bass
Mute of all tracks, apart for track 2 (usually

Bass) and 10 (usually Drum)
Chord Latch+Damper
Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is

released, and sustains tracks where the
Damper has been turned on
226
List of functions assignable to the Pedal or Assignable Slider

PEDAL OR ASSIGNABLE SLIDER
The followingfunctionscan beassignedto a continu
ouspedalortotheAssignableSlider.
Function
Meaning
Master volume
Master Volume
Accomp.Volume
Accopaniment Volume
Kb Expression
Keyboard Expression
Function
Meaning
Joystick +X
Joystick right
Joystick -X
Joystick left
Joystick +Y
Joystick forward
Joystick -Y
Joystick backward
Vdf cutoff (RT tracks)
Filter cutoff (on the Programs assigned to the

Realtime tracks)
FX CC12 Ctl
FX CC13 Ctl
LIST OF SOUNDS ASSIGNABLE TO THE PADS

YoucanassignthefollowingsoundstothePads.
SOUND NAME
SOUND NAME
SOUND NAME
SOUND NAME
ChinaGong
36
DistSlid2
71
Darbuka1
106
HeartBeat
Crash 1
37
Sticks
72
Darbuka2
107
Footstep1
Crash 2
38
Cowbell
73
Darbuka3
108
Footstep2
88 Crash
39
Agogo 1
74
Darbuka4
109
Stadium
Ride 1
40
Agogo 2
75
Darbuka5
110
DoorCreak
Ride 2
41
Whistle 1
76
Darbuka6
111
DoorSlam
China
42
Whistle 2
77
Darbuka7
112
CarEngine
Ride Bell
43
Sh. Guiro
78
Darbuka8
113
Car Stop
Splash
44
LongGuiro
79
DoufRimAk
114
Car Pass
10
RevCymbal
45
Cuica 1
80
Tef 1
115
Car Crash
11
DragonGng
46
Cuica 2
81
Tef 2
116
Crickets
12
OrchCymb1
47
Triangle1
82
Tef 3
117
Train
13
OrchCymb2
48
Triangle2
83
Tef 4
118
Helicopt
14
OrcSdRoll
49
88Cowbell
84
Tef 5
119
Gun Shot
15
OrchSnare
50
TimbLow
85
Tef 6
120
MachinGun
16
Timpani 1
51
TimbHi
86
Rik 1
121
Laser Gun
17
Timpani 2
52
TimbRim1
87
Rik 2
122
Explosion
18
Timpani 3
53
TimbRim2
88
Rik 3
123
Dog
19
Timpani 4
54
CongaLow
89
RekDomAk
124
H. Gallop
20
Orch. Hit
55
CongaHi
90
OpenBells
125
Birds 1
21
BrassFall
56
CongaSlap
91
Sagat 1
126
Birds 2
22
Ch. Bell
57
CongaMute
92
Sagat 2
127
Thunder
23
JingleBel
58
Tamb.Acc1
93
Davul
128
Sea Shore
24
WindChim1
59
Tamb.Acc2
94
Ramazan 1
129
River
25
WindChim2
60
Tamb.Push
95
Ramazan 2
130
Bubble
26
WindChim3
61
TambOpen
96
Ramazan 3
131
Cat
27
VibraSlap
62
Castanet1
97
Kup 1
132
Lion
28
RainStick
63
Castanet2
98
Kup 2
133
PhoneRing
29
Scratch 1
64
Aah !
99
Kup 3
134
Applause
30
Scratch 2
65
Uuh !
100
Kup 4
135
Wind
31
Scratch 3
66
Yeah ! 1
101
Baya 1
136
Starship
32
Scratch 4
67
Yeah ! 2
102
Baya 2
137
Jetplane
33
Scratch 5
68
Hit It !
103
Laughing
138
Siren
34
Scratch 6
69
Hollo 1
104
Scream
139
Cosmic
35
DistSlid1
70
Hollo 2
105
Punch
227
List of functions assignable to the Pads

PADS
YoucanassignthefollowingfunctionstothePads,and
usethemasswitchcontrols.
Function
Meaning
StyleUp
Selects the next Style
StylDown
Selects the previous Style
PerfUp
Selects the next Performance
PerfDown
Selects the previous Performance
ProgUp
Selects the next Program
ProgDown
Selects the previous Program
PunchI/O
Turns the Punch Recording on/off
FxA Mute
Mute of the Internal FX A
FxB Mute
Mute of the Internal FX B
FxC Mute
Mute of the Internal FX C
FxD Mute
Mute of the Internal FX D
Fx Mute
Mute of all Internal FXs
Upp1Mute
Upp2Mute
Upp3Mute
Low Mute
Mute of the Lower track
DrumMute
Mute of the Drum track
PercMute
Mute of the Percussion track
BassMute
Mute of the Bass track
Acc1Mute
Acc2Mute
Acc3Mute
Acc4Mute
Acc5Mute
Acc Mute
Mute of all Acc tracks
Mel.Mute
Mute of the Songs track 4 (usually, the Melody

track)
Drum&Bas
Mute of all tracks, apart for track 2 (usually

Bass) and 10 (usually Drum)
QuarterT
Quarter Tone on/off
Fx CC12
Fx CC13
SCALES
The following is a list of scales (or tunings) you can
select in Style Play (Scale on page44) and Global
(Scaleonpage125)modes.
Equal
Equaltuning,thestandardscaleformod
ernWesternmusic.Itismadeof12identi
calsemitones.
PureMajor Major chords in the selected key are per
fectlytuned.
PureMinor Minorchordsintheselectedkeyareper
fectedtuned.
Arabic
Anarabicscale,usingquartersoftone.Set
theKeyparameterasfollow:
CfortherastC/bayatiDscale
DfortherastD/bayatiEscale
FfortherastF/bayatiGscale
GfortherastG/bayatiAscale
A#fortherastBb/bayatiCscale
PythagoreanPythagorean scale, based on the music
theories of the great Greek philosopher
and matematician. It is most suitable for
melodies.
Werckmeister
LateBaroque/ClassicAgescale.Verysuit
ableforXVIIICenturymusic.
Kirnberger Harpsichord scale, very common during
theXVIIICentury.
Slendro
Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan. The
octaveisdividedin5notes(C,D,F,G,A).
The remaining notes are tuned as in the
Equaltuning.
Pelog
Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan. The
octave is divided in 7 notes (all white
keys,whenKeyis=C).Theblackkeysare
tunedasintheEqualtuning.
Stretch
Simulates the stretched tuning of an
acousticpiano. Basically an equal tuning,
the lowest notes are slightly lower, while
the highest notes are slightly higher than
thestandard.
User
User scale, i.e. scale programmed by the
user for the Style Play, Backing Sequence
andSongPlaymodes.Theuserscalecan
be saved to a Performance, Style Perfor
mance, STS or Song. You cant select a
UserscaleinGlobalmode.
MIDI Controllers
228
20. MIDI CONTROLLERS

The following is a table including all Control Change
messages, and their effect on various microAR
RANGERfunctions.
CC#
CC#
CC Name
microARRANGER Function
72
Release
Release time
73
Attack
Attack time
CC Name
microARRANGER Function
74
F.CutOff
Filter cutoff (Brilliance)
Bank Select
Program selection
75
Decay T.
Decay time
Mod1 (Y+)
Joystick forward
76
Lfo1 Sp.
Vibrato speed
Mod2 (Y-)
Joystick backward
77
Lfo1 Dpt
Vibrato depth
Lfo1 Dly
Vibrato initial delay
Undef. ctl
78
Foot ctl
79
FilterEg
Port.time
80
Gen.pc.5
Data ent.
81
Gen.pc.6
Volume
82
Gen.pc.7
Balance
83
Gen.pc.8
Undef. ctl
84
Port.ctl
10
Pan Pot
Track volume
Track panning
Undef. ctl
91
Fx A/C
11
Expression
12
Fx Ctl 1
92
Fx 2 ctl
13
Fx Ctl 2
93
Fx B/D
Undef. ctl
94
Fx 4 ctl
16
Gen.pc.1
95
Fx 5 ctl
17
Gen.pc.2
96
Data Inc
18
Slider
97
Data Dec
19
Gen.pc.4
98
NRPN Lsb
Undef. ctl
99
NRPN Msb
100
RPN Lsb
101
RPN Msb
1415
2031
Expression
8590
Control Change #3263 are the LSB (Least Significant Bytet) of Control
Change #031, i.e. the MSB (Most Significant Byte), and are changed
according to their MSB counterparts.
64
Damper
65
Portamento
66
Sostenuto
67
Soft pedal
68
Legato
69
Hold 2
70
Sustin level
71
F.Res.Hp
Damper pedal
Sostenuto pedal
Soft pedal
Filter resonance
102119
A/C (reverb) send level
B/D (modul.) send level
Undefined ctl
120
AllSOff
121
Res Ctl
122
LocalCt
123
NoteOff
124
OmniOff
125
Omni On
126
Mono On
127
Poly On
Reset All Controllers
MIDI Controllers
229
MIDI Implementation Chart
KORG microARRANGER
OS Version 1.0 - Aug. 10, 2011
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART

Function
Transmitted
Recognized
Default
116
116
Changed
116
116
Remarks
Memorized
Basic Channel
Default
Mode
Note
Number:
Messages
Altered
****************
0127
0127
True Voice
****************
0127
Note On
Note Off
Poly (Key)
Sequencer data only
*A
Mono (Channel)
Sequencer data only
*A
9n, V=1127
9n, V=1127
Velocity
V=64
Aftertouch
O
0, 32
Bank Select (MSB, LSB)
*A
1, 2
Modulations
*A
64
Damper
*A
Data Entry MSB
*A
38
Data Entry LSB
*A
7, 11
Volume, Expression
*A
10, 91, 93
Panpot, A/B or C/D FX Block Send
*A
71, 72, 73
Harmonic Content, EG time (Release, Attack)
*A
74, 75
Brightness, Decay Time
*A
76, 77, 78
Vibrato Rate, Depth, Delay
*A
98, 99
NRPN (LSB, MSB)
100, 101
RPN (LSB, MSB)
120, 121
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
O
True #
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Mode 1:OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3:OMNI OFF, POLY
O
0127
All sounds off, Reset all controllers
****************
0127
*A,
*A, 1
*A
*A
0127
*2
Song Position
Song Select
Tune
Clock
*3
Commands
*3
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
O (123127)
Active Sense
Reset
*A: Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode.
*1: LSB, MSB = 00,00: Pitch Bend range, =01,00: Fine Tune, =02,00: Course Tune.
*2: Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages.
*3: Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter (Global page 6) is set to Midi.
Mode 2:OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4:OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
230
Parameters
21. PARAMETERS
Control panel and operating modes parameters
ThefollowingtableshowstheparametersyoucansavetomemorywhenpressingtheWRITEbuttoninthevarious
operatingmodesandeditenvironments.
Page Parameter
Control Panel
Master Volume (Slider)

Acc./Seq Volume (Slider)
Performance
Single Touch
Setting (STS)
Style
Performance
Global
Seq1+Seq2
Setup
Assignable Slider
(function)
Selected Mode
Memory
Bass Inversion
Manual Bass
Note
Split Point
Not saved to card
Groove Quantize
Tempo Lock
Single Touch
Selected Style Number
General parameter
Keyboard Mode
Style Change
Perf./Program
Program Change
Octave Transpose
Master Transpose
Tempo
Display Hold
Style Play Mode

Main Program
Play/Mute status
1
Volume
2
Pan
3
FX Send Level
4
Detune
Scale
Key
5
Note
Detune
6
Pitchbend Sensitivity
FX Select (A, B, C, D)
78 Modulating Track
B>A (or D>C) Send
912 FX Parameters (A, B, C, D)
13 Easy Program Edit
14 Track Mode
15 Track Internal/External
Damper
16
Expression
Joystick X
17
Joystick Y
18 Dynamic Range
Ensemble Track
Ensemble Type
19 Dynamic
Tempo
Feedback
V1V4 Drum Map
Kick Designation
20
Snare Designation
Fill 1/2
(A, B, C, D)
(A/B, C/D)
(A/B, C/D)
(A/B, C/D)
(C, D)
(C/D)
(C/D)
(C/D)
(A, B)
(A/B)
(A/B)
(A/B)
Program (Original/On)
Only Style tracks,

globally
Wrap Around
Keyboard Range (Original/Off)
Only Style tracks
Synchro Start/Stop
Fade In/Out
Style Element
(V1, V2, V3, V4, Fill 1/2,
Count In, Intro 1/2, Ending 1/2)
Ensemble On/Off
Chord Scanning
21
General parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
Separate tracks
Only Realtime tracks
General parameters
Parameters
Page Parameter
Pad 14
Volume
22 Pan
C Send Level
D Send Level
Pad Lock
Scale Lock
23
Auto Octave Lock
Master Transpose Lock
Chord Recognition Mode
Scale Mode
24
Memory Mode
Velocity Control
Song Play Mode
Main Program
Play/Mute status
1
Volume
2
Pan
3
FX Send Level
FX Select (A, B, C, D)
4
Modulating Track
B>A (or D>C) Send
56 FX Parameters (A, B, C, D)
7
Track Mode
8
Track Internal/External
9
Jukebox
Link Mode
10 S2 FX Mode
Performance FX Mode
Song Mode
Song data
Global Edit Environment
Velocity Curve
Master Tune
Scale
1
Key
Speakers On/Off
Metronome Volume
Master Transpose on
Style/Realtime tracks
Seq 1/2
2
Midi In
Scale Transpose Position
Pedal/Switch Function
Assignable Slider Function
3
Damper Polarity
Footswitch Polarity
4
MIDI Setup Preset
Local On/Off
5
Clock
Clock Send
6
Midi In Channels (116)
Chord 1 Channel
Chord 2 Channel
7
Velocity Input
Upper Octave
Lower Octave
8
Octave Transp. on the Midi In
Mute In
9
Midi In Filters (18)
10 Midi Out Channels (116)
11
Midi Out Filters (18)
Card Edit Environment
Global Protect
Factory Styles Protect
Single Touch
Setting (STS)
Style
Performance
Performance
Seq1+Seq2
Setup
Global
Note
General parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
Separate tracks
List saved to card
General parameters
See table Style and Song parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
Not saved to card

Set to On at startup
General parameters
General parameters
Set to Int at startup
General parameters
Separate tracks
General parameters
231
232
Parameters
Style and Song parameters

Thefollowingtableisalistofdatasaved(tomemoryorcard)wheneditingaStyleoraSong.
Note:WhensavingaSongtocardasaStandardMIDIFile(SMF),allparametersareconvertedtoordinarytrackparameters.
Pa80exclusivedataareconvertedtoSysExorMetaEvents,thatwillbeignoredwhenreadingtheSMFonadifferentkeyboard
orsequencer.
Parameter
Volume (GM Master Volume)(a)
Tempo
Meter (Time Signature)
Header
Style
Tracks
Master Track
Header
Song
Tracks
Master Track
Programs(b)
Note On/Off
Pitch Bend
After Touch
Control Change(c)
Quarter Tone(a)
Quarter Tone Reset(a)
Chord Variation Length
Original Key/Chord
NTT
Expression
Keyboard Range
Chord Variation Table
Retrigger Mode
Tension
Play/Mute status(a)
Master Transpose(a)
Volume
Pan
FX Block(a)
FX Send
Detune
Scale(a)
Key
Note
Detune
Scale Yes/No(a)
Pitch Bend Range
FX Select (A, B, C, D)(a)
Modulation Track(a)
FX Feedback Send (B>A or D>C)(a)

FX Parameters (A, B, C, D)
Easy Program Edit
Track Mode(a)
Internal/External Mode
(a) Saved as SysEx data.

(b) For this Program to be used in a Style, the Prog parameter should be set to Orig in the Style Play mode. See Prog (Program) on page 49.
(c) Not all Control Change messages are allowed in Styles. Please see List of recorded events on page 54 for more information.
Recognized chords
233
22. RECOGNIZED CHORDS

ThefollowingpagesshowthemostimportantchordsrecognizedbytheKorgPa80,whentheselectedChordRecog
nitionmodeisFingered2(seeChordRecognitionModeonpage51).Recognizedchordsmayvarywithadiffer
entChordRecognitionmodes.
Major 6th
Major
3-note
T
2-note
2-note
4-note
T
Major 7th
4-note
3-note
2-note
T
T
Sus 2
Sus 4
3-note
2-note
3-note
3-note
2-note
T
T
Dominant 7th
4-note
T
T
T
T
T
Dominant 7th Sus 4

4-note
4-note
4-note
T
Major 7th 5
Dominant 7th 5
3-note
T
T
Major 7th Sus 4

4-note
T
= constituent notes of the chord
T = can be used as tension
234
Recognized chords
Minor
Minor 6th
3-note
2-note
4-note
Minor 7th
Minor-Major 7th
4-note
3-note
Diminished
3-note
4-note
Diminished Major 7th
3-note
4-note
T
T
Minor 7th 5
4-note
Augmented
3-note
T
T
No 3rd
2-note
Augmented 7th
4-note
T
Augmented Major 7th

4-note
No 3rd, no 5th
1-note
= constituent notes of the chord
T = can be used as tension
Error messages & Troubleshooting
235
Error messages
23. ERROR MESSAGES & TROUBLESHOOTING

ERROR MESSAGES
SMF Import Failed! (Press Exit)
Your microARRANGER can communicate with you

using various messages. Here is the list of these mes
sages.
Messagescanbeoftwodifferenttypes:
Waiting for your confirmation (Yes No). Press
ENTER/YEStogoon,EXIT/NOtostop.
Revealinganerrororfailure.Pressanybuttonon
thefrontpanel.
Backing Sequence Mode
General
Another Command Is Running (Press Exit)
Youcantexecuteacommanduntiltheonethatisrun
ningiscompleted.
Are you sure? (Enter/Exit)
Thisisaconfirmationrequestbeforemanyoperations.
PressENTER/YEStoconfirm,EXIT/NOtoabort.
Generic error
Someundefinederrorhashappened.
Record Aborted
ThereisnotenoughmemorytoentertheStyleRecord,
SongRecord,orBackingSequencerRecordmode.
Style Play
Corrupted Style Perform. Save It Again
The Style Performance was damaged. Press WRITE,

andselecttheCurrentStyleoption,tosaveittomem
oryagain.
Style Select Fails
microARRANGERwasnotabletocompletetheopera
tion.
Style Record
Arranger is Running! (Press Exit)
WhileinStyleRecordmode,thismessagemayappear
whenyoutrytoselectadifferenttrack,orexecutean
editoperation,whiletheArrangerisrunning.
There was an error while reading the Standard MIDI

FilewiththeImportSMFfunction.Thefilemaybecor
rupted.
Too Many Styles! (Press Exit)
You have recorded the maximum number of Styles

allowed (depending on the memory, 10 to 15 Style
changes).
Song Play
Cannot Load JBX File to Seq 2 (Press Exit)
YoucantloadaJukebox(JBX)filetoSequencer2.Juke
boxfilescanonlybeloadedtoSequencer1.
Juke Box List Empty! (Press Exit)
YouaretryingtostartplayingbackaJukeboxlist,but
thelistisempty.PleaseaddsomeSongstothelist.
Juke Box List Full! (Press Exit)
AJukeboxlistmaycontainupto127Songs.Youwere
tryingtoaddoneSongmore.
Save Song List: Insert Card and Press Enter
YouaresavingalistofSongs.Pleaseinsertacardand
pressENTER.
Save JBX List: Insert Card and Press Enter
YouaresavingalistofSongsasaJBXfile.Pleaseinsert
acardandpressENTER.
Wait Please
Youweretryingtoloadafile,whilemicroARRANGER
isstillloadinganotherone.
Song
Too Many Events
You have tried to copy too many events on the same

tick.
Out of Memory!
ThememorylimitforaSong(300KB)hasbeenreached.
Low memory!
Incompatible Meter
ThespaceintheSSD(thespacewhereUserStylesare
stored)isgoinglow.ExitRecord,thenloadsomebanks
ofsmallerStylesbeforeenteringRecordagain.
Youweretryingtocopyatrackonatrackwithadiffer
entmeter.
Sequencer is Running! (Press Exit)
Style Copy Failed (Press Exit)
WhileinSongRecordmode,thismessagemayappear
whenyoutry toselectadifferenttrack,orexecutean
editoperation,whiletheSequencerisrunning.
microARRANGERwasnotabletocompletetheCopy
operation.
Style Delete Failed (Press Exit)
microARRANGERwasnotabletocompletetheDelete
operation.
Song Play and Song mode

Cannot load Jukebox file on Seq.2
Style Save Failed (Press Exit)
YoucanloadaJukeboxfileonlyonSequencer1.
microARRANGER was not able to complete the Save

operation.
Damaged Standard Midi File
Style Select Failed (Press Exit)
microARRANGERwasnotabletocompletetheselec
tion.
TheStandardMIDIFileyouaretryingtoloadisdam
aged,andcannotbeplayedback.
236

Error messages
Jukebox list is empty
Directory not found (Press Exit)
YoutriedtodeleteaSonginanemptyJukeboxlist,or
tosaveanemptyJukeboxlist.
Jukebox list is full
The directory is not in the current card. The card has

probablybeenreplacedbeforefinishingthecardopera
tion.Insertthecardagain,andtryagain.
TheJukeboxlistalreadycontains127Songs.
Card Full (Press Exit)
Not a Standard Midi File
Theselectedmedium(card)isfull.Deletefilesyouare
not interested to keep, or replace the card with an
emptyone.Then,tryagain.
TheselectedfileisnotaStandardMIDIFile,andcan
not be played back. Select a .MID or .KAR file.
microARRANGERcanplaybackStandardMIDIFiles
in0and1format.
Standard Midi File format 2
YouhavetriedtoreadaFormat2StandardMIDIFile.
microARRANGER cant playthis kindof file.Select a
StandardMIDIFilesin0and1format.
Program
Overwrite Program? (Enter/Exit)
YouaretryingtostoreaProgramtoamemorylocation
alreadyoccupiedbyaProgram.PressENTERtoover
writeit,orEXITtoabort.
Card not empty! (Sh+Enter to Format)
DuringaBackup,youinsertedacardcontainingsome
data. Please replace it with an empty one, or press
SHIFT+ENTERtostartformattingthecard.
Card write-protected
Thecardiswriteprotected.Movetheprotectiontabto
closethehole,andtryagain.Besuretherearentdata
you dont want to overwrite. Otherwise, replace the
cardwithanemptyone.
Erase Failed! (Press Exit)
An error occurred during Erase. Erase operation

aborted.
Error while converting (Press Exit)
Card mode
Cant Read Card! (Press Exit)
The card is probably damaged. Try again. If the mes

sageappearsagain,trywithadifferentcard.
Can't Read File! (Press Exit)
Thefileyouaretryingtoload,copy,eraseorrenameis
damaged,orhasanullsize(0kb),thuscantberead.
ThismessageduringaNewDiroperationmeansthere
are problems on the card. Try loading the file from a
differentcard.
Copy Failed! (Press Exit)
An error occurred during Copy. Copy operation

aborted.
Copy: Invalid Destination (Press Exit)
You tried to copy an ordinary file or folder into a

.SETfolder.
Corrupted Style Perf. Save it again
While trying to load Korg iseries data, some errors

occurred.Theoriginalfileisprobablycorrupted,orits
structureistoodifferentfrommicroARRANGERorPa
seriesdata.
Error while formatting medium
An error was reported when formatting the medium

(card). The format procedure has been aborted. Try
again. If formatting a card, replace the card and try
again.
Error while Writing! (Press Exit)
An error was reported while writing on the medium

(card).Theprocedurehasbeencanceled.Selectadiffer
entmedium,andtryagain.
Existing Files Not Copied (Press Exit)
After a Copy procedure (no Overwrite selected), all

filessharingthesamenamehavenotbeencopied.
Factory Styles Protected! (Press Exit)
The Style Performance is damaged. Save it again by

pressing WRITE, and selecting the Current Style
option.
The.SETfileyoujustloadedincludedsomebanksof
FactoryStyles.SincetheFactoryStyleProtectflagwas
switchedon,FactoryStylebankswerenotloaded.(See
FactoryStyleProtectonpage142).
Delete all data. Continue? (Enter/Exit)
Fast Format Failed. Full Format? (Enter/Exit)
Formatting will delete all data on the card you are

readytoformat.Besureyouhaveacopyofalldatayou
wishtopreserve.
TheFastFormatprocedurefailed.PressENTERtogo
onwithaFullFormatprocedure(slower).
Delete Destin. Files Failed! (Press Exit)
Thefileyouaretryingtocopyalreadyexistsontarget.
Youhavetriedtowriteoverareadonlyorsystemfile.
microARRANGER cant write over this kind of files.
Shouldyouneedtowriteoveroneofthesefile,usea
personalcomputertochangethefilesproperties,then
tryagain.Readyourcomputersusersmanual.
Directory Full (Press Exit)
File/Dir Already Existing (Press Exit)
Youreachedthemaximumfoldernumberfortheroot
of the selected card. Delete some files, or replace the
card.
DuringaRenameorNewDiroperation,youweretry
ingtouseanexistingname.Useadifferentname.
Directory Not Empty (Press Exit)
Thefileyoutriedtodeleteisinusebyanotherproce
dure.Waitfortheproceduretobecompleted,thentry
again.
The file you were trying to overwrite could not be

deleted.
Destination File Exists (Press Exit)
You were trying to delete a directory still containing

files.Deletethesefiles,thendeletethedirectory.
File is protected
File in Use (Press Exit)
237
Error messages
Files in Use Not Deleted (Press Exit)
Not Enough Space on Media
This message may appear during an Erase operation.

Filesusedbyotherprocedureshavenotbeenerased.
Thereisnomorespacetoload,saveorcopydata.The
card operation will be aborted. Replace the card, and
useanemptycardtosaveyourdata.Shouldthismes
sageappearduringloading,theSSD(SolidStateDisk)
basedinternalmemoryisfull.
Files in use have not been overwritten
This message may appear during a Copy with Over

write operation. Files used by other procedures have
notbeencopied.
Nothing to Rename (Press Exit)
File Is Protected (Press Exit)
Therearenoitemstorename.
Youweretryingtooverwriteaprotectedfile.
Overwrite Existing File? (Yes/No)
File Not Found (Press Exit)
Youarewritingdataonanexisting.SETfolder,oron
afileoftype.MIDor.JBX.
The file is not in the current medium. The card has

probablybeenreplacedbeforefinishingthecardopera
tion.Insertthecardagain,andtryagain.
Overwrite on Backup? (Enter/Exit)
Formattinghasbeensuccessfullycompleted.
PressENTER/YEStooverwritefilescarryingthesame
nameonthetargetdevice,orEXIT/NOtoavoidover
writinganyfile.
Format aborted (Press Exit)
Overwrite on Copy? (Enter/Exit)
Formatoperationaborted.
PressENTER/YEStooverwritefilescarryingthesame
name on the target device (Press Exit)/NO to avoid
overwriting any file. File that are not yet on card are
alwayscopied.
Format Completed (Press Exit)
Format failed! (Press Exit)
An error occurred during Format. Format operation

aborted.
Illegal name (Press Exit)
ThenameisnotallowedonmicroARRANGER.
Insert an SD card and press Enter
While saving the operating system Save OS on

page141, or executing a Backup procedure (see
Backup Data on page141), microARRANGER asks
foracard.
Invalid Copy Parameter (Press Exit)
Thecopyoperationwasnotpossible.Maybeyouwere
tryingtocopyafileoveritself,orcopyingnestedfold
ers.
Load Failed! (Press Exit)
Overwrite Protected Files? (Enter/Exit)
Protectedfilescannotusuallybeoverwritten.Bypress
ingENTER,youcanoverwritethemduringthecurrent
operation.
Rename: Invalid Name (Press Exit)
You cant use the name you entered. Please retry and
selectadifferentname.
Rename: New Name Must Be a \".SET\
Youcantmodifya.SETfolderextension.
Rename Failed! (Press Exit)
An error occurred during Rename. Rename operation

aborted.
TheLoadprocedurehasnotbeenexecuted.Tryagain,
ortrywithdifferentfiles.
Save Failed! (Press Exit)
Make New Dir Failed! (Press Exit)
Some Files Missing (Press Exit)
While trying to create a new directory, an error

occurred.
ThismessagemayappearattheendofaRestoreopera
tion.SomeUserfilemaybemissing.Thisisnotaprob
lemfortheFactoryDataintegrity.
Media Write-Protected (Press Exit)
The card is physically protected. Remove the protec

tion,andtryagain.
Memory full
This message appears in Backing Sequence mode,

whenthememoryforrecordingaSongisfull.
No Card/Unformatted. (Sh+Enter to Format)
Eitherthereisnocardinthedrive,orthecardisunfor
matted. Insert a card, and try again, or press
SHIFT+ENTERtostartformattingthecard.
Not a Pa-series or Corrupted File
The file you are trying to load is not compatible with

microARRANGERorPaseriesinstruments.
AnerroroccurredduringSave.Saveoperationaborted.
Unit Not Found (Press Exit)
Youweretryingtoaccessastoragedevicenotavailable
onyourinstrument.
Unformatted medium
Youhaveselectedamedium(card)thatisnotyetfor
matted, or is in a format that microARRANGER cant
recognize.FormatthemediumusingtheFormatproce
dure(seePage5Formatonpage140).
Wait
microARRANGERisbusywithacardoperation.
238

Troubleshooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Solution
Page
General problems
Power does not turn on
Make sure that (1) the power cable is plugged into the outlet, (2) the cable is plugged into the connector on
the back of the instrument, (3) and is not damaged, (4) there are no problems with the mains.
Is the power switch turned ON?
If the power still does not turn on, contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Center.
No sound
Is a jack connected to the HEADPHONES connector? This would disable the internal speakers.
22
Check the connections of your amp or mixer.
22
Make sure that all the components of the amplifying system are turned on.
Are the MASTER VOLUME or ASSIGN.SLIDER sliders of the microARRANGER set to a position other than
0?
12
Is the Local parameter set to Off? Turn it On.
127
Is the Speaker parameter set to Off? Turn it On.
125
Is the Attack parameter value too high? Set it to a lower value, to let the sound start faster. Is the Volume
parameter too low? Set it to a higher value.
43
45
Lowest note are not played
When the SPLIT button is lit up, the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part (low notes, below the split
point) and the Upper part (high notes, above the split point). Is the Lower track muted? Unmute it.
24
Wrong sounds
Do the USER banks contain modified data? Load the appropriate data for the Song or the Style you wish to
playback.
133
Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified? Load the appropriate Drum Kits.
133
Have the Styles or Performances been modified? Load the appropriate data (Styles or Performances).
133
Sound does not stop
Make sure that the damper switch polarity parameter is set correctly.
126
The selected Style or Song cannot

start
Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Int. If you are using the MIDI Clock of another device, you must
set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI, and make sure that the external device transmits MIDI Clock data.
127
Does not respond to MIDI messages
Make sure that all MIDI cables are connected correctly.
22
Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to receive in the microARRANGER.
47
79
Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the microARRANGER do not prevent the reception of messages.
129
Percussive instruments are not

played correctly
Make sure that the Percussion and Drum Track is set to Drum Mode and the
external device has not transposition applied.
46
78
Some clicks can be heard when

playing a percussive instrument
This is part of the sound, and not a problem.
A background noise can be heard

after selecting a Performance, Style
or STS
The selected Performance, Style or STS recalled the effect 15 Analog Record, simulating the noise of a old
vinyl recording.
Card related problems

Cannot format a card
Is the card inserted correctly?
130
Cannot save data to a card
Is the card formatted?
140
130
130
Does the card contain data compatible with the microARRANGER?
131
Cannot load data from a card
Technical specifications
239
24. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Model: KORG microARRANGER
Keyboard
61 keys (C2C7), natural-touch mini-keyboard with velocity
Operating System
KORG OPOS (Objective Portable Operating System). Multitasking, Load-While-Play feature. SSD (Solid
State Disk)-resident. Upgradable from SD card.
Display
Backlit custom LCD
Data storage
8MB (>20MB equivalent) Internal Solid State Disk (SSD), SD/MMC card slot.
Sound generation system
KORG HI - Hyper Integrated.
Polyphony
62 voices, 62 oscillators. Filters with resonance.
Multitimbricity
40 tracks (2 x 16 Sequencer, 4 Realtime, 4 Pads)
Sound memory
32 Mbyte of PCM ROM, with Stereo Piano.
Programs
662 (Single Oscillator, Double Oscillator), including a Stereo Piano and GM Level 2-compatible Programs.
33 Drum Kits, 128 User Programs, 64 User Drum Kits. Easy and Full Program Editing.
Effects
4 stereo digital multi-effect systems (with 89 effect types each).
Performances
160 Realtime Performance memories. Up to 304 Styles Performances with 4 Single Touch Setting each.
Styles
Up to 304 Styles, Solid State Disk-resident, freely reconfigurable. 8 Style tracks, 4 Single Touch Settings
per-Style, 48 User Styles, programmable Style Performances and Single Touch Settings. Direct Card
reading feature. Compatible with old i-Series Styles. Style Record with Edit functions, Step Edit, Event
Edit.
Single Touch Settings (STS)
4 304 (memorize Realtime tracks)
Style controls
4 Variations, 2 Fills, 2 Intros, 2 Endings, Counter In/ Break, Synchro Start/Stop,

Tap Tempo/Reset, Fade In/Out, Bass Inversion, Manual Bass, Tempo Lock, Memory, Accompaniment
Volume, Accompaniment Mute, Drum Mapping, Snare & Kick Designation, Single Touch.
General controls
Master Volume, Ensemble, Octave Transpose, Master Transpose, Split Point, Style Change, Tracks Volume, Quarter of Tone, Assignable Slider, Joystick, Dial.
Pads
4 Assignable Pads + Stop button
Song Play
XDS* Crossfade Dual Sequencer player - 2 Sequencers with separate

Start/Stop, Pause, << (Rewind) and >> (Fast Forward) controls. Balance control.
Lyrics data are displayed on-screen. Jukebox function. SMF Direct Player (formats 0 and 1).
Song / Backing Sequence
Easy Record function. Full featured sequencer. 16 tracks. SMF native format.
Pedals
Damper, Assignable (continuous, footswitch)
Realtime controllers
Joystick (pitch + modulation), Assignable slider, Pads
MIDI
IN, OUT. Individual track assignement. Auto-setup functions (MIDI Setup)
Audio Inputs
Line impedance
Audio Outputs
2 Main (L/Mono, R)
Main Amplifier
2 5 Watt Amplifier
Speakers
2 10 cm speakers
Power Consumption
9 Watt
Dimensions (W x D x H)
873 x 277 x 91 (mm) / 34.37 10.91 3.58 (without music stand)
Weight
4.2 kg / 9.26 lbs
Accessories
Quick Start Guide, AC adapter (DC12V:
Options
XVP-10 (Exp/Volume Pedal), EXP-2 (Foot Controller),DS-1H (damper pedal), PS-1/PS-3 (Pedal switch)
), Music Stand, Accessory Discs
*Specificationsandappearancearesubjecttochangewithoutnoticeforimprovement.
240
Alphabetical Index
25. ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A
Acc/SeqVolume10,12
AMS (Alternate Modulation
Source)
Resonance112
ArabicScale34
AssignableSlider126
Attack119
AttackLevel
AmpEG119
AttackTime
FilterEG116
AudioInputs11
AudioOutputs11
EditEnvironment21
Effects
Songmode95,97
SongPlaymode71,76
StylePlaymode43,44
Ending14
Ensemble48
Level
Program
B
Backing Sequence mode 30, 82
87
Backup9,141
Balance10,18,32
BankSelect37
BPM
MIDI/TempoSync.,LFO121
F
F1F4buttons16,19
Fade
LFO121
Fill14
Filter
CutoffFrequency113
FilterType112
LowPass&HighPass112
LowPassResonance112
Footswitch126
Polarity126
Format140
G
C
ChordRecognitionMode51
ChordScanning17
CutoffFrequency113
GeneralMIDI35
Global125129
Globalchannel35
GrooveQuantize71
Damper11,47
Polarity126
DecayTime
FilterEG116
Delay
LFO121
Demo11
DirectSD40
Disk130142
Backup141
Format140
Display1921
F1F4buttons16,19
Pagebuttons19
Volume/Valuebuttons15,19
DisplayHold16
DoubleSequencer31,70
Drummode78
Drumtracks46,99
Inputs11
Intro14
J
Joystick47
Jukebox74,79
K
KeyboardMode17
Keyboardsettings24
Trim112
LFO
Waveform,LFOwaveform
120
LocalOff37,127
Lock50
LowPass&HighPass112
LowPassResonance112
Lyrics73,74
M
MasterTranspose17,126
MasterTune125
MasterVolume10,12
Menu15
Messagewindow21
MIDI
Chordchannels128
Clock70,127
GeneralMIDI35
Globalchannel35
INchannels127
Interface22,37
OUTchannels129
SettingatrackforMIDI79,99
Setup36,126
StandardMIDIFile70,88
MIDIinterface22,37
MIDISetup36,126
Midifile35,70,88
Mode
BackingSequence8287
Program105124
SongPlay7081
StylePlay4051
Mute16,24
O
OctaveTranspose18
Offset
Offset,LFO121
OperatingModes12,20
OS(OperatingSystem)
Backup9,141
Update9
Outputs11
Alphabetical Index
P
Pads17,50
Lock50
Page15,19
Pedal126
Performance40
Selecting17,25
PitchBend44,97
Portamento
AMS123
Program
Editing45,98
Selecting17,25
ProgramChange37
Programmode105124
StyleChange25
StylePlaymode4051
Sync.
KeySync.,LFO121
MIDI/Tempo,LFO121
SynchroStart/Stop14
T
TapTempo15
Tempo40
Tempo/Valuesection16
TrackSelect16,73,74
Tracks
Drummode78
Drum/Percussion46,99
Keyboard/Realtime tracks 24,
40,70
R
Resonance112
S
Scale
Lock50
Mainscale125
Selectinginrealtime34
Select
MFXEffectSelect122
SelectingWindows21
Sequencer
Linkmode80
Selectingandswitching73
Sequencer173
Sequencer273
Sequencer2effectsmode80
Transportcontrols18
Shift16
SingleTouch13,16,26
SingleTouchSettings(STS)16
Selecting26
Song
Editing32
Playbackfromdisk28,31,74,
84,89
Recording30,82
Selecting74,84,89
StandardMIDIFile35
SongPlaymode7081
SpeakersOn/Off125
SplitPoint13,36
StandardMIDIFile35,70,88
Style
Ending14
Fill14
Intro14
Recording5269
Selecting13,26
StylePerformance40
Variation14
OctaveTranspose18
Programs17
Selecting15,24,73
Volume19,43
Transpose17,18
Tune
Tune,Program108
U
UserInterface20
EditEnvironments21
OperatingModes20
SelectingWindows21
V
VALUEslider
AMS123
Variation14
Velocity
AMS123
Velocity Intensity, Amp Mod.
118
Velocity,FilterEG114
VelocityCurve125
Volume
Acc/Seq10,12,71,88
Balance10
Individual tracks (Song Play)
76
Individualtracks(Song)95
Individual tracks (Style Play)
43
Master10,12,71,88
Volume/Valuesection15,19
W
Write15
Global125
StylePlaymode42
241
4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan
2011 KORG INC.

Korg MicroArranger Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Korg MicroArranger Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual

INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER ELECTRICAL

KEEP THIS MANUAL

KEEPING FOREIGN MATTER OUT OF YOUR

THE FCC REGULATION WARNING (FOR USA)

NOTICE REGARDING DISPOSAL (EU ONLY)

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS

THE BALANCE SLIDER

Song Play mode

Backing Sequence mode

Pagestructure ................................ 132

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

LOADING THE OPERATING SYSTEM

Your microARRANGER can be constantly updated as

RELOADING THE FACTORY DATA

CONTROLLING THE VOLUME

Connect the supplied AC power adapter to the dedi

TURNING THE INSTRUMENT ON AND OFF

THE BALANCE SLIDER

You can send the sound to an external amplification

Connect a Damper (Sustain) pedal to the DAMPER

Stereo. Connect two mono cables to the L/MONO &

THE MUSIC STAND

This button doubles as a PREVIOUS EVENT func

20 ENDING 12 (DOT, TRIPLET) buttons

See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating

The right half is for the Style tracks page, where

While you are in the main pages of any

39 CHORD SCANNING section

Note: The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to

49 SEQUENCER TRANSPORT CONTROLS - SEQ1

Display and User Interface

4. DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE

each page command appearing along the last line

Status icons area

Style (accompaniment/backing) tracks

Realtime (Keyboard) tracks

First, select the line using a VOLUME/VALUE (AH)

TRACK SELECT. Eachoftheoperatingmodeshavea

Display and User Interface

Operating modes. (See diagram at the bottom of this

Display and User Interface

Edit environment. (See diagram at the bottom of this

SYMBOLS AND ICONS

Selecting windows. When you press one of the

Sometimes, a message might appear in the display,

Selected track or parameter. When this

Text in solid black

board, MIDI guitar, wind controller, MIDI accor

SELECTING, MUTING/UNMUTING AND

The selected track is shown with a solid square sur

Mute/unmute. Press both VOLUME/VALUE (AH)

Play status; the track plays on the key

Solo. While in the Style Play, Song Play and Song

The Performance Select window appears. There

Master Transpose, Program,

Other performance parameters are saved in the

Chord Recognition Mode, Memory Mode, Velocity

1. Press the PERFORM button. This changes the

Use the leftmost button of the PROGRAM/PER

Last selected Performance

The STYLE CHANGE button

Press the PROGRAM button. This changes the

Use the leftmost PROGRAM/PERFORMANCE